Guide Sauvegarde

Version 4.
2
Ref: ADM42EW-0108
Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows
Atempo Copyrights
Atempo retains all property rights concerning the documentation of Time Navigator software. Your right to copy the Time Navigator software documentation is limited by the legislation on copyright. Copies or adaptations without Atempos prior written consent are forbidden by law and constitute a reprehensible breach. This documentation is provided "as is" without any warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including (but not limited to) the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Atempo shall not be liable for loss of profits, decreasing or interrupted business activity, for loss of data or data use, nor for any indirect, special or consequential damages whatsoever, even if Atempo has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising out of a fault or an error in the documentation or in Time Navigator software. Atempo retains all rights to modify this documentation periodically without notice. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted, for any purpose, by any means, electronic or mechanical, without Atempos express and written permission. Atempo, Atempos logo and Time Navigator are registered trademarks of Atempo. All brand or product names mentioned in this guide are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Copyright 1992-2008 Atempo. All rights reserved.
Third Party Copyrights

Time Navigator uses certain Opensource components listed here:
The International Component for Unicode (libicu). For more information, consult
http://www-306.ibm.com/software/globalization/icu/index.jsp
lesstif: the Hungry Programmers' version of OSF/Motif. For more information, consult
http://www.lesstif.org/
The Year-2038 bug. For more information, consult
http://2038bug.com/
OpenSSL. "The OpenSSL Project is a collaborative effort to develop a robust,
commercial-grade, full-featured, and Open Source toolkit implementing the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL v2/v3) and Transport Layer Security (TLS v1) protocols as well as a full-strength general purpose cryptography library. The project is managed by a worldwide community of volunteers that use the Internet to communicate, plan, and develop the OpenSSL toolkit and its related documentation." For more information, consult http://www.openssl.org/
Perl. For more information, consult
http://www.perl.org.
Apache 2.0. For more information, consult http://www.apache.org
The licenses for these components can be consulted in the Time Navigator Release Notes guide.
Contents
Contents
Introduction
Time Navigator Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Documentation . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Release Notes . . . . . . Time Navigator Getting Started Guide Other Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Comments are Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 3 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 8
Chapter 1
Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation

Prerequisites to Opening Time Navigator Administration Console . Unix Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Time Navigator Administration Console . . . . . . . Connecting to Another Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Catalog Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Time Navigator Administration Console Start Faster Quitting Time Navigator Administration Console . . . . . . . Shutting Down the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Administration Console Main Window . . . . . . . Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icon Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 10 12 13 13 13 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 19 20 25 27 28
ii
Alarm Area . . . . . . . . Handling Platforms . . . . . . . Displaying Platforms . . . Searching for a Platform Grouping Platforms . . . Sorting Platforms . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
29 31 31 32 33 35
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
About the catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Catalog Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspending a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing up the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backing up a Single Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Application Creation Parameters . . . . . Configuring the Catalog Application . . . . . . . . Viewing the Catalog Application Content . . . . . Backing up Several Catalogs on the same Server Backing up a Remote Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Catalog with the Boot Catalog . . . Restoring Another Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Catalog Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 39 43 45 47 49 50 51 52 52 54 55 59 59 62 63 64 64 67 68
Chapter 3
Platform Management
About Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firewalls and Backup Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Host Detected by Time Navigator Creating Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Platform Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 70 70 71 73 74 74 79 81 83 84 84
Contents
iii
Setting Platform Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Preferences Tool . . . . . . . . . Tunables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Domain Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help/Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Web Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NDMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host connections Deleting Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Hosts Detected by Time Navigator . . List Administration of Platforms . . . . . . . . . . Host List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Host Information . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Host List . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Host Status . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Host Parameters . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Host Comment . . . . . . . . Deleting Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application List Window . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Application Information . . . . . . Exporting the Application List . . . . . . . . Editing an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Application Status . . . . . . Modifying Application Comment . . . . . . Deleting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 86 . 86 . 87 . 90 . 96 . 99 .100 .101 .101 .102 .103 .104 .104 .105 .106 .106 .106 .107 .108 .110 .111 .111 .112 .113 .113 .113 .114 .114 .115 .115 .116 .116 .117 .117 .117 .118
Chapter 4
Users and Access Rights

About Users and Access Rights . . . . . . Platform Access . . . . . . . . . . . . Backed up or Archived File Access Catalog and Functionality Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 .120 .120 .120
iv
System Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User and Access Rights Operations . . . . Defining Default Access Rights . . Defining Personal Access Rights . Creating a User . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a User . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining or Modifying a Password Changing the User Identity . . . . . Creating a User Group . . . . . . . Editing a User Group . . . . . . . . Deleting a User Group . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.121 .122 .123 .123 .123 .129 .130 .131 .131 .132 .133 .134 .135
Chapter 5
Device & Media Management

About Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator Device Detection Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Split Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Library Drive Position Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Library Properties . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinitializing a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Mode of the Drive . . . . . . . . Supervising Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . Manually Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejecting a Media from a Drive . . . . . . . . . Displaying Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Administration of Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 .139 .140 .147 .148 .152 .157 .159 .159 .161 .165 .165 .166 .166 .167 .167 .170 .182 .182 .183 .184 .185 .186 .187 .188 .188 .189
Contents
Drive List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Drive Information . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Drive List . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Drive Status . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Drive Connection Type . . Identifying Drive content . . . . . . . . . . Ejecting a Media from a Drive . . . . . . Testing Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Media Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Media Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Cartridge Operations . . . . . . Viewing Media Information . . . . . . . . Exporting Media Information . . . . . . . Recycling a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reopening a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . Putting a Cartridge Off-line . . . . . . . . Viewing Cartridge Statistical Information Externalizing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing a Cartridge Label . . . . . . . . . Reading a Cartridge Label . . . . . . . . . Adding a Prefix to a Cartridge Label . . . Editing the Cartridge Life Cycle . . . . . Displaying the Cartridge Wear Level . . . Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.189 .191 .191 .191 .191 .192 .192 .193 .193 .193 .194 .195 .195 .196 .198 .199 .200 .200 .204 .210 .213 .215 .217 .217 .218 .218 .219 .220 .221 .224 .226 .226 .228 .228 .228 .229 .229
Chapter 6
Time Navigator Library Manager

Managing Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Viewing a Different Catalog or Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Label vs. Bar Code Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
vi
Modifying Slots Arrangement . . . . Library Operations . . . . . . . . . . . Library Properties . . . . . . . . . . . Reinitializing Libraries . . . . . . . . Launching a Library Reinitialization Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Drive Mode . . . . . . . Enabling/Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . Testing a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejecting a Media from a Drive . . . Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot/Cartridge Information . . . . . . Media Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . Cartridge Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying a Cartridge . . . . . . . . Putting Cartridges On-line . . . . . . Putting Cartridges Off-line . . . . . . Moving Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Cartridge . . . . . . . . . Slot Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling/Disabling a Slot . . . . . . . Changing Slot Content . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.235 .235 .237 .237 .238 .240 .240 .241 .242 .243 .243 .244 .245 .245 .247 .247 .248 .249 .250 .251 .252 .252 .252 .253 .253
Chapter 7
Automatic Backup Configuration

About Time Navigator Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup without Using the Cache of the Server Scheduling issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administration Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Backup with the Backup Wizard Backup Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Triggering of a Backup . . . . . . . . . Editing Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 .286 .286 .288 .288 .289 .290 .291 .291 .291 .300 .300 .301 .315 .316
Contents
vii
Deleting Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Administration of Strategies . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the Strategy List . . . . . . . . . . . Strategy List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Strategy List . . . . . . . . . . Editing Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Strategy Media Pools . . . . . . Modifying Strategy Schedules . . . . . . . . Resetting Pending Strategies . . . . . . . . . Deleting Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Schedule Creation . . . . . . . Scheduling a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Schedule Rule . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Schedule Rule . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Schedule Rule . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . . Filter Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Nested Selections . . . . . . . . . . Backup Selection Representation . . . . . . Viewing Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Backup Selection . . . . . . . . . List Administration of Backup Selections . . . . . List of all Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . Viewing Backup Selection Information . . . Exporting the Backup Selection List . . . . Editing Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Backup Selection Parameters . . Modifying Backup Selection Filters . . . . . Modifying Backup Selection Security Rule Deleting Backup Selections . . . . . . . . . . Macro-multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.316 .317 .317 .317 .319 .319 .320 .321 .322 .322 .323 .323 .324 .326 .333 .335 .336 .336 .336 .337 .337 .337 .338 .338 .339 .339 .339 .347 .352 .353 .353 .355 .355 .357 .357 .358 .359 .359 .359 .360 .361 .362 .364
viii
Cache Space Management . . . . . . . . . . Simple Backup without Macro-multiplexing Backup with Macro-multiplexing . . . . . . Configuring Macro-multiplexing . . . . . . . Backup Status by Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the Backup Status by Platform . . Backup Status by Platform Parameters . . . Viewing Backup Details . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Details Window . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-running a Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
.364 .365 .365 .366 .368 .368 .368 .369 .370 .370
Chapter 8
Agents
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Time Navigator Agent . . . . . . . Backing up Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Daemon . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . Specifics of the Mac OS X agent . . . . . . . Known Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OES NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OES Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NDMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer . . . . . . . . . Starting Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Displayed Information . . . . Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 .372 .372 .372 .372 .372 .373 .373 .374 .374 .374 .375 .377 .380 .380 .383 .384 .385 .386 .386 .389 .391 .392 .394
Chapter 9
On Demand Backup
Configuring On Demand Backup Defining Users . . . . . . . Defining Strategies . . . . . Managing Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 .406 .407 .408
Contents
ix
Using On Demand Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows and Unix: Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer . . On Demand Backup Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring On Demand Backup in Time Navigator Job Manager
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.411 .411 .414 .414
Chapter 10 Time Navigator in SAN Environments

About Time Navigator in SAN Environments . . . About Multiple Server Architecture . . . . . . About Storage Node Architecture . . . . . . . About Mixed Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Servers or Storage Nodes . . . . . . Device Descriptor Re-allocation . . . . . . . . SAN Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Server Architecture Implementation . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Node Architecture Implementation . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAN Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shared Drive Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Drive Connection type . . . . Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 .420 .421 .422 .422 .423 .424 .425 .425 .425 .428 .428 .428 .429 .429 .430 .430
Chapter 11 Alarms
Alarm Description . . . . . . . . Alarm IDs and categories Alarm Severity . . . . . . Alarm Type . . . . . . . . Alarm Messages . . . . . Viewing Alarms . . . . . . . . . Sorting Alarms . . . . . . Processing Alarms . . . . . . . . Notifying Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 .434 .434 .435 .435 .436 .439 .440 .443
Chapter 12 Time Navigator Event Viewer

About Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Events in Connected Mode Viewing Events in File Mode . . . . General Operations on Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 .446 .447 .447 .448
Connecting to a Catalog . . . . . . Updating the Event Manager . . . Setting User Preferences . . . . . Preferences Window . . . . . . . . Event Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Events to Display . Selecting the Columns to Display Adjusting Columns . . . . . . . . . Adding a Line Break . . . . . . . . Filtering Events . . . . . . . . . . . Event Filter Parameters . . . . . . Clearing Events . . . . . . . . . . . Event Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Events . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Events Window . . . . . . Event Purging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . event File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . log or log_debug File . . . . . . . Notifying Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.448 .448 .450 .450 .451 .451 .452 .452 .453 .453 .454 .457 .458 .459 .459 .459 .462 .463 .463 .465
Chapter 13 Time Navigator Job Manager

Viewing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . Column Choice Job Window . . . . . . . . . Sorting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Manager Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing Time Navigator Job Manager Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Details Window - General Tab . . . . . Job Details Window - Advanced Tab . . . . Job Details Window - Specific Tab . . . . . Job Details Window - Events Tab . . . . . . Column Choice Window - Events . . . . . . Export Events Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 .469 .469 .469 .470 .470 .470 .474 .474 .475 .475 .476 .476 .476 .477 .479 .481 .483 .484 .485
Contents
xi
....................... Job Details Window - Alarms Tab . Filtering Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Filtering Window . . . . . . . . . Purging Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Purge Window . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Job Window . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Duplication Window . . . . . . . Job Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Job Behavior using Parameters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.487 .487 .489 .489 .490 .492 .492 .492 .494 .494 .495 .495 .495 .497 .497 .497 .499 .500
Chapter 14 Time Navigator Task Viewer

Time Navigator Task Viewer Interface . . . . . . . . . . Platform List Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Scale Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Zoom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering the Display of the Platforms . . . . . . . Updating Time Navigator Task Viewer Contents Exporting Data to a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Simultaneous Backups . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups Selecting a Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalogs Selection Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 .503 .504 .505 .505 .506 .508 .508 .513 .513 .513 .514 .516 .516
Chapter 15 Time Navigator Media Request Console

Viewing Requests . . . . . Selecting Catalogs . . . . Managing Requests . . . . . . . Handling a Request . . . . Responding to a Request Processed Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 .521 .522 .522 .523 .524
xii
Viewing Handled Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Information in the Handled Requests Area Viewing Information in the Pending Requests Area Request Status and Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redirecting Operator Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
.525 .525 .526 .527 .527 .528 .529
Chapter 16 Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System

About the Virtual Library System . . . . . . . . . . Configuring a Virtual Library System . . . . . . . Virtual Library System Configuration Files Using the Atempo VLS Wizard . . . . . . . Creating a Virtual Library System . . . . . Virtual Library System Parameters . . . . . Cartridge File Location . . . . . . . . . . . . SAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Virtual Library System . . . . . . . . . . Managing the Virtual Library System . . . . . . . Adding Spare Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Cartridges Offline . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Cartridges Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 .532 .532 .532 .535 .541 .542 .543 .545 .546 .546 .547 .547
Chapter 17 Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library

Duplication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Data Using Cartridge Duplication . . . . . . . . . Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Virtual Library System Application Virtual Library System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Data Using Job Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Virtual Library System Application Virtual Library System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 .551 .551 .552 .554 .567 .567 .572 .573 .574 .574 .583 .583
Chapter 18 List Application

Application Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 List File Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Contents
xiii
Basic Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a dynamic List file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Application Creation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager . . Restore Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List File Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the List Application to back up a MYSQL database
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.591 .592 .603 .604 .604 .606 .612 .614 .618 .620 .620 .623 .624
Chapter 19 Mapped Network Drives

Net Disk Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Net Disk Application Creation Parameters . . . Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back up and Restore without the Net Disk Application Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 .627 .629 .632 .632 .633 .635
xiv
Glossary Index
Introduction
Welcome to Time Navigator. Time Navigator is a software product that automatically backs up, archives and restores data. Its flexible and dynamic architecture brings both performance and security to your data storage needs. Available on a variety of platforms, Time Navigator interfaces directly with the most popular DBMS such as Oracle, SQL Server, Sybase, as well as Notes, MS Exchange... etc. Innovative developments such as Time Navigation simplify the restore process and reduce restore time. Time Navigators user oriented graphical interface facilitates product administration and brings you a high level of security and reliability. Time Navigator supports an ever increasing number of storage peripherals (drives and libraries). Consult our on-line Compatibility Guide at www.atempo.com for up-to-date information. This Time Navigator Administration Guide contains instructions on how to configure, control and administer Time Navigator. Several graphical applications are available, such as Time Navigator Library Manager, that allows you to view and easily manage your library content, and Time Navigator Media Request Console to manage media requests.
Time Navigator Features

Backup/Restore
Backup consists of copying data on a regular basis to ensure timely restore in case of accidental data loss. Time Navigator offers automatic backup scheduling, and provides easy steps to restore information. The advantages of the Time Navigator solution are the following:
The possibility for users to perform restore operations themselves, without the help of the administrator and without knowing how the backup robotized library is organized. The possibility for administrators to schedule backups easily, manage the robotized library automatically and monitor backup operations on the network. The on-line backup of the main types of database. The possibility to work in a very heterogeneous environment: Unix, Windows, NetWare, Mac OS X and VMS operating systems can all be backed up.
Archiving
Archiving meets another need in data management, that of storing data (projects, measurement results, etc.) in the medium to long term, for security as well as space saving reasons. Archiving operations consist in copying data into an archive folder and associating this folder with keywords for identification purposes. Time Navigator offers:
The ability for users to create archive folders with indexes and to archive and restore data by themselves, with key word search capabilities. An efficient time navigation method for searching folders. The possibility to archive to a central media library. The on line consultation of authorized archive folders. The automatic archiving of selected directories or files.
Introduction
Time Navigation
Designed by Atempo, Time Navigation greatly simplifies the consultation and restore of backed up or archived data. At any time, the user can navigate in the past on his machine and view the exact image of his files or directories as they were on a given date, regardless of their actual location on the storage media. Restoring them is then just a click away.
Conventions
This guide uses conventions to make information easy to access and understand.
Text in Time Navigator graphical application windows is displayed in the following font:
Window text.
Time Navigator commands and scripts related to the different operating systems (Unix, Windows, etc.) are displayed in the following font:
scripts and commands.
Cross-references to further information are indicated by the symbol. Procedures indicating the steps to follow to perform an action with Time Navigator are presented as follows:
Procedure title
1. 2.
First step. Next step, etc.
Command syntax is presented as follows:
Square brackets [ ] indicate an option. The - sign refers to a parameter. The parameter is either followed by the type of information to provide, or is self-sufficient. The | sign indicates a choice between several parameters.
Introduction
Time Navigator Documentation

Time Navigator documentation consists of a series of PDF format files located on the delivery CD-ROM. The PDF format requires the use of Adobe Acrobat Reader, which can be downloaded from the Adobe web site, at www.adobe.com.
Note
The Time Navigator Release Notes and Time Navigator Getting Started Guide manuals are also available in print format.
Time Navigator Release Notes

The Time Navigator Release Notes contain Time Navigator version-specific information such as new features, new behaviors and performance improvements.
Time Navigator Getting Started Guide

The Time Navigator Getting Started Guide is an introductory guide to familiarize users with Time Navigator. This guide contains information concerning Time Navigator Server and Agent installation, backup configuration and restore methods.
Other Guides
The Reference guides (Time Navigator Installation Guide, Time Navigator Administration Guide and Time Navigator Restore Guide) describe the installation, administration and use of the software for backing up and restoring file systems. The Specific guides describe installation, configuration and use of Time Navigator options, such as Time Navigator Archiving Server, Time Navigator for Oracle, Time Navigator for MS-SQL Server, Time Navigator for NDMP, etc.
Time Navigator Online Help

All the Time Navigator graphical interfaces include a context-sensitive online help system available for:
Windows (HtmlHelp format), Unix (HTML format). This format is compatible with the Netscape Navigator 4.0 browser, or any other compatible browser.
This online help system allows you to find the information you need easily and quickly:
From any dialog box within the application, click on Help to access context-sensitive information describing the parameters of the dialog box. From any graphical interface, choose Help - Help Topics to get the online help for this interface. You can also search for information through the Contents tab, the Index tab or the Search tab that offers a powerful full-text search.
Time Navigator Tutorials

Discover Time Navigator through the Flash-based Tutorials delivered with the product:
Setup Tutorial: How to install, use the Preferences tool and configure the Device Detection Wizard. Backup Tutorial: How to configure an automatic backup. Restore Tutorial: How to restore missing files or previous versions of existing files. Monitoring Tutorial: How to monitor your backups and analyze problems. Architecture Tutorial: How Time Navigator can be integrated with various
architectures (Client/Server, Multi-site, Secured, Firewall and SAN Architectures).
Archiving Tutorial: How to use Time Navigator for long-term storage and classification of your file sytems.
To access these tutorials, choose Help-Tutorial from the Time Navigator Administration Console or Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. The tutorials are also available from the Autorun (Windows) or from the CD-ROM index.htm file (Unix). To view these tutorials, you need:
A web browser.
Introduction
A Shockwave Player (or Macromedia Flash Player) program. If needed, download the program corresponding to your machines operating system from:
http://www.macromedia.com/shockwave/download/alternates/
Note
The Shockwave Player and Macromedia Flash Player programs are not available for IBM AIX and VMS.
Technical Support
Web Support
If you have subscribed a maintenance contract and you encounter a problem with Time Navigator, consult the Atempo Web Support at:
http://support.atempo.com
Complete information on Atempo Web Support, including how to get a login, the range of tools and services available and how to use each of them, can be found in the Time Navigator Troubleshooting Guide, on your Time Navigator delivery CD-ROM. The Knowledge Base includes:
Time Navigator PDF documentation. Time Navigator patches. Time Navigator Known Issues. Technical Notes.
If you are unable to solve your problem or find the information you need, Atempo and its partners will help you. Web support includes an interactive interface through which you can log your inquiries directly and follow them up. Support is also available by email and by phone. When calling the Atempo Technical Support team, please provide your maintenance contract number. We also recommend that for all Support inquiries you generate the Time Navigator Environment Report.
For more details on the Environment Report, see the Time Navigator Troubleshooting Guide.
Your Comments are Welcome

We value and appreciate your opinion as a Time Navigator user and reader of our documentation. As we write, revise and evaluate our guides, your comments are the most important input we receive. Please do not hesitate to send us any remarks you have to the following address: documentation@atempo.com
C H A P T E R
Time Navigator Administration Console is one of the main interfaces you will encounter when using Time Navigator. It offers a truly interactive and centralized administration that includes:
A representation of your backup network, displaying catalogs, servers, clients, SAN, databases, automated libraries and drives. Access to a series of monitoring tools, such as Time Navigator Job Manager, Time Navigator Event Viewer and Time Navigator Task Viewer. Real time information concerning various components of the backup network. Configuration tools to set up your backup environment and schedule automatic backups.
This chapter describes the functioning of Time Navigator Administration Console both in disconnected and connected mode.
10
Prerequisites to Opening Time Navigator Administration Console

The following items are prerequisites to opening Time Navigator Administration Console:
The tina_daemon process must be running on the Time Navigator server. The Time Navigator service must be started on the Time Navigator server.
Unix Prerequisites
A script called runtina is provided in the $TINA_HOME/Bin directory which loads the Time Navigator environment at the moment a command is run. It takes the command itself as its argument. Example:/usr/Atempo/tina/Bin/runtina tina_adm -language English It is also possible to add $TINA_HOME/Bin to the PATH variable in your .profile file. If you do this, you do not need to include the path every time to execute runtina. For example, you can directly type runtina tina_adm -language English in any console window. Any other commands can be launched in the same way. Alternatively, the environment can be set by running tina.sh or tina.csh, depending on the shell you are using. For shell and bash, type
. $TINA_HOME/Bin/.tina.sh
For csh, run
Chapter 1
11
source $TINA_HOME/Bin/.tina.csh
Note:
Atempo recommends using runtina rather than the shell script to set the environment, because certain system libraries in the environment can disrupt the running of standard Unix commands such as ls.
Note:
If the script is run at reboot, it may prevent the launching of the window manager. Make sure not to set the script in a user profile (.cshrc, .profile ...).
An X-Window graphical display is required. You must check that the environment variable DISPLAY is correctly defined or use the [-display display] option of the tina_adm command.
12
Disconnected Mode
When you are in disconnected mode, no catalog is displayed in Time Navigator Administration Console. This does not mean that the Time Navigator service or daemon is not running. One or more catalogs may be active, but you are not connected to any one of them, hence no catalog contents appear in Time Navigator Administration Console. In disconnected mode, you can perform the following operations:
Creating a Catalog Editing a Catalog Opening Time Navigator Event Viewer To create or edit a catalog, you must be logged in as root or with administrators rights.
Warning:
To start Time Navigator Administration Console in disconnected mode
1.
Choose /Applications/Atempo/tina41/Administration Console.app Make sure the Time Navigator service is running (enter $TINA_HOME/
Bin/runtina tina_daemon). Then enter $TINA_HOME/Bin/runtina tina_adm
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Time Navigator Administration Console 2. 3.

Note:
If some catalogs have already been created, the Catalog Selection window appears. Select none and click on OK. Time Navigator Administration Console appears. For a full description of the options available with the tina_adm command and their default value, see the "tina_adm" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
Chapter 1
13
Connected Mode
Prerequisites
In addition to the prerequisites for opening Time Navigator Administration Console in disconnected mode, opening in connected mode, meaning to connect to a catalog, implies that at least one catalog has already been created on the server.
Opening Time Navigator Administration Console

To connect to a catalog and access the various functionalities offered by Time Navigator, you must have the appropriate permissions to do so. Thus, you should choose a Catalog Identity according to the Level of Catalog Access you require. The following two sections provide information concerning the catalog login. Information concerning Users can be found in Users and Access Rights, page 119.
Catalog Identity
First connection to a catalog:
By default, when you create a catalog, the Privileged User is the only one allowed to connect to the catalog. Thus if you are connecting to a catalog for the first time, you must use the privileged user identity with or without a password depending on whether you defined one or not.
Tip:
While you are logged in as the privileged user you can grant other users access to the catalog (see To define user specific rights, page 123) as well as modify the default rights (see Defining Default Access Rights, page 123).
Logging in as the privileged user:
On subsequent login, if you need to be logged as the privileged user, provide the privileged user name and password if you have defined one.
Logging in as a user known to the catalog:
Enter the user name and password exactly as defined in the catalog. The user must at least have the General Task permission to connect to the catalog. If you did not specify a password for a user, just provide the user name. To define users in the catalog, see To create a user, page 129.
Logging in as a user unknown to the catalog:
If the user name you provide is unknown to the catalog, whether you provide a
14
password or not, the user will be assigned default permissions. The default permissions do not allow a user to connect to the catalog. The privileged user can modify the default rights to allow access to the catalog to any user, see Defining Default Access Rights, page 123 for details.
Level of Catalog Access
The following table presents the permissions required to perform catalog operations:
Operation
Creating or editing a catalog Starting, stopping or suspending a catalog Connecting to the catalog in Time Navigator Administration Console Accessing the Time Navigator functionalities. Granting catalog access permissions to users.
User(s) allowed to perform the operation

root or user with administrators rights only Privileged user only Privileged user and any user with the General Task permission. See Users and Access Rights, page 119. Privileged user and any user with the General Task permission and the permission specific to each functionality. See Defining Personal Access Rights, page 123 for details. Privileged user only
To start Time Navigator Administration Console in connected mode 1.
Choose /Applications/Atempo/tina41/Administration Console.app Enter ./tina_adm in the Bin directory of the installation directory ($TINA_HOME). Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Time Navigator Administration Console
Note:
For a full description of the options available with the tina_adm command and their default value, see the "tina_adm" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
2.
The List of Catalogs Window window appears. Select the catalog you want to connect to and click on OK. You can only be connected to one catalog at a time.
Chapter 1
15
3.
The Catalog Login Window appears. Enter the name and password of the user you want to log in as. See Catalog Identity, page 13 to choose the appropriate user. If the user you provide does not have the permission to connect to the catalog a warning message is displayed. If the password you provide is incorrect, the Catalog Login window reappears to let you enter the password again. Once you have provided a correct login, Time Navigator Administration Console appears.
Connecting to Another Catalog

If you are working in a multi-catalog environment, you can connect to another catalog to display its contents in Time Navigator Administration Console (you can only view a single catalog at a time in that window).
Note:
You can only connect to a running catalog. If a catalog is stopped, you must start it before you can connect to it, see To start a catalog, page 49.
To connect to another catalog
1. 2. 3.
In the Catalog Information area, select the catalog you want to connect to. Choose Catalog-Connect. If the catalog user currently connected has the permission to access the catalog you are trying to connect to, no login is required. If not (or if no catalog user is currently connected, i.e., you are in disconnected mode) you have to provide a login allowing the connection to the new catalog. See Catalog Identity, page 13 and Level of Catalog Access, page 14 for details. The catalog previously displayed is disconnected and the newly selected one appears.
4.
Disconnecting the Catalog

Disconnecting the current catalog allows you to switch to the disconnected mode. This is useful if you want to create or edit a catalog.
To disconnect the catalog
Choose Catalog-Disconnect. All the catalog information disappears, the window is empty.
16
Refreshing the Catalog Status

To refresh the status of all the catalogs
Choose Catalog-Refresh the Catalog List.

To refresh the status of one catalog
In the Catalog tab of the Catalog information area, right-click a catalog then choose Refresh Catalog Status.
Making Time Navigator Administration Console Start Faster

By default, the catalog list is refreshed when Time Navigator Administration Console starts and regularly afterwards. If your environment has a great number of catalogs and/ or if there is a heavy load on your network, disabling the automatic refresh of the catalog list will make Time Navigator Administration Console start faster.
To disable the automatic refresh of the catalog list:
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalog and uncheck Automatic Refresh of the Catalog List.
Next time you start Time Navigator Administration Console, the icon will appear beside each catalog except the one you are connected to. This icon means the catalog status is unknown. To manually refresh the status of one or several catalogs, see Refreshing the Catalog Status, page 16.
To enable the automatic refresh of the catalog list:
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalog and check Automatic Refresh of the Catalog List. Until you start Time Navigator Administration Console again, the automatic refresh only applies to the catalogs which you have already manually refreshed.
Note:
Next time you start Time Navigator Administration Console, it will return to its default configuration and refresh the entire catalog list.
Chapter 1
17
Quitting Time Navigator Administration Console

To quit Time Navigator Administration Console
Choose Catalog-Quit.
Shutting Down the server

This section concerns Unix platforms only. Prior to shutting down the server, you must manually stop the Time Navigator service to prevent damages to the catalog.
18
Time Navigator Administration Console Main Window
Menu Bar
Network Area
Catalog Information Area
Status Bar
Icon Area
Alarm Area
Time Navigator Administration Console consists of:
The Menu bar which includes all the application menus. The Network area which allows you to view platforms, libraries and drives in its upper part, and in the lower part, the shared drives. The Catalog Information area which indicates the name of all the catalogs located on the server and their current status, (Catalogs tab) and the catalog and cache spaces (Current Catalog tab). The list of catalogs shows the alarm with the highest security level for each reachable catalog.
Chapter 1
19
The Status bar which indicates the current catalog, the current user and the number of platforms. The Icon area which represents the list of all platform groups managed in the Time Navigator configuration. The Alarm area which allows you to view alarms initiated by the application graphically. The three buttons represent different severity levels. See Alarms, page 433, for additional information.
The Network, Alarms, and Real Time Information areas are updated every five seconds. Several instances of Time Navigator Administration Console can run at the same time. Any action performed in one instance will be also viewed in the others, except when removing or creating a platform.
Menu Bar
The Menu bar includes all the administration menus:
Catalog Menu
The Catalog menu allows performance of catalog operations such as creating, starting, connecting, etc. See Opening Time Navigator Administration Console, page 13.
Monitoring Menu
The Monitoring Menu allows opening of the Time Navigator monitoring interfaces:
Alarms, page 433 Time Navigator Event Viewer, page 445 Time Navigator Job Manager, page 467 Time Navigator Task Viewer, page 501 Time Navigator Media Request Console, page 519
Platform Menu
The Platform menu allows handling of hosts and applications. See Handling Platforms, page 31.
Backup Menu
The Backup menu allows to create backup objects such as strategies, backup selections, groups, etc, to schedule automatic backups. See Automatic Backup Configuration, page 285.
20
Archiving Menu
The Archiving menu allows management of archive folders. See the Time Navigator Archiving Server guide.
Devices Menu
The Devices menu allows to detect and manage devices, as well as perform library and drive operations. See Device & Media Management, page 137 and Time Navigator Library Manager, page 233.
Storage Menu
The Storage menu allows management of media, media pools, cartridges, snapshots and replications. See Device & Media Management, page 137.
Security Menu
The Security menu provides access to Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager (if you installed this fonctionality) and allows management of users and access rights for Time Navigator. See Users and Access Rights, page 119 and Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager.
Help Menu
The help menu provides access to Time Navigator Online Help, tutorial, Web support zone and information concerning the Time Navigator Licenses and version used.
Network Area
The Network area contains the platforms, libraries and drives in its upper part, and in the lower part, the shared drives.
Selecting Items in the Network Area
To perform any operation on a platform, platform group, drive or library, you must first select it in the Network area.
To select an object in the network area
1. 2.
Display the object to select in the Network area if it is not already displayed (see Displaying Platforms, page 31). Click on the object icon. The outer frame turns to a darker blue: the object is selected.
Chapter 1
21
To select a platform group
In the Icons area, click on the icon of any platform belonging to the group. All the group is selected and is displayed with a black background. Only one object can be selected at a time, whatever its nature (platform, drive, library or group).
Note:
Platform Representation
A platform can be either a host or an application.

1. Alarms 2. Host/Application Status 3. Network Information 4. Host/Application Name 5. Host/Application Type 6. Backup strategies (A, B, C or D)
Click here to select the
Line # Platform Information 1 Alarms concerning the host/application. The color of the box indicates the alarm severity level: Background color : no alarm. Yellow : minor alarm. Orange : major alarm. Red bar : critical alarm. The blinking of the bar indicates the alarm status (viewed or not): Blinking bar : non acknowledged alarms. Non blinking bar : acknowledged alarms. Note: When a platform has several alarms of different severity levels, the color of the bar indicates the maximum severity level (ex: a minor alarm and a major alarm = orange bar). 2 Host/Application Status. Background color : platform is enabled, backup authorized. Black cross on an ocher background : platform is disabled, backup not authorized.
22
Line # Platform Information 3 Network Information (applies to hosts only) Drive icon : host has access to a shared drive. Lightning : host is connected to one or more local drive. Host/Application Name The name corresponds to a hostname and not an alias (ex: hercule), except if you declared it in the localhostname field of the hosts file in the Conf directory of the Time Navigator installation directory. Host/Application Type: model and architecture (ex: SGI, Windows 2000...). Backup strategies associated with the host/application (A, B, C and D) up to 4 strategies for any given platform. If a letter appears in the box, it indicates that the backup strategy is defined. If a backup is being performed, the box of the concerned strategy is displayed with a green background.
5 6
Drive Representation
Click here to select the drive
1.Alarms concerning the drive 2. Status (Disabled,Enabled or Maintenance). 3. Drive Operation 4.Drive Name 5. Drive Type 6. Cartridge Name 7. Volume of data processed
Chapter 1
23
Line n# 1
Drive Information Alarms concerning the drive. The color of the bar indicates the alarm severity level: Blue bar : no alarm. Yellow bar : minor alarm. Orange bar : major alarm. Red bar : critical alarm. The blinking of the bar indicates the alarm status (viewed or not): Blinking bar : non acknowledged alarms. Non blinking bar : acknowledged alarms. Note: When a drive has several alarms of different severity levels, the color of the bar indicates the maximum severity level (ex: a minor alarm and a major alarm = orange bar).
Drive Status. Enabled, green background Disabled, ocher background Maintenance, ocher background
: drive is available : drive is unavailable : drive is in maintenance mode
A different icon appears for each operation being performed by the drive. The operations are: Writing on media Reading from media Forwarding media Rewinding media Writing a label Testing the drive Recycling media Deleting media Drive Name This is the logical name of a drive. Drive Type: Manufacturer and type (ex: Exabyte 5GB-C). Media Name * : non labelled media. Label : labelled media. The background color indicates the nature of the request: A Red background means that the media is required. A background of the same color as the overall background means that the media has been identified and is being used. Volume of data processed on media (not just for the current session).
4 5 6
Line #1 is only active when an alarm concerning the drive is detected. Lines #5, 6, and 7 are only active during the reading or writing session of a backup or
24
archiving of data on media.

Note:
During maintenance operation or while using a drive for a non Time Navigator
Chapter 1
25
Network Representation
Click here to select the
1.Drive display toggle 2. Number of drives attached to the network 3. Network Name
Line 1
Network Information Drive display toggle. Use this button to show or hide the drives attached to the network. The plus sign indicates that drives are hidden. The minus sign indicates that the drives are displayed. Number of drives attached to the network Network Name
2 3
Catalog Information Area

Catalogs Tab
The Catalogs tab indicates the name of all the catalogs located on the server and their current status. For running catalogs, and if the user has the access permission to the catalogs, the background color of the icon indicates the active alarm with the highest severity present on the catalog. A tool tip provides a list of all active alarms per alarm level for a particular catalog.
Icon Description
The catalog is running and is the catalog currently displayed in Time Navigator Administration Console. The catalog is running but is not currently displayed in Time Navigator Administration Console. The catalog is running but the current user does not have the permission to access that catalog.
26
Icon
Description
The catalog is stopped. The catalog status is unknown due to an error. The catalog status is unknown (the automatic refresh is turned off).
Current Catalog Tab

The Current Catalog tab provides real time catalog and cache usage information.
Catalog Area In the Catalog area, you can monitor the modifications occurring in the catalog space. Field
Volume
Description
This is the catalog size you declared when you first created your catalog. This figure will not change unless you edit your catalog and modify it. See Editing a Catalog, page 45 for details on how to increase the catalog size. This is the amount of available space in your catalog expressed as a percentage of total catalog volume. This percentage decreases when the number of backup selections and versions increases. It increases when media are recycled or objects are deleted. The free space should not be allowed to be too low as it could seriously hinder Time Navigator functioning. Thus, when you reach 20% of remaining free space, the field will be displayed in orange to warn you (this value can be modified using the tunable Catalog Filling Rate Alarm). If you reach 5%, the field will be red. The catalog will cease functioning when it is 98% full.
Free
Objects Instances
Number of all distinct objects (files and directories) contained in the catalog. Number of all object versions contained in the catalog.
Backing up a new backup selection involves the creation of one object and one version in the catalog. The object and the first version created use an average of 512 bytes. The following versions use approximately 128 bytes (Unix, Windows XP) or 256 bytes for systems such as 2000/2003, NetWare, VMS with extended security management (ACL or access list type). Backing up an existing object only involves the creation of a new version.
Chapter 1
27
If backup strategies or archive folders have multiple writing media pools, several file copies are written. In this case, one version is created for each copy. For example, if your strategy has a multiple writing media pool, each file is backed up in two copies and two new versions are recorded in the catalog for each file.
Cache Area The Cache area enables you to follow the evolution of the cache occupied space. Fields
Volume Free
Information
Total cache volume as determined when the catalog was created (sums up disk and memory cache). Percentage of available cache. This figure actually refers to the percentage of free container in the cache, thus it will appear constant even if data is being processed by the cache, until it leaps to a new threshold. When the free cache space falls below 10%, the field is displayed with an orange background. When the free cache space falls below 5%, the field is displayed with a red background. Percentage of cache used for writing sessions (e.g., during backup and archiving operations). Percentage of cache used for reading sessions (e.g., during restore operations).
Writing Reading
The Status Bar
The status bar contains the following information:

Numbered Area 1 2 Description
Current catalog name Button to launch Time Navigator Media Request Console User Status and User Name:
Key icon: privileged user Yellow icon: user known to the catalog No icon: user unknown to the catalog
28
Numbered Area 4
Description
The first number represents the number of platforms currently displayed. The second number represents the total number of platforms in the catalog Alarm area. Displays the alarms issued by Time Navigator:
Green means no alarm Yellow means minor Orange means major Red means critical
Icon Area
The Icon area contains all the platforms declared in the application. Platforms belonging to a group are represented in a group area containing an icon for each platform. Only the first ten characters of the name are displayed. Using the icon area right click menu, you can:
Enable/disable platforms. If you right click on a platform belonging to a group, all the platforms in the group are enabled/disabled at once. Sort platforms
The platform status is indicated by its icon color and by symbols whose meaning is explained in the following table:
Chapter 1
29
Visual Clue
Dark green icon Ocher icon Green icon Dark blue icon Red, Orange and yellow icon No symbol (platform name alone) Circle Vertical bar
Description
Enabled platform. Disabled platform.
Example
adele.fs2 hobbes.list adele aria
Automatic backup being performed on the platform. The platform is highlighted.
Non-acknowledged alarm on the platform of fatal, adele.fs major or minor severity level. Platform displayed in the Network area. Platform not displayed in the Network area. Platform displayed in the Network area, and connected to one or several drives. adele.fs2 axle adele athanagor gaston.list aragorn and hobbes
Vertical bar to the right of circle. Platform not displayed in the Network area and connected to one or several drives. Dimmed circle with ocher background. Thick line between platforms Platform Disabled and not viewed in the Network area. Platforms are grouped
Note:
When a platform is selected in the Network area, its icon blinks in the Icon area to allow the user better to view it.
Alarm Area
The Alarms area allows you to view alarms initiated by the application. It contains three buttons which correspond to different severity levels. The color of the button indicates the alarm severity level:
Green button:
no alarm.
Yellow button: minor alarm. Orange button: major alarm. Red button: critical alarm.
30
The blinking of the button indicates the alarm status:
Non blinking button: acknowledged alarms. Blinking button: not acknowledged alarms.
If you click on an alarm button, the list of alarms of the selected severity level is displayed. You can acknowledge the displayed alarms. The list contains information on alarms such as name and type of the object, severity level, first and last dates of occurrence, number of occurrences and message. For more information on managing alarms, see Alarms, page 433.
Chapter 1
31
Handling Platforms
Displaying Platforms
In the Icons area, the presence of symbols on a platform icon indicates that the platform, and the libraries and drives, attached to it (if any) are not displayed in the Network area. The platform button in the Icons area acts as a toggle to view, or not, the platform in the Network area.
Note:
To display a drive or a library, you must display the host it is connected to.
For more information on the meaning of symbols associated with icons, seeIcon Area, page 28.
To display a platform in the Network area
1. 2.
Choose Platform-Display-View. The Platforms to Display window appears, listing all the platforms that are not displayed in the Network area. Select one or several platforms in the list and click on OK.
In the Icons area, the symbol the platform icon contains disappears and the platform, along with the libraries and drives connected to it (if any), is displayed in the Network area.
Tip:
You can also double-click on the platform icon in the Icons area to display the platform in the Network area.
To remove a platform display from the Network area
1. 2.
Choose Platform-Display-Iconify. The Platforms to iconify window appears, listing all the platforms that are displayed in the Network area. Select one or several platforms and click on OK.
The selected platforms, along with the libraries and the drives connected to them (if any), are no longer displayed in the Network area. A symbol appears among the corresponding
32
icons of the Icons area.

Tip:
You can also double-click on the platform icon in the Icons area to remove the platform from the Network area.
Searching for a Platform

It is possible to search for a platform in the Network area. This feature is very useful if many objects are declared in the Network area and you have to scroll back and forth to find a platform.
To search for a platform
1. 2.
Choose Platform-Search-Host/Application. The host/application list appears. Select a platform in the list or fill in the Search field to filter platforms according to their names. You can use, among others, the following special characters:
*: specifies any characters from 0 to n. ?: specifies any single character, including the space character. [ab]: specifies only one character among those mentioned (a or b).
3.
Click on OK.
The focus is set on the searched platform.

Note:
If the platform was minimized in the Icon area, it is maximized and appears in the Network area.
Chapter 1
33
Grouping Platforms
Platform groups allow you to define backup settings for the whole group at once. All platforms belonging to the group will have identical backup settings. Only users authorized to edit backup strategies and backup selections can perform this operation.
Note:
Platforms must be compatible in order to be grouped. For example, you can only group hosts that are of the same type. Likewise, you can only group applications that are of the same type, except for the Filesystem and List applications that are grouped according to the host type they are attached to. If the platforms are not compatible, you can use the backup strategy import feature. See To create a backup strategy, page 301.
Warning:
If the platform you plan to add to a group already has backup selections and strategies defined, they will be replaced with the group backup selections and strategies.
To group platforms
1. 2.
Choose Backup-Groups. The Modify Groups window appears. In the Existing groups list, select the platform or the platform group that you want to associate with a group.
Tip:
You can select more than one group or platforms using the Ctrl key.
3.
In the Destination groups list, select the group with which you want to associate the selected platform.
34
4.
Click on Apply to take the modifications into account without closing the window and click on OK to close the window. A dialog box reminds you that the platform adopts the backup selections and strategies of the group it is associated with and prompts you to confirm your decision.
Warning:
Platforms belonging to the same group have identical backup selections. The same directory must exist on all the platforms of the group.
5.
Tip:
Click on Yes to validate the operation. You can also select a platform in the Icons area and drag and drop it on top of the platform with which you want to associate it.
To remove a platform from a group
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Backup-Groups. The Modify Groups window appears. In the Existing groups list, select the platform to remove from the group. In the Destination groups list, select New group. Click on Apply to take the modifications into account without closing the window and click on OK to close the window. You can also drag and drop the platform outside of the group in Icons area.
Tip:
Note:
When a platform is removed from a group, it keeps the strategies and backup selections of the group with which it was associated. If you are allowed to, you can modify its backup selections and strategies. See Editing Strategies, page 316 and Editing a Backup Selection, page 355.
Chapter 1
35
Sorting Platforms
When you open Time Navigator Administration Console, the platforms in a group are automatically sorted in alphabetical order, and the groups are sorted in the alphabetical order of the first platform in each group. You have the option, if you modify the groups, to manually sort platforms.
To sort platform groups
Choose Platform-Display-Sort. The platforms in the icon area are sorted in alphabetical order within each group and the groups are sorted by their first platform.
Tip:
You can also right click in the icon area and select Sort.
36
37
C H A P T E R
Catalog Management
This section describes how to perform the following operations:
Creating a Catalog, page 39 Editing a Catalog, page 45 Setting Catalog Parameters, page 47 Starting a Catalog, page 49 Stopping a Catalog, page 50 Suspending a Catalog, page 51 Backing up the Catalog, page 52 Restoring the Catalog, page 64
38
About the catalog

The Catalog is the core Time Navigator database. It contains all the information required to run Time Navigator, such as the configuration of platforms, drives, libraries, users, cartridges...etc. It also contains the meta-data recorded in the catalog during write operations. This meta-data consists of the description and location of all backed up files. In most cases, a catalog will be created during the installation phase. Otherwise, creating a catalog is the first operation you have to perform to configure your Time Navigator environment.
Multicatalog
The multicatalog functionality allows you to set up backup and archiving operations with a lot of freedom. For instance, one catalog can be dedicated to backing up data and another to archiving data. The different catalogs work independently from one another although they may share resources such as drives and libraries through Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager. Some Time Navigator applications such as Time Navigator Task Viewer, Time Navigator Job Manager or Time Navigator Media Request Console, will let you access several catalogs at the same time, while others, such as Time Navigator Administration Console will require you to choose a single working catalog.
Note:
Each catalog must be backed up on a regular basis to secure your Time Navigator environment.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
39
Creating a Catalog
When you create a catalog, Time Navigator automatically creates a Data.catalog_name directory in the installation directory, containing a series of odb, ... odb_n files that represent the catalog. The maximum size of an .odb file is 1 GB, thus depending on the size of your catalog, 1 to 32 odb files will be created. For performance reasons, you may want to locate your odb files elsewhere than in the default directory. To do so, use the Split Catalog File (odb_translation_path_)# or Catalog File Location (global_odb_translation_path) tunables prior to creating the catalog.
Note:
The catalog must be created on a local disk, not on a network disk via NFS for instance.
See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details on how to use these tunables.
Preliminary Steps
While logged in as root or with administrators rights, open Time Navigator Administration Console in disconnected mode (see Opening Time Navigator Administration Console, page 13). If Time Navigator Administration Console is already open and connected to a catalog, choose Catalog-Disconnect to switch to the disconnected mode.
To create a catalog
1.
Choose Catalog-New. The Time Navigator Catalog Editor window appears.
40
2. 3.
Provide a catalog name and size, and an identity for the privileged user as described in Catalog Parameters Area, page 43. Click on Add in the Cache area to define your cache space. The following window appears:
4.
Choose the Type and Size of the cache space and click on OK.
You must define at least one type of cache. In order to improve performances, both cache space types can be segmented. The following tables summarize the cache caracteristics for each cache type, and the disk cache maximum size according to the catalog size. For the Disk Cache, you must specify a path for the disk cache file to be created
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
41
as well as a size. Repeat the operation for each disk cache to be created.
Cache Characteristics Cache type Characteristic
Maximum Size Minimum Size
Value
2047 MB 32 MB, at least 64 MB recommended
Maximum Number of Segments 32 Minimum Number of Segments 0 if at least 1 disk cache segment has been defined, otherwise 1 Maximum Segment Size
Memory
Unix: 2047MB Windows: 64 MB except if tunable max_memory_axes_size is set (see the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details) If the tunable is not set, the cache size you provide is automatically divided into 64 MB segments and rounded up to the nearest multiple of 64. For instance if you request 200 MB of memory cache, four segments are created. 32 MB 32 GB to 512 GB depending on the catalog size (see Maximum Disk Cache Size, page 41) 1 GB
Minimum Segment Size Maximum Size Minimum Size
Maximum Number of Segments 32
Disk
Minimum Number of Segments 0 if at least 1 memory cache segment has been defined, otherwise 1 Maximum Segment Size 32 GB to 512 GB depending on the catalog size (see Maximum Disk Cache Size, page 41) and on the number of segments 32 MB
Minimum Segment Size
Maximum Disk Cache Size If the catalog size is...

< 2 GB >= 2 GB and < 8 GB >= 8 GB and < 16 GB > 16 GB
...the maximum disk cache size is..;

32 GB 128 GB 256 GB 512 GB
42
5. 6.
To modify the structure of your cache, click on the Advanced Tab. See Advanced Tab, page 44 for details. Click on OK to launch the catalog creation.
Modifying Memory Cache Size in MacOS
When you configure a memory cache in Time Navigator Configurator, the maximum size allowed is proportional to the size of the shared memory defined in your machine. The default values defined at setup are:

sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmmax=536870912 sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmmin=1 sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmmni=128 sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmseg=32 sysctl -w kern.sysv.shmall=131072
This means that, by default, you cannot create a memory cache larger than 512 MB. However, if you want to have memory cache larger than this, you can modify the size of the shared memory in your Mac system. You can do this manually by modifying the shm values in the file /etc/rc.
To Modify the Memcache Default Values in MacOS
The general principle is to set the shmmax and shmall values according to the following formula:
shmmax=total size in bytes to allocate to your shared memory shmall=shmmax/4096
For example, the following values will allow the creation of memcache of up to 1 GB:
shmmax=1073741824 shmall=262144
Warning
Atempo recommends that you do not allocate more than 1/4 of the system memory to Time Navigator cache. Example: if your server has 4GB system memory, do not allocate anymore than 1GB for Time Navigator.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
43
Note
After any modification of the file /etc/rc, the machine needs to be rebooted.
Catalog Editor Window

Catalog Parameters Area
Catalog Name: Name that appears in the Time Navigator interfaces. The catalog
name is not case sensitive and always appears in lower case.You can use the following characters:
Any letter. Any number from 0 to 9. Underscore _.
Catalog Size (MB)
At least 128 MB, at most 128 GB. To determine your catalog size, be aware that the first version of a backed up object will use up approximately 1024 bytes. Subsequent instances will use up approximately 256 bytes for Unix, clients and 512 bytes for Windows, MAC OS X, NetWare, and VMS clients (the difference in size is due to the presence of security attributes and/or ACLs).
Note:
The catalog size must be a multiple of 4. It will be automatically rounded if you enter a size that is not a multiple of 4.
Auto-expanding catalog size
By default, a catalog is in auto-expanding mode. The size you provide when creating the catalog is automatically increased as needed up to a maximum of 128 GB, provided that you have enough disk space. Alarms warn you when you are close to reaching the maximun size of the catalog and when your file system is nearly full.
Note:
To disable the auto-expansion of the catalog, use the tunable -disable_auto_expand. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details on how to set a tunable. The size of the catalog is then limited to the size you define when creating the catalog.
44
Privileged User Name
Enter a name for the privileged user. This user needs not exist at the operating system level. You can use any characters. The privileged user is the only user that can grant access rights to other users. He has all the rights to perform any operations on the catalog, except editing the catalog. Editing the catalog can only be performed by root or a user with administrators rights.
Password
Enter a password for the privileged user and confirm it in the Confirm field.
Note:
If you choose not to define a password for the privileged user at this point, you can define one later, just as you would for any catalog user.
Server Name
This field is automatically filled by Time Navigator and contains the name of the server you are working on.
Comments
Enter a comment if you wish. This comment will appear next to the catalog name in the Catalog List window.
Cache Tab
Add: Lets you create a new cache space. Modify: Lets you modify a cache space. Delete: Lets you delete a cache space. File Pathname: Displays the access path to the cache space. Cache Size: Displays the size of the cache space.
Advanced Tab
Note:
The default container size is calculated according to the cache size you specify in the Cache tab. You may change the size of the containers as needed, without modifying the size of the cache.
Average number of Versions per objet: Allows Time Navigator to optimize the catalog structure by keeping versions of a same object in the same location. The default value is 5, i.e., each time a new object is backed up in the catalog, Time Navigator
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
45
reserves enough space near the object to hold 4 more versions of that object. Keep the default value if you are unsure of what information you should provide. This field only appears when you are creating a catalog, not when you are editing it.
Memory cache layout is xx containers of yy MB: Indicates the current memory cache layout based on the memory cache information found in the Cache Tab. xx is the number of containers, yy is the size of each container. New Size of Memory Containers (MB): Allows you to modify the size of the memory cache containers, if the default cache container size does not suit your needs. Choose a size between 4 MB and 256 MB. Disk cache layout is xx containers of yy MB: Indicates the current disk cache layout based
on the disk cache information found in the Cache Tab. xx is the number of containers, yy is the size of each container.
New Size of Disk Containers (MB): Allows you to modify the size of the disk cache
containers, if the default cache container size does not suit your needs. Choose a size between 4 MB and 256 MB.
Editing a Catalog
Once a catalog has been created, you may need to edit it, for instance to increase its size.
Note:
If the catalog is in auto-expanding mode (default mode when creating a catalog), you do not need to increase the catalog size, it is automatically increased when needed.
You need to stop the catalog in order to modify it.

To edit a catalog
1. 2. 3.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console with the catalog administrator login. Stop the catalog. Right click on the catalog to edit in the Catalog Information area and choose Stop. Choose Catalog-Properties. The Catalog List window appears. Select the catalog to edit and click on OK.
46
4.
Edit the catalog settings as needed.
All fields but the Host Id and the catalog name can be edited. For all other fields, follow the procedure described in Creating a Catalog, page 39.
5.
Restart the catalog. In the catalog information area, right click on the catalog and choose Start. Log in as the privileged user of the catalog.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
47
Setting Catalog Parameters

Parallel Restore Parameters
It is possible to perform several simultaneous restore jobs. This is known as parallel restore. Parallel restore works by initiating a father job that then handles several child jobs. These child jobs appear as parallel jobs. Child jobs may also be fathers. All these jobs remain active until at least one has ended. They will only appear in the job history once all child jobs have completed.
Note:
Parallel restore does not depend on having backed up the original data with a parallel backup. You can perform a parallel restore on data that was backed up without parallelism if the backup was done on several cartridges.
You can set limits to the maximum number of snapshots or cartridges to use. The limits concerning snapshots are mostly related to your network abilities. The practical limit on cartridges is the number of drives available. The limits apply to each individual restore and not all of the current restores. If a child job is interrupted or fails for some reason, the other child jobs will continue normally. During a parallel restore job, if a file is split across two cartridges, parallel performance is reduced as this will require two passes on the job:
a first pass to restore data from the first cartridge and perform other complete jobs. a second pass to complete the restoration of data on the second cartridge for the job(s) split across two cartridges. Parallel backup only applies to hosts and filesystem applications. It does not apply to any other application type including the catalog application.
Note:
On Demand Backup Parameters
See On Demand Backup, page 405.

To set catalog parameters
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalog-Parameters.
48
2. 3.
Set the restore parameters as specified in Catalog Parameters Window, page 48. Click on OK.
Catalog Parameters Window

Restore Parameters Maximum Number of Parallel Cartridge Restore Jobs: Specifies the maximum number of resources (cartridges, drives) that can be allocated simultaneously to a single restore job. The default value is 3. Maximum Number of Parallel Snapshot Restore Jobs: Specifies the maximum number of restore
processes that can be launched simultaneously by a single snapshot restore job. The default value is 3.
Note:
The job limitation is currently based on using all enabled drives. Resource management then determines what can be done with available resources.
On Demand Backup Maximum of On Demand Backup per day and per host: Specifies the global maximum number of On Demand Backups that authorized users throughout the network are permitted to launch within a 24-hour period on any given host. The default value is 5.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
49
Starting a Catalog
If a catalog is not running, you cannot display its contents in Time Navigator Administration Console. You must start it before performing any action on it.
Note:
The privileged user is the only user allowed to start the catalog.
Tip:
A running catalog is represented in the Time Navigator Administration Guide Catalog Information area with a green icon.
To start a catalog
1. 2. 3. 4.
If you are already connected to a catalog, switch to disconnected mode, unless the currently logged user is the privileged user of the catalog you want to start. In the catalog information area, select the catalog you want to start and choose Catalog-Start. If you are in disconnected mode, the catalog login window appears. Log in as the privileged user of the catalog you want to start. The catalog is started, its icon in the catalog information area becomes green.
50
Stopping a Catalog
It is possible to stop a catalog without stopping the Time Navigator service or daemon. Stopping a catalog allows you to edit that catalog. A stopped catalog remains so until it is manually started again using the Catalog-Start menu.
Note:
The privileged user is the only user allowed to stop the catalog.
Tip:
A stopped catalog is represented in the Catalog Information area with a black square on top of a red icon.
To stop a catalog
1. 2.
Connect to the catalog as the privileged user. In the catalog information area, select the catalog to stop and choose Catalog-Stop.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
51
Suspending a Catalog
It is possible to suspend a catalog without stopping the Time Navigator service or daemon. Suspending a catalog allows you to edit the catalog. Unlike a stopped catalog, a suspended catalog is automatically restarted if the Time Navigator service or daemon is shut down and then restarted. A suspended catalog can also be restarted manually using the Catalog-Start menu.
Note:
The privileged user is the only user allowed to suspend the catalog.
Tip:
A suspended catalog is represented in the Catalog Information area with a black square on top of a red icon.
To suspend a catalog
1. 2.
Connect to the catalog as the privileged user. In the catalog information area, select the catalog to suspend and choose Catalog-Suspend.
52
Backing up the Catalog

The backup and restore of the catalog are performed via the Time Navigator Catalog Application.
Note:
All the catalog operations performed by the Catalog application are also available in command line. See the tina_init and tina_odbsave commands, as well as the Catalog Manual Procedures appendix in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details.
Catalog Application
The Catalog Application allows you to back up the catalog contents. It is automatically created when you create a catalog. Its name is: <catalog_name>.cat
Warning:
On Mac OS X platforms, you must imperatively have a root account in order to use the Catalog application.
The Catalog application copies the catalog on the backup media and creates a small meta-catalog file: the Boot Catalog. The boot catalog contains all the necessary information to locate and restore the backed up catalog files. The boot catalog is saved on disk for ease of access, in a directory named Boot in the Data.<catalog name> directory The boot catalog files are named as follows: bootxxxx_<catalog_name>.cod Using environment variables (see Available Environment Variables, page 55 for details), it is possible to forward a copy of the boot catalog through email, and to perform a duplicate (mirror) backup of the boot catalog. The Catalog Application appears in Time Navigator Administration Console with the following icon:
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
53
The Catalog Application is attached to a server. It is catalog specific, i.e., it can back up only one catalog. However, you may have several Catalog applications located in the same catalog. In this way, you can centralize backups of different catalogs into one catalog.
Possible Configuration of the Catalog Application
The Catalog Application can be configured for the following cases:
Catalog Application A: to back up its own catalog. The Catalog Application is installed in the catalog it is backing up. Catalog Application B: to back up a catalog located on the same server. The Catalog Application is not installed in the catalog it is backing up, but in a catalog belonging to the same server. Catalog Application C: to back up a remote catalog.
The Catalog Application is not installed in the catalog it is backing up. It is installed in a catalog belonging to a different server.
54
Backing up a Single Catalog

Backing up the Catalog is based on the same principles as other Time Navigator database applications backup, such as Oracle, Sybase, Microsoft SQL Server, ... etc. A backup selection is automatically set on the root meta-directory of the file tree at the application creation. This default backup selection has the following settings:
It is associated with all the backup strategies No filter is set No time phase is excluded The data format is not compressed and not encoded
Once the application is created, you must define its environment variables and configure it for automatic backups. Configuring the Catalog Application backup consists in defining:
A backup strategy, to indicate the backup schedule. The creation of the boot catalog takes place once the backup job is complete. As a result, if a postprocessing is defined via the backup strategy, it will run prior to the creation of the boot catalog and thus it will not perform any operation on the boot catalog.
Warning:
A media pool, to indicate the backup location.
To set the Catalog Application environment variables
1. 2.
Select the Catalog Application icon in the Network Area. Choose Platform-Properties. The following window will appear:
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
55
3.
Edit the fields of this interface as described in the following section, Catalog Application Creation Parameters, page 55.
Catalog Application Creation Parameters

Host Name: Name of the host the application is connected to. Click on Host Name to select
another host.
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. The application name can be
edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.

Warning:
Each application must be given a unique name.
User Name: Name of the user who has access to the application. Password: Allows to provide a password and confirm it. Use of a password is optional.
Available Environment Variables

Warning:
If you do not remove the parenthesis, the variable will not be taken into consideration.
56
Environment Variable Name

TINA_SDB_BOOT_HISTORY TINA_SDB_CATALOG TINA_SDB_MAIL_TO TINA_SDB_MAIL_FROM TINA_SDB_HOME TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH (Unix only) TINA_SDB_MAIL_SERVER TINA_SDB_MIRROR_PATH
Default Value
7 Current catalog name No default value tina@ atempo.com
$TINA_HOME
Possible Value
any integer Catalog name Email address Email address Path Path Server name Path
Description
Maximum number of boot catalogs to keep. 0 means all files are kept. Name of the catalog to be backed up. Address to send the boot catalog to, e.g., admin@mydomain.com. Address from which the boot catalog is sent. Catalog backup Binaries installation directory. Time Navigator libraries path. Name of the SMTP mail server. Duplicate boot catalog destination directory. Note: on Windows platforms, due to permissions issues, the boot catalog cannot be located on a mapped network drive. Restores the catalog backup and launches a tina_init Catalog restore path if
TINA_SDB_RECOVER = no
No default value No default value No default value
TINA_SDB_RECOVER TINA_SDB_RESTORE_PAT H TINA_SDB_SAVE_EVENTS
Yes
$TINA_HOME /Bin
Yes, No Path Yes, No
Yes
Specifies whether the events and parameters files are backed up during catalog backup Maximum number of full backup disk copies to keep. 0 means all files are kept.
TINA_SDB_SAVE_HISTORY
any integer
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
57
Environment Variable Name

TINA_SDB_SAVE_PATH
Default Value
No default value
Possible Value
Path
Description
Full backup disk copy destination directory. Define this variable if you want a disk backup in addition to the media backup. Note: on Windows platforms, due to permissions issues, the catalog disk backup cannot be located on a mapped network drive. Service name of the catalog to back up. Set this variable to back up a catalog other than the current catalog. Set this variable to Yes if you do not want to back up indexes. By default, indexes are backed up by the Catalog application.
TINA_SDB_SERVICE_NAM E
Current Time Naviga tor service name No
Service name
TINA_SDB_SKIP_INDEX
Yes, No
Environment variables can also be edited via Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. Open the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager corresponding to the application that you need to edit variables for. Open the meta-tree and the Information directory. A list of Information icons appears displaying all the variables that are available for the application. The variables are represented in the following format:
VARIABLE_NAME = value
The color bar on the left identifies the variable status:

Color Gray Status Variable not defined by the user: - Variable not set in the environment -or- Variable set by default, without the user defining it Variable set in the environment - Optional variable whose value is incorrect -or- Variable defined by the user while not supported by Time Navigator Mandatory variable whose value is incorrect
Green Orange
Red
58
Note
For some applications, it is mandatory to edit the TINA_APP_LIB_PATH environment variable. The environment variable must be edited via the Time Navigator Administration Console when creating the application in Time Navigator. This variable is needed for Time Navigator to connect to the application.
Editing an environment variable in the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager
1.
Make sure that the user connected to the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager is granted the General Tasks and Platforms rights (Administration tab in the Access Control window). For more information on users access rights, see the Time Navigator Administration Guide. Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Properties. The Properties window appears. Add or modify the value of the variable. Click on OK to immediately update the environment. The new value is displayed in the tree.
2. 3. 4.
If you assign an incorrect value to a variable, a red or orange icon (depending on the severity) appears in the tree, followed by an error message. You can still access the list of variables and modify the incorrect value with the procedure above.
Information on environment variables
Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Help to display information about the variable. The Help window contains the variable description, the possible values and the default value, if any.
Note
It is possible to copy and paste text from the Help window to the Properties window.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
59
Configuring the Catalog Application

To configure the catalog application
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, create a media pool. See Creating a Media Pool, page 196 for details. Create a backup strategy. See Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301 for details. Choose times and frequency for the catalog application backup. There is no distinction between full and incremental backups, i.e., whether you schedule full or incremental backups, all backups will be full.
Note:
Atempo recommends backing up the catalog daily, once the last backup job has been completed.
3. 4.
Select a media pool. To trigger manual backups, choose Backup-Strategy-Full Session Now, or right click on the strategy letter below the application icon and select Full Session Now.
Viewing the Catalog Application Content

You may use Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to view the content of the catalog backup. It will show you all the boot catalog files and various other information.
To view the Catalog Application contents
1. 2.
Select the Catalog Application icon. Choose Platform-Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, Tip: You can also right click on the Catalog Application icon and select Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. The following window appears.
60
Catalog Application Contents
The Information directory contains details concerning the catalog and the environment variables. The Boot catalog directory contains the boot catalog files as well as the value of the environment variables defining the directory path and history. The Catalog save on disk directory contains the catalog backup disk copies, if any, as
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
61
well as the value of the environment variables defining the directory path and history.
Warning:
You must define the TINA_SDB_SAVE_PATH environment variable to use this feature.
The Configuration directory contains the Time Navigator Adm and Conf directories and allows to back up their contents. Since the Adm directory contains all the Time Navigator events, it could be quite voluminous. It is thus recommended to define a backup selection on the Adm directory using the same strategies as the backup selection set at the root of the application, with the Compressed option enabled. Use filters to exclude the Adm directory from the root backup (see Filter Syntax, page 347). If you do not want to back up the events, set the TINA_SDB_SAVE_EVENTS environment variable to no. For more information about the events and parameters files, see the Time Navigator Administration Guide and the Time Navigator Installation Guide.
The Index directory contains the indexes allowing to perform advanced search of backed up objects, for instance x2k_index if you are using the MS Exchange Single Object Restore feature. The Mirror boot catalog directory contains the mirror boot catalog files, if any, as well as the value of the environment variables defining the directory path and history.
Warning:
You must define the TINA_SDB_MIRROR_PATH environment variable to use this feature.
The catalog backup files.
62
Backing up Several Catalogs on the same Server

You have the option through a single catalog to back up other catalogs located on the same server. To do so, you must create as many catalog applications as there are catalogs to be backed up, and make sure you define the appropriat e environment variables.
Note:
When you back up another catalog on the same server, Time Navigator does not create a boot catalog and does not display all the directories in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
To back up other catalogs on the same server
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select the server icon in the Network Area. Choose Platform-New-Application. Select Catalog in the Application Type window. The New Application window appears. Fill in the fields and define at least the following environment variables. The value of the variables must be that of the catalog to back up:
Mandatory Variables:
TINA_SDB_CATALOG
Optional Variables:
The following variables need to be set only if their value for the catalog to back up is different from the value for the catalog performing the backup: TINA_SDB_HOME TINA_SDB_SERVICE_NAME TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH (Unix only) Repeat the operation until each catalog you want to back up has its own Catalog Application. 5. Configure each application for backups. See To configure the catalog application, page 59 for details.
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
63
Backing up a Remote Catalog

It is possible through a single catalog to back up a catalog located on a different server.
Note:
When you back up a remote catalog, Time Navigator does not create a boot catalog and does not display all the directories in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
To back up a remote catalog
1.
Select the remote catalog host icon in the Network Area.
64
Restoring the Catalog

The restore procedure will vary depending on the way you have been using the Catalog Application, i.e., to back up the current catalog, another catalog on the same server or a remote catalog. Restoring a catalog involves two steps: restoring the backed up catalog file, and recreating the catalog. The extent of the restore depends on the Catalog Application configuration.
Closing Cartridges upon Restoring the Catalog
If you have performed some platform backups between the last catalog backup and the moment the restore takes place, that data will not be restored since it is not included in the catalog backup. However that data is written on cartridges, and can be retrieved via the tina_cart command. Thus, you may want to close all cartridges to avoid overwriting that data during future backups. To do so, add the -close_cart option when you launch the tina_init command in the different cases presented below.
Note:
Using this option closes all cartridges in the catalog. You will have to reopen them manually if you want to reuse them. In addition, if all cartridges are closed, make sure you have enough spare cartridges in your library to handle the upcoming backups.
Restoring the Catalog with the Boot Catalog

These methods apply only in the case where the Catalog Application was used to back up its own catalog, i.e., Catalog A in Possible Configuration of the Catalog Application, page 53, since it is the only case where a boot catalog is created.
To restore a catalog via the boot catalog
In command line, enter the following:

tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.<catalog_name>/Boot/ bootxxxx_<catalog_name>.cod
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
65
This command will restore your catalog and recreate it.

Note:
If your library has the capacity to read barcodes, the catalog restore process automatically includes a barcode reinitialization. If your library does not support barcodes, a read label reinitialization can be included in the restore process if you use the following command:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME$/Data.<catalog_name>/Boot/ bootxxxx_<catalog_name>.cod -force_reinit
This option is only available for non barcode libraries, and it will trigger a reinitialization of all non barcode libraries associated to the catalog.
Examples
Command to restore the democat catalog:

tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod tina_init -boot \%TINA_HOME%\Data.democat\Boot\boot0023_democat.cod
Command to restore the democat catalog installed in a Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager configuration:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -catalog_name boot_democat tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -catalog_name boot_democat tina_init -boot \%TINA_HOME%\Data.democat\Boot\ boot0023_democat.cod -catalog_name boot_democat
Command to restore the democat catalog and reinitialize the nonbarcode library associated to democat:
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -force_reinit tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -force_reinit tina_init -boot \%TINA_HOME%\Data.democat\Boot\ boot0023_democat.cod -force_reinit
Command to restore the democat catalog and close all cartridges in the catalog:
66
tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -close_cart tina_init -boot $TINA_HOME/Data.democat/Boot/boot0023_democat.cod -close_cart tina_init -boot \%TINA_HOME%\Data.democat\Boot\ boot0023_democat.cod -close_cart To restore a catalog using a multiple writing media pool
If the media pool containing the primary catalog backup is not available and you want to use a multiple writing media pool, proceed as follows: 1. Perform a tina_init -file $TINA_HOME/<boot_catalog.cod> to build the boot catalog. The name of the boot catalog is boot_tina (this step creates a Data.boot_tina file that you will need to delete once the restore process is complete). Start the Time Navigator service or daemon.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console for the newly created boot_tina
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
catalog. In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Library-Reinitialization-barcode. Open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager for the boot_tina.cat Catalog application. Restore the catalog backup file you need. Stop the Time Navigator service or execute a tina_stop to shut down the daemon. Perform a tina_init -file $TINA_HOME/<restored_catalog_file> to recreate your catalog. In the file:
$TINA_HOME/Conf/catalogs $TINA_HOME/Conf/catalogs %TINA_HOME%/Conf/catalogs.txt,
remove the 4 lines concerning the boot_tina catalog, and delete the Data.boot_tina
Chapter 2
Catalog Management
67
directory.
Note:
If your library has the capacity to read barcodes, the catalog restore process automatically includes a barcode reinitialization. If your library does not support barcodes, a read label reinitialization can be included in the restore process if you use the following command:
tina_init -file $TINA_HOME/<restored_catalog_file> -force_reinit
This option is only available for non barcode libraries, and it will trigger a reinitialization of all non barcode libraries associated to the catalog.
Restoring Another Catalog

In this configuration, the value of the TINA_SDB_RECOVER environment variable will determine whether the restore will include the reconstruction of the catalog or not. Only if the variable is set to yes (default value), will the reconstruction take place.
To restore another catalog on the same server
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select the Catalog Application icon for the catalog to be restored and choose Platform-Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. or Right click on the Catalog Application icon for the catalog to be restored and select Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
In Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, open the file tree until you see the file representing your catalog. Right click on your catalog file and select Information. Select the version you want to restore and click on Synchronize. If TINA_SDB_RECOVER is set to Yes, Time Navigator restores your catalog file and recreates your catalog. No further operation is required. If TINA_SDB_RECOVER is set to No, Time Navigator only restores the catalog file. Once the restore is complete, enter the following, in command line:
tina_init -file <restored_catalog_path>
where the restored_catalog_path corresponds to the value of the TINA_SDB_RESTORE_PATH variable followed by <catalog_name>.cod, for
68
instance: /home/tina/Bin/newdoc.cod.
Note:
If you are using a key that does not include the catalog name, you must add a name for the restored catalog as a parameter in the tina_init command:
tina_init -file <restored_catalog_path> -catalog_name <restored_catalog_name>
See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for details concerning restore procedures.
Restoring the Catalog Configuration

When you restore the Adm or Conf configuration directory Time Navigator creates an Adm.restored and a Conf.restored file. The catalog configuration restore procedure is similar to that of any file system restore. See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for details concerning restore procedures.
69
C H A P T E R
Platform Management
In this section you will find the necessary procedures to perform the following platform related tasks:
Creating a Platform, page 74 Setting Platform Preferences, page 86 Editing Platforms, page 106 Deleting Platforms, page 108 Managing Hosts Detected by Time Navigator, page 110 List Administration of Platforms, page 111
70
About Platforms
The Platforms object represents the hosts and applications backed up by Time Navigator. Host and application backup configuration and management are centralized in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Hosts
Hosts are Time Navigator client machines; they represent the machines being backed up. Authorized users can perform archiving on hosts. The following operating systems are currently supported for hosts:
Windows Unix Mac OS X NetWare VMS
In addition to backing up, archiving and restoring the above client file systems, Time Navigator provides the following features: Time Navigator Disaster Recovery for Windows (Powered by WinPE) Time Navigator for Cluster See the compatibility guide on the Atempo site, www.atempo.com for details.
Applications
Applications include databases and application software. The applications currently supported by Time Navigator are:
Time Navigator for DB2 Filesystem The Filesystem application allows you to create a clone of the host the application is attached to. This is very useful for creating additional backup strategies on the host and for organizing data in a thematic way (e.g. according to applications, departments, etc.). See Filesystem Application, page 637 for details. Time Navigator for Informix List The List application allows you to create and organize objects logically regardless
Chapter 3
Platform Management
71
of their actual physical location. See List Application, page 589 for details.
Time Navigator for Lotus Domino Time Navigator for MS-Exchange Time Navigator for MS-SharePoint Portal Server Time Navigator for MS-SQL Server Time Navigator for NDMP NetDisk (the Net Disk application allows you to back up and restore Windows 2000/2003 mapped network drives). See Mapped Network Drives, page 627 for details. Time Navigator for Oracle Time Navigator for Sybase System State
For information on these applications, see the corresponding Time Navigator documentation. The list of supported applications is subject to frequent changes. Please consult the Time Navigator Compatibility Guide on the Atempo Web site: www.atempo.com for up-todate information. For information on platform representation in Time Navigator Administration Console, see Platform Representation, page 21.
Firewalls and Backup Masters

A Master is a machine designated to take on the backup process of another host. A master is useful when the host does not have the tina_backup binaries installed, or when the host cannot connect to the server, as for instance when the host is behind a firewall. The master may be either the server itself, or another client machine. The Time Navigator service or daemon must be running on the machine declared as the backup master. The following diagrams show the differences in the backup process with or without a backup master. When a master is used, the tina_backup process runs on the master rather than on the host, and the host does not have to initiate a connection toward the server as is not allowed when the host is protected by a firewall.
72
Backing up without a master
Backing up with a master
To assign a master to a host, see Creating a Platform, page 74.
Broken Connection during Backup

If the host is behind a firewall, an inactive connection between the server and the agent may be broken by the firewall after few minutes, usually when a large file is being backed up, and this may cause backups to fail. In that situation, it is recommended to modify the TCP idle timeout at the operating system level to keep the connection alive much longer. For more information on how to modify this TCP parameter on the different operating systems, see Appendix 3: TCP Parameter Modification, page 651.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
73
Mobile Platforms
For machines such as laptop computers that are subject to being disconnected from the network regularly, Time Navigator includes a Mobile Platform feature, applying to both host and application. This preventsthe server from trying to connect to an absent platform, and ensures that if the platform misses a scheduled backup, the backup will run as soon as it is reconnected to the network. To configure a mobile platform, see Creating a Platform, page 74, and Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306.
74
Creating a Platform
Creating a Host
Upon installing Time Navigator, the setup automatically creates a host in Time Navigator Administration Console for each client machine declared in the catalog. In addition, you can:
Manually create a host at any point in time. Automatically create a newly installed host detected by Time Navigator. The number of hosts you can create is limited by the terms of your license.
Note:
To manually create a host
1. 2.
Choose Platform-New-Host. The New Host window appears. Fill in all the Parameters as described in:
Host Window - General Tab, page 75. Host Window - Protocol Tab, page 76 Host Window - Advanced Tab, page 77 Host Window - SAN Connection Tab, page 78
3. 4.
Click on OK to validate the operation. Enable the host. See Enabling Platforms, page 84.
The new host is displayed in the Network area and its icon in the Icons area. It constitutes a new group. For more information on host representation in Time Navigator Administration Console, see Platform Representation, page 21.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
75
Host Window - General Tab
Type: Type of the host to be selected from the drop-down list. Host Name: Name of the new host. You must respect the case of the hostname. The name
must be the hostname known by the network and not an alias.

Note:
If you want to use aliases, you must declare the aliases in the hosts file. See Time Navigator Configuration Files in the Time Navigator Installation Guide for details.
Software Version: Time Navigator version installed on the host. When creating a host, the
version is "Unknown". The version is only available when editing the host. See Editing Hosts, page 106 for more information.
Comment: Allows you to enter a comment concerning the host you are creating.
An error message is displayed if the host does not exist on the network or if it has already been created.
76
Host Window - Protocol Tab
The protocol corresponding to the selected host type is automatically checked. For most hosts, the protocol will be TiNa 4.1.0. For a Network Appliance host, the protocol will be NDMP and you will be asked to specify a User name and Password.
Note:
Some hosts support both TiNa and NDMP protocols.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
77
Host Window - Advanced Tab
Backup Master: Select this option if you want to specify a backup master for the created
host. The backup master can either be the Time Navigator server or another host on the network. If a backup master if selected, the binary used during backup will be running on the master rather than on the host. This option can be very useful if a firewall is present or if no binaries can be installed on the host. Select the Server option or select the Host option, and enter the name of the host in the Master Name textbox. An error message is displayed if the selected host cannot be a backup master.
Note:
The Backup Master option will automatically be selected if the host type you are creating requires a backup master. By default, the server will be the backup master.
For more information on the backup master, see Firewalls and Backup Masters, page 71.
Storage Node: Check this box if the created host is a storage node.
For more information on Time Navigator in a SAN environment, see Time Navigator in SAN Environments, page 419.
78
Do Not Report Host Unavailability: If your host is a mobile platform, i.e., a laptop computer
or a machine frequently disconnected from the network, check this box, to prevent Time Navigator from issuing an alarm each time the host is not found on the network. To configure mobile hosts, see also Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306.
Secured Agent: Check this box if you want to encrypt and secure Time Navigator network connections between this host and other Time Navigator agents.
Note:
To secure network connections, you must have created at least one certificate. See the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for more information.
Host Window - SAN Connection Tab
Fill in the fields of the SAN Connection tab if the host you are creating is part of a SAN environment and if you have already created at least one shared drive in Time Navigator.
Add: Allows you to associate the host to drives in a SAN environment. Remove: Allows you to disconnect the host from the drives in a SAN environment. Device Descriptor: Allows you to enter the device descriptor for the host.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
79
For instance: docmac_DocLib For instance: /dev/nst0 It represents the host SCSI address and must be entered in a cxbytzla format.
Enable connection: Allows you to connect the host to a drive in a SAN environment. Disable connection: Allows you to disconnect the host from a drive in a SAN environment. NDMP : This area provides information on the connected shared drives provided that the drives communicate through NDMP: the drive Network Name, the User, its Password and the NDMP Version.
For more information on Time Navigator in a SAN environment, see Time Navigator in SAN Environments, page 419.
Creating a New Host Detected by Time Navigator

Time Navigator Server regularly polls the network in order to detect new machines hosting Time Navigator. Such hosts consist of:
Hosts on which a Time Navigator service or daemon is running and that are unknown to the catalog. Hosts that are known to the catalog but whose operating system has changed.
To create a host detected by Time Navigator
1.
Check whether a host icon appears in the status bar of Time Navigator Administration Console. The number next to the icon indicates the number of hosts detected on the network. In the example below, 2 new hosts have been detected.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Hosts from list. The New Discovered Hosts window appears.
80
3. 4.
In the host list, select the hosts that you want to declare in the catalog and create in the Network area. Click on New. The Host Creation Progress window appears and indicates if the creation was successful. Click on Close. The newly created host appears in the Network area.
5.
If you want to disable the automatic host detection feature, you can set the tunable "Disable Host Automatic Detection" (disable_host_auto_discovery). If you want Time Navigator to systematically create detected hosts in the catalog without notifying the user via the graphical interface, you can set the tunable "Automatic Creation for Detected Hosts" (create_auto_discovered_host). See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
New Discovered Hosts Window

Name: Name of the new host detected by Time Navigator Type: Operating system of the host Version: Time Navigator version detected on the host Status: The status is New if the host has been detected but not processed. The status is Ignored if you chose to discard this host from the current Time Navigator catalog. DNS Name: Network name of the host.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
81
Marks the selected host(s) as Ignored. When marked as ignored, hosts disappear from the list. If you want to display them again, check the Display hosts with "Ignored" status box.
Note:
Ignored host can be created in the catalog at a later stage if needed.
Delete the selected host(s) from the new host list.
Note:
Deleted hosts disappear from the host list but they will reappear as new each time the machines are rebooted.
Display host with "ignored" status: Allows to display in the list the hosts that were marked as Ignored. New: Automatically creates the selected host(s) in the catalog.
Creating Applications
Just as you had to create a host per machine to be backed up, you must create an application for each application to be backed up. The number of applications you can create is limited by the terms of your license.
To create an application
1. 2.
In the Network area, select the host where the application is installed. Choose Platform-New-Application. The list of the supported applications is displayed.
82
3.
Select an application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application Window is displayed. The fields appearing in this window varies according to the application you are creating. The following screen is for an Oracle application.
Note:
Chapter 3
Platform Management
83
4.
Enter the name of the new application in the Application Name textbox. The application name is the name given to the application backup folder. The application name can be edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.
Warning:
Each application must be given a different name.
5.
Enter the application owner information in the Owner textbox. Click on Password to enter a password and confirm it. The owner is usually the operating system user who installed the application software.
6.
Enter the access user information in the Access User textbox. Click on Access Password to enter a password and confirm it. Enter the Environment Variables required for the application you are creating. Click on OK to validate the operation. Enable the application. See Enabling Platforms, page 84.
7. 8. 9.
For application specific information, see the guide corresponding to the application you are creating, such as Time Navigator for Oracle,
84
Enabling Platforms
When first created, a platform (host or application) is disabled. A platform must be enabled to support a backup.
To enable a platform
1. 2.
Choose Platform-Use-Enable-Host/Application. The list of disabled hosts/applications appears. Select the platform to enable in the list or fill in the Search field to filter platforms according to their names. You can use, among others, the following special characters:
3.
Click on OK to validate.
Tip:
If you have only one platform to enable, you can also right click on the platform icon and choose Enable. If you have a lot of platforms to enable, it is recommended to use the Platform-Use-Enable-Host/Application menu because it allows for platform multiple selection.
The cross with an ocher background disappears from the host icon in the Network area. The host icon is displayed with a green background in the Icons area.
Disabling Platforms
The disabled status indicates that no backup occurs on the platform. You can temporarily disable a platform for the following reasons:
Maintenance. If you are disabling a host, it is recommended also to disable the drives connected to it (see Changing the Mode of the Drive, page 182). To avoid removing a platform from a group if you do not wish to back it up for a
Chapter 3
Platform Management
85
short period of time, etc.

Note:
Devices connected to a disabled host, can still be used, provided that the
tina_daemon process is active on the host.
To disable a platform
1. 2.
Choose Platform-Use-Disable-Host/Application. The list of enabled hosts/applications appears. Select the platform to disable in the list or fill in the Search field to filter platforms according to their names. You can use, among others, the following special characters:
3.
Click on OK to validate.
Tip:
If you have only one platform to disable, you can also right click on the platform icon and choose Disable. If you have a lot of platforms to disable, it is recommended to use the Platform-Use-Disable-Host/Application menu because it allows for platform multiple selection.
A cross with an ocher background is displayed on the host icon in the Network area. The platform icon is displayed with an ocher background in the Icons area.
86
Setting Platform Preferences

Platform Preferences can be defined and edited via the Preferences Tool. They are divided into the following categories:
Tunables, page 87 Event Notification, page 90 Domain Filters, page 96 License, page 99 Services, page 100 Catalog, page 101 Help/Tutorial, page 101 Web Interfaces, page 102 Databases, page 103 Advanced Indexing, page 104 VMware, page 105
Starting the Preferences Tool

The Preferences Tool can be started on any machine on the network if you are using Time Navigator Administration Console, otherwise it is started on the local machine if you are using the command mode for Unix or the Start menu for Windows.
To start the Preferences Tool
1. 2.
Select the platform for which you want to set preferences in Time Navigator Administration Console. Choose Platform-Set Preferences. The Preferences tool appears.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
87
Tip:
You can also use the tina_pref command on Unix and the Start-All Programs-Time Navigator-Utilities-Preferences menu on Windows.
Tunables
Tunables are special parameters that modify Time Navigator behavior. They may be used to tune the application to fit specific needs. The Preferences tools allows you to:
Activate or disable a tunable Set a tunable value Choose the catalogs for which a tunable applies
88
Choose the binaries for which a tunable applies For an exhaustive list of all the tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
Note:
When you set tunables via the Preferences tools, settings are recorded in the following file:
%TINA_HOME%\Conf\parameters.txt $TINA_HOME/Conf/parameters
There are two categories of tunables:
Category I: Basic tunables that can be used without help from Customer Services. Category II: Advanced tunables that must be used with help from Customer Services. Use them cautiously as an inconsiderate use may damage your configuration and prevent Time Navigator from efficiently protecting your data. The Time Navigator tunables are dynamic. No restarting of the Time Navigator service is required. However, if you modify a tunable impacting a graphical application, the application must be closed an opened again for the new tunable to be taken into account. See the Time Navigator Tunables Guide for details.
Note:
To set a tunable
1. 2.
In the Preferences tool select Configuration-Tunables. The List of current tunables appear. Click on New. The Tunable Selection window appears. It displays the list of all the tunables available. To display the list of advanced tunables, check the Show Advanced Tunables box. When you select a tunable, its description appears in the right pane. Open a category and select a tunable in the list and click on OK. A tunable information window appears. In the Value tab, enter the tunable value in the New Value field, and click on OK. The default value is also displayed. Click on Reset to return to the default value.
3. 4.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
89
5.
In the Executables tab, check Choose Executables if you want to limit the use of the tunable to specific binaries or if you want to assign different values to this tunable for different executables. Select the executables you want in the list.
Note:
By default, if you do not select any executable, the tunable applies to all executables.
If the executable you want to select does not appear in the list, click on New
Executable and enter the name of the executable.
6.
In the Catalogs tab, check Choose Catalogs if you want to limit the use of the tunable to specific catalogs or if you want to assign different values to this tunable for different catalogs. Select the catalogs you want in the list.
Note:
By default, if you do not select any catalog, the tunable applies to all catalogs.
If the catalog you want to select does not appear in the list, click on New Catalog and enter the name of the catalog. 7. 8. The new tunable appears in the Current Tunable List with its value, the binaries and the catalogs chosen. Repeat this operation for all the tunables you want to define on the platform. If you want to assign different values to the same tunables according to the binaries or catalogs it applies to, you need to define it several times, for each value. Click on Apply if you want to apply your choices and keep the Preferences window open, otherwise click on OK.
9.
To modify the value of a tunable
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Preferences tool, select Configuration-Parameters. The List of current tunables appears. Select the tunable that you need to modify and click on Properties . The Tunable information window appears. Modify the Value, Executables and Catalogs tabs as needed. See To set a tunable, page 88 for details. Click on OK to apply changes and close the Preferences window.
90
To remove a tunable
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Preferences tool, select Configuration-Parameters. The List of current tunables appears. Select the tunable that you want to remove and click on Remove. Confirm your choice. The tunable is removed from the tunable list. Click on OK to apply changes and close the Preferences window.
Event Notification
Time Navigator Event Viewer consists of all the logs generated by Time Navigator. They are used to troubleshoot incidents that occur with any Time Navigator function or process. They can be consulted either through Time Navigator Event Viewer or in the file:
%TINA_HOME%\Adm\event.txt $TINA_HOME/Adm/event
Events can be redirected towards external elements. You can specify the catalog, the type of events you want to redirect, as well as the kind of information to be displayed for each event. Using this Event Notification editor fills in the file:
%TINA_HOME%\Conf\logs.xml $TINA_HOME/Conf/logs.xml DTD and XSL are provided with the logs.xml file in the Conf directory:
The logs.dtd file can be used to check for the validity of the xml file. The logs.xsl stylesheet can be used to view the contents of the logs.xml file via a browser without using Time Navigator. It is highly recommended to use the Preferences tool to notify events. The use of the Conf/logs.xml to notify events is not supported.
Warning:
Several event notifications can be defined on the same Time Navigator Server.
To create an event notification:
1.
Select Event Notification in the tree structure of the Preferences tool. The list of current notifications appears. It contains the names of event notifications that are already set on your Time Navigator Server.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
91
2.
Click on New to define a notification. The Notification Parameters window appears. Set the parameters in the tabs described below: The Destination, Name and Format tabs are mandatory. Click on OK to validate the operation.
3.
Destination Tab Mode: Specifies the output mode to be used. You must choose one of the following:
System Logs sends the output to the internal log system under Unix (syslog), VMS (central operator) and Windows (Event Viewer).
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) sends the output to SNMP on Unix
and Windows.
SNMP Manager: specifies the SNMP manager machine which must have a daemon
receiving SNMP traps. This field is mandatory. Community: specifies the listening groups. By default, listening groups are public. This field is optional. Trap Port: specifies the listening port of the SNMP daemon which receives traps. By default, the listening port is snmp-trap (value equal to 162) and must be present in the services file. This field is optional.
File sends the output to a file. File Path: specifies the destination file path. Click on Browse (...) to choose the destination file. Standard Error Output sends the output to the standard error output of a command entered on Unix and VMS. Standard Output sends the output to the standard output of a command entered on
Unix and VMS.
Command sends the output to a command line or a script on Unix and Windows. Command Path: specifies the absolute path of an executable or a script file. Click on Browse (...) to provide the absolute path of an executable or a script file.
Note:
If several Time Navigator environments are present on the machine, you must specify the following command line options to be able to use the "command" output along with Time Navigator commands:
-tina <environment_name> and -tina_service_name <service_name>.
Console sends the output to the console on Unix (/dev/console), Windows (Information window) and VMS (central operator). On Windows, the information window is displayed on the screen as long as the
92
Time Navigator service is running or as long as you do not click on the OK button to close it.
Email is used to send event information by electronic email.
For instance, you can send an email to the administrator each time a critical or major alarm is issued. SMTP Server: specifies the name of the SMTP server. From: specifies the name of the email sender. To: specifies the name of the recipient. Cc: specifies the names of other recipients if any. Subject: specifies the subject of the email.
Name Tab Name: Name of the event notification that you are creating. By defalut, the name is NOTIFICATION_<number>. Comment: Description identifying the event notification. Severity Tab Notified Severity Levels: Types of severity levels that you want to notify. Click on the column left of the Severity list to select the severity levels to notify.
Information: Message of general interest. Accounting: Accounting concerning backups and archiving. Debug: Diagnosis Help. Warning: Warning with no important consequences. Fatal: Fatal error causing the program exit. Error: Serious error that might cause the program to exit. Minor Alarm: Warning with no immediate consequences on processes. Major Alarm: Warning with important consequences on one or several processes. Critical Alarm: Warning with serious consequences on all processes.
Format Tab Event File Format: specifies the private format of the event file. It enables you to create event
sub-files based on filters. The notified events can be viewed via Time Navigator Event Viewer.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
93
Customized Format: specifies the types of information that you want to notify. Click on the column left of the Format list to select the information types to notify.
Alarm Object Name: The name of the object with which the alarm is associated. If the object is a library named takata_vls, the alarm object name will be takata_vls. Only
available when an alarm is notified.
Alarm Object Type: The type of the object with which the alarm is associated (drive,
library, host, application, job, etc.). Only available when an alarm is notified.
Process ID: The identification number of the process which has generated the event. Job ID: The identification number of the job associated with the event. Date: The date when the event occurred (emission date). Logging Date: The date the event is recorded in the server event file. Severity Short Name: The event severity level abbreviated with letters.
I for Info A for Acct D for Debug W for Warning E for Error F for Fatal m for minor alarm M for Major alarm C for Critical alarm
Severity Long Name: The event severity level. For having the list of severity levels,
see Severity Tab, page 92.
Catalog: The catalog associated with the event. User Name: The name of the user associated with the event. Host Name: The name of thehost associated with the event. Server Name: The name of the catalog server associated with the event. Program: The program associated with the event. Function: The name of the function that has generated the event (debug information). Number: The internal identifier of the function (debug information). Text: The message of the event.
Class Tab Notified Classes: Types of classes that you want to notify. Click on the column left of the Class list to select the class types to notify.
Standard: Standard events. No specific class is defined for these events.
94
Non Restored Object: Events related to an object restore error. I/O Error: Events related to an input/output error on a drive or on a backup media. Fuzzy Object: Events related to a fuzzy object, for instance an object modified while
backup was in progress or an incompletely backed up object.
Secure Event: Events related to security and compliance operations. See the
Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for information on security and compliance.
Non Uncompressed Object: Events related to objects that are restored but not
uncompressed.
End User: Events easily understandable designed to help the user in case of error during Time Navigator execution.
Note:
The number of logs concerning fuzzy object encountered when a job is being performed has been limited by default to 20, to avoid slowing down performances. You can use the accounting_max_fuzzy_objects tunable to specify how many fuzzy object logs should be kept in the event file (see the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.)
Filter Tab
Filters can be used to specify selection criteria when notifying event information. Enter the name(s) of the objects you want to filter in the corresponding fields. These fields accept lists. If you want to specify several names inside the same field, they must be separated by a blank. They also accept wildcards (* to specify any character from 0 to n and ? to specify any single character). If no filter is mentioned, all events are notified.
Catalog: The name of one or several catalogs. Host Name: The name of one or several event sending machines (machines known under this name in the catalog). User Name: The name of one or several users. Program: The name of one or several binaries (ex: tina_archive).
Chapter 3
Platform Management
95
Alarm Filter Tab
The Alarm Filter tab is only displayed when an alarm severity level is selected in the Severity tab (minor, major or critical alarms). Alarm filters can be used to specify selection criteria when notifying alarm information. Enter the name(s) of the objects you want to filter in the corresponding fields. These fields accept lists. If you want to specify several names inside the same field, they must be separated by a blank. They also accept wildcards (* to specify any character from 0 to n and ? to specify any single character). If no filter is mentioned, all alarms are notified.
Drive: The name of one or several drives. Application: The name of one or several applications. Library: The name of one or several libraries. Alarm ID: One or several alarm identification numbers (ex: 30020).
To modify an event notification:
1.
Select Event Notification in the tree structure of the Preferences tool. The list of current notifications appears.It contains the names of event notifications that are already set on your Time Navigator Server. Select a notification in the list and click on Properties. The Notification Parameters window appears.
Note:
2.
If you have previously configured an event notification by manually editing the logs text file, a default name is given to the event notification. You can rename it and add a description so that it can be more easily identified.
3. 4.
Modify the parameters as needed. See Event Notification, page 90. Click on OK to validate the operation.
To disable an event notification:
1.
Select Event Notification in the tree structure of the Preferences tool. The list of current notifications appears.It contains the names of event notifications that are already set on your Time Navigator Server.
96
2. 3. 4. 5.
Select a notification in the list and click on Properties. Select the Name tab. Check Disable. Click on OK to validate the operation. The selected event notification is no longer active.
To delete an event notification:
1.
Select Event Notification in the tree structure of the Preferences tool. The list of current notifications appears.It contains the names of event notifications that are already set on your Time Navigator Server. Select a notification in the list and click on Delete. Click on OK to validate the operation. The selected event notification is removed from the list.
2. 3.
Domain Filters
Note:
Domain filtering concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
Domain filtering allows the catalogs administrator to define which administration objects can be accessed by which machines or users declared in the domain. The objects are:
Hosts Media pools Users Applications
This filtering feature is enabled by the tunable Time Navigator Administration Domain Filter (domain_filter). The tunable can have the following values:
host
This indicates that access control to the domain is at the host level. A list of host is defined. Only the hosts defined in this list can access the domain and view the objects belonging to this domain. In addition these hosts are the only hosts appearing in the domain.
host_user
This indicates that a second level of access control is added, according to the user.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
97
A list of host and a list of users are defined. Access can only be granted for users belonging to the list and connecting from a host defined in the list. In addition the hosts and users defined in the lists are the only ones appearing in the domain.
Note:
When you define a new domain in the Preferences, the tunable is automatically set to the value host. To set it to the value host_user, you must edit the tunable value as described in Tunables, page 87.
See also the Time Navigator Tunables guide for more information on tunables. A domain filter consists of the following parameters:
In a domain, the parameter ... Privileged defines ... The IP addresses of the machines allowed to view all the objects of the catalog for all domains. These machines cannot be viewed in the domains, unless they are defined in it as hosts.
The IP addresses of the domains administration
Administration
consoles. These machines can view all the catalog objects in the domain they are administering. They cannot be be viewed in the domains, unless they are defined in it as hosts. Hosts Pools Users The hosts allowed to access the domain and the hosts that belong to the domain. The media pools belonging to the domain. The users belonging to the domain, and, if the user access control is activated (i.e., the tunable domain_filter is set to host_user) the list of users allowed to access the domain. The applications belonging to the domain.
Application Important notes and exceptions
1. 2.
When the filtering is enabled, only the machines declared in the file can connect to the catalog. This means that an undefined host cannot be backed up. The following objects are always accessible from every client of a catalog:
The Time Navigator Server
98
The drives and libraries, if the host to which they are connected is accessible The user groups The spare and lost+found media pools
3. 4.
The Time Navigator Server has a privileged access to all the objects in all its catalogs. When the filtering is enabled, the server host file must contain the information required to correctly define all the clients which can connect to the catalogs, especially concerning the machines DNS extensions. The server must be able to link the network name sent by the client and the host name defined in the domain filter. When the filtering is enabled and you want to create a new object in the catalog, the domain must be updated prior to the object creation. When filtering is enabled, it may happen that connection is refused to an agent, and a message "Access denied" appears in the Event Logs. The Event Logs will also show the following details concerning the agent or user that was refused access:
5. 6.
The Hostname (as it apears in the catalog) The Network Alias (name of the machine as it is known on the network or in the file etc/hosts) The IP Address The Name of the User that attempted to connect to the catalog
From this information, it should be possible to decide whether you wish to authorize this agent to connect.
To configure a domain filter
1. 2.
In the Preferences tool, select Configuration-Domain Filters and click on New. The Domain Parameters Window appears. In the Name tab, provide:
A name for the filter, by default, the name is DomainN. A comment to describe the filter. The comment is optional. The name of the catalog where the domain filter is defined.
Click on Connection to get the hosts, pools, users and applications information appear in the corresponding tabs.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
99
3.
In the Priviledged tab, click on New and provide the IP address of the machines allowed to access all the objects in the catalog. Click on OK. Repeat this operation for all concerned hosts.
Note:
These machines cannot be viewed from the domains, unless they are defined in it as hosts.
4. 5.
In the Administration tab, click on New and provide the IP address of the domain administration consoles. Click on OK. In the Host tab, click on New and select the host allowed to access the domain and to be included in the domain, from the list. Click on OK. In the Pools tab, click on New and select the media pools to be included in the domain from the list. Click on OK. In the Users tab, click on New and select the users to be included in the domain from the list. Click on OK.
Note:
6. 7.
In addition, if you want to restrict access to the domain to the users you define in this tab, you must set the value of the tunable domain_filters to host_user. See Tunables, page 87 for details.
8. 9.
In the Applications tab, click on New and select the applications to be included in the domain, from the list. Click on OK. Click on OK to validate your choice and close the window.
License
Note:
Modifying the license concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
The License preferences shows you the license mode you are currently using as well as the license contents, and allows you to modify it. If you are using an evaluation license, you can switch to using a local or remote license server. If you are already using a license server, either local or remote, you cannot switch to using an evaluation license.
100
To modify Time Navigator license mode
1. 2.
In the Preferences tool, select Environment-License. To switch to using a local license server:
Check the option Use Local License Server. Provide the path of the atempo.lic license file that you received by mail from Atempo administrative services. The Service button allows you to stop and start the Atempo License Manager service. Check the option Use Remote License Server. Provide the name of the license server in the License Server Name field. This is the name of the machine where the Atempo License Manager is installed.
3.
To switch to using a remote license server:
4.
Note:
Click on OK to validate your choices and close the window. See Time Navigator Installation Guide for details.
Services
Note:
Modifying services concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
You can modify the TCP and UDP port numbers that you defined when installing Time Navigator.
To modify Time Navigator Service parameters
1. 2. 3.
In the Preferences tool, select Environment-Services. Modify the port numbers as needed. On Unix machines, click on Search from Service Name to automatically select the TCP and UDP port associated to the specified service in the etc\services file of the local machine or NIS.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
101
4.
Note:
Click on OK to validate your choice. See Time Navigator Installation Guide for details.
Catalog
Note :
Catalog configuration concerns Time Navigator agents only, not servers.
Catalog configuration allows to modify the list of catalogs that can back up the agent.
To modify the catalog list
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Preferences tool, select Environment--Catalog. Click on the catalogs to add them to the list of catalogs that will back up the agent. To update the list of detected catalogs, click on Refresh. If the catalog you want to add does not appear in the list, click on Add a Catalog and provide the following information:
Name of the server where the catalog to add is located Name of the catalog to add TCP and UDP ports to use to communicate with the server
5.
Click on OK to validate your choice.
Help/Tutorial
Note :
The Help/Tutorial preference concerns Time Navigator Unix servers only, not Windows servers, and not agents.
For theses platforms, you can choose the browser to use to view the online help and tutorials. In addition, if the setup program is unable to detect a default browser, you must configure it with the Preferences tool.
To configure the browser to use to view the online help and tutorial
1.
In the Preferences tool, select Interfaces-Help/Tutorial.
102
2. 3. 4.
Check the Online Help option. Enter the path of the browser you want to use or click on the Browse button to select it. Click on OK to validate your choice.
Web Interfaces
Note:
Web interfaces configuration concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
The Web interfaces preferences allow you to specify whether you want to use Atempo Web Server or another Web server to access Time Navigator Web Restore and Time Navigator Web Supervision. By default, an Apache server is installed along with Time Navigator, however this server is not in service until you configure it.
To configure Atempo Web Server
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Preferences tool, select Interfaces-Web Interfaces. Check the option Activate Web Interfaces. Check the option Use Atempo Web Server. Click on OK to validate your choice.
To use a Web Server other than Atempo Web Server
1. 2. 3.
In the Preferences tool, select Interfaces-Web Interfaces. Check the option Web. Check the option Use An Existing Web Server.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
103
4.
Define the parameters as described in the following table.

Field
Perl Binary Absolute Path
Description
Status
Absolute path of the PERL executable. Must Mandatory contain the name of the executable. This path is copied in the first line of the web interfaces perl scripts. Absolute path of the root of the data of the http Mandatory server where the images of the web interfaces and the online help will be copied. Absolute path of the directory containing the CGI Mandatory scripts on the http server where the web interfaces perl scripts will be copied. Name of the SMTP Server that will be used by Optional the restore interface to send mails. Time Navigator Web Restore only. A mail can be sent for instance, to inform the user that the restore is complete and provide an URL where the user can view restore information.
HTTP Server Data Root Directory
CGI Script Directory
SMTP Server Name
5.
Note:
Click on OK to validate your choice. See the Time Navigator Web Interfaces guide for details.
Databases
The databases parameters allow you to set the installation directory (Windows) or the name of the administrator (Unix) for the following Time Navigator applications:
Sybase DB2 V7 DB2 V8
To configure Time Navigator databases
1. 2. 3.
In the Preferences tool, select Components-Databases. Check the application for which you want to set the parameters. Enter the path of the installation directory or click on Browse to select it (Windows), or enter the name of the administrator (Unix).
104
4.
Note:
Click on OK to validate your choice. See the Time Navigator for Sybase or Time Navigator for DB2 guides for details.
Advanced Indexing
Note:
SER configuration concerns Time Navigator servers only, not agents.
Use the SER parameter to configure the Single Email Restore feature of the Time Navigator for MS-Exchange application. This parameter lets you define the Path of the index database.
To configure Time Navigator for MS-Exchange Single Email Restore feature
1. 2. 3. 4.
Note:
In the Preferences tool, select Components-Email. Check Advanced Indexing Database. Enter the path where you want the indexing database to be located or click on Browse to select a directory. Click on OK to validate your choice. See the Time Navigator for MS-Exchange guide for details.
NDMP
Note:
VMware configuration concerns Time Navigator Windows servers and agents only, not Unix platforms.
This parameter allows you to configure the NDMP Data Center.

To configure NDMP Data Center
1. 2.
In the Preferences tool, select Components-NDMP. Check the option Use NDMP Data Center.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
105
3. 4.
Note:
The Configure button allows you to Click on OK to validate your choice. See the Time Navigator for NDMP guide for details.
VMware
Note:
VMware configuration concerns Time Navigator Windows servers and agents only, not Unix platforms.
This parameter allows you to configure WMware for VCB.

To configure Time Navigator VMware for VCB Application
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Note:
In the Preferences tool, select Components-VMware. Check the VMware Configuration option. Enter the Name you want to give to the Configuration File. The extension .conf is automatically appended to this name. Enter the Name of the Virtual Center (the machine in your VMware network that handles administrative tasks). Enter the Name of the User of the Virtual Center, and his/her Password. Click on OK to validate your choice. See the Time Navigator for VMware with VCB guide for details.
106
Editing Platforms
Editing Hosts
Editing a host enables you to modify the following parameters:
The Type. The Protocol. The Advanced parameters. The SAN parameters.
Editing a host also enables you to view the Time Navigator Software version that is installed on the selected host.
To edit a host
1. 2. 3.
Select the host to edit in the Network area. Choose Platform-Properties. The Host Properties window is displayed. Modify the host settings.
Note:
The Backup Master option cannot be deselected if the host type requires it.
4.
Click on OK to validate the operation.
Editing Applications
Editing an application enables you to modify the following parameters:
The Application Name. The Username. The Password. The Environment Variables.
The hostname, to which the application is linked cannot be modified.

To edit an application
1.
Select the application to edit in the Network area.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
107
2. 3. 4.
Choose Platform-Properties. The Application Properties window is displayed. Modify the application settings: the application name, the username, the password and the environment variables. See Creating Applications, page 81 for details. Click on OK to validate the operation.
Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host connections

This feature allows you to temporarily disconnect host from a drive without affecting other drive-host connections (especially in SAN systems, where a drive is accessed by several storage nodes). See Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host Connections, page 430, for details.
108
Deleting Platforms
Deleting a platform removes the platform from the network backed up by Time Navigator. The backup strategies and selections associated with the platform are lost and all the backed up files are removed from the catalog. When deleting a host, you can create an archive folder carrying the name of the deleted host (i.e., host.hostname). All backed up files are thus kept in the folder and can be recovered from any other host. The folder belongs to the root or Administrator user. When you delete a host, the devices connected to this host are also deleted.
Note:
The archive folder host.hostname uses media associated with the host strategies. If the media have a recycling policy, the archive folder will be purged progressively.
For more information on restoring archived files, see the Time Navigator Archiving Server guide.
To delete a platform
1. 2.
Select the platform to delete in the Network area. Choose Platform-Delete. The Delete Host/Application window appears. It contains all the characteristics of the selected host/application.
Note:
You cannot delete the server.
3.
Click on Delete to delete the platform. If it is a host, a dialog box asks you if you want to create an archive folder in order to keep all backups or not. Indicate your choice by clicking on the corresponding button. The platform is removed from the Network area. You can no longer open
Chapter 3
Platform Management
109
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager on this platform.

Note:
Deleting a platform may take a while if it contains a large number of files.
Note:
It is recommended to wait until the platform backups are finished, and to delete its backup strategies before removing the platform from the network.
110
Managing Hosts Detected by Time Navigator

You can manage the list of detected hosts and decide what action is to be taken on each host. Apart from creating the hosts in the Network area, you can:
Ignore the newly detected hosts so that they no longer appear as new. For example, if the host is already known to another Time Navigator catalog and you do not want to declare it in the working catalog. Delete the newly detected hosts from the list. Deleted hosts will reappear as new whenever the machine is rebooted.
To discard detected hosts
1.
Check whether a host icon appears in the status bar of Time Navigator Administration Console. The number next to the icon indicates the number of hosts detected on the network. In the example below, 2 new hosts have been detected.
2. 3.
Choose Platform-Nex-Hosts from list. The New Discovered Hosts window appears. In the host list, select the hosts that you want to discard permanently from the working catalog and click on the arrow icon on the right. Such hosts disappear from the host list. If you want to display them again, check the Display hosts with "Ignored" status box. They will appear in the list with the Ignored status. This allows to create them at a later stage if needed.
4.
Click on Cancel to close the window.
To delete detected hosts
1. 2.
Choose Platform-New-Hosts from list. The New Discovered Hosts window appears. In the host list, select the hosts that you do not want to declare in the catalog now and click on the cross icon on the right. Such hosts disappear from the host list. They will reappear as new each time they are rebooted.
3.
Click on Cancel to close the window.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
111
List Administration of Platforms

If you want to perform administrative tasks on a great number of platforms at once, you can use the list of hosts or list of applications windows that allows you to perform a variety of platform tasks.
Host List Window
Number of hosts: Total number of hosts appearing in the list. Export: Allows to export the host list to a file. Host Information
Status: Status of the host, either enabled or disabled. Name: Name of the host as defined when the host was created. Type: Operating system of the host. Software Version: Version of Time Navigator installed on the host. Comment: Comment concerning the host if you entered one when you created the
host.
112
Mobile: Indicates whether or not the host is a mobile platforms. Storage Node: Indicates whether or not the host is a storage node. Secured: Indicates whether or not the host is secured.
Note:
See the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for details.
Properties: Opens the Host Properties window for a single selected host.
Tip:
You can also double click on a host in the list to open the Host Properties window.
Modify Status: Opens the Host Status window to modify the Enabled/Disabled status for all the selected hosts. Modify Parameters: Opens the Host Parameters window to modify parameters for all the
selected hosts.
Modify Comment: Opens the Host Comment window to modify the comment of all the
selected hosts.
Delete: Allows to delete all the selected hosts.
Note:
A message box ask you if you want to create archive folders to archive the hosts backup files.
Viewing Host Information

To view host information
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Browse through the list and click on Close when you are done.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
113
Exporting the Host List

To export the host list
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Click on Export, the Export window appears. Specify the export parameters as described in Export Window, page 214. Click on OK. The exported file is created in the location you specified. Click on Close in the Host List window when you are done.
Editing a Host
Note: To edit a host
This feature can only be used to edit a single host at a time.
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Select the host you want to edit and click on Properties. The Host Properties window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Host, page 74 for details. To edit another host, select it in the list and repeat step 2. Click on Close in the Host List window when you are done.
3. 4.
Modifying the Host Status

To modify the host status
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Select the hosts for which you want to change the status and click on Modify Status. The Host Status window appears. Change the status and click on OK to apply the modification. Click on Close in the Host List window when you are done.
114
Modifying Host Parameters

To modify host parameters
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Select the hosts for which you want to modify parameters and click on Modify Parameters. The Host Parameters window appears. Change the parameters as described in Host Parameters Window, page 114and click on OK to validate your choice. Click on Close in the Host List window when you are done.
Host Parameters Window

Modify Mobile Status: Check this box if you want to modify whether or not hosts are mobile
hosts.
Do not report Host Unavailability: This parameter must be checked if hosts are mobile. Modify Storage Node Status: Check this box if you want to modify whether or not hosts are
storage nodes.
Storage Node: This parameter must be checked if hosts are storage nodes. Modify Compliance Status: Check this box if you want to modify whether or not hosts are
secured.
Secured Agent: This parameter must be checked if hosts are secured hosts.
See Host Window - Advanced Tab, page 77 for details concerning these host parameters.
Modifying the Host Comment

To modify host comment
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Select the hosts for which you want to change or add a comment and click on Modify Comment. The Host Comment window appears.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
115
3. 4.
Enter a comment and click on OK to apply the comment to all selected hosts. Click on Close in the Host List window when you are done.
Deleting Hosts
To delete hosts
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Host List. The Host List window appears. Select the hosts you want to delete and click on Delete. A message box appears asking you if you want to create archive folders to archive the hosts backup files. Click on Yes if you want to archive the contents of the deleted hosts backup folders. Otherwise, click on No.
Note:
Archiving the hosts backup files will allow you to restore them should you need to at a later date.
Application List Window
Number of Applications: Total number of applications appearing in the list.
116
Export: Allows to export the host list to a file. Application Information
Status: Status of the application, either enabled or disabled. Name: Name of the application as defined when the application was created. Type: Type of the application. Host: Name of the host to which the application is attached. Software Version: Version of Time Navigator installed on the host. Comment: Comment concerning the application if you entered one when you created
the application.
Properties: Opens the Application Properties window for the selected application.
Tip:
You can also double click on an application in the list to open the Application Properties window.
Modify Status: Opens the Application Status window to modify the Enabled/Disabled status
for all the selected applications.

Modify Comment: Opens the Application Comment window to modify the comment of all
the selected applications.

Delete: Allows to delete all the selected applications.
Viewing Application Information

To view application information
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The Application List window appears. Browse through the list and click on Close when you are done.
Exporting the Application List

To export the application list
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The Application List window appears.
Chapter 3
Platform Management
117
2. 3. 4. 5.
Click on Export, the Export window appears. Specify the export parameters as described in Export Window, page 214. Click on OK. The exported file is created in the location you specified. Click on Close in the Application List window when you are done.
Editing an Application
Note:
This feature can only be used to edit a single application at a time.
To edit an application
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The Application List window appears. Select the application you want to edit and click on Properties. The Application Properties window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating Applications, page 81 for details. To edit another application, select it in the list and repeat step 2. Click on Close in the Application List window when you are done.
3. 4.
Modifying the Application Status

To modify the application status
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The Application List window appears. Select the applications for which you want to change the status and click on Modify Status. The Application Status window appears. Change the status and click on OK to apply the modification. Click on Close in the Application List window when you are done.
Modifying Application Comment

To modify application comment
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The Application List window appears.
118
2. 3. 4.
Select the applications for which you want to change or add a comment and click on Modify Comment. The Application Comment window appears. Enter a comment and click on OK to apply the comment to all selected applications. Click on Close in the Application List window when you are done.
Deleting Applications
To delete applications
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Platforms-Application List. The Application List window appears. Select the applications you want to delete and click on Delete. A message box appears asking you to confirm your choice. Click on Yes if you want to delete the applications, otherwise, click on Cancel.
119
C H A P T E R
User and Access rights can be defined under the Security menu.
In order to define or modify default or personal access rights for Time Navigator users, you must be logged in as the Time Navigator privileged user (the Security User Access Rights menu which you must use to perform this operation, only appears when you are logged in as the privileged user). Any user who has the right to access Time Navigator Administration Console and manage user groups can: create a user and modify his password, create user groups, associate users with a group, remove users from a group. Any user can be declared as a Time Navigator user even if the user does not exist at the operating system level.
120
About Users and Access Rights

All Time Navigator operations are associated with specific rights. User profiles can be defined precisely to allow or restrict access to certain operations. There are three levels of access which determine a user profile:
Access to platforms. Access to backed up or archived files. Access to the catalog and Time Navigator functionnalities.
Platform Access
Platform access is based upon rights defined at the operating system level. To be able to see the contents of a platform in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, a user must have the permission to access that platform. A login will thus be required each time the user wants to display a platform in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
Backed up or Archived File Access

File access is based upon rights defined at the operating system level. In Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, the file tree is displayed according to these rights, in the past as well as the present.
The Unix root user can access all files. The Windows 2000/2003 Administrator user can access all files. The MAC OS X user with administration rights can access all files. The NetWare admin user can access all files. The VMS system user can access all files.
Catalog and Functionality Access

Rights to access functions are independent from operating system rights. They are specific to Time Navigator, and are recorded in the catalog. Users access rights may vary according to the type of user: the "privileged" user, users known to the catalog or users unknown to the catalog. When a user tries to connect to a catalog via one of the graphical interfaces, a login is required. The user functionality access rights are then assigned for that session according to the rights defined for that user.
Chapter 4
121
Privileged User
The Time Navigator privileged user name is defined by the administrator when a catalog is created. The privileged user is the only user allowed to define the access rights of other users. Defining rights is performed via the User-Access menu. This menu is only available to the privileged user and is hidden or dimmed for any other user. By default, the privileged user has the rights to perform any operations except editing the catalog or creating another catalog. Editing or creating a catalog can only be performed by the root or Administrator user. The privileged user's rights cannot be modified and he can be neither deleted nor removed from a user group. Changing the identity of a catalog privileged user can only be performed by editing the catalog. The former privileged user is then assigned default user rights.
Users Known to the Catalog
Users known to the catalog have been individually declared in the catalog. They may have a password and they may have been assigned specific rights. Once a password is declared for a user, that password is required each time the user wants to connect to the catalog. If no specific rights have been defined for a known user, that user access is limited to the default access right.
Users Unknown to the Catalog
By default, other users only have archiving and restoring rights (provided that they have the necessary operating system access rights to the files they want to archive or restore). They do not have the right to open Time Navigator Administration Console. Some users may be granted the right to open Time Navigator Administration Console and to manage user groups. They can create, edit, delete users (except the privileged user) and user groups, move users to another groups, modify user passwords. To declare users, define users rights and set paswords, see User and Access Rights Operations, page 123.
System Users
Privileges need also to be defined for system users that have to issue Time Navigator command lines. For instance, the system user must be the root user (on Unix systems) or must have at least the backup operator rights (on Windows systems) or administrators rights (Mac OS X systems) to execute the tina_export command.
122
For more information on system user rights with command line, see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide. For more information on how to add a system user in a user group, see Editing a User, page 130.
User Groups
User groups are used to perform archiving, and to define personal access rights for users. A user must belong to a group before he can be granted personal access rights. Users belonging to a user group are authorized by the administrator to archive data with the drives allocated to their group. When users need to label a cartridge, archive or extract archives from a local archiving folder with Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, they must choose one drive in the list of available drives allocated to their group. The administrator thereby controls the drives a user has access to. A user cannot belong to several groups at once but a user can be moved from one group to another. To create or edit a user group, see Creating a User Group, page 133 and Editing a User Group, page 134. For more information on local archive folders, see the Time Navigator Archiving Server guide.
Chapter 4
123
User and Access Rights Operations

Defining Default Access Rights
Default access rights are granted to any user unknown to the catalog and to any user known to the catalog who has not been granted personal rights.
To modify user default rights
1. 2. 3.
Use the privileged user login to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User Access Rights-Default. The User Default Access Permissions window appears. Click on the tab of the access rights category you want to modify and check the access rights you want to grant to the default users. See Defining Personal Access Rights, page 123 for details concerning the different access rights. Click on OK to validate. In order to take your modifications into account, you must restart the applications.
4.
Note:
Defining Personal Access Rights

Just as you defined default rights for all users, you may define personal access rights for specific users.
Note:
You can only grant personal rights to a Users Known to the Catalog.
To define user specific rights
1. 2. 3.
Use the privileged user login to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User Access Rights-Personal. The list of users declared in Time Navigator is displayed. Select a user in the list, and click on OK. The Access Control window appears. The name of the selected user is displayed in the upper part of the window.
124
4.
Choose between:
Share Default Access Rights: Allows the selected user to share all the default
access rights.
Define Personal Access Rights: Allows to define customized access rights for the
selected user. 5. 6. Click on the tab of the access rights category you want to modify and check the access rights you want to grant to the default users. For details concerning each type of rights, see:
Access Control Window - Administration Tab, page 125 Access Control Window - Media Tab, page 126 Access Control Window - Backup Tab, page 127 Access Control Window - Archive Tab, page 127 Access Control Window - Security Tab, page 128 Access Control Window - Other Tab, page 128
7.
Check Copy Default Access Rights if you want to apply all the access rights
currently defined as the default for the current tab.
Chapter 4
125
8.
Note:
Click on OK to validate. In order to take your modifications into account, you must restart the applications.
Access Control Window - Administration Tab

General Tasks: Allows to access a catalog in order to display its contents in
Time Navigator Administration Console and perform the following tasks:
Process alarms. If the user does not have the Administration right, the Alarms window is reachable via Time Navigator Library Manager, but in a read-only mode. Process jobs via Time Navigator Job Manager. If the user does not have the Administration right, he can only modify his own jobs.
Also allows to use administration objects (such as platforms, drives, libraries, media, users, etc.).
Note:
To create, edit or delete objects, it is also necessary to have the access right to the specific object.
Platforms: Allows to create, edit, delete platforms (hosts and applications) and to enable
or disable platforms.
Drives: Allows to create, edit, and delete manual or robotized drives. Media Pools: Allows to create, edit, and delete media pools. Also allows to associate media
pools with drives.

Library: Allows to create, edit, and delete libraries. Allows also to associate drives with
a library in Time Navigator Administration Guide and define a cleaning slot via Time Navigator Library Manager.
126
User Group Management: Allows to create, edit and delete users and user groups. Also
allows to associate drives with user groups.

Note:
If a user does not have this right but has the overall Administration right, he will be able to change identity and modify his password.
Access Control Window - Media Tab

Allowed Cartridges area
All: Provides cartridge administrator rights. The user has complete access to all the
Time Navigator cartridges to perform cartridge operations.
User's Only: Allows the user to perform operations on his own cartridges only.
Note:
This level of allowed cartridge does not allow the user to duplicate cartridges. This right is not required to give the user access to media pools during backup or restore operations.
None: The user cannot perform any cartridge operations.
Mount Request Operator: Allows to perform requests to mount cartridges. Allows to have access to Time Navigator Media Request Console. Allows to move cartridges within a library (Time Navigator Library Manager). Allows to bring cartridges on/off line (Time Navigator Library Manager). Allows to empty drives (Time Navigator Administration Console and Time Navigator Library Manager). Drive Use: Allows to perform all operations on drives (identifying contents, cleaning and testing). Also allows to enable/disable drives.
Note:
The user must have the Drives permission defined in the Administration tab.
Library Use: Allows to reinitialize libraries and enable/disable slots.
Note:
The user must have the Library permission defined in the Administration tab.
Chapter 4
127
Access Control Window - Backup Tab

Allowed Strategies: Allows to use the selected backup strategy(ies) to perform a backup. You must select at least one strategy. Strategies: Allows to edit or delete backup strategies for all the platforms among the strategies selected in Allowed Strategies above. Backup Selections: Allows to create, edit or delete backup selections that are associated
with the strategies selected in Allowed strategies above.

Platform Use: Allows to start a backup only for the strategies that are selected in Allowed Strategies above. Restore Backed up Data: Allows to restore data.
Note:
Restore rights are dependent on the strategies selected in Allowed Strategies above because you can only synchronize on the versions backed up by a strategy you have access to.
Choose the Destination Directory: Allows to select a destination directory other than the
original directory when restoring data.

On Demand Backup (start and stop): Allows the end-user to launch On Demand Backups from agent hosts, and to cancel On Demand Backups already in progress.
Access Control Window - Archive Tab

Archiving Allowed: Allows to use the Time Navigator archive functionality.
Note:
If the access right is not granted, no archive operation is available.
Archive Administrator: Gives the user archive administrator rights. The user has access to
all the Time Navigator folders and archives.

Create Archive Folders: Allows to create archive folders. Edit Folders: Allows to modify archive folders.
128
Delete Folders: Allows to delete archive folders. View Folders: Allows to view archive folders. Restore Archives: Allows to restore archives. Archive Files: Allows to archive data. Create Archives: Allows to create archives. Edit Archives: Allows to modify archives. Delete Archives:
Allows to delete archives.
Access Control Window - Security Tab

Certificates (create, import, delete): Allows to manage certificates to secure backup and
restore operations.
Security Templates (create, delete): Allows to manage security templates. Rules (create, delete):
Allows to manage security rules.
Access Control Window - Other Tab

Run Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager: Allows to start Time Navigator Restore &
Archive Manager.
Connect to any Platform via Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager: Allows to view the file
tree of a platform (host or application).

Open Backup Folders: Allows to view the backup folder of another platform (host or application) in the past. Choose Working Strategy via Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager: Allows to view, in the file tree, the objects backed up by a strategy. This right is automatically selected depending on the number of strategies chosen in the Allowed Strategies as defined in the Backup tab. Forbidden Menus
Hidden: The user only views the menus he has access to.
Chapter 4
129
Dimmed: The user views all the menus but the ones he cannot use are dimmed.
Creating a User
Creating users consists in declaring them in the Time Navigator catalog. The users can either be known to the machine operating system or not. Users specific to Time Navigator can be created in order to enhance catalog security. You may grant specific access rights to the users you create. See Defining Personal Access Rights, page 123 for details.
To create a user
1. 2.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User-New. The New User window appears.
3.
Enter a name for the user or click on User Name to select from the list of operating system users.You can use the following characters:
Any letter (the user name is not case sensitive). Any number from 0 to 9. Underscore _. Backslash "\". The user name cannot be modified at a later stage.
Note:
Warning:
On Windows machine, the domain name is taken into account when identifying Time Navigator catalog users: the user DOMAIN\userX is not the same user as userX.
130
4. 5. 6.
Click on Password to define and confirm a password, if needed. The password uses alphanumeric characters. Validate the password in the Confirm textbox. Click on Group to associate the user with a user group. The list of the user groups available in Time Navigator appears. Select a group in the list, then click on OK.
Note:
A user must belong to a group. Even if you have not yet created any group in Time Navigator, the system group is available by default.
7.
Tip:
Click on OK to validate. You can also create a user when you create or modify a user group using the
Security-User Group-New and Security-User Group-Properties menus. However, you
cannot use these menus to define a password for the new user. You must choose the Security-User-Properties command to define a password if any. See Creating a User Group, page 133 for details.
Editing a User
Editing a user allows you to modify the following settings:
The password (see To define or modify the password of an existing user, page 131) The group to which the user belongs to.
Note:
A user cannot belong to several groups at once, but he can be moved from one group to another.
Note:
The privileged user can only belong to the system group which is automatically created when a catalog is created. The group of the privileged user cannot be changed.
To edit a user
1.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog.
Chapter 4
131
2. 3. 4. 5.
Choose Security-User-Properties. The User Selection window is displayed. It contains all the users available in the active catalog. Select a user in the list, then click on OK. The User Properties window appears. Modify the user settings as described in Creating a User, page 129. Click on OK to validate. Time Navigator automatically updates the User Group Properties window if you have modified the group the user belongs to.
Deleting a User
Deleting a user from the Time Navigator catalog removes all his media, and therefore all his archived files, from the catalog. The operation can be quite lengthy.
To delete a user
1. 2. 3. 4.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User-Delete. The User Selection window appears. It contains all the users available in the active catalog. Select the user to be deleted in the list, then click on OK. A dialog box prompts you to confirm your decision. Click on Yes to delete the user.
The deleted user is automatically removed from the group he belonged to.
Defining or Modifying a Password

Defining or modifying a password requires certain permission as shown below:
To modify the password of the privileged user, you must be logged in as the privileged user. To modify or define the password of any user (except the privileged user), the catalog login must allow for User Group Management. To modify or define the password of the user currently connected to the catalog does not require any specific rights.
To define or modify the password of an existing user
1. 2.
Use the login appropriate to the user type you want to edit. Choose Security-User-Properties. The User Selection window is displayed.
132
3. 4.
Select the user you want to edit and click on OK. In the User Properties window, enter the new password, confirm it and click on OK. You can use the following characters:
Any letter. Any number from 0 to 9. Underscore _. You also have the option to define a users password when you create the user. See To create a user, page 129.
Tip:
Changing the User Identity

You have the option of changing the current catalog user login without disconnecting and reconnecting to the catalog. Changing identity is possible only if the new user has the necessary rights to open Time Navigator Administration Console.
To change user identity
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Security-Change Identity. The Catalog Login window appears. Enter the new username in the User textbox. Type the user password in the Password textbox. Click on OK to validate.
The identity of the new user appears in the status bar in the lower part of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Chapter 4
133
Creating a User Group

When you create a user, you must imperatively associate that user with a group. A default group, "system" is present in the catalog. You may create additional groups as needed. User groups are also necessary to perform archiving. User groups associate users with drives. The users belonging to a group are allowed by the administrator to archive data on the drives of their group.
Note :
A user cannot belong to several groups at once. However, a user can be moved from one group to another.
To create a user group
1. 2.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User Group-New. The New User Group window is displayed.
3. 4.
Enter the name of the new user group in the Group Name textbox (ex: accounting). Add users to the group. Type in a user name in the User texbox, then click on Add. - or Click on Add to select users from the list of operating system or domain users (if a domain has been defined).
If you enter the name of a user that does not exist, Time Navigator creates the user.
134
If the user you enter already belongs to another group, Time Navigator asks you if you want to change the group of that user. Do not remove a user from his old group before adding him to the new one. Otherwise the user will loose all his archives. If you mistakenly add a user to the group, click on Remove to delete that user from the group.
Note:
To define passwords for users, see To define or modify the password of an existing user, page 131. 5. Click on Add in the Drives area to associate a drive with the user group. The list of drives available in Time Navigator is displayed. Select a drive in the list, then click on OK. If you mistakenly add a drive to the group, click on Remove to delete that drive from the group. Click on OK to validate.
6.
The created user group is automatically displayed in the User Groups tab of the Drive Properties window with which it is associated.
Editing a User Group

Editing a user group allows you to modify the following settings:
The group name. The users belonging to the group. The drives associated with the group.
When editing a user group, a system user can be added to a Time Navigator user group with the Add button. This button will display the users of the operating system or of the entire domain if a domain has been defined. The system user will have to be added into a group in order to give him privileges for Time Navigator operations, especially for issuing command lines (ex: tina_export).
To edit a user group
1. 2.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User Group-Properties. The user group list appears.
Chapter 4
135
3. 4. 5.
Select a user group in the list, then click on OK. The User Group Properties window appears.
Add and/or Remove users and drives as described in Creating a User Group,
page 133. Click on OK to validate.
Time Navigator automatically updates the User Groups tab of the Drive Properties window according to the modifications made in the Drives area.
Deleting a User Group

You cannot delete a user group that contains users. You must first remove the users from the group, by moving them to another group for instance. Removing a user from a group prevents him from accessing the drives associated with the group and deletes all his media from the catalog, and therefore, all his archives. This operation can be quite lengthy.
To delete a user group
1. 2. 3. 4.
Use a login that allows for User Group Management to connect to the catalog. Choose Security-User Group-Delete. The user group list appears. Select a user group in the list, then click on OK. A dialog box prompts you to confirm your decision. Click on Yes to delete the user group.
The deleted user group is automatically removed from the User Groups tab of the Drive Properties window with which it was associated.
136
137
C H A P T E R
This section describes all the objects you need to manipulate in order to manage your media as well as the various operations that can be performed on these objects:
About Devices, page 137 Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator, page 139 Device Detection Wizard, page 140 Device Configuration Manager, page 147 Library Drive Position Test, page 157 Libraries, page 159 Drives, page 167 List Administration of Drives, page 189 Media Pools, page 195 Cartridges, page 200 All the procedures shown in this section are available via Time Navigator Administration Console. Be aware however, that many media operations can also be performed via Time Navigator Library Manager. See Time Navigator Library Manager, page 237 for details.
Note:
About Devices
The term Devices designates Libraries and Drives.
Libraries may be either
Physical peripherals that use tape cartridges or other media to store
138
Time Navigator Administration Guide for Mac OS XMicrosoft WindowsUnix
externalized data, providing an automated system to move these cartridges into drives,
Virtual systems that emulate the physical structure on a hard disk, using files to represent the cartridges. Time Navigator has a proprietary Virtual Library System, managing access to the library files on disk directly.
Drives connected to the libraries to manage data transfer between the cartridges in the library slots and the file systems of the protected computers.
Physical and virtual libraries and drives used for backup and restore of data with Time Navigator need to be recognized and declared within it. This can be done automatically or manually. Time Navigator provides four interfaces to assist you with this process at various levels of detail and expertise:
Device Detection Wizard: Detects and declares your libraries and drives automatically,
in a minimum of simple steps.
Device Configuration Manager: Detects your libraries and drives automatically, and
provides interfaces for you to edit defaults and alter configuration details before deciding which devices to declare.
Library - New or Properties: Advanced setup of Libraries, particularly useful for setting up Time Navigator Virtual Library Manager. Also needed for manual configuration of libraries not recognized by Time Navigator. Drive - New or Properties: Advanced setup of Drives and association with Libraries, for
cases where drives are not recognized by Time Navigator Device Detection.
Chapter 5
139
Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator

The scenario described in this section occurs only once and presupposes the following:
You have physically installed your backup network hosts and devices. You have installed a Time Navigator 4.2 server on a host, or upgraded a host to 4.2 from an earlier version of Time Navigator. You are launching Time Navigator Administration Console for the first time on a given environment.
Time Navigator detects that there are not yet any devices declared in your system. The Administration Assistant window appears for the purpose of guiding you through the various declaration options that are open to you:
Devices are essential to the running of Time Navigator for backup and restore operations. Three options are available to you for handling them:
Discover and declare physical devices: This option launches the Device Detection Wizard.
It presupposes that there are physical or virtual devices already present in your network.
Declare a Virtual Device for Backup to Disk (Atempo VLS): Atempos proprietary Virtual Library System cannot be set up via the Device Detection Wizard or the Device Configuration Manager. Selecting this option will launch a series of interfaces that
permit you to create and declare an Atempo VLS on your system.
Declare Devices Later: This option puts off the device declaration process and lets you
get on with something else. If you do not wish to set up your devices at this time, you will be able to launch the other procedures from Time Navigator Administration Console at a moment of your choice.
140
Device Detection Wizard

The Device Detection Wizard is a tool that scans selected hosts for the presence of connected libraries and drives and discovers the parameters needed for them to be declared in Time Navigator. It leads you step by step through configuring and declaring the devices you want to use with your Time Navigator installation.
Warning:
Device detection must not be launched if there are any Time Navigator jobs running. Please check in Time Navigator Job Manager that this is not the case and cancel any unterminated jobs.
Note:
Software Controlled Libraries (such as ACSLS) and devices connected to an NDMP filer are not detected by this Wizard.
To run the Device Detection Wizard
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select the menu Devices -Device Detection Wizard. Alternatively, if you wish to declare devices directly on a host, right click the host icon and launch Device Discovery Wizard from the popup menu. The first screen that appears contains Pre-requisite Conditions for device declaration. If you do not take this information into account, your device declaration may fail. Please read the Pre-requisites carefully and make sure that you meet all the conditions, then click on Next.
2.
Chapter 5
141
3.
If you did not launch the Wizard directly from a selected host, the next window that appears is Host Selection. Select here the hosts on which you want to launch the automatic detection and declaration procedures.
The window supports multiple selection. To select several contiguous hosts, hold the Shift key down as you point and click the cursor. To select disjointed hosts, hold the CTRL key down as you point and click the cursor. Click on Next when your selection is complete. 4. The system may take a few minutes to detect all your devices. You will see a progress bar while the process is running. Finally, the window below will appear.
142
This window lists all the physical and virtual drives and libraries detected on the selected hosts in your system, with the parameters they need to be recognized by Time Navigator. By default, all fully detected devices are selected To Declare. You may remove a device from the selection by unchecking the box to the left of it. Time Navigator creates a default name for each device based on its Serial ID and Type. This is the name by which it will be known in the Time Navigator Catalog and appear in the interfaces. To change this default name, highlight the device and type a new name in the New Name box. When the selection is as you wish, click on Next. 5. 6. If the Wizard has all the information it needs to declare the devices, the window below will now appear. If everything is as you want it, simply click on Finish. The devices are detected and appear in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Chapter 5
143
If the Wizard needs more information
Sometimes the Wizard cannot auto-detect all the information it needs to declare a device automatically. In this case, you may see one or more of the following dialog boxes during the procedure. These will enable you manually to supply the missing parameters. 1. If Time Navigator cannot find any devices on one or more of the hosts you selected, the following window will appear.
144
2.
If Time Navigator cannot recognize a device that it has detected, you will see the symbol ??? in the Serial ID column. In this case, depending on what information is missing, you will be guided through the necessary steps for the device to be recognized. The window below appears if Time Navigator was unable to detect the Type of a library. It allows you to select the Vendor and Model of the library manually. Once you have checked the box to the left of the vendor and highlighted the model, click on Next.
3.
4.
A similar window appears if Time Navigator was unable to detect the Type of a drive. It allows you to select the Model of the drive manually. Once you have checked the box to the left of the vendor and highlighted the model, click on Next.
Chapter 5
145
5.
The SAN Network Selection window (not shown) appears only when a SAN is detected. The Wizard puts any device that should be in a SAN in a default SAN labeled 01_. If this is your only SAN, you may change its name. If several SANs are detected, then you must manually select which devices go on which SANs. You may also create a new SAN in the SAN Network Selection window. If the Wizard finds drives but cannot determine in which library they belong, the following window appears:
6.
The Wizard tries to judge the most likely configuration. If this is correct, just click
146
on Next. Otherwise, manually select the associated library in the pull-down list, or define the drive as Standalone.
Chapter 5
147
Device Configuration Manager

Like the Wizard, this interface automatically detects libraries and drives connected to your network, but it is more powerful and flexible. It covers the whole range of cases of device detection management. It gives you rapid access to a huge number of devices, including VTLs and those on SAN configurations, and allows you to make certain modifications to existing configurations. To access the Device Configuration Manager, select it in the Devices menu.
To open the Device Configuration Manager
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, launch the menu Devices - Device Configuration Manager, or right-click on a host and select Device Configuration Manager in the pop-up menu. Time Navigator automatically detects if a host is a storage node or has libraries attached. If it is not, you will not see the Device Detection Wizard and Device Configuration Manager items in the right-click pop-up menu for the host. The first screen to appear is a warning message requesting you to ensure that the pre-requisite conditions for a detection have been met:
Note:
2.
Devices are connected, switched on and configured in the system. No backup or restore activities are currently running on the selected hosts.
3.
If you have launched the item from the Devices menu, rather than directly from a host, the Storage Node Choice for Device Detection Windows appears.
Select the hosts you want to include in the Device Detection procedure. You can select multiple contiguous nodes with CRTL+Shift and the mouse, or multiple individual nodes with CTRL and the mouse.
148
4.
If a host you want to include is not on the list, and has been configured in the current catalog in Time Navigator, the Add Storage Nodes to the List button will be active. Click on this button to call up a list of configured hosts for selection. If the Add Storage Nodes ot the List button is inactive, it means that there are no more hosts configured in this catalog of Time Navigator. To add more hosts, launch the menu Platform - New - Host. Similarly, you can remove hosts from the Device Detection by selecting them with the mouse and clicking on the button Remove Storage Nodes from the List.
Tip:
The detection process can take a few minutes. When it is complete, you will see the Device
List window:
Device List Window

Columns
Icon: The icon in the column at extreme left differentiates whether a detected device is a
Library
or Drive
Status: This is the status with regard to detection and declaration.
Chapter 5
149
Green: Devices already declared. Yellow: These devices have been detected and are flagged to be declared. Orange: These devices are declared but not detected. This could present a problem - for example a device that has been physically removed from the network without being deleted in Time Navigator. Grey: All other devices, including ??? devices requiring more information before they can be declared.
Type: This is the format of the library or drive: 4mm, 8mm, Optical, etc. The Type cannot always be detected. If it is not, ??? will appear in this column and you will have to select it manually. If the Type is not provided, the device cannot be declared. Some Types are not yet supported by Time Navigator (i.e. not present in the Compatibility Guide). Unrecognized libraries are classed as Generic by default. Drives cannot be Generic. The Type must be entered manually if it is not detected. Serial Number: The serial number of the device, as detected. If the device cannot be detected, this will read ???. Name: This is the name by which the device will be known in the Time Navigator
Catalog and called for backup and restore operations. A default name, made up from the type and the serial number, is provided, but it can be changed.
Descriptor: The form of the Device Descriptor depends on the Operating System.
: The rule is: c(port number)b(bus number)t(target number)l(lun number) Example: c1b0t0l0. : Path of the Special file in the /dev/directory for which the no rewind option has been set, for example, /dev/nst. The user must know this path. : Drives or tapes q0...n, libraries qc0...n.
Host: The name of the host on which the device has been detected (if you have run
detection on multiple hosts). If a device is connected to more than one host, it will appear several times in the list, each connection on a separate line, all with the same serial number. For example, a device on a SAN can be seen by several hosts or storage nodes. When one of the lines is selected, the others show up highlighted in white.
Connections: The device can either be connected directly to a host or it can be connected
to a SAN.
When a single device is seen simultaneously by more than one host, it is automatically listed as being on a SAN.
150
If it is detected as being on a SAN, it also appears as connected to the SAN.
Library: This column describes to which library a drive is associated. It will only show information on lines concerning drives and will be blank for libraries. Position: This column concerns drives only and will be blank for libraries. It designates the position of the drive within the library (also called index). The first position is 0. Number of Drives: This column concerns libraries only and details how many drives are in
the detected library.

Product Name: The name and model as coded in the firmware of the product (the product ID). If the Product Name is not detected, the Type also cannot be detected and the device
cannot be declared.
Buttons
Select New Hosts for Device Detection: Brings up the interface for selection of hosts on which
to run the Device Detection process.

Properties: Calls up the Properties Window, allowing you to modify device parameters such
as name, or manually to enter information needed to declare devices that have not been completely detected. See Properties Window, page 151.
Note:
Double-clicking on the line of a device has the same effect as clicking on this button.
To Declare: Prepares the detected device to be declared (its status line should turn yellow). Library Split: This button allows you to split a single library into several logical libraries.
The procedure is described in detail in the section Library Split Definition, page 152. When a library is split, its icon changes to:
Reinitialize: This button returns the selected device to the configuration it had just after the
detection process terminated. This is useful if you wish to cancel your edits on a given device without having to re-run the detection process on the entire host.
Chapter 5
151
Merge Two Identical Connections: This button permits handling of cases in which two
connections appear, or which one is detected but not declared (without a serial number or ???), and the other declared but not detected, but in reality they represent the same connection. When you select both items, the button becomes active and lets you merge the two connections into a single one.
Associate with a Single Physical Drive: This button permits handling of a case in which a single
drive is attached to two separate hosts, and appears in the list as two unidentified drives (no serial number or ???). If the user knows that the two items represent the same drive, this button allows the two drives to be declared as a single drive on a SAN.
Apply: Declares all the devices that have been flagged for declaration. Close: Exits the Device Configuration Manager.
Properties Window
This window appears when you double click on the line of a device, or click on the Properties button, in the Device Configuration Manager. It allows you specify configuration parameters manually for any device that was incompletely or not detected (devices labeled ???), or change the default name of a detected device prior to its declaration.
General Area:
To Declare: Check this box if the device has been parametered as needed and you want it to be declared when the Apply process is next run.
152
Name: This is the name by which the device will be known in the Time Navigator
Catalog and called for backup and restore operations. If you do not like the provided default name, made up from the type and the serial number, you can change here.
Type: This is the format of the library or drive: 4mm, 8mm, Optical, etc. If the Type could not be detected (i.e. ??? in the Type column in the Device Configuration Manager), you will have to select it manually. Click on the Browse button to call up a list of all supported Types. If you do not see the required Type, select Generic.
Drive Area
The settings in this frame are specific to drives:

Connection: This can be Direct if the drive is connected directly to a library, or SAN if it is connected to a storage node. Library: Select the library with which the drive is associated in the pull-down list. The drive can also be a Standalone. Position: The slot placing of the drive in the library.
Library Split Definition

When you select a library in the Device List Window, and click on the Library Split button, a series of windows appears allowing you to configure the split.
To configure a Libary Split from the Device Configuration Manager
1.
The Library Split Definition lets you determine the number of splits.
Chapter 5
153
The default, when you open the window, is two splits. This can be changed in the Number of Splits field. The splits then appear in the box underneath. They take the name of the library followed by _1 to _n, where n is the number of splits. 2. Select one of the splits and click on the Split Properties button to configure the drives and slots in that split. The Drive Choice for Library Split Window appears:
154
3.
Click on the button Add drives in split to call up the Drive Choice window, pictured below. Here you have a list of all the drives configured on the Library you are splitting. Select the drives you wish to include in the split. You can do multiple selections by holding down the Shift key as you click with the mouse from the first to the last element in your selection, or select all with the CTRL+A key combination. Click on OK when you have finished.
4.
Click on the button Add slots in split to assign slot numbers to the split. The Slot Choice window appears. It lists all the slots available in the Library. You can make multiple selections by holding down the Shift key as you highlight with the mouse, or select all with the CTRL+A key combination. Once a range of slot numbers have been assigned to a given split, they disappear from this list so that they cannot be accidentally assigned to another split. Click on OK when you have made your selection.
Chapter 5
155
5.
The drives and slots you selected now appear in the Split Properties window that we saw earlier. You can modify this configuration, if necessary, using the buttons to add and remove drives and slots, or click on OK to validate it.
6.
Continue the configuration of the other splits in the library by selecting each in turn and launching the Split Properties window on it. When all the splits have been configured, the configuration will appear in the lower part of the Library Split Definition window, as pictured below:
In the line at the bottom, each pair of parentheses represents a split. The numbers ahead of the pipe symbol (|) are the drives assigned to the split, while the numbers
156
after the pipe represent the slot numbers. For example, the second pair of parentheses in our illustration, (0,1|11,12,13), shows that two drives, and slot numbers 11 through 13, have been assigned to the split dev_JGE51A0025_2. Click on OK to apply the split to the Library. In the Device List Window, page 148 window the library will display all the splits and the icon will have changed to the Split Libray icon.
Chapter 5
157
Library Drive Position Test

This operation consists in mounting a cartridge through each of the drives in a library in order to calculate their position, also known as their logical index.
This is useful in cases where a library is unrecognized (i.e. it displays as ??? after the Device Detection has been run, implying that no serialization method has been detected for its drives), and has had to be declared manually. In such cases, the serial numbers and positions of the drives within the library have not been retrieved automatically.
Test Drive Position is also useful when a library has been split and the drives need to
be reindexed.
To use the Drive Position Test feature
Drivers for the Library and drives must be installed and configured. Each drive in the Library must have been declared in Time Navigator and associated with the Library. Each declared drive in the library must be in Maintenance mode. There must be at least one data cartridge in the library slot. The cleaning cartridge must be defined in the cleaning slot. In multi-catalog environments, the Test must be run separately for every catalog, since when libraries are split and shared over several catalogs, the drive positions are not necessarily the same in the different splits. To launch the drive position test on a library, select the library in Time Navigator Administration Console, then run the menu Devices - Library - Operations - Test Drive Position. The window below appears:
Note:
1.
158
2. 3.
When you are sure that the preconditions have been met, click on the button Start Library Positions Learn Operation. The operation can take a while. There is no graphical display associated with it. When the learn is finished, the window changes and displays a Close button. Click on this to finish and exit.
Chapter 5
159
Libraries
About Libraries
Time Navigator distinguishes between several different kinds of libraries, depending on the protocols used to manage them and on their physical architecture.
Traditional physical Libraries are devices using the SCSI protocol to control the mounting and unmounting of cartridges in robotized drives. A device descriptor designates the SCSI parameters of the configuration. These libraries consist of:
One or several drives. Slots (from a few to several hundred). The library can contain as many cartridges as it contains slots. Optionally, one or several mailboxes which are used for adding or removing cartridges from the library.
Software Controlled Libraries, having more than around 600 slots, are too large to be
managed via the SCSI protocol. An extra software layer is added to interface between the library and Time Navigator. Time Navigator dialogues with the software rather than directly via SCSI with the device itself. Hence they do not have a device descriptor, but are configured by setting parameters in the software.
Virtual Libraries
These are emulations on disk of the traditional SCSI protocol libraries. They are configured in the same way as physical libraries, and require a device descriptor, except for one case: Atempos proprietary Virtual Library System must be set up manually using its own interface. This is covered in a separate chapter of this guide. See Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System, page 531.
Library Representation
Libraries are displayed in the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console. They appear between the host they are attached to, and the drives associated with them. The icons vary according to whether the library is:
Physical or Software Controlled (a library with its door open):
160
A Virtual SCSI Library other than the Atempo VLS (no door)
An Atempo Virtual Library (includes the Atempo logo)
Under the librarys name, a second information bar specifies the type of library (within the range of types supported by Atempo from the vendor.)
For more information on library representation in Time Navigator Administration Console, see Network Area, page 20.
Library Reinitialization
Inconsistency may appear following manual operations (ex: cartridge move not requested by Time Navigator) and the actual contents of the library may no longer correspond to the contents of the catalog. The reinitialization of the library is then required. Reinitializing a library allows Time Navigator to match the library logical status with its actual physical status. The logical status is the image of the library Time Navigator builds in the catalog.
Chapter 5
161
Allocating a library and at least one of its drives is required. If allocation fails, reinitialization will wait until a drive becomes available.
Note:
When a catalog restore is performed, you must reinitialize the library.
Relationship between Libraries, Drives and Cartridges
A distinction must be made between the use of a library and the use of the library drives. The library is allocated when a cartridge mount request is issued. The picker (mechanical arm) moves a cartridge from a slot to a drive or from a drive to a slot. Robotized or not, a drive is allocated to a cartridge if it is used for reading or writing on cartridges. Drives may be allocated while the library is not and inversely. You can add or remove cartridges to and from the library. These operations are known as bringing cartridges on-line and off-line. Bringing cartridges on-line requires that:
The library be allocated to move cartridges. A drive be allocated to read labels of cartridges added into the library. If all library drives are allocated, the operation is cancelled.
Bringing cartridges off-line only requires that:
The library be allocated to move cartridges if a mailbox is used, A library drive be allocated if the cartridge brought off-line is located in a drive.
Creating a Library
In most cases, library creation is handled through the Device Detection Wizard and Device Configuration Manager that we covered in the first part of this chapter.
Note:
Before creating a library with Time Navigator, make sure that the SCSI adapter for the library has been installed.
To create a library
1.
In the Network area, click on the icon of the host to which the library is to be attached.
162
2.
Choose Devices - Library - New.
3.
Choose between Libraries, Software Controlled Libraries and Virtual Libraries. (See About Libraries, page 159 for details).
Note:
The creation and configuration of Virtual Libraries, including Atempo Virtual Library System, is covered in a separate section of this manual, Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System, page 531, The creation and configuration of Software Controlled Libraries is discussed in the Time Navigator Virtual Library Manager guide.
4.
Select the library vendor and type and click on OK.
5.
The New Library window appears:
Chapter 5
163
The name of the host you selected appears in the Host Name field. You cannot edit it at this point. 6. 7. Fill in the library parameters as described in New Library Window, page 164. If you have already created drives, click on Add in the Associated Drives area and select the drives to associate.
Note:
If the drives have not been created yet, you will have the opportunity when you create your drives to associate them with the library.
8.
The Library Properties button gives you access to various parameters defining the library behavior. Time Navigator assigns default values to all parameters according to the library you select in step 2 above. Thus you do not have to modify anything in that window. Should you decide to change any of the library properties, be extremely careful as it could greatly disturb Time Navigator functioning. For a detailed list of the library properties, see Advanced Library Properties, page 165. Click on OK.
9.
A library Reinitialization (barcode) is automatically performed when the library is first created. This reinitialization provides information to the catalog concerning the slots and drives empty/full status. See Reinitializing a Library, page 166, for details.
164
New Library Window

Type:
Indicates the library model you selected in the Library List Window.
Host Name: Indicates the host the library is attached to. This is the host you selected in
the Network area.You cannot edit it at this point.

Device Descriptor:
Warning:
The protocol used to access the library is always the Tina protocol, even if the host accessing the library has been set to use the NDMP protocol. As a result the device descriptor must always respect the Time Navigator format, not the NDMP format.
Note:
The colon character ":" is not allowed for the library device descriptor definition. For example: qc0 Path of the file allowing access to the library. For example: /dev/qc SCSI address of the library. The Device Descriptor must be entered in a
cxbytzla format, where:
x is the number of the SCSI controller y is the number of the bus z is the number of the SCSI target a is the LUN number.
Tip:
The Device Descriptor information can be found in the Windows 2000/2003 Administrative Tools directory. See your operating system documentation for details.
Library Name:
Name of the library. This name appears with the library icon in the Network area.
Chapter 5
165
Serial Number: Concerns library installed in a SAN environment. The Serial Number is
automatically detected by Time Navigator and appears when editing the library if you have set the tunable Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor. See Device Descriptor Re-allocation, page 423 for details. If the library is software-managed, the library type appears in this field.
Reset: If the serial needs to be updated, click on the Reset button, Time Navigator
automatically detects the new number.

Associated Drives Area: Lists the drives already associated with the library and allows you to
add or remove drives from the list.

Note:
Only drives that are not already associated to a library appear in the Drive List window when you click on Add.
Advanced Properties: Lets you access the Library Properties window. See Advanced Library Properties, page 165.
Advanced Library Properties

For a complete list of Advanced Properties, see Appendix 1: Advanced Library Properties, page 645.
Editing a Library
Once a library has been created, you always have the option to edit the following:
The library device descriptor. The library serial number (can be reset and redetected by Time Navigator). The drives associated with the library. The library properties.
The library type and name, as well as the name of the host to which the library is connected cannot be modified.
To edit a library
1. 2.
Select the library to edit in the Network area. Choose Device-Library-Properties. The Library Properties window appears.
166
3.
Modify the Device Descriptor and Associated Drives as needed. See New Library Window, page 164 for details. To edit the library properties, click on Advanced Library Properties. See Appendix 1: Library Properties, page 703 for details. Click on OK to validate the operation.
4.
5.
Time Navigator automatically updates the windows concerning the drives associated with the library, according to the modifications performed in the Associated Drives area.
Reinitializing a Library
For details concerning library reinitialization, see Reinitializing Libraries, page 247
Deleting a Library
If you delete a library from the network, you must delete it from Time Navigator. When you delete a library, you modify the loading mode of the drives associated with the library. Drives are manually loaded again.
To delete a library
1. 2. 3.
Select the library to delete in the Network area. Choose Devices-Library-Delete. The Delete Library window appears. It contains all the characteristics of the selected library. Click on Delete to delete the library. The library is removed from the Network area and from Time Navigator Administration Console. The deleted library is automatically removed from the Library area of the Drive Properties window with which it was associated.
Chapter 5
167
Drives
About Drives
Drives are storage devices (backup and archiving). Many types of drives are supported by
Time Navigator: 8 mm magnetic tapes, DAT, DLT, 3480, magneto-optical disks, DVD-RAM, etc. You can also create a VTL Disk Drive in lieu of a regular drive to perform backups on disk rather than on cartridges. A user can use every declared drive, as long as he has the necessary rights to access it. A drive is available if it is enabled and not being used. When a drive is enabled, the application assumes that it will use the drive exclusively.
Local Drives vs Shared Drives A local drive is connected to the host which controls it (any Unix or Windows 2000/2003
machine that is client or server of Time Navigator). It is also possible to share a drive between several Time Navigator catalogs via Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager. A shared drive is connected to a Storage Area Network (SAN). It can be controled by several hosts via the SAN.
DVD-RAM Drives
Note :
DVD-RAM are supported on Windows platforms only. DVD-RAM drives belong to the Magneto-optical Drive category. They are mostly used for archiving purposes. You must declare them manually as neither the Device Detection Wizard nor the Device Configuration Manager support the detection of DVD-RAM drives (see Creating a Drive, page 170 for details). The device descriptor of a DVD-RAM drive is the drive letter assigned in the file system, for instance: "D:" You must use a media pool dedicated to the DVD-RAM drive. Due to performance reasons,disabling the DVD-RAM drive cache is not supported.
168
WORM Drives
WORM drives allow for non-rewritable, non-erasable data storage on WORM media (WORM: Write Once Read Many). They are mainly used for legal archiving purposes. Only WORM media can be mounted in a drive declared as a WORM drive.
Warning:
Make sure you do not mix WORM and WMRM (Write Many Read Many) drives in the same library. Such configurations are not supported by Time Navigator.
Cache and performance
In order to improve reading and writing performances, some optical WORM drives are equipped with a cache that can be enabled/disabled. By default, the cache is disabled by Time Navigator. This prevents the catalog from being desynchronized from the actual media content, should a power cut occur. If you want to enable the cache at you own risk, set the "Enable optical cache on write" (enable_optical_write_cache). For details on how to set tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
Drive Loading Mode
If the drive is manually operated, you will be asked to mount/unmount cartridges required by Time Navigator (ex: to insert a labelled, non-labelled or cleaning cartridge into the device). Optical drives cannot be manually operated. If the drive is robotized, the cartridge operations needed by the application are performed without the operators intervention. The operator is only required to bring cartridges on and off-line. In both cases, mounting requests appear in Time Navigator Media Request Console. This window should always be opened and minimized on the console of the operator in charge of cartridges. To use Time Navigator Media Request Console, see Time Navigator Media Request Console, page 573.
Drive Cleaning
Drives must be cleaned on a regular basis to maintain them in good working condition. Time Navigator keeps track of the number of times a drive is being used, and uses various settings to control the drive cleaning. A cleaning request is automatically triggered when the Time of Use since the Last Cleaning is greater than the Time of use
Chapter 5
169
Before Cleaning parameter.

Note:
Drive cleaning only applies to physical drives. Virtual drives do not require cleaning.
Drive cleaning operations have priority over any other operation requiring a drive (backup, archiving, etc.) except if the other operation is already in progress, in which case the cleaning will wait for the operation to end before proceeding. If you cancel a cleaning request, the following requested operation will occur and Time Navigator will request the drive cleaning again the next time it is used. The cleaning operation status (manual or automatic) depends on:
The drive loading mode (manual or robotized). The presence or not of a slot reserved for the cleaning cartridge.
Initiating the cleaning request
Robotized drive
Manual drive = Manual cleaning
Slot reserved f or the cleaning cartridge = Automatic cleaning
No slot reserved for the cleaning cartridge = Manual cleaning
To automate the cleaning operation, reserve a slot in the library for the cleaning cartridge and make sure a cleaning cartridge is in the cleaning slot. Time Navigator will also handle the cleaning cartridge wear according to manufacturer specifications and require you to change the cleaning cartridge when it is worn. In the case of manual cleaning, a dialog box prompts you to insert a cleaning cartridge in the device and to specify the end of the cleaning operation. For information on drive representation in Time Navigator Administration Console, see Drive Representation, page 22.
170
Creating a Drive
In most cases, drive creation is handled through the Device Detection Wizard and Device Configuration Manager that we covered in the first part of this chapter. However, if you need to create a drive manually, or wish to set up a disk drive that will emulate drive operation from a hard disk, you may use the following procedure to create it directly in Time Navigator Administration Console. Likewise, if you are creating a DVD-RAM drive, you must use this procedure since neither the Device Detection Wizard nor the Device Configuration Manager support the detection of DVD-RAM drives.
Note:
Optical drives, other than DVD-RAM, do not support the manual mode. They must be robotized.
Note:
To declare a shared drive, refer to the procedure To create a shared drive, page 429.
To create a drive
1.
In the Network area, select the library to which the drive is connected.
Note:
If the drive is directly attached to a host, select that host. The host must be a storage node.
2.
Choose Devices-Drive-New and select a drive from the Drive Type Selection window.
Chapter 5
171
3. 4.
Select the drive manufacturer and type. Click on OK. The New Drive window appears: Fill in parameters for the new host as described in:
Drive Window - General Tab, page 172 Drive Window - Connection Tab, page 180 (for shared drives only) Drive Window - Cartridges Tab, page 175 Drive Window - Library Tab, page 176 Drive Window - Information Tab, page 177 Drive Window - Identity Tab, page 178 Drive Window - User Groups Tab, page 179
5.
The new drive is displayed in the Network area and is linked to the selected host. A vertical bar is displayed at the right of the circle representing the host in the Icons area. For more information on drive representation in Time Navigator Administration Console, see Network Area, page 20.
172
If one or several media pools, libraries, and user groups are associated with the drive, they will automatically be displayed by Time Navigator in the corresponding areas in the Drive window: Media pools, Libraries and User Groups. Note: Time Navigator does not check for the presence of the device on the network when it is created, but at each attempt to access it.
Drive Window - General Tab
Type: Type of the drive you selected. Drive Name: Name of the drive. The drive name must be unique within the entire catalog.
Note:
The colon character ":" is not allowed in the name of the drive.
Cartridge Life Cycle (points): Cartridge wear parameter (ex: 1500 life points). A default value is automatically entered by Time Navigator depending on your drive.
For more information on cartridge wear, see Cartridge Wear, page 203.
Serial Number: Serial number of the drive. It concerns SAN drives only. It is automatically detected by Time Navigator and appears when editing the drive if you have activated the tunable Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor. For more information on serial numbers, see Device Descriptor Re-allocation, page 423.
Chapter 5
173
Reset: Forces Time Navigator to re-detect the drive serial number. Useful if the drive has
been changed.
Local Drive (not shared): Indicates whether the drive is local or shared. Host: Name of the host the drive is attached to. Device Descriptor:
For example: tape0 Absolute path of the drive descriptor. It is recommended that you specify a non Berkeley device. For example:
IBM AIX: /dev/rmt0.1 SUN Solaris: /dev/rmt/0cn COMPAQ Tru64: /dev/ntape/tape0_d0 HP-UX: /dev/rmt/0mn Linux: /dev/nst0 SGI Irix: /dev/rmt/tps0nrvc Drive SCSI address. The device descriptor must be entered in a cxbytzla
format.
x is the number of the SCSI controller, y is the number of the bus, z is the number of the SCSI target, a is the LUN number.
The device descriptor of a DVD-RAM drive is the drive letter assigned in the file system, for instance: "D:"
174
Note:
The Device Descriptor information can be found in the Windows 2000/2003 Administrative Tools directory. See your operating system documentation for details.
Warning:
Drives attached to the same host must imperatively have their own unique device descriptor. Do not use the same descriptor for all drives. The Device Descriptor used must be a no rewind device. Otherwise, the cartridge label and data are systematically overwritten at each new backup. To check that the Device Descriptor being used is correct, perform a drive test as described in Testing Drives, page 183.
Warning:
The protocol used to access drives is always the Tina protocol, even if the host accessing the drive has been set to use the NDMP protocol. As a result the device descriptor must always respect the Time Navigator format, not the NDMP format.
Note:
If the created drive is a Disk Drive, the device descriptor corresponds to the absolute path of the directory into which the data will be backed up.
Chapter 5
175
Drive Window - Cartridges Tab
Add: Allows to add a media pool to associate with the drive.
Note:
If you have already created media pools, click on Add to select the media pool(s) you want to associate with the drive. If not, you will be able to add a media pool later.
Remove: Allows to remove a media pool. Writing Mode Area Non-Rewritable (WORM): Specifies that the drive uses non-rewritable cartridges.
Note:
The box is automatically checked if the drive uses non-rewritable media.
Note:
If the created drive can be used with both rewritable (WMRM) and non-rewritable (WORM) media, you must declare it as either WMRM (default behavior) or WORM. Mixing different types of media for the same drive is not allowed in Time Navigator.
176
For more information, see WORM Drives, page 168.
Drive Window - Library Tab
If the library is robotized, click on Library to select the library containing the drive.
Note:
The fields in the Library tab can be accessed if at least one library has already been declared in Time Navigator.
Library: Name of the library associated with the drive (if any). Drive Position in Library: Indicates the drive location inside the library. See Changing the
Mode of the Drive, page 182 for details.
Chapter 5
177
Drive Window - Information Tab
Statistics Area
Hours of Use: Number of hours the drive was used for. Volume Read: Amount of information that the drive has read. Volume written: Amount of information that the drive has written. Number of Mounts: Number of times a cartridge was mounted in the drive. Number of Cleanings: Number of times the drive has been cleaned. Use since Last Cleaning: Number of hours the drive has been used for since the last
cleaning.
Last Cleaning Date: Date when the drive was last cleaned.
Cleaning Management Area
Cleaning Managed by Time Navigator: Indicates whether you want the drive cleaning to be managed by Time Navigator. Max. Use between Cleanings (Hr): Maximum number of hours the drive can be used for between two cleaning sessions.
Note:
If the value is 0, the drive cleaning will never be performed.
178
Use before Next Cleaning (Hr): Number of hours the drive can be used for, before
Note:
This field cannot be edited. It is automatically filled in by Time Navigator.
Status: Indicates whether the drive needs to be cleaned. Reset: Resets drive statistics values to 0 and the cleaning management values to the original values.
Note:
Default values are entered for all parameters automatically according to the drive type.
For more information on cleaning drives, see Drive Cleaning, page 168.
Drive Window - Identity Tab
Change Identity to Access Device: Indicates that you are providing a specific user identity to
access the drive.

User: Name of a user who has the necessary rights to access the drive.
Chapter 5
179
Password: Click on Password. Provide a password and confirm it.
Drive Window - User Groups Tab
Add: Allows to add a user group to associate with the drive. Remove: Allows to remove a user group.
180
Drive Window - Connection Tab
This tab only appears if you are configuring a shared drive.

SAN: Name of the SAN onto which the drive is connected.
Add: Allows to associate hosts to the drive in a SAN environment. Remove: Allows to disconnect hosts from the drive in a SAN environment. Host: Indicates the name of the host associated with the drive. Device Descriptor: Indicates the device descriptor for the drive associated to the host. Device Descriptor: Allows to enter the device descriptor for the shared drive associated to
the host. For example: tape0
Absolute path of the drive descriptor. For example:
IBM AIX : /dev/rmt0.1
Chapter 5
181
SUN Solaris : /dev/rmt/0cbn COMPAQ Tru64 : /dev/ntape/tape0_d0 HP-UX : /dev/rmt/0mnb Linux : /dev/nst0 SGI Irix : /dev/rmt/tps0nrvc
The Device Descriptor represents the drive SCSI address. It must be entered in a cxbytzla format.
x is the number of the SCSI controller, y is the number of the bus, z is the number of the SCSI target, a is the LUN number. The Device Descriptor information can be found in the Windows NT/ 2000 Administrative Tools directory.
Note:
Warning:
Drives attached to the same host must imperatively have their own unique device descriptor. The Device Descriptor used must be a no rewind device. Otherwise, the cartridge label and data are systematically overwritten at each new backup.
NDMP Area NDMP: This box must be checked if you want the drive to support NDMP. Network Name: Drive network name User: NDMP user Password: NDMP user password Version: NDMP version
182
Changing the Mode of the Drive

When first created, a drive is in disabled mode. If you want to perform a backup, the drive must be "Enabled". If you only want to allow the drive to perform restore operation, the mode must be "Enable for Restore only".If you want to perform certain maintenance operations on a drive and not allow backups to proceed, you should put the drive in Maintenance mode. The following table shows the different modes a drive can be in.
Drive Mode
Enabled Enabled for Restore only
Description
All operations can be performed. Only restore operations can be performed and non job related operations such as: erasing, recycling, labelling, or identifying a cartridge; cleaning or testing the drive, reinitializing the library. Note: During a restore, drives in the mode Enabled for Restore only are used in priority. If none is available, another drive is chosen. In addition, if the cartridge required to perform the restore is already mounted in a drive, that drive is used for the restore regardless of the drive mode. No operation can be performed. Only a drive test, a cartridge identification, or a cartridge move can be performed.
Disabled Maintenance
To change the drive mode
1. 2.
Select the drive in the Network area. Choose Devices-Drive-Use and select the mode you want.
The Mode is displayed underneath the drive icon in the Network area.
Supervising Drive
If you have installed Time Navigator Web Supervision, you have the option to monitor your catalog and drive activities via a Web browser. The URL to access Time Navigator Web Supervision depends on the parameters you specified during installation. See the Time Navigator Web Interfaces guide for more information.
Chapter 5
183
Testing Drives
Although this step is optional, we strongly recommend performing this operation when the drive is used for the first time or any time a hardware maintenance operation is performed. Testing the drive will verify that it is in working condition, that it has been properly configured and that Time Navigator correctly handles that drive. If a drive returns errors indicating that it has broken down, Time Navigator automatically disables the drive and triggers an alarm. In that case you should perform a drive test to try identifying the problem. The reasons for a failed test can be one of the following:
There is a conflict between the driver version and the operating system. The drive is not correctly configured. The media is unavailable: it must be neither write protected, nor too worn out in the case of magnetic tapes. The driver for the drive is configured in fixed block size mode. Time Navigator requires that the driver be put into variable block size mode. For more information about the driver configuration, see the drive manufacturers documentation and Time Navigator Drivers guide.
If you are working in a SAN environment and several hosts have access to a drive, you can select the host to use to perform the test. You should test the drive with all hosts.
Note:
This test requires a spare cartridge. Any data contained on the cartridge will be deleted by the test.
Warning:
Testing a WORM drive implies that the WORM media used will be unusable once the operation is complete. It is recommended that you then remove this media from the library.
To test a drive
1.
Right-click on the drive to test in the Network area and select Maintenance. See Changing the Mode of the Drive, page 182 for details.
184
2. 3. 4.
Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Test. The mount request of the non-labelled cartridge is initiated. If several hosts have access to the drive (SAN environment), select the host you want to perform the test with in the Select Access for Drive window and click on OK. The test begins and the Drive Test window appears showing you the test progress. If the test is sucessful, the message: This Device works correctly is displayed. Otherwise, Time Navigator returns one of the following errors:
Read error Write error Rewinding error Status error Configuration error Positionning error If you want to stop the test, click on Cancel.
Note:
5.
Click on Close when the test is over.
Automatically Cleaning Drives

Time Navigator uses two separate components to handle automatic drive cleaning. The first component is the actual cleaning of the drive. This is the component described in this section. The second component is the cleaning cartridge management, described in Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters, page 229. Time Navigator automatically triggers a drive cleaning according to the following parameters:
Max. Use between Cleaning (hours). The value of this parameter depends on the drive
type. It is set according to the specifications of the manufacturers and corresponds to the maximum time of use between two cleaning sessions.
Use before Next Cleaning (hours). When the drive is created, this parameter is by
default the same as the first parameter since the drive is supposed to have never been used. Afterward, Time Navigator keeps track of the time the drive is being used, and automatically triggers a cleaning request whenever this value comes to 0.
Chapter 5
185
This parameter is reset to its original value whenever a cleaning is performed. The Max Use between Cleaning parameters can be defined when you create a drive, or modified later.
To edit the drive cleaning parameters
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select the drive to edit in the Network area. Choose Devices-Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window appears. Click on the Information tab. In the Cleaning Management Area, check the Cleaning Managed by Time Navigator box. Modify the Max. Use between Cleaning setting (ex: 30 hours). The Use before Next Cleaning setting is automatically updated.
Note:
0 indicates that the drive cleaning is never performed.
5.
For more information on drive cleaning, see Drive Cleaning, page 168.
Manually Cleaning Drives

Independently from the automatic triggering, you can manually initiate the cleaning of any drive. This may be very useful when a drive whose cleaning is imminent is going to be used for an automatic backup. In that case, you may clean the drive before the backup takes place. The cleaning operation is the same whatever its origin (manual or automatic).
To initiate drive cleaning
1. 2.
Select the drive to clean in the Network area. Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Cleaning,

Note:
You can also choose Device-Library-Operations. Then, in the Library Operations window, choose Drive-Cleaning, or you can use the Drive List window.
The cleaning operation begins if the selected drive is enabled and available.
186
The Use before Next Cleaning parameter is reset to its original value.
Warning:
To actually perform automatic robotized drive cleaning, you must also set the appropriate cleaning cartridge parameters. See Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters, page 229 for details.
To reset the parameters when performing a manual cleaning
1. 2. 3. 4.
After manually cleaning a drive (manually inserting a cleaning cartridge in a drive without using Time Navigator), select the drive in the Network area. Choose Devices-Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window appears. In the Information tab, reset the Use since Last Cleaning field value to 0. The Use before Next Cleaning parameter is reset to its original value. Click on OK to validate the operation.
Editing Drives
Editing a drive enables you to check or modify the following settings:
The maximum time of use between two cleaning sessions and the time of use before cleaning to allow Time Navigator to automatically initiate the drive cleaning request. See Automatically Cleaning Drives, page 184 for details.
The life cycle of cartridges associated with a drive to allow Time Navigator to automatically calculate the cartridge wear level. See Cartridge Wear, page 203 for details.
The drive serial number (can be reset and detected again by Time Navigator). The library the drive is associated with, if the drive is robotized. The user groups and media pools the drive is associated with. The identity for device access. The hosts which can access the drive if it is a shared drive
The type and name of the drive cannot be modified.

To edit a drive
1.
Select the drive to edit in the Network area.
Chapter 5
187
2. 3. 4.
Note:
Choose Devices-Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window is displayed. Modify the drive settings as needed. Click on OK to validate the operation. Time Navigator automatically updates the media pools, libraries, and user groups areas of the Drive Properties windows if you modify the drive information through the Media Pools, Libraries or User Groups windows (i.e., if you create a library and associate a previously created drive to it, the library name will automatically appear in the Drive Properties Library field).
Deleting Drives
If you remove a drive from your network, you must also remove it from Time Navigator. Deleting a drive removes it from the list of available drives defined for the libraries, media pools and user groups. The recorded cartridges are kept and can be read on any other compatible drive.
To delete a drive
1. 2. 3.
Select the drive to delete in the Network area. Choose Devices-Drive-Delete. The Delete Drive window is displayed. It contains all the characteristics of the selected drive. Click on Delete to delete the drive. The drive is removed from the Network area.
Note:
The deleted drive is automatically removed from the Associated Drives areas of the Media Pool and Library Properties windows and from the Drives area of the User Group Properties window it was associated with.
Identifying the Contents of a Drive

Use this operation to identify the cartridge located inside the drive.
To identify the contents of a drive
1. 2.
In the Network area, select a drive. Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Identify Content.
188
Tip:
You can also right click on a drive and choose Identify.
The Drive Contents Window appears. See Drive Contents Window, page 188 for details.
Drive Contents Window

The Drive Contents window provide information about the cartridge mounted in the drive.
Cartridge Name: Name of the cartridge that is currently in the drive. Creation Date: Date the cartridge was created in the catalog. Cartridge Description: Description entered when writing a cartridge label manually. The field
is empty if the cartridge was automatically labeled.

Label: Cartridge label.
Ejecting a Media from a Drive

Use this operation to eject a media from a drive. You do not have to specify the destination slot, Time Navigator will choose it.
To eject a media:
1. 2.
In the Network area, select the drive you want to empty. Choose Devices-Drive-Operations-Eject Media.
Tip:
You can also right click on a drive and choose Eject Media.
Displaying Drives
See Displaying Drives, page 24 to find out how you can show or hide a drive in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Chapter 5
189
List Administration of Drives

If you want to perform operations on several drives at once, you can use the Drive List windows that allows you to perform a variety of tasks.
Drive List Window
Number of drives: Total number of drives appearing in the list. Export: Allows to export the drive list to a file. Drive Information
Status: Status of the drive, either Enabled, Restore Only, Maintenance or Disabled. Name: Name of the drive as defined when it was created. Type: Type of the drive. Serial Number: Drive serial number. Automatically detected by Time Navigator after the first access to the drive, if it is a shared drive. Library: Name of the library associated with the drive.
190
Cartridge: Name of the cartridge located in the drive.
Note:
This column shows a question mark when you first open the window, click on Identify Content to identify the cartridge.
Test: Result of the drive test.
Note:
This column shows a question mark when you first open the window, click on Test to test the drive and display the result.
Connection: Shows the connection type of the drive, either local with the name of
the host, or SAN.
Sharing: Indicates the number of hosts than can access the drive.
Properties: Opens the Drive Properties window for the selected drive.
Tip:
You can also double click on a drive in the list to open the Drive Properties window.
Modify Status: Opens the Drive Status window to modify the status of all the selected drives. Modify Connection Status: Opens the Drive Connection Status window to modify that status. Allows to switch between local and SAN connection. Identify Content: Allows you to identify the cartridge contained in the selected drives.
Cartridge names appear in the Cartridge column.

Eject Media: Allows to unmount the cartridge located in the selected drives. Test: Launches a test of the selected drives. See Testing Drives, page 183 for details. Cleaning: Launches the cleaning of the selected drives. See Manually Cleaning Drives,
page 185 for details.

Delete: Deletes the selected drives.
Chapter 5
191
Viewing Drive Information

To view drive information
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Browse through the list and click on Close when you are done.
Exporting the Drive List

To export the drive list
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Click on Export, the Export window appears. Specify the export parameters as described in Export Window, page 214. Click on OK. The exported file is created in the location you specified. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
Editing a Drive
Note:
This feature can only be used to edit a single drive at a time.
To edit a drive
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Select the drive you want to edit and click on Properties. The Drive Properties window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Drive, page 170 for details. To edit another drive, select it in the list and repeat step 2. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
3. 4.
Modifying the Drive Status

To modify the drive status
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive
192
List window appears. 2. Select the drives for which you want to change the status and click on Modify Status. The Drive Status window appears. See Changing the Mode of the Drive, page 182 for details. Change the status and click on OK to apply the modification. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
3. 4.
Modifying the Drive Connection Type

This feature allows you to quickly convert a local drive already configured in Time Navigator Administration Console to a shared drive and vice versa. You can convert several drives at a time.
To convert one or several local drives to the shared type
1. 2. 3. 4.
From the menu bar, select Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Select one or several drives. then click Modify Connection Status. The Drive Connection Status window appears. Select the lower radio button, select the SANs name from the drop-down list and click OK. Close the Drive List window.
To convert one or several shared drives to the local type
1. 2. 3. 4.
From the menu bar, select Devices-Drive-Drive List.. The Drive List window appears. Select one or several drives. then click Modify Connection Status. The Drive Connection Status window appears. Select "Local Drive (not shared)" and click OK. Close the Drive List window.
Identifying Drive content

To identify the drive content
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Select the drives whose content you want to identify and click on Identify Content.
Chapter 5
193
3. 4. 5. 6.
Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on No to cancel it. A Progress window appears. Click on Hide if you do not want to see it. Once the operation is completed the name of the cartridges contained in the drives appears in the Cartridge column. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.

To eject a media
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Select the drives you want to empty and click on Eject Media. Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on No to cancel it. A Progress window appears. Click on Hide if you do not want to see it. Once the operation is completed the Cartridge column displays "None". Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
Testing Drives
To test drives
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Select the drives you want to test and click on Test. See Testing Drives, page 183 for details. Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on No to cancel it. A Progress window appears. Click on Hide if you do not want to see it. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
Cleaning Drives
To clean drives
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears.
194
2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the drives you want to clean and click on Cleaning. See Manually Cleaning Drives, page 185 for details. Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on No to cancel it. A Progress window appears. Click on Hide if you do not want to see it. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
Deleting Drives
To delete drives
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Devices-Drive-Drive List. The Drive List window appears. Select the drives you want to delete and click on Delete. See Deleting Drives, page 187 for details. Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on No to cancel it. A Progress window appears. Click on Hide if you do not want to see it. Once the operation is completed the drives no longer appear in the list. Click on Close in the Drive List window when you are done.
Chapter 5
195
Media Pools
About Media Pools
Media pools are created to manage media in a catalog. A media pool is defined by a name, a label, associated drive(s) and a management policy. Once created, the pool can be associated with a backup strategy or an archiving folder to allow data to be written on cartridges. Cartridges will be automatically added to a pool when needed. It is recommended to keep automatic backup and archiving on separate pools since the media used for automatic backup can be recycled and reused whereas those used for archiving will most likely not be recycled. A media pool can also be used to dedicate some drives to automatic backup and others to archiving. Most frequently, though, pools will have access to all available drives and Time Navigator will decide which drive will be used for a particular backup, archiving or restore.
Storage vs. Recycling Policy
When creating or editing a media pool, you can choose between two media management policies:
Infinite retention period (storage policy). Limited retention period (recycling policy).
The storage policy consists in increasing the number of cartridges indefinitely. Once a cartridge is full, Time Navigator asks for a spare cartridge, labels it and fills it. It keeps on requesting spare cartridges each time the previous cartridge is full. The backup volume continuously increases and there is no automatic recycling. The administrator can manually delete cartridges when he thinks that the backed up information is no longer needed. The recycling policy keeps data on a cartridge for a limited time only. The retention period policy consists in labeling a certain number of cartridges that are used in turn. The Retention Period parameter of the media pool allows you to define the retention time that data is kept.
196
If the retention priod is equal to zero, no data retention period is guaranteed. Only the number of media available in the pool determines the retention period.You should pre-label at least enough cartridges to complete your most voluminous backup since Time Navigator will not request spare cartridges but will overwrite existing ones. If there are no more empty cartridges, the one which contains the oldest data will be recycled. Time Navigator thus keeps files for several days or months depending on the number of cartridges, the backed up volume and the backup frequency. If the retention period is not equal to zero, cartridges containing data older than the retention period can be recycled. If no cartridge meets this requirement, a spare cartridge is labelled under the name of the user in the media pool. Thus, the data retention period is guaranteed.
Automatically Created Pools
Two pools are automatically created when a catalog is created:
The LOST+FOUND pool, that contains lost+found cartridges, i.e., cartridges belonging to another Time Navigator catalog. Their label is followed by -LF<5 digit cartridge number in the pool>. The SPARE pool, that contains spare cartridges. Time Navigator will automatically label a spare cartridge when needed. The cartridge will thus no longer belong to the spare pool, it will belong to the user pool. The spare cartridges appear in the catalog as SPARE<5 digit cartridge number in the pool>.
These pools only appear in the media pool list if they contain cartridges. You cannot edit or delete these pools.
Creating a Media Pool

A media pool is defined by a name, a label, an associated drive(s) and a management policy. Once created, the pool will be associated with a backup strategy to allow data to be written on cartridges. See Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301, for details.
To create a media pool
1.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-New. The New Media Pool window appears.
Chapter 5
197
2. 3.
Fill in the parameters as described in Media Pool Window, page 197. Click on Add in the Associated Drives area to associate a drive with the media pool. The list of available drives is displayed. Select a drive in the list and click on OK. Repeat this step to associate other drives.
Note:
If you want to perform synthetic full backups, associate at least two drives to the media pool.
Warning:
It is highly recommended not to associate drives from different libraries to the same media pool.
4.
Click on OK to validate the operation and close the window.
The created media pool is automatically displayed in the Media Pools area of the Drive Properties window with which it is associated.
Media Pool Window

Pool Name: Indicates the name of your choice for the pool.
Tip:
The pool name can be related to the pool use (ex: backup week for the weekly full backups) or to the platforms backed up with the pool, ...etc.
198
Label: Is usually a short version of the pool name. The pool label appears in the name of
all the cartridges belonging to the pool.

Comment: Allows you to enter a comment of your choice to identify the media pool. The
comment is recorded in the Time Navigator catalog.

Note:
If you modify the comment, specify whether you want the new pool comment to be applied on all existing cartridges in the pool or only on the new cartridges.
Retention Period
Infinite: Select this option if you do not want to recycle cartridges. This option is referred to as the storage policy. In that case, Time Navigator will not reuse a cartridge once it is filled. Data stored during: Select this option if you want to recycle cartridges after a set
period of time. This option is referred to as the recycling policy.
Retention Period: Represents the time period Time Navigator will wait once a
cartridge is filled, until it recycles it. See About Media Pools, page 195 for details concerning the recycling policy.
Associated Drives
Add: Allows you to determine the drives Time Navigator may use when performing a backup with this media pool. Remove: Allows you to stop a drive from being used by Time Navigator for
backups using this media pool.
Logical Name:
Displays all the drives that may use this media pool.
Editing a Media Pool

Editing a media pool enables you to modify the following parameters:
The name of the media pool. The contents of the Comment field. The media pool management policy (infinite or limited retention period). The drives associated with the media pool.
Chapter 5
199
The label of the media pool is written at the beginning of each media and thus cannot be modified.
To edit a media pool:
1. 2. 3.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-Properties. The list of media pools appears. Select a media pool in the list, then click on OK. The Media Pool Properties window appears. Modify the media pool parameters as needed (See Media Pool Window, page 197) and click on OK. If you have modified the comment, a dialog box asks you whether you want the new pool comment to be applied on all existing media in the pool (click on Yes) or only on the new media (click on No).
Note:
Deleting a Media Pool

To delete a media pool associated with a strategy or archive folder, you must first delete it within the strategy or the archive folder.
Note:
A media pool cannot be deleted if it contains cartridges.
To delete a media pool:
1. 2. 3.
Choose Storage-Media Pool-Delete. The list of media pools appears. Select a media pool in the list, then click on OK. A message window prompts you to confirm your choice. Click on OK to delete the pool.
200
Cartridges
About Cartridges
Backup Media
The backup media used by Time Navigator can be of the following kind:
Cartridges
Acartridge refers to either a magnetic tape, a digital optical disk, or even files on a disk. With VTL Disk Drives for instance, a cartridge is simulated by a file created on disk.
Snapshot
A snapshot represents the contents of a volume backed up using one of the currently available snapshot technologies. It is kept on disk. The Time Navigator applications that integrate a snapshot mechanism are:
Oracle NDMP List Filesystem
Replica
A replica represents a copy of data performed with the Time Navigator replication features. A replica is kept on disk.
Cartridge Identification
Cartridges are always associated with an owner. The cartridge owner is the pool label the cartridge belongs to. Time Navigator offers two ways to identify a cartridge:
with the label with the barcode
The label is an actual file written on the cartridge enabling its identification. It contains the following information:
The cartridge name, composed of an optional prefix (common to all cartridges in the catalog), the cartridge owner (identifying the pool or the user the cartridge belongs to) and a number. The cartridge creation date. An optional description.
Chapter 5
201
To identify a cartridge, Time Navigator reads its label, and thus requires that the cartridge be mounted in a drive. The administrator can label cartridges for any user. In Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, the current user can only label cartridges for his own use. To do so, he must belong to a user group containing drives. Prior to any operation, the cartridge label is read: there is no possible identification error. Barcodes, if supported by your library, also let Time Navigator identify a cartridge, but without mounting it in a drive and reading its label. The library picker quickly scans all the cartridges in the library and reads their barcodes. Reading barcodes is much faster than reading labels.
Warning:
Two cartridges cannot have the same bar code because identification problems will occur.
Note:
Labeled and recyclable cartridges belong to a specific catalog whereas spare cartridges do not belong to any particular catalog until they are labeled.
Cartridge Status
When a brand-new cartridge is inserted in a library or a cartridge has just been erased, it appears as an unknown cartridge. Upon identification, a cartridge takes on one of the following statuses:
Cartridge Status
Spare
Description
No Time Navigator label present on tape. The cartridge is ready to be labelled for a backup or an archiving. The cartridge is either brand new or has just been erased. It belongs to the Spare pool. A Time Navigator label is present on the cartridge. It is not recognized as belonging to the current catalog. This cartridge will not be used for a backup. It belongs to the Lost+Found pool. A label is present. It is recognized as belonging to the current catalog.
Lost + Found
Known
202
Cartridge Access
Access to cartridges is controlled. No user can write on the cartridges of another user. A cartridge can only be deleted by its owner or a cartridge administrator (any user for whom this right has been defined, or a privileged user such as: root, Time Navigator privileged user, administrator... etc.).
Priorities for Cartridge Use during a Backup
When a backup starts, cartridges are selected in the following order: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The most recently used, labeled, partially filled, non-closed cartridge. Any other partially filled, non-closed cartridge. Any labelled empty cartridge. Recyclable cartridges. The one with the oldest last backup will be used first, then other recycling cartridges in the same order. See Recycle, page 205 for details. Spare cartridges.
If several cartridges have the same priority status, preference will go to the one located inside the drive, if applicable. If the cartridge that is next in line to be used is not present in the library, Time Navigator automatically selects the one after it.
Job Priority
In Time Navigator, several jobs can be started at the same time. They are executed in the following order:
If a cartridge is already mounted in the drive, all jobs using this cartridge have priority. This avoids mounting and unmounting cartridges repetitively. If no cartridge is mounted in the drive, restore/archiving jobs have priority over backup jobs.
Writing Formats
Several writing formats are available on cartridges:
TiNa (the only format to allow data compression and encoding) tar cpio sidf (backup without using the cache on server) none (raw format) unknown (used for NDMP backup)
Chapter 5
203
Different formats cannot be mixed on a single cartridge. A cartridge begun with the tar format may only contain tar files. However, a cartridge with the TiNa format can contain a compressed file, then a compressed and encoded file, then a file which is neither compressed nor encoded, etc. As the tar and cpio formats comply with POSIX standards, it is possible to restore data with the tar and cpio commands from any Unix machine. In addition, it is possible to restore on a Windows system, data backed up on a Unix system in the Time Navigator tar format (see the documentation of the particular tar command you are using to find out the options you need, i.e., you may need to: specify a no rewind option, specify the block size, create a device (mount -b option)...etc.). On a Windows 2000/2003 machine, if you use the tar or cpio formats, some information is not backed up. For example, some data and attributes associated with files are not backed up. The tina_cart command allows you to read data written in the TiNa format without having Time Navigator installed on the machine. See the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
Externalizing Cartridges
Cartridges can be put offline, externalized and stored in vaults or remote sites. This operation can be useful:
If the library capacity is not sufficient compared with the cartridge retention period. If you want to guard your cartridges in the event of natural or human accidents.
Time Navigator provides assistance for quickly detecting cartridges that are eligible to be put offline (out of the library). By default, eligible cartridges are closed or full, and not recyclable. This feature also allows to draw up the list of offline cartridges that have passed their retention period. Such cartridges should be put online so that they can be recycled.
Cartridge Wear
Cartridge wear is used to estimate the remaining life of a cartridge. It is a percentage calculated from the useful life of a cartridge. The total cartridge life is expressed in life points. It is common to all cartridges of a certain type, thus it is set at the drive level.
204
The first time a cartridge is labelled, it receives the maximum life point for its type. Each time the cartridge label is read by Time Navigator (i.e., prior to rewinding, reading or writing on the tape), a life point is substracted and the wear percentage updated accordingly.
Warning:
As a cartridge gets closer to the end of its useful life, it is recommended to duplicate it in order to avoid losing information. The number of life points is indicated for information only. A cartridge can be faulty with a wear level inferior to 100%.
Note:
To perform cartridge operations, your user profile must give you permission to Edit the media pool of every user. See Defining Personal Access Rights, page 123 for details.
Note:
For manual drives, make sure you insert the appropriate cartridge in the drive before proceeding.
Available Cartridge Operations

Depending on their status, several operations can be performed on cartridges. The following table summarizes the possible cartridge operations.
Operation
Recycle Close Reopen Delete -> Spare Duplicate Writing Label Offline
Spare
no no no yes no no yes yes
Lost + Found
no no no yes yes no no yes
Known
yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes
Chapter 5
205
Recycle
Recycling a cartridge consists in reusing a cartridge already containing backups within the same media pool.
Multi-cartridges jobs
When you recycle a cartridge that contains only part of a job, i.e., when a single backup used more than one cartridge, only that cartridge is recycled. Its status becomes Emptied. Data can still be restored from the remaining non-recycled cartridges. However if the job is an NDMP job, and is spread on several cartridges, the job is recycled on all the cartridges if you recycle any one of the cartridges. A partially recycled cartridge remains full until it is totally recycled. For instance: If an NDMP backup job JOB1 stores data on:
Cart0001 (Full) Cart0002 (Full) Cart0003 (Partially filled)
And another NDMP job JOB2 stores data on:
Cart0003 (Full) Cart0004 (Partially filled)
When you recycle Cart0001:
Cart0001 becomes Emptied Cart0002 becomes Emptied Cart0003 remains Full but JOB1 is no longer available in the cartridge information interface. Cart0004 remains Partialy filled.
If you then recycle Cart0003:
Cart0001 is Emptied Cart0002 is Emptied Cart0003 becomes Emptied Cart0004 remains Partialy filled but JOB2 is no longer available in the cartridge information interface.
206
Recycling steps
Recycling takes place in two steps: 1 2 In the catalog, all the file versions contained on the cartridge are marked as "deleted". The catalog is cleaned to actually remove all the file versions marked as deleted. This step is performed via a maintenance job. The maintenance job is automatically launched every day at noon by default.
The data on the recycled cartridge can no longer be restored via the catalog. However, as long as the cartridge is not used again and that the data is still physically present on the cartridge, it is possible to recover the data via the tina_cart command. For more information, see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface Guide.
Automatic vs. manual recycling
Recycling a cartridge is either an automatic or a manual operation. All known cartridges belonging to a pool with a recycling policy will eventually be automatically recycled if:
Their retention period has expired. A cartridge is needed in the catalog and no other eligible (i.e., labelled empty or partially filled) cartridge is available. The cartridges do not contain the last full backup of a backup folder for a given strategy, nor any incremental backup performed after it. This ensures that the last backup version of a backup folder remains available at all times to be restored.
When recycling is automatically performed, the cartridge with the oldest last backup, i.e, which has been recyclable for the longest time, will be recycled first. When the recycling is manually initiated via Time Navigator Administration Console, only Step 1 is performed immediately. Step 2 takes place on the next scheduled catalog maintenance job, unless it is manually launched using the tina_odbgc -purge command. When the recycling is manually launched via the tina_cart_control
Chapter 5
207
-recycle command, both steps are performed in a row.
Note:
The recycling operation is not available for: - Non-rewritable cartridges (WORM). - Cartridges that have been closed by Time Navigator following an error (cartridges closed by the user are recyclable).
Close
Closing a cartridge is either an automatic or a manual operation. Only a Known cartridge can be closed. A cartridge is automatically closed if: It is full An error occurred during a writing session (e.g., an error such as Media Defect). A cartridge can also be manually closed by its owner or a cartridge administrator. Only labelled, empty or partly filled cartridges can be manually closed. If a cartridge is closed, Time Navigator will not request it again for data writing. It can nevertheless be requested for restore or a new backup if its recycling date is reached. Closing cartridges may be useful if you wish to take cartridges off site for security reasons. Since these cartridges will no longer be physically available, closing them will prevent Time Navigator from requesting them for a backup. Subsequent backups will be performed on new cartridges. Closing cartridges is also very useful in case of catalog restore.
208
If your catalog is damaged and restored, backups C and D performed between the catalog backup and the catalog restore will not exist in the catalog once it is restored. If cartridges are not closed upon restoring the catalog, backup E will overwrite the data written by backups C and D. Although files backed up by backups C and D cannot be restored by the catalog, it is possible to access them using the tina_cart command. To avoid overwriting this data, you should close any partially filled cartridges when you restore your catalog.
Reopen
Reopening a cartridge is a manual operation that consists of opening a previously closed cartridge. Any full cartridge is automatically reopened when recycled by Time Navigator.
Delete
Deleting a cartridge is never automatically performed by Time Navigator. When you delete a cartridge, you delete the cartridge object and all its content from the catalog.
Warning:
Deleting cartridges should be used only for cartridges that have actually been destroyed or lost, to make sure that Time Navigator will not request them at any time in the future.
The actual information contained on the cartridge, including its label, remains. If you reuse a deleted cartridge, it will appear as a Lost+Found, that is, Time Navigator will be able to read its label but will not recognize it as belonging to the catalog you deleted it from.
> Spare
Erasing a cartridge is never automatically performed by Time Navigator. When you erase a cartridge, its label is physically erased. The cartridge becomes spare. The cartridge content is removed from the catalog, but not the cartridge object. This allows the catalog to continue to keep track of the wear and cleaning information after the cartridge has been erased. You should use this feature if the cartridge content is of no interest to you but you want to keep using the cartridge.
Note :
The erasing operation is not available for non-rewritable cartridges (WORM).
Duplicate
Duplicating a cartridge is done manually. It consists in:
Chapter 5
209
Copying data from one cartridge to another. Creating one version per duplicated object (directory or file) in the catalog. A given object can have four versions in the catalog. The same cartridge can thus be duplicated three times.
A cartridge can be duplicated by its owner or a cartridge administrator. When the cartridge administrator duplicates a cartridge, he can copy it onto another pool of cartridges. Any cartridge can be duplicated. Duplicating a cartridge requires the presence of two drives:
A drive for reading data. A drive for writing data.
A cartridge can be duplicated into another set of cartridges or associated with another type of media. Several destination cartridges can correspond to a single source cartridge if storage capacities are different. If a file is spread on two cartridges, the duplication of one of these cartridges will entail the duplication of the whole file, hence the mounting of the two source cartridges.
Label
Labelling only applies to Spare cartridges. Other cartridges already have a label. Once it is labelled, a cartridge can be used to back up data. It can then be kept with no date limitations, deleted, recycled or duplicated. Labelled cartridges are either: Empty. Partly filled. Full. Closed.
Note:
For Time Navigator, a spare cartridge may contain information that has been manually backed up, outside the application. Labelling a cartridge will delete this information.
Offline
When you remove a cartridge from the library either manually or via a mailbox, this functionality allows you to inform the catalog that the cartridge is offline.
210
Viewing Media Information

It is possible to display the characteristics of all the cartridges contained in a given media pool. The list can be exported to a text or HTML file. See Exporting Media Information, page 213.
To view media information
1.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. The Media pool list appears. Empty pools will not appear in this window. Select a pool, then click on OK. The Media Information Window containing all the cartridges of the pool you selected appears. See Media Information Window, page 211 for details.
2.
3.
Click on Column Choice to select the columns you want to view. The Column Choice Window appears. See Column Choice Window, page 212 for details. You may Sort the cartridges according to any column content. To do so, double click in the column heading you want the cartridges to be sorted by. On the first click sorting will be descending. Click a second time to sort in ascending order.
4. 5.
Click on Pool Choice to view cartridges from a different pool. Click on Close to close the window.
Chapter 5
211
Media Information Window

The Pool Label and Pool Name fields correspond to the information you entered when you created the media pool.
Number of Cartridges: Number of all the cartridges existing in the pool. Total Volume: Volume of all the data currently written on all of the cartridges in the pool. Column Choice: Lets you choose the Cartridge Columns to be displayed or hidden in the
window. See Column Choice Window, page 212.

Export: Lets you export cartridge information to a file in either plain text or html format. Display In/Out Status: Allows you to decide whether or not you want that status displayed.
By default the box is unchecked when you open the window, to avoid delaying the opening of the window if there is a great number of cartridges for which the status has to be determined.
In/Out Period: Lets you modify the cartridge externalization time period criteria. Pool Choice: Lets you select another media pool in order to display the related cartridge
information.
Cartridge List: Contains all the cartridges belonging to the selected pool. Cartridge Operations Recycle: Consists in reusing a cartridge already containing backups within the same media
pool.
Close: Prevents any writing operation on the cartridge. Reopen: Opens a previously closed cartridge. Delete: Removes the cartridge and all versions it contains from the catalog. > Spare: Assigns the cartridge to the Spare media pool, erasing its contents, but keeping the cartridge history in the catalog. Duplicate: Copies data from one cartridge to another.
212
Off-line: Puts the cartridge off-line in the catalog and moves it to the mailbox slot (if any),
allowing you to physically remove the cartridge from the library.

Information: Provides a set of statistics concerning cartridge usage.
Column Choice Window

The Column Choice window allows you to modify the column selection in the Media Information window.
All: Displays all columns in the Media Information window. Invert: Makes all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns
selected.
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Media Information window. Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Media Information window. > Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the > Button to move the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also double click on columns individually to move them to the Visible Columns list. < Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the < Button to move the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also double click on columns individually to move them to the Hidden Columns list. Available Columns
Name: The cartridge name is automatically created by Time Navigator. It consists
at least of the pool label followed by a number corresponding to the creation order of the cartridge in the pool.
Barcode: Barcode of the cartridge, if any. Volume (MB): Volume of data written on the cartridge. Status: Indicates whether a media is closed or not and why. Filling Level: The possible values for the filling status are: Partly filled, Empty,
Chapter 5
213
Emptied, or full.
Note:
An "emptied" cartridge indicates that the cartridge has been recycled in the catalog but its label is not physically erased, whereas the status "empty" indicates that the cartridge label has been erased.
Last Recycling: Date of the last recycling. If the cartridge has never been recycled, this date is the same as the creation date. Location: Either the library name or "External" for a non robotized drive or if the cartridge was brought offline. Rule: Name of the security rule if the cartridge contains data secured by a rule. A cartridge cannot contain data secured by different rules. See the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide for details on secured backup. Description: By default the catalog name if the cartridge has been labeled by the user. Creation: Date of the cartridge creation in the catalog. Last Backup: Date of the last backup performed on the cartridge. Equivalent to last
recycling date if the cartridge is empty.
Format: Writing format, either TiNa, tar, cpio, sidf, none or unknown. Wear level: Percentage calculated from the Cartridge Life Cycle parameter found in the Drive Properties window. See Cartridge Wear, page 203 for details. Retention Period: Cartridge recycling status: Infinite, Expired since (days, hours),
Expires in (days, hours) or WORM (non-rewritable cartridge).
In/Out Status: Ready Offline (eligible to be put offline), Ready Online (eligible to be put online), or - . Type: Equivalent to the drive type. Label: Label of the pool to which the cartridge belongs. Tape File: Number of tape files present on the tape. A tape file contains all the
objects written during the same backup session.
Exporting Media Information

To export Media Information
1. 2.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. The media pool list appears. Select a media pool in the list.
214
3.
In the Media Information Window, click on Export. The Export window appears:
4. 5.
Specify the export parameters as described in Export Window, page 214. Click on OK.
The exported file is created in the location you specified.
Export Window
File: Indicates the name of the text file the list is exported to. Enter an absolute path in
that field or click on the Browse Button.

Warning:
The file extension must match the selected file format (.txt or .html). /Documents/list.txt /tmp/list C:\temp\list.txt
Browse Button: Lets you select a name and location for the export file. Export only Selected Lines: Lets you only export information for the objects selected in the
list.
Chapter 5
215
File Format Tab
File Format: Lets you choose the format of the export file, either Text or HTML. Encoding: Lets you choose the encoding for the export file, either Latin 1
(ISO8859-1), US ASCII or UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character values into a byte stream).
Contents Tab
Export Visible Columns: Check this box to export all the information displayed in the
list.
Note:
When the Export Visible Columns box is checked, the selection in the Export/Do not Export lists is not taken into account.
Export: List of the columns that will be exported. Don't export: List of the columns that will not be exported.
Uncheck the Export Visible Columns box and doubleclick on the column heading to switch them from the Export list to the Do not export list and inversely.
Recycling a Cartridge
Recycling cartridges is performed automatically if you select the Data stored during option when creating or editing a pool. In that case, a cartridge is recycled, as needed, during a backup if no other cartridge is available, and if at least one cartridge has reached the end of its retention period. See Recycle, page 205 for details. In order to minimize drive use, cartridge recycling takes place in two steps: in the first step, a drive is allocated to modify the cartridge label to indicate that the cartridge becomes available for a writing session. The second step does not require a drive and concerns only the cleaning of the catalog. The catalog cleaning is automatically performed every day at noon. You can modify the time of cleaning with the Catalog Cleaning Time (date_run_catalog_gc) tunable. You can also cancel the automatic catalog cleaning job using the Disable Daily Catalog Cleaning (disable_catalog_gc) tunable. In that case, the catalog cleaning must be manually performed using the tina_odbgc command. For details concerning the tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
216
For details concerning the Time Navigator commands, see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide. You can also recycle a cartridge manually by following the procedure below.
Note:
The recycling operation is not available for: - Non-rewritable cartridges (WORM). - Cartridges that have been closed by Time Navigator following an error (cartridges closed by the user are recyclable)
To recycle a cartridge manually
Note:
If the cartridge(s) you want to recycle contains the last full backup, or any of the incremental backups performed after the last full backup, of a backup folder for a given strategy, a warning appears to inform you that your operation may corrupt data integrity. You will have the option either to proceed with the recycling or recycle only the cartridges that do not contain critical data. This ensures that the last backup version of a backup folder remains available to be restored at all times. Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the media to recycle in the list and click on Recycle. The Cartridge Recycle window appears. It displays the available drives. Click on Start. When the progress bar is full, click on Close. The recycling operation described here only takes care of step 1 in the recycling process (see Recycle, page 205 for details). To actually complete the removal of all recycled file versions from the catalog, either wait for the next catalog maintenance job to occur (that job is automatically launched every day at 12:00) or launch the tina_odbgc -purge command (see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Note:
Chapter 5
217
Closing a Cartridge
A cartridge is automatically closed if:
It is full. An error occurs when writing data (ex: an error such as a media defect).
You can manually close a partially filled or empty cartridge at any time to avoid writing on it. See Close, page 207 for details.
To close a cartridge
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the media to close in the list and click on Close. The Cartridge Close window appears. It displays the available drives. Click on Start. When the progress bar is full, click on Close.
Reopening a Cartridge
It is possible to reopen a cartridge that has been previously closed.
To reopen a cartridge
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the media to reopen in the list and click on Reopen. The Cartridge Reopen window appears. It displays the available drives. Click on Start. When the progress bar is full, click on Close.
218
Deleting a Cartridge
When you delete a cartridge, you delete the cartridge object and all its content from the catalog. The actual information contained on the cartridge, including its label, remains. If you reuse a deleted cartridge in the same catalog, it will appear as a Lost+Found, that is, Time Navigator will be able to read its label but will not recognize it as belonging to the catalog you deleted it from.
Note:
Cartridges that have been destroyed or lost should be deleted, to make sure that Time Navigator does not request them at any time in the future.
To delete a cartridge
1. 2. 3. 4.
Note:
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the cartridge(s) to delete in the list and click on Delete. The Cartridge Deletion window appears. It displays the available drives. Click on Start. Deleting can be quite lengthy if the cartridge contains a high number of objects.
Warning:
Removing versions from the catalog is a very delicate operation that must not be interrupted. Do not quit the application during this operation or you may corrupt your catalog.
5.
When the progress bar is full, click on Close.
Erasing a Cartridge
When you erase a cartridge, the cartridge label is physically erased. The cartridge is labeled as spare. The cartridge content becomes inaccessible for the catalog, but the cartridge object still exists. This allows the catalog to keep the wear and cleaning information after the cartridge has been erased.
Chapter 5
219
You should use this feature if the cartridge content is of no interest to you and you want to reuse the cartridge.
Note:
This operation is not available for non-rewritable (WORM) cartridges.
To erase a cartridge
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the cartridge(s) to erase in the list, then click on -> Spare. The Cartridge Erase window appears. It displays the available drives. Click on Start. When the progress bar is full, click on Close.
Duplicating a Cartridge
Duplicating a cartridge can be divided in two operations:
The copy of data from one cartridge to another. The creation of one version by copied object (directory or file) in the catalog. Duplicating a cartridge requires at least two drives.
Note:
To duplicate a cartridge
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the cartridge(s) to duplicate in the list, then click on Duplicate. The Media Pool Selection window appears. Select the pool you want the duplicated cartridge to belong to then click on OK. The Cartridge Duplicating window appears. Click on Start.
220
6.
Note:
When the progress bar is full, click on Close. Duplicating a cartridge can take a long time if the number of backed up files is high. The operation can entail the mounting of several source cartridges if a file belonging to the cartridge to be duplicated is spread out on several cartridges.
Note:
Once the duplication is complete, the duplicated versions become the primary versions, and the original versions become secondary. Thus if a restore is required Time Navigator requests the duplicated cartridge. You may modify this behavior with the tunable "Use Source Cartridge when Restoring Duplicated Cartridge" (see the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details).
Putting a Cartridge Off-line

The off-line operation consists of removing a cartridge from the library and putting it in the out mailbox.
Warning:
If the library is not equipped with at least one out mailbox, you have to manually remove the cartridge from the slot, but the catalog is informed that the cartridge is no longer inside the library.
To put a cartridge off-line
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the cartridge(s) to put offline. Click on Off-line. The Set Cartridge Offline window appears.
Tip:
If you are putting offline more cartridges than there are mailbox slots in the library, check the Retry if mailbox full box. When this option is checked, once all mailbox slots are full, Time Navigator waits for the administrator to empty the slots and places cartridges into the slots as soon as they are emptied, until all selected cartridges are put offline.
Chapter 5
221
If you do not check the option, an operator request is issued each time the mailbox is full, thus sending the administrator back and forth between the library to empty the mailbox and Time Navigator Administration Console to suspend and acknowledge the operator requests. 5. 6. Click on Start. When the progress bar is full, click on Close.
Viewing Cartridge Statistical Information

You can view statistical information for a single cartridge such as hours of use, last mode used, and number of mounts.
To view a single cartridge information
1. 2. 3.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. Select the cartridge that you want to view the information for and click on Information. The Cartridge Information window appears. See Cartridge Information Window - Information Tab, page 221 or the Cartridge Information Window Jobs Tab, page 223.
Cartridge Information Window - Information Tab
222
Hours of Use: The number of hours the cartridge was in use. Last Use Date: The last date the cartridge was used. Last Use Mode: The last use was for either writing or reading. Number of Mounts: The number of times the cartridge was mounted in a drive. Number of Tape Files: The number of tape files present on the tape. A tape file contains all
the objects written during a single backup session.

Number of Recyclings: The number of times the cartridge has been recycled. Recyclable: Recycling status: Since (days, hours), In (days, hours), No (data integrity), No
(worn cartridge), No (data integrity), No (unknown reason), No (WORM), No, or - (if the cartridge is empty or belongs to the Spare or Lost and Found pool).
Volume Read: The amount of information that has been read from the cartridge. Volume Written: The amount of information that has been written on the cartridge since the
beginning of its life. This value is not reinitialized when the cartridge is recycled.
Filling: The amount of information currently on the cartridge. On a new cartridge that has never been recycled, this value will be the same as that for Volume Written. Comment: Allows you to enter any information about this cartridge that can be of use for
later reference. The comment is recorded in the Time Navigator catalog.

Note:
If you had already filled the Comment field when creating or editing the media pool, the same comment appears in the cartridge Comment field. See Creating a Media Pool, page 196 for details.
Chapter 5
223
Cartridge Information Window - Jobs Tab
ID: Unique identification number for each job. Folder: Name of the backup or archiving folder involved with the job. Description: Contains the job type, i.e., Backup (full or incremental), Synthetic, Archiving, Restoration, Cartridge Duplication or Maintenance. Recyclable: Data recycling status:
Yes if the data is recyclable Data integrity if the job contains either the last full backup, or any of the incremental
backups performed after the last full backup, of a backup folder for a given strategy. Such data is not recyclable. This ensures that the last backup version of a backup folder remains available at all times to be restored.
Data in retention time period if the data has not yet reach the maximum retention period. Such data is not recyclable.
Status: Indicates the job status.
Note:
If the job is cancelled on request or on error, the data is deemed unreliable to perform a restore and it automatically appears as Recyclable data.
224
Submit Date: Date and time when the job is submitted.
End Date: Date and time when the job is finished or cancelled.
Externalizing a Cartridge
The cartridge externalization feature provides assistance for quickly detecting cartridges that are eligible to be put offline and externalized in order to free space in the library. It also allows you to view cartridges that should be brought online again in order to be recycled. For details concerning the cartridge externalization feature, see Externalizing Cartridges, page 203.
Offline Criteria
By default, Time Navigator considers that a cartridge is eligible to be brought offline if it meets the following criteria :
It is online. The name of the library appears in the Location column of the Media Information window. It belongs to a cyclical media pool. It is either full or closed. It does not contain critical data (last full backup and following incremental backups). It will not be recyclable within 5 days.
Online Criteria
By default, Time Navigator considers that a cartridge is eligible to be brought online if it meets the following criteria :
It is offline. The External status appears in the Location column of the Media Information window. It belongs to a cyclical media pool. It will be recyclable in less than 1 day.
To view cartridges eligible to be brought off/online
1. 2. 3.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. The Media Information window appears. In the In/Out Status column, check the cartridge status:
Chapter 5
225
"Offline Ready": the cartridge is eligible to be brought offline. "Online Ready": the cartridge is eligible to be brought online.
To modify the time period criteria
Note:
Since the calculation of these criteria can take a long time, you may disactivate this function by unchecking the checkbox next to this button. When the checkbox is disactivated, the In/Out Status button is greyed out and no information appears in the In/Out Status column. Choose Storage-Media-Management. Select a pool in the media pool list. The Media Information window appears. Click on the In/Out Period button. The In/Out Period window appears.
1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Modify the settings as decribed in In/Out Period Window, page 226. Click on OK.
Command Line
If you would rather view all the cartridges of the catalog instead of only the cartridges belonging to one media pool, use the command line feature: the tina_library_control command for cartridges eligible to be brought offline and the tina_cart_control command for cartridges eligible to be brought online. The command options allow to filter and sort the list according to your needs. See the Time Navigator Command Line Interface Guide, for details.
226
In/Out Period Window

Displays cartridges ready to put offline within: if you choose 2 weeks, the cartridge is marked
as "Offline Ready" only if it is recyclable in more than 2 weeks.

Displays cartridges ready to put online within: if you choose 6 days, the cartridge is marked as "Online Ready" only if it is recyclable in less than 6 days.
Replacing a Cartridge
Defective, worn-out or otherwise unsuitable cartridges must be replaced physically in the Library, and logically in Time Navigator.
To replace a cartridge with a short retention period:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. Close the cartridge and put it off-line in Time Navigator. As soon as the cartridge becomes Recyclable since, delete it in Time Navigator. In the time between these two actions, insert a new cartridge into the library.
To replace a cartridge with a long retention period:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. If the cartridge is still readable and working, duplicate it. After duplication, delete the original cartridge in the catalog, and remove it from the library. If the cartridge is only partially readable, close it and put it offline. As soon as the cartridge becomes Recyclable since, delete it in Time Navigator. In the time between these two actions, insert a new cartridge into the library.
Writing a Cartridge Label

During a writing session, if a spare cartridge (not labelled) is needed, Time Navigator will label it before writing on it. This procedure is therefore optional. However it is possible to label cartridges ahead of time.
Chapter 5
227
For more information on cartridge labels, see Cartridge Identification, page 200.
Note:
For Time Navigator, a spare cartridge can contain information that has been manually backed up. Labeling a cartridge deletes this information.
Note:
Time Navigator media administrators rights are required to perform this operation.
To write a cartridge label
1. 2.
Choose Storage-Media-Write Label. The Media Pool list appears. Select the media pool for which you want to label cartridges, then click on OK. An error message is displayed if no drive is associated with the media pool, otherwise, the Label Cartridge window appears.
3.
Enter the number of cartridges you want to label. They will be labelled in a row. The description field contains, by default, the catalog name. You may change the field content. Whatever description you enter will be included on each cartridge. Click on OK. If the drive needs to be manually loaded, insert the cartridge to label in the drive. The In Progress window appears. It keeps you informed of the labeling process. While labeling is in progress, click on Cancel to stop labeling. Once labeling is over, click on Close. Labeling occurs in the drive associated with the pool.
4. 5.
Note:
An error message is displayed if the cartridge is not spare (cartridge already labeled), is write protected or if the manual drive is empty.
228
Reading a Cartridge Label

Reading the label of a cartridge can only be performed with Time Navigator Library Manager. See Label vs. Bar Code Viewing, page 243.
Adding a Prefix to a Cartridge Label

In addition to labeling cartridges, you can add a prefix to all the cartridges belonging to a given catalog in order to identify them easily if you are working with several catalogs. Adding a prefix can only apply to future cartridge creation. It does not affect current cartridges. For more information on labels, see Cartridge Identification, page 200.
To add a prefix to a cartridge label
1. 2. 3.
Choose Storage-Media-Prefix. The Edit Prefix of Cartridge Labels window appears. Enter alphanumerical characters in the Prefix of Cartridge Labels area to add a prefix to the cartridge labels of the working catalog. Click on OK. Click on Yes to confirm the prefix.
Editing the Cartridge Life Cycle

The Cartridge Life Cycle parameter indicates the maximum number of times a cartridge label can be read by a drive before being worn out. It is set at the drive level, i.e., it will be the same for all the cartridges used by a particular drive. This parameter is set by default according to the drive type you are creating.
Note:
The Cartridge Life Cycle parameter is used by Time Navigator to calculate the Cartridge Wear level.
See Creating a Drive, page 170 and Cartridge Wear, page 203 for details. You may edit the Cartridge Life Cycle parameter at any point.
To edit the cartridge life cycle
1. 2.
Select the drive to edit in the Network area. Choose Drive-Properties. The Drive Properties window is displayed.
Chapter 5
229
3. 4. 5.
Select the General tab. Modify the Cartridge Life Cycle settings as needed. Click on OK to validate the operation.
Displaying the Cartridge Wear Level

The Cartridge Wear level is calculated with the Cartridge Life Cycle parameter found in the Drive Properties window. See Creating a Drive, page 170 and Cartridge Wear, page 203 for details.
To display the cartridge wear level
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Storage-Media-Management. The media pool list is displayed. Select a Pool. The Media Information window appears. Click on Column Choice. Select the Wear Level column. Close the Column Selection window. The Wear Level percentage is displayed. When a cartridge is worn, it is recommended to duplicate it in order to avoid losing information (see Duplicating a Cartridge, page 219).
Warning:
Setting the Cleaning Cartridge Parameters

If you are using robotized drives and you want Time Navigator to manage drive cleaning automatically, you must set the following:
The Time of Use since last cleaning and Time of Use before cleaning parameters in the Drive Properties window. This operation is described in Automatically Cleaning Drives, page 184. The cleaning cartridge parameters in the Library Properties window.
To set the cleaning cartridge parameters
1. 2.
Select a library and choose Library-Properties and click on Library Properties. Click on the Standard tab.
230
3. 4.
Make sure the Cleaning Slot option is checked. Define or modify the cleaning cartridge settings:
The Reserved Slot in the library for the cleaning cartridge. In most cases, when you create a library, the reserved slot for cleaning is 0. Enter the slot number you want to use for the cleaning cartridge. The number of Cleanings already performed with the cleaning cartridge. By default, when you create a library, the number of cleaning is 0. The cleaning cartridge Life Cycle. It is the maximum number of cleanings authorized with the cartridge. This is defined by the cleaning cartridge manufacturer.
5.
Click on OK to validate the operation. Setting the cleaning cartridge information properly is very important since you may damage your drive if you use a worn cleaning cartridge.
Warning:
The counter representing the number of cleanings already performed with the cartridge is automatically incremented each time you use the cleaning cartridge.
Chapter 5
231
If you have not reserved a slot for the cleaning cartridge, you must manually manage its wear by specifying every cleaning performed with the cartridge. Time Navigator automatically asks you to change the cleaning cartridge when the number of performed cleanings is greater than the cartridge life cycle. You must then manually put the cleaning cartridge in the reserved slot. The cleaning cartridge settings can be defined when creating a library or modified when editing it.
232
233
C H A P T E R
In this chapter, both terms "media" and "cartridge" are used to refer to either a magnetic tape, a digital optical disk, or files on a disk.
Managing Libraries
Libraries can be controlled and managed with Time Navigator Library Manager. This application lets you:
View the library content Perform library operations Perform drive operations Perform media operations Perform slot operations In order to use Time Navigator Library Manager, a user must have been assigned the Library Use rights in his profile. See Defining Personal Access Rights, page 123 for details.
Note:
To view the library contents
Choose Library-Operations. If the current catalog uses a single library, it will be displayed in Time Navigator Library Manager. If several libraries are present you will be asked to select the library to display. You have the option to use the command line to start the Time Navigator Library Manager. If you use the command line, you will have to specify the catalog and the library to be displayed unless you are working in a single catalog, single library
234
environment. Use the following parameters:

tina_library -catalog <catalog_name> -library <library_name>.
Or you can simply enter tina_library and select items in the windows as they appear on the screen. Or use Windows Start menu to launch Time Navigator Library Manager. Time Navigator Library Manager appears:
Viewing a Different Catalog or Library

You may at any time change the catalog or the library you are viewing.
To change catalog
1. 2.
Choose Catalog-Connect. Select a catalog in the Catalog Selection Window and click on OK.
Chapter 6
235
To change library
1. 2.
Choose Library-Change.
Select a library in the Library Selection Window and click on OK.
Label vs. Bar Code Viewing

You have the option at any time to switch between viewing Label, Full Label or Bar Code information for the cartridges, provided that the library you are using does support Bar Codes.
To choose a viewing option
Choose View-View and one of the following:
Label: to view the cartridge label as defined in the media pool properties. Bar Code: to view the cartridge bar code, if your library supports them. Full label: to view the cartridge full label, if the label is longer than the default slot size. The slot size is then modified to suit the label size.
Modifying Slots Arrangement

You can modify the library properties to have slots arranged either horizontally or vertically, modify the location of the first slot and set the number of slots per line/ column.
To modify slots arrangement
1. 2. 3.
Choose Library-Properties. Select the Geometry Tab. Modify the geometry options according to your needs.
See Editing Library Properties, page 235 for details.
Library Operations
Editing Library Properties
You may verify or modify your library properties at any time. The library properties are set by default upon library creation. Time Navigator assigns properties to a library according to manufacturers specifications.
236
The library properties contain information such as whether or not a Cleaning Cartridge is being used, whether the library manages Bar Code or not, whether the slots in the window are displayed horizontally or vertically, ...etc. Not all properties can be edited. Even though Time Navigator recognizes libraries and sets their properties, you can edit them in order to specify your library behaviour.
Warning:
If mishandled, editing library properties can prevent the library from working properly.
To edit library properties
1. 2. 3. 4.
Tip:
Choose Library-Properties. Select the tab containing the properties you want to edit: Standard, Generic, Specific or Geometry. See Library Properties, page 237 for details. Edit the properties as needed. Click on OK. If you have made an undesired modification, click on Default configuration to get all library properties back to the Time Navigator original settings.
Chapter 6
237
Library Properties
For a complete list of Library Properties, see Appendix 1: Advanced Library Properties, page 645.
Reinitializing Libraries
Reinitializing a library allows Time Navigator to match the library logical status with the library actual physical status. The logical status is the image of the library Time Navigator builds in the catalog.
Note:
A Bar code reinitialization is automatically performed when the library is first created.
238
Bar code, Read Label or Full Inventory Reinitialization

Bar code The Bar Code reinitialization can be used even if the library does not support barcode. In that case, the library simply checks the full/empty and available/not available status of the slots and drives. This type of reinitialization does not involve any reading or moving of the cartridges and is therefore much faster than the other reinitialization types. A Read Label reinitialization involves moving and reading every single cartridge selected for the reinitialization, but it may be unable to solve inconsistencies, if a cartridge has been moved manually, for example. When you perform a Read Label reinitialization, any unknown cartridge whose label is displayed as ?????, will be identified by Time Navigator. A Full inventory consists in checking the full/empty and available/not available status of the slots and drives and in identifying the cartridges through their bar code, when this is possible. Then, the cartridges which remain unknown (????) are identified through the reading of their label. This is the slowest type of reinitialization, but it gives the surest reading of library status.
Read Label
Full Inventory
Warning:
A Read Label reinitialization or a Full Inventory can be quite lengthy depending on your configuration. It may vary from a few minutes to a few hours.
Full vs. Partial Reinitialization

A reinitialization can be either partial: only selected locations are synchronized, or full: all locations in the libraries, including drives and mailbox slots, are synchronized.
Tip:
A partial reinitialization can be used to identify a single cartridge.
During the reinitialization, the library is busy and Time Navigator Library Manager is not active. You can also manually trigger the library reinitialization.
Launching a Library Reinitialization

To launch a full reinitialization:
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, choose Library-Reinitialization-Full or
Chapter 6
239
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select a library, choose LibraryReinitialization
or Right Click in Time Navigator Library Manager background, select

Reinitialization
and one of the following:
Bar Code: to launch a bar code reinitialization. Read Label: to launch a label reinitialization. Full Inventory: to launch a library full inventory.
2.
In the Question window, click on Yes to start the reinitialization.
To launch a partial reinitialization:
1. 2.
Select the locations you want to synchronized (slots, drives, mailboxes) in Time Navigator Library Manager. Choose Library-Reinitialization-Selection only and one of the following:
Bar Code: to launch a bar code reinitialization. Read Label: to launch a label reinitialization. Full Inventory: to launch a library full inventory.
3.
To identify a single cartridge, right click on the cartridge, select Identify.
During the reinitialization, a picker (mechanical arm) is displayed on the bottom right of the library icon in the Network area to indicate that the library is being reinitialized.
Note:
Reinitializing a library can also be performed using tina_library_control, a functionality available in the command line. For more information on the tina_library_control command, see the "tina_library_control" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
240
Drives
Drive Information
Time Navigator Library Manager indicates whether the drive is full or empty, whether the drive is active or not. It also shows the alarms and locks applied to a drive and the drive activity, if any. There are three kinds of information.
Drive Status
Enabled Maintenance Enabled for Restore Only Disabled (See Note 1:) Except status (See Note 2:)
Visual Clue
No specific sign on drive icon A yellow wrench on drive icon A crossed out pencil on drive icon Red cross on drive icon A yellow triangle on drive icon when the drive contains a cartridge
Drive Status
Empty Full Minor Alarm Major Alarm Critical Alarm Locked Note 3:) (See
Visual Clue
Drive is of same color as background Drive is green, the cartridge name appears Yellow dot on the right of the drive icon Orange dot on the right of the drive icon Red dot on the right of the drive icon A lock appears on the drive
Drive Activity
Reading Writing Forwarding
Visual Clue
Green arrow under the drive icon Red dot under the drive icon Two right-pointing black arrows under the drive icon
Chapter 6
241
Rewinding
Two left-pointing black arrows under the drive icon
Note 1:
When a drive is disabled, it indicates that the drive is unavailable. This unavailability can be of two types:
Logical unavailability: Time Navigator decides whether a drive is available or not. Physical unavailability: the decision resides with the library handler. The drive may be damaged. In this case, the red cross on the drive is dimmed.
Note 2:
When a cartridge in the drive has an Except status, it indicates that the physical drive contents does not match the catalog contents. Choose Library-Operations-Reinitialization-Full Inventory to solve the inconsistency.
Note 3:
There are two types of locks:
A lock on the cartridge object located inside the drive (the lock appears in the drive upper left corner). It indicates that the cartridge itself is reserved by a Time Navigator process. A lock on the drive (the lock appears in the drive lower left corner). It indicates that the drive is reserved by a Time Navigator process.
Modifying a Drive Mode

You may need to modify a drive's mode (Drive Information) in order to perform maintenance operations or to repair it if it is broken.
242
The following table shows the different modes a drive can be in:
Drive Mode
Enabled Enabled for restore only
Description
All operations can be performed. Only restore operations can be performed and non job related operations such as: erasing, recycling, labelling, or identifying a cartridge; cleaning or testing the drive, reinitializing the library. Note: During a restore, drives in the mode Enabled for Restore only are used in priority. If none is available, another drive is chosen. In addition, if the cartridge required to perform the restore is already mounted in a drive, that drive is used for the restore regardless of the drive mode.
Disabled Maintenance
No operation can be performed. Only a drive test, a cartridge identification, or a cartridge move can be performed.
To change the drive mode:
1. 2.
Select the drive you want to operate on.. Choose Drive and one of the following: Enable, Enable for restore only, Maintenance or Disable, depending on the mode you want to apply to the drives.
Enabling/Disabling
By default, when you create a drive, it is disabled. You must enable it in order to perform any job (backup, archiving, restore...). The disabled status indicates that the drive is not used for performing backups or archiving. If a drive is actually disconnected from the host, for maintenance reasons or for any other reason, you must temporarily disable it to prevent Time Navigator from attempting to use it. See also Changing the Mode of the Drive, page 182 and Testing Drives, page 183.
To enable/disable a drive
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive you want to enable/disable. Choose Drive-Enable or Drive-Disable. or
Chapter 6
243
Right click on a drive and choose Enable or Disable.
Testing a Drive
Testing a drive allows you to check if it works correctly.
Note:
A Spare cartridge must be present in the library to be able to perform a drive test.
To test a drive:
1.
In the Library Operation window, select the drive you want to test, choose Drive-Test. Time Navigator performs a series of tests on the drive.
Tip:
You can also right click on a drive and choose Test. Time Navigator performs a series of tests on the drive.
2.
Click on Close when all the tests are finished.
Cleaning a Drive
Drives must be cleaned on a regular basis to maintain them in good working conditions.
To clean a drive with a dedicated Cleaning slot:
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive you want to clean. Choose Drive-Cleaning. or Right click on a drive and choose Cleaning.
To clean a drive without a dedicated Cleaning slot:
1. 2. 3.
Put a cleaning cartridge in the drive to be cleaned. In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive to be cleaned. Choose Drive-Cleaning.
244

Use this operation to eject a media from a drive. You do not have to specify the destination slot, Time Navigator will choose it.
To eject a media
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the drive you want to empty and choose Drive-Eject Media. or Right click on a drive and choose Eject Media.
Chapter 6
245
Cartridges
Slot/Cartridge Information
The following table sums up the visual information attached to a slot:

Slot
S0 S1
Description
Cleaning slot, full. In most cases, Slot 0 is reserved for cleaning. Slot disabled (catalog level) Full slot with unknown cartridge
Visual Clue
Slot is green, name of cartridge Cleaning appears with blue cross on tape icon No-entry sign appear on slot Slot is green, ???? appears on cartridge Slot is green, name of cartridge appears A lock appears in the slot upper left corner
S2
Full slot with spare cartridge Cartridge in slot is locked (reserved by a process) (See Note 1:)
246
Slot
S3, S4 S5
Description
Empty available slot Full slot with Lost+Found cartridge Cartridge in slot is locked (reserved by a process) Slot is locked (reserved by a process) (See Note 1:) A major alarm has been issued on cartridge in slot
Visual Clue
Slot is of same color as background, a dash appears on slot LF appears in the cartridge label A lock appears in the slot upper left corner A lock appears in the slot lower left corner Slot is orange (a red slot would indicate a fatal alarm, a yellow slot, a minor alarm) No cartridge name appears, lock in the lower left corner, dash ????? appears on the cartridge and a yellow triangle appears on the left of the cartridge.
S6 S7
Empty slots, available and locked (reserved by a process) (See Note 1:) Except status slot, the physical library contents does not match the catalog contents. Perform a Full Inventory reinitialization (Library-OperationsReinitialization-Full Inventory menu). Empty slot disabled (library handler level) (See Note 2:) Empty slot disabled (catalog and library handler level) (See Note 2:) Empty slot, disabled (catalog level) (See Note 2:)
S8 S9 S10
No cartridge name appears, broken in Unix, dimmed in Windows, dash on slot No cartridge name, dimmed no-entry sign, broken in Unix, dimmed in Windows, dash No cartridge name, no-entry sign
Note 1:
There are two types of locks:
A lock on the cartridge object (upper lock). It indicates that the cartridge itself is reserved by a Time Navigator process. A lock on the slot (lower lock). It indicates that the slot is reserved by a Time Navigator process.
Note 2:
When a slot is disabled, it indicates that the slot is unavailable. This unavailability can be of two types:
Logical unavailability: Time Navigator decides whether a slot is available or not. For instance if the library is shared between several catalogs, some slots may be unavailable for a particular catalog.
Chapter 6
247
Physical unavailability: the decision resides with the library handler. The slot may be damaged.
Media Operations
Some of the media operations available from Time Navigator Library Manager are the same as the ones available through the main menu Storage-Media-Management in Time Navigator Administration Console.
To Recycle, Close, Reopen, Erase or Delete media
In the Library Operation window, select the cartridges you need, choose MediaOperations, select All Cartridges or Selection Only and select the operation you want to perform. or Right click on a cartridge, select the operation you want to perform. In addition, with Time Navigator Library Manager, you may identify a cartridge, bring a cartridge On or Off line and move a cartridge from one slot to another.
Cartridge Status
If a cartridge is unknown to the catalog, it will appear in the library with questions marks. You must identify it before attempting any operation on that cartridge. This operation is equivalent to performing a library reinitialization for a single cartridge. Upon identification, a cartridge will take on one of the following statuses:
Cartridge Status
Spare
Description
No Time Navigator label present on tape. The cartridge is ready to be labelled for a backup or an archiving. The cartridge is either brand new or has just been erased. It belongs to the Spare pool. A Time Navigator label is present on the cartridge. It is not recognized as belonging to the current catalog. This cartridge will not be used for a backup. It belongs to the Lost+Found pool. A Time Navigator label is present. It is recognized as belonging to the current catalog.
Lost + Found
Known
See Cartridge Status, page 201 for details.
248
Identifying a Cartridge
To identify a cartridge:
In the Library Operations window, right click on the cartridge to identify and select Identify. or Choose Reinitialization-Selection Only- Read Label. See Reinitializing Libraries, page 237 for details.
Bringing Cartridges On/Off line

The offline operation consists of removing a cartridge from the library. The online operation consists of putting a cartridge in the library.
Selecting cartridges to be put on/off line
Time Navigator provides assistance for quickly detecting cartridges that are eligible to be put offline and externalized. This feature also allows you to draw up the list of offline cartridges that should be put online because they have passed their retention period. See Externalizing Cartridges, page 203 for details. The lists are displayed via two commands: tina_library_control for cartridges to be put offline and tina_cart_control for cartridges to be put online. Some options allows you to sort and filter the cartridge lists according to your needs. See the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details.
Bringing Cartridges On/Off line
Before bringing cartridge(s) online, make sure you have enough empty available slot(s) in your library.
Note:
To bring a cleaning cartridge online or offline, see Cleaning Slot, page 253.
Chapter 6
249
Putting Cartridges On-line

Note:
Only off-line cartridges can be put on-line.
To bring cartridges online with a mailbox
1. 2. 3. 4.
Put the cartridge(s) in the "in" or "in/out" mailbox slot(s) and proceed. Select all the mailbox slot(s). Perform a Bar Code reinitialization, to inform the catalog of the empty/full status of the mailbox slot(s). Select the mailbox slot(s) containing cartridges to be brought on line and choose Media-On-Line. or Right click on the mailbox slot(s) one after the other and select On-Line (this menu is only available if the slot is full).
The cartridge(s) will be put in available slots and identified. If no drive is available at the time, the cartridges will appear as unknown (????).
To bring cartridges online without a mailbox
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, choose Media-On-Line. The following screen appears:
Note:
When you select the Media-On-Line command, all the slots available to receive a cartridge become locked to avoid being used by another procedure. Thus the non locked available slots in the screen above refer to slots that were not locked and available before the operation started.
250
2. 3. 4.
Click on View List to get a list of the slots available to receive a cartridge. Insert the cartridge(s), close the library door and click on OK. Time Navigator performs a partial barcode (read label if barcode is not an option) reinitialization of all the slots available to receive a cartridge.
Putting Cartridges Off-line

Note:
Only on-line cartridges can be put off-line.
To put cartridges off-line with a mailbox:
1. 2.
Select the cartridges to put off-line. Choose Media-Off-line. The Off-line Confirm Window appears.
Tip:
If you are putting off-line more cartridges than there are mailbox slots in the library, check the Retry if mailbox full box. Once all mailbox slots are full, Time Navigator waits for the administrator to empty the slots and places cartridges into the slots as soon as they are emptied, until all selected cartridges are put off-line. If you do not check the option, an operator request is issued each time the mailbox is full, thus sending the administrator back and forth between the library to empty the mailbox and Administration Console to suspend and acknowledge the operator requests.
3. 4. 5.
Check that the selected cartridges are the ones that you want to put off-line and click on Confirm. Empty the mailboxes manually. Perform a Bar Code Reinitialization in order to indicate the mailbox full/empty status to the catalog.
To put cartridges off-line without a mailbox:
1. 2.
Select the cartridges to put off-line. Choose Media-Off-line.The following screen appears:
Chapter 6
251
3. 4. 5.
Click on View List to get a list of the slots to be emptied, i.e., the slots you selected in step1. Empty the slot and click on OK to validate. Time Navigator performs a barcode reinitialization on the emptied slots, to verify that the slots are empty.
Moving Cartridges
Time Navigator Library Manager allows you to move cartridges, from a location to another.
Note:
Users cannot move the cleaning cartridge from one slot to another. Users are only allowed to put the cleaning cartridge on or offline.
Note:
The destination must be empty.
To move a cartridge:
1. 2. 3.
Tip:
Select the cartridge you want to move. Choose Media-Moving. Select the destination location in the Destination Choice Window and click on OK. You can also drag and drop the cartridge from its present location to its destination. Except for the cleaning cartridge that cannot be dragged and dropped.
To move several cartridges at once, use the Slots-Change Content menu. See Changing
252
Slot Content, page 253.
Replacing a Cartridge
Defective, worn-out or otherwise unsuitable cartridges must be replaced physically in the Library, and logically in Time Navigator. See Replacing a Cartridge, page 226.
Slot Operations
Mailbox Slots
The mailbox slots are used to add or remove cartridges in the library. A mailbox slot can be:
an in slot, for incoming cartridges, an out slot, for outgoing cartridges, an in/out slot for either incoming or outgoing cartridges.
Enabling/Disabling a Slot
You can disable a slot to prevent the current catalog from using that slot and the cartridge it may contain. Enabling it allows the catalog to use the slot and associated cartridge. This feature can be used to avoid mixing tapes inside the library if several catalogs are using the same library. When a slot is disabled, the catalog will view it as logically unavailable and will not attempt to use it until it is enabled again.
To enable/disable a slot
1. 2.
Select the slots to enable/disable. Choose Slots-Enable or Disable. or Right click on a single slot and select Enable or Disable.
Tip:
It is possible to display only the enabled slots in TTime Navigator Library Manager if your library is used by several catalogs, for example. To do so, choose Slots-View enabled only.
Chapter 6
253
Changing Slot Content

This feature is useful to bring cartridges on and off line in a single operation.
To change slot content
1. 2.
Select the slots you want to modify. Choose Slots-Change Content. The following window appears:
3. 4. 5.
Click on View list to see the list of the slots to modify, i.e., the slots designated in step 1. Change the slot content as needed and click on OK to validate. Time Navigator will initiate a partial reinitialization of the selected slots, in a Bar Code mode if available, otherwise in a Read Label mode.
Cleaning Slot
The cleaning slot is specially designed to handle the cleaning cartridge. Once a slot is chosen as the cleaning slot, Time Navigator will not attempt to read the cartridge located inside that slot (during a full read label reinitialization for instance). Most often, Slot 0 is designated as the cleaning slot. However this is not always the case, some libraries do not have a preset cleaning slot. You will have to manually set it. You can change the cleaning slot at any point, but a library cannot contain more than one cleaning slot. Some of the functions described below are also available through the Library Properties window. If no cleaning slot is defined, use the Add command to create one. If you want to re-assign the cleaning slot to a different slot, use the Set command. Finally, to delete the cleaning slot, use the Remove command.
254
To set the cleaning slot
1. 2. 3.
Remove the cartridge from the cleaning slot. Select the new slot you want to use for cleaning. Choose Slot-Cleaning Slot-Set.
To create the cleaning slot
1. 2.
Select the slot you want to use for cleaning. Choose Slot-Cleaning Slot-Add.
To remove the cleaning slot
1. 2.
Remove the cartridge from the cleaning slot. Choose Slot-Cleaning Slot-Remove.
Chapter 6
255
256
Chapter 6
257
258
Chapter 6
259
260
Chapter 6
261
262
Chapter 6
263
264
Chapter 6
265
266
Chapter 6
267
268
Chapter 6
269
270
Chapter 6
271
272
Chapter 6
273
274
Chapter 6
275
276
Chapter 6
277
278
Chapter 6
279
280
Chapter 6
281
282
Chapter 6
283
284
285
C H A P T E R
In this section, you will find the description of the steps required to configure your Time Navigator environment to perform automatic backups or your data as well as administration information.
Administration Assistant, page 291 Backup Wizard, page 291 Backup Strategies, page 300 List Administration of Strategies, page 317 Scheduler, page 323 Backup Selections, page 339 List Administration of Backup Selections, page 357 Macro-multiplexing, page 364 Backup Status by Platform, page 368
286
About Time Navigator Backup

Backup Types
There are three types of backup:
Full Synthetic full Incremental
The full backup backs up the contents of all directories that have a backup selection associated with the strategy. The synthetic full backup is built from previous full and incremental backups and does not generate any network traffic. Instead of copying objects (files and directories) from the disk, Time Navigator finds the last backed up version of each object in the catalog to build the synthetic full backup. For each object, the most recent version is taken into account, whatever the strategy, i.e., if you are performing a synthetic backup with strategy A, and the last version of a file was backed up by an incremental session with strategy B, the synthetic backup will use the version from strategy B.
Warning:
You must have at least two drives available to perform Synthetic Full backups since both a reading and a writing session are involved.
The incremental backup only backs up the objects that have been modified or created since the last backup (either full or incremental of the same strategy). If your very first backup is incremental, all files and directories will be backed up as they would have been with a full backup.
Parallel Backups
Time Navigator Parallel Backup is a functionality that increases system performance by splitting backup jobs into several processes that run simultaneously. Each process backs up one backup selection. When the parallel backup is in progress, each process is shown in Time Navigator Job Manager as it takes place. When the parallel backup is complete, it appears as only one job.
Chapter 7
287
Limitations
The following are not supported:
VMS, NetWare and AS400 operating systems NDMP and SMS applications Replication, archiving, snapshots and synthetic backups features
How to best use parallel backups

As a general rule, define as many backup selections as you have drives (virtual or physical). Define backup selections of roughly the same size to distribute the backup load evenly. If you use a VLS and if the backup selections and the VLS are located on the same filesystem, parallel backups will be slower.
Defining a parallel backup

To define a parallel backup:
1. 2. 3.
Create several backup selections and check the Parallelization option for each of them. See Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab, page 344. Create a strategy and associate all the backup selections involved in the parallel backup to this strategy. See Creating a Backup Selection, page 339. Define the Parallelism Index of the strategy. This is the number of simultaneous data streams. See Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306. To determine the Parallelism index, add 1 to the number of simultaneous data streams you want. For example, if you want 4 simultaneous data streams, the Parallelism index is 5.
Adjusting the Parallelism index

If some of your drives are already used for backup/ restore operations and as a result the number of available drives is lower than the Parallelism index, some of the parallel backup jobs will queue up and cause a CPU strain. To avoid this problem, adjust the Parallelism index so that it equals the number of available drives. To adjust the Parallelism index, see Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306.
288
Backup without Using the Cache of the Server

A client platform (agent or storage node) can back up its data directly on a storage device that is either local or connected to a storage node. This feature prevents data from transiting via the Time Navigator Server, which reduces network traffic. Only the metadata is sent to the catalog located on the server. When this function is enabled, the only writing formats available are sidf and tar. When you perform a such backups, the following Time Navigator features are not available:
Synthetic backup with tar format.

tina_export command when exporting to the same catalog
Scheduling issues
Incremental backups allow you to perform quick backups, minimizing the volume of data transferred. Restore performance, however may not be optimal. If data is spread out on several media, more media mounting/unmounting will be required to read data. This may lengthen the overall restore time. Time Navigation will help optimize media mounting and reduce the restore time of spread out data. Full backups must be regularly performed for security reasons and to regroup data in order to accelerate its restore. However, they will take more time because of the large volume to back up. Performance will vary according to the networks and platforms types being used. Synthetic full backups do not initiate any activity on the client hosts nor on the network since all operations are performed on the server where the catalog is located. They allow you to save time and they avoid overwhelming a low bandwidth network and putting a strain on client hosts. They also let you back up migrated or compressed files rapidly. It is not necessary to retrieve migrated files nor to decompress files compressed on disks by the operating system (Windows 2000/2003, NetWare, etc.) before backing them up.
Note:
The synthetic full backup does not reflect the reality of the disk at the time it is performed. For instance, files modified between the last backup taken into account and the synthetic session are not backed up. It is thus recommended to schedule a synthetic backup right after an incremental session.
Chapter 7
289
Backup Process
Each strategy is independent from the others. If the example file is backed up by Strategy A, modified, then backed up by Strategy B, the next incremental session of Strategy A will also back up the example file. Backup strategies (defined by the administrator) are associated with backup selections (defined for each client platform or platform groups by the administrator or users). For each platform or platform group, backup selections determine the directories and files to back up. The server checks every 5 minutes which platforms are to be backed up. It then runs the tina_backup program on the platforms to be backed up. The server must be able to connect to the client: the Time Navigator service or daemon must be running on the client.
Note:
Service ends if the tina_daemon on the server is stopped. Clients will no longer be able to connect. Error messages, such as Connection error with the host x or The host x does not accept the connection are logged in the event file.
A backup session starts depending on the date and time defined in the strategy. For each strategy, tina_backup checks the type of backup. If a full session is scheduled, all backup selections associated with the strategy are considered. If an incremental session is scheduled, the backup selections considered are those whose strategy and time settings correspond to the current session. When a backup selection is considered during a session, the files and the subdirectories to back up are filtered by name and size (by default * for the name and infinite for the maximum file size). A backup format must be defined for each strategy and eventually compression and encoding can be selected. For a given strategy and platform, only one session can take place at a time. If a session is not complete, no new session can start. When a session starts, a Start backup (full or incremental) message is logged in the event file. For each backup selection considered, the beginning and the ending messages are added to the event file. When all backup selections have been backed up, the End backup (full or incremental) message is added. The session is complete, a new backup can start. For more information concerning events, see Time Navigator Event Viewer, page 445.
290
When using different strategies, you define different times, different recycling policies, and different drives for any given platform. Each strategy is associated with at least a main pool and eventually one or more multiple writing media pools for full and incremental sessions. Main pools allow you to specify the drives to be used for backups, the media to be used and the recycling mode. Main pools for incremental and full sessions of a given strategy can be identical or distinct. Multiple writing pools allow you to perform duplicate copies of the files backed up by a session. You can define up to three multiple writing pools. A main pool may also be a multiple writing pool. Each file is then copied twice with the same drives, on the same media pool.
Note:
If you are scheduling a backup with several pools, i.e., with duplicate writing sessions, you must have at least one available drive per media pool, since duplicate writing sessions take place simultaneously.
Manual Triggering
In addition to automatically scheduled backup, the administrator can manually trigger a (full or incremental) backup for any strategy, on any platform. An incremental session performed under those conditions includes all backup selections associated with the selected strategy.
Chapter 7
291
Administration Assistant
The administration assistant automatically opens when you launch Time Navigator Administration Console, if:
You do not have any devices configured in your catalog. In that case, the assistant allows you to start the Device Configuration Wizard (see Initial Configuration of Devices in Time Navigator, page 139 for details). One or more platforms in the catalog have not been configured for backup yet. In that case, the assistant allows you to start the Backup Wizard (see Backup Strategies, page 300 for details).
To disable the automatic launching of the assistant, set the tunable Disable Administration Assistant. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
Backup Wizard
The Backup Wizard allows you to configure platforms for backup. A backup configuration consists of the following elements:
A backup selection A media pool A scheduling
The wizard automatically assigns the backup configuration to the first available strategy for the given platform. For instance, if you are configuring a backup on the platform "myplatform" that has no strategy defined yet, the Wizard will use Strategy A. If "myplatform" already has strategies A and B defined, then the wizard will create Strategy C.
Configuring a Backup with the Backup Wizard

When you open Time Navigator Administration Console, the Backup Wizard is automatically launched by the Administration Assistant if it detects one or more platforms in the catalog without a backup configuration. In addition, you can manually launch the wizard at any time.
To configure a backup
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Backup Wizard if the
292
Wizard does not automatically open.

Tip:
You can also right click on a platform and choose Backup Wizard.
The Welcome window appears.
Click on Next. 2. In the Platform Selection window, select the platform that needs to be configured for backup.
Note:
If you launched the wizard by right-clicking on a platform, you can only configure a backup for that platform. The Platform Selection screen does not appear.
Chapter 7
293
Click on Next.
Note:
If compatible platforms (same operating system for hosts, and same type for applications) have already been configured for backup, the wizard gives you the option to Configure a new backup or Back up with an existing configuration. If you choose to use an existing configuration, the wizard lets you select the platform whose configuration you want to use.
294
3.
In the Backup Selection window, click on Add.
4.
In the New Backup Selection window, enter the path of the folder containing the data to back up, or click on Browse to select the path.
Click on OK then click on Next. 5. In the Media Pool window, choose wether you want to use the same or separate pools for full and incremental backups. If you use the same pool, both backup types will have the same retention period (i.e., the amount of time backed up data is kept before the media is recycled) and will be backed up using the same device.
Chapter 7
295
Click on Next.
Note:
If you already have media pools in your catalog, the wizard asks whether you want to use an existing pool or create a new one. If you choose to use an existing pool, the wizard asks you to select a pool from the list of available pools.
6.
In the Media Pool Parameters window, indicate the retention period and device to use for the new pool.
296
Retention Period If you do not want to limit the amount of time during which data is stored, select Do not reuse media. Otherwise, choose the number of days, months or years during which data will be stored. Once that time period expires, the media will be reused to store new data. Device Select the library you want to use to back up your data. Click on Next. 7. In the Media Pool Name window, enter a name for the new pool.
Chapter 7
297
Click on Next.
Note:
If you chose to use separate pools for full and incremental backups, you need to define both a full pool and an incremental pool.
8.
In the Full Schedule window, select one of the default schedule.
298
Typically, full backups are performed weekly while incremental backups are performed daily. Click on Next. 9. In the Incremental Schedule window, select one of the default schedule.
Chapter 7
299
Click on Next.
Note:
In your catalog, if you have some platforms compatible with the one you are configuring (same operating system for hosts, and same type for applications), and that are not yet configured for backup, the wizard opens the Platform Group window, to let you apply the current backup configuration to these platforms.
Note:
In the Summary window, verify that all information is according to your needs.
Click on Finish. In Time Navigator Administration Console, the platform(s) you configured now show the letter of the Strategy you just defined.
300
Backup Strategies
About Backup Strategy
Strategies allow you to schedule dates and times for automatic backup, job priority and parallelism, snapshot or replication sessions and to specify the media pool to be used to write data. Strategies must be defined for each platform or platform group to be backed up, snapshot or replicated. If no strategy is defined for a platform or platform group, no file will be backed up. Strategies are referred to by the letters A, B, C and D and appear in the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Strategy Types
There are three types of strategy:
Backup strategy Snapshot strategy (see the Time Navigator SnapBackup guide for details) Replication strategy (see the Time Navigator Replication guide for details) Once you have chosen the type of a strategy, you cannot modify it, i.e., you cannot turn a snapshot strategy into a standard backup strategy. If a particular strategy is no longer needed, delete it and recreate a new strategy of a different type. In additon, you cannot create both snapshot and replication strategies on a single platform.
Note:
Simultaneous Backups
One of the issues you have to watch out for when scheduling backups, is the number of simultaneous backups. When a session is about to be performed, a job is created on the backup server which in turn launches a tina_daemon process and a tina_backup process. As a result, if many backups are scheduled at the same time, the server could become saturated with all the tina_daemon and tina_backup processes. If you are particularly concerned with your backup server performances, you have the option to limit the number of simultaneous jobs via two tunables: Limit Number of Simultaneous Jobs (limit_nb_jobs) and Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs (max_nb_jobs).
Chapter 7
301
The Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs (max_nb_jobs) applies to the total number of jobs using all defined strategies with all platforms under the control of Time Navigator. It must not be confused with the parallelism index. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
Parallelism Index
The parallelism index defines the maximum number of jobs for each defined strategy. A parallelism index is set as a practical upper limit according to your system resources. It can also be set as an upper limit that you wish to attain but may not be able to all of the time.
Creating a Backup Strategy

You can define up to four strategies for a given platform, Strategy A, B, C and D.
Note:
If more than 4 strategies are needed for a particular platform, you have the option of creating a clone of the platform with the Filesystem application. You will then have four more strategies available for each Filesystem application you create on a given platform. See Creating Applications, page 81.
Note:
The Strategy Creation procedure only takes into account the creation of a backup strategy. For snapshot or replication strategy, see the Time Navigator SnapBackup guide or the Time Navigator Replication guide.
To create a backup strategy
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, select a host. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A-New, or right click on one of the squares representing strategies on the host icon and select New. The New Backup Strategy A window for the selected host appears. Fill in the parameters for the new backup strategy as described in:
3.
Backup Strategy Window - Full Tab, page 302 Backup Strategy Window - Incremental Tab, page 304 Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306 Backup Strategy Window - Snapshot Tab, page 314
302
Backup Strategy Window - Replication Tab, page 315
4.
To import information from another strategy, click on Import. In the Import a Strategy window, select a platform, a strategy, the elements you want to import and click on OK. The Default Configuration button sets default for all tabs at once.
Note:
The new strategy appears under the host icon in the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Backup Strategy Window - Full Tab

Use the Full tab to configure full backups.
Chapter 7
303
Media Pools Area
This area indicates the media pools to be used during backups.

Warning:
Even if you do not want to schedule full backups for this strategy, you must select a main media pool in the Full tab.
Main: Lets you select a main media pool from the list of available pools.
Note:
You must create at least one media pool to define a strategy.

Multiple Writing Pools: Lets you specify the pools to be used for multiple writing. You
can define up to three secondary media pools. The Add button lets you select pools from the list of available pools. The Remove button deletes a pool from the Multiple Writing Pools list.
Warning:
Using multiple writing requires having at least one drive per simultaneous backup copies to be performed.
Full Scheduling Area
Schedule name: Indicates the name of the schedule that triggers automatic backups. Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to let you select a schedule from
the list of existing schedule.
New: Opens the Schedule window to let you define a new schedule. Edit: Allows you to edit the schedule specified in the Schedule Name field. Unlink: Allows you to unlink the schedule currently associated to the strategy. Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the full backups that should take place with
the strategy until you uncheck the box. See Scheduler, page 323 for details.
Synthetic: Enables the Synthetic backup mode, see Backup Types, page 286 for details.
304
A, B, C and D: Backup strategies involved in a synthetic backup. If you do not want the
synthetic backup to be constructed from previous backups of all strategies, uncheck the unwanted strategies.
Note:
You must have at least 2 drives available to perform Synthetic backups since both a reading and a writing session are involved.
Note:
Options set in the Advanced tab do not apply to Synthetic backups except for the
Format option.
Default Configuration: Sets default for all tabs at once. Import: Allows you to use information from another strategy. Calendar View: Allows you to view the scheduled backups at a glance in a monthly
calendar.
Backup Strategy Window - Incremental Tab

Use the Incremental tab to configure incremental backups.
Chapter 7
305
Media Pools Area
This area indicates the media pools to be used during backups.

Warning:
Even if you do not want to schedule incremental backups for this strategy, you must select a main media pool in the Incremental tab.
Main: Lets you select a main media pool from the list of available pools.
Note:
You must create at least one media pool to define a strategy.

Multiple Writing Pools: Lets you specify the pools to be used for multiple writing. You
can define up to three secondary media pools. The Add button lets you select pools from the list of available pools. The Remove button deletes a pool from the
306
Multiple Writing Pools list.

Warning:
Using multiple writing requires having at least one drive per simultaneous backup copies to be performed.
Incremental Scheduling Area
Schedule name: Indicates the name of the schedule that triggers automatic backups. Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to let you select a schedule from
the list of existing schedule.
New: Opens the Schedule window to let you define a new schedule. Edit: Allows you to edit the schedule specified in the Schedule Name field. Unlink: Allows you to unlink the schedule currently associated to the strategy. Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the incremental backups that should take
place with the strategy until you uncheck the box. See Scheduler, page 323 for details.
Reset: Sets default for all tabs at once. Import: Allows you to use information from another strategy. Calendar View: Allows you to view the scheduled backups at a glance in a monthly
calendar.
Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab

Use the Advanced tab to configure special options, format, pre- and post-processing commands, job priority and parallelism and retry on incident.
Chapter 7
307
Warning:
All the Advanced options you set apply to both incremental and full backups defined for the strategy, except if you have selected the Synthetic backup option in the Full tab. Only the Format option of the Advanced option, will apply to a Synthetic backup.
Special Options Area
The Use Cache on Server option allows you choose whether to back up data using the cache on the Time Navigator server. If you you choose not to use the cache, and the platform is a storage node, the library and drives can be directly attached to it. If the platform is a Time Navigator Agent, data is backed up via a storage node. The Go through Network Filesystem option concerns Unix hosts only. It allows Time Navigator to go through NFS mount points, in order to back up files located on other disks.
Note:
The root user of the machine performing the backup must have the access rights to the machine on which NFS points have been mounted.
308
Tip:
To back up mapped network drives on Windows hosts, see Net Disk Application, page 627.
The Do not go through Local File System option prevents Time Navigator from backing up file systems mounted on a local mount point. Only the file system designated by the backup selection is backed up. The Wait for End of Writing on Media option allows you to wait until data has safely been written on media before performing a postprocessing. The backup strategy will be displayed as being in progress, i.e., with a green background, in Time Navigator Administration Console Network area, until data is written on media rather than until it is written in the cache space, as is usually the case. The Specific Attribute Backup option allows: ACLs (Access Control List) backup into the catalog and files access rights management. This option is available on specific platforms where ACLs are backed up on tapes by default and can also be backed up into the catalog, if this option is activated.
Note:
For Windows and Mac platforms, it is essential to check this option if you need to restore only the Specific Attributes of an object without the data.
On Mac OS X, this option allows to back up the FinderInfo in the catalog in addition to the tape backup that is performed by default. For additional OS specific information, see Backup of Specific Attributes, page 311.
The Relaunch until Platform is Reachable option ensures that a strategy remains active until the platform can be reached. Time Navigator checks every 5 minutes for a list of platforms to be backed up according to the schedules defined in the various strategies. If this option is checked, an unreachable platform remains on that list until it is actually backed up, whatever the reason for the unreachability.
Tip:
This option is useful for mobile platforms.
The Continue Backup if one of the Multiple Writing Sessions Fails option ensures that a backup job starts or continues even if one of the writing sessions composing the job fails or cannot start. For instance, if one of the drives fails before or during a
Chapter 7
309
backup in multiple writing mode, one of the sessions stops but the other ones will continue. The user can eventually perform a media duplication at a later date if necessary.
The On Demand Backup option makes this strategy available to authorized users from agent posts to run backups on demand, outside the schedule set by the administrator (See On Demand Backup, page 405). The Sessions can be Multiplexed option allows you to manage the macro-multiplexing mechanism. When several backups are started simultaneously, this mechanism is used to split a backup into blocks in order to optimize backup duration and medium use.
Note:
Macro-Multiplexing is discussed at length in Chapter 4. See Macromultiplexing, page 364.
Format Area
Allows you to select the Writing Formats (see Writing Formats, page 202 for details) that will be used for backup. Click on the radio button of the format you want. By default, the TiNa format is selected.
Warning:
On a Windows 2000/2003 machine, if you use the tar or cpio formats, some information will not be backed up. For example, some file attributes and some data associated with files will not be backed up.
Note:
If you uncheck the Use Cache on Server option, the only formats available are sidf or tar.
Note:
If you are creating a strategy for an NDMP application, you must use the "unknown" format. This is the only case when this format is used.
310
Command Area
In the Commands area, you can indicate actions to be taken immediately before (Preprocessing) and immediately after (Post-Processing) a backup has taken place. You must enter either the absolute path of the command you want to execute, or the absolute path of a script file or executable file.
Tip:
You can use one of the Pre- and- Postprocessing Variables (see Pre- and Postprocessing Variables, page 313) set by the backup process in the processing scripts
Pre-processing example: /Applications/database/stop_database.sh /home/people/db/stop_database.sh c:\database\stop_database.cmd
Post-processing example: /Applications/database/start_database.sh /home/people/db/start_database.sh c:\database\start_database.cmd
Note:
The pathnames for Preprocessing and Postprocessing scripts support the whitespace (spacebar) character, in addition to the alphanumeric characters already supported in Time Navigator pathnames.
Note:
Currently, the Preprocessing and Postprocessing commands are available only on Mac OS X, Unix and Windows systems. The commands are executed on the backed up client. For Windows platforms, only .cmd, .vbs or .bat scripts are allowed.
Jobs Area Priority: Indicates the priority level of jobs associated with the strategy being defined.
Select the level from the drop down list.
Chapter 7
311
Parallelism Index: Allows you to define the number of jobs that can be performed
simultaneously. The maximum value depends on the number of drives available for backup operations.
Note:
A value of 0 for the Parallelism Index turns off parallelism. The (default) value 1 does not allow parallel jobs. The minimum value to activate parallelism is 3.
Having set a paralellism index, you must associate it with a backup selection to fully define a parallel backup. See Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab, page 344 for more information.
Retry on Incident Area
Allows you to automatically restart, at regular intervals, a failed backup. Enter a number in the Number textbox to specify how many times Time Navigator will restart the automatic backup. Enter a time interval in minutes in the Interval textbox to specify the time interval between restarting attempts. By default, a backup will be restarted twice with a 10 minute interval.
Reset: Sets default for all tabs at once. Import: Allows you to use information from another strategy. Calendar View: Allows you to view the scheduled backups at a glance in a monthly
calendar.
Backup of Specific Attributes

Depending on the client operating system and on the writing format selected (i.e., tar, Tina, ...etc.) Time Navigator handles Specific Attributes backup differently. Specific Attributes will either be backed up on tape, in the catalog or both. Specific Attributes backup will be either systematically performed by Time Navigator or be left up to the user.
Extended Attributes and FinderInfo
The FinderInfo along with the ResourceFork constitute the Apple extended attributes. In addition, there can be third party extended attributes. Extended attributes consist of a name and data. They are currently used only on Mac OS. They are directly integrated in file systems (HFS, XSAN and UFS). On UFS and XSAN, they are stored in ._ files. ACLs are not stored as extended attributes on Mac OS.
312
All extended attributes are backed up on tape. However, currently only the FinderInfo can also be backed up in the catalog.
Tape Backup of Extended Attributes Tina5 sidf no yes yes no no no Catalog Backup of Extended Attributes (FinderInfo only) Tina5 sidf yes, optional yes, optional yes, optional tar yes, optional yes yes
Operating System
Writing Format
Mac OS X 10.3 Panther Mac OS X 10.4 Tiger Mac OS X 10.5 Leopard
tar
To back up the Finder info in the catalog, check the option Specific Attribute Backup when defining the backup strategy for the client. See Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306 for details.
ACLs
An ACL (Access Control List) is an operating system mechanism designed to manage file security. ACLs offer the possibility of defining access rights for a specific user or group to a given resource (e.g., stopping the host, installing or uninstalling a peripheral driver, etc.). The ACLs associate an object (such as a directory or file) with an identifier and a permission: the identifier defines the user or the group which has been granted access rights (permission) to the object.
Operating System
Writing Format Unix: Solaris, HP-UX, Fujitsu, Digital Unix, CRAY, AIX, Linux
ACL Tape Backup

Tina5 sidf tar
ACL Catalog Backup

Tina5 sidf tar
no
no
yes, optional
yes, optional
Other Unix
no
no
no
no
Chapter 7
313
Operating System
Mac OS X: 10.3 (Panther) 10.4 (Tiger) 10.5 (Leopard) Windows: 2000/2003 XP NetWare VMS NDMP (Network Appliance, EMC Celerra) no no no yes n/a no no yes
ACL Tape Backup

no no no no n/a no no no
ACL Catalog Backup

no yes, optional yes, optional yes, optional n/a yes yes, optional no no yes, optional yes, optional yes, optional n/a yes yes, optional no
In cases where ACLs backup is optional, the choice is made by checking the Specific Attribute Backup option when the backup strategy for the client is defined. See Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306, for details.
Note:
It is essential to check the Specific Attribute Backup option if you need to restore only the Specific Attributes of an object without the data.
Note:
When deciding whether or not to back up Specific Attributes in the catalog for Windows 2000/2003, keep in mind that they could make your catalog quite voluminous and affect performance. Specific Attributes tape backup on the other hand has no impact on performance.
Pre- and Postprocessing Variables

Following is a list of the environment variables set by the backup process that can be used in a pre- or postprocessing script.
List of variables that can be used in a preprocessing script: Variable Name
TINA_BACKUP_COPY_MODE TINA_EVT_JOB_INFO
Value
incr or full according to the backup type
Job number
314
Variable Name
TINA_CATALOG TINA_HOME
Value
Name of the catalog Time Navigator installation directory
List of variables that can be used in a postprocessing script: Variable Name

TINA_BACKUP_COPY_MODE TINA_EVT_JOB_INFO TINA_CATALOG TINA_HOME TINA_RETCODE
Value
incr or full according to the backup type
Job number Name of the catalog Time Navigator installation directory 0 if backup was successful, >0 if backup failed
Backup Strategy Window - Snapshot Tab

Use the Snapshot tab to configure snapshots for the selected strategy on a snapshot-ready platform.
Enable Snapshot Backup Mode: Activates the snapshot mode. This option is only available if
the application support the snapshot feature.

Complementary Media Pool: Indicates where the non-snapshottable data is backed up. This
option concerns only the Oracle and List applications and is mandatory for these two applications, since some of the data cannot be snapshotted (for instance the redo logs for Oracle).
Remove Snapshot after Backup: Specifies that Time Navigator removes the snapshot contents
from disk once it has been backed up on tape. This option is only available if you perform a tape copy of your snapshot.
Default Configuration:
Sets default for all tabs at once.
Import: Allows you to use information from another strategy. Calendar View: Allows you to view the scheduled backups at a glance in a monthly
calendar. See the Time Navigator SnapBackup guide for details.
Chapter 7
315
Backup Strategy Window - Replication Tab

Use the Replication tab to configure replication for the selected strategy on a replicationready platform.
Enable Replication Mode: Activates the replication mode. This option is only available if the application support the replication feature. Replication Destination Area
Name: Allows you to select a destination replication from a list, if destinations already exists. New Destination: Allows you to create a replication destination. Edit Destination: Allows you to modify a replication destination.
Allow incremental Replication: Allows you to keep track of the replicas in the catalog. This
option is mandatory to perform incremental replication and to keep the replica up to date if, for instance some files have been deleted since the last replica. See the Time Navigator Replication guide for details.
Default Configuration:
Sets default for all tabs at once.
Import: Allows you to use information from another strategy. Calendar View: Allows you to view the scheduled backups at a glance in a monthly
calendar.
Manual Triggering of a Backup

Independently from the automatic triggering, you can manually initiate an incremental or full backup for any strategy, on any platform. An incremental session initiated under these conditions takes into account all the backup selections associated with the selected strategy.
To manually initiate a backup
1. 2.
Select the platform or platform group to back up. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B,C, or D)-Full (or incremental) Session Now. or
316
Right click on the letter of the strategy you want to back up, below the host icon, and select Full (or Incremental) Session Now. 3. The backup starts if the selected platform or platform group is enabled and if no other session of the strategy is in progress.
Editing Strategies
The Backup-Selected Platform- Strategy-Properties menu is used to edit a backup strategy.
To edit a backup strategy
1. 2. 3.
Select a platform. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B,C, or D)-Properties. The Strategy Properties window is displayed. Modify the strategy as needed. See Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301 and follow the same procedures.
Deleting Strategies
You can delete a strategy. In this case, the backups scheduled with that strategy will not be performed any longer.
To delete a backup strategy
1. 2. 3.
Select a platform. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B,C, or D)-Delete. The Delete Strategy window is displayed. It contains all the characteristics of the selected strategy. Click on Delete to delete the strategy. A dialog box prompts you to confirm your decision. The deleted strategy is removed from the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Chapter 7
317
List Administration of Strategies

If you want to perform operations on a great number of strategies at once, use the Strategy List window that allows you to perform a variety of tasks.
Viewing the Strategy List

To view the strategy list
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Click on Close when you are done.
Strategy List Window
Number of strategies: Total number of strategies appearing in the list. Export: Allows to export the strategy list to a file. Strategy Information
Platform: Name of the host or application for which the strategy is defined.
318
Name: Letter and name of the strategy. Type: Platform type, operating system for a host, application type if the platform is an application. Main Pool (full): Name of the main full pool associated to the strategy. Main Pool (incremental): Name of the main incremental pool associated to the strategy. Secondary Pools (full): Name of the secondary full pools associated to the strategy. Secondary Pools (incremental): Name of the secondary incremental pools associated to
the strategy.
Schedule (full): Name of the full schedule associated to the strategy. Schedule (incremental): Name of the incremental schedule associated to the strategy. Synthetic: Indicates the letter of the strategies involved in synthetic backups for the
platform.
Priority: Indicates the strategy priority as defined in the Advanced tab of the
strategy. Possible values are: High, Very high, Medium, Low Very low.
Properties: Opens the Strategy Properties window for the selected strategy.
Tip:
You can also double click on a strategy in the list to open the Strategy Properties window.
Modify Media Pools: Opens the Strategy Pool window to modify the pools for the selected
strategies.
Modify Schedules: Opens the Strategy Schedules window to modify schedules for the
selected strategies.
Modify Priority: Allows to change the priority of the selected strategy. Choose the priority
from the list.

Reset Pending Strategies: Allows to reset pending strategies to their usual status.
Chapter 7
319
Delete: Allows to delete the selected strategies.
Note:
Whenever you select a strategy in the list, all the other strategies that could be affected by a modification of that strategy (i.e., strategies bearing the same letter and associated to platforms belonging to the same group) are highlighted too.
Exporting the Strategy List

To export the strategy list
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, go to Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Click on Export, the Export window appears. Specify the export parameters as described in Export Window, page 214. Click on OK. The exported file is created in the location you specified. Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
Editing Strategies
Note:
When you modify a strategy, all the strategies bearing the same letter and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are modified as well.
To edit a strategy
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, go to Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Select the strategy you want to edit and click on Properties. The Strategy Properties window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301 for details. To edit another strategy, select it in the list and repeat step 2. Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
3. 4.
320
Modifying Strategy Media Pools

Note:
When you modify a strategy, all the strategies bearing the same letter and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are modified as well.
To modify strategy media pools
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, go to Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Select the strategies for which you want to modify pools and click on Modify Media Pools. The Strategy Pools window appears. Modify the pools as described in Strategy Pools Window, page 320 and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301 for details concerning strategy pools. Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
4.
Strategy Pools Window

Modify Main Full Pool: Check this box to modify the main full pool.
Name: Main full pool name
Modify Secondary Full Pools: Check this box to modify the secondary full pools
Add to existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are in
addition to existing ones.
Replace existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are
replacing existing ones.
Remove from existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define
are to be removed from the existing ones.
Select: Allows you to select pools from the list of available pools. Unselect: Allows you to remove pools from your selection. Name: Displays the name of the pols you have selected.
Modify Main Incremental Pool:
Name: Main incremental pool name
Modify Secondary Incremental Pool:
Chapter 7
321
Add to existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are in
addition to existing ones.
Replace existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define are
replacing existing ones.
Remove from existing secondary pools: Specifies that the secondary pools you define
are to be removed from the existing ones.
Select: Allows you to select pools from the list of available pools. Unselect: Allows you to remove pools from your selection. Name: Displays the name of the pools you have selected.
Modifying Strategy Schedules

To modify strategy schedules
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, go to Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Select the strategies for which you want to modify schedules and click on Modify Schedules. The Strategy Schedules window appears. Modify the schedules as described in Strategy Schedules Window, page 321 and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Schedule, page 326 for details concerning schedules. Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
4.
Strategy Schedules Window

Modify Full Schedule: Check this box to modify the full schedule.
Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to allow you to choose a
full schedule for the strategy.
Unlink: Unlinks the current full schedule from the strategy.
Modify Full Schedule Status: Check this box to modify the full schedule status.
Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the full backups that should take
place with the strategy until you uncheck the box.

Modify Incremental Schedule: Check this box to modify the incremental schedule.
Choose: Opens the Schedule Management window to allow you to choose an
incremental schedule for the strategy.
322
Unlink: Unlinks the current incremental schedule from the strategy.
Modify Incremental Schedule Status: Check this box to modify the incremental schedule
status.
Disable Temporarily: Allows you to pause the incremental backups that should take place with the strategy until you uncheck the box.
Resetting Pending Strategies

Strategies are pending when the job corresponding to the backup they were supposed to launch is paused, for instance if a host is unreachable and the option Relaunch until Platform is reachable is selected in the Strategy window.
To reset pending strategies
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Select the strategies you want to reset and click on Reset Pending Strategies. Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on Cancel. Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
Deleting Strategies
Note:
When you delete a strategy, all the strategies bearing the same letter and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are deleted as well.
To delete strategies
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, go to Backup-Strategy List. The Strategy List window appears. Select the strategies you want to delete and click on Delete. See Deleting Strategies, page 316 for details. Click on Yes to confirm the operation or click on Cancel. Once the operation is completed the strategies no longer appear in the list. Click on Close in the Strategy List window when you are done.
Chapter 7
323
Scheduler
Note:
If you are upgrading from a version prior to version 4.1.0, schedules are automatically created based on the scheduling information contained in your existing backup strategies.
About the scheduler

The Scheduler allows to define the days and times when automatic backups should take place. To use the Scheduler, you must associate a Schedule to the strategy for which you want to trigger automatic backups. To define a schedule, you need one or several schedule rule.
Schedule
A schedule consists of:
A name A list of schedule rules
A schedule can be either created from scratch, copied from an existing schedule, imported from a file or you can modify an existing schedule. You can also delete a schedule if you no longer need it, however you will not be able to delete a schedule if it is associated to an active job. The same schedule can be used by several strategies. By default, when you create a catalog, the following three schedules are created:
A daily backup from Monday to Friday at 20:00 A weekly backup on saturday at 20:00 A monthly backup the first sunday of the month at 20:00.
Schedule rule
There are three types of schedule rules:
Start rules that allow you to define the day(s) and times of the week/month when a backup should take place Activity Interval rules that allow you to define times during the day when backups can
324
take place
Exclusion rules that allow you to define specific days when backups cannot take
place.
Note:
You can use any combination of rules for a particular schedule, with at least one Start rule defined in order to launch backups.
Similarly to a schedule, a schedule rule can be either created from scratch, copied from an existing rule, or you can modify an existing rule. A rule can also be deleted if you no longer need it.
Configuring the Scheduler

When you configure the scheduler, the configuration applies for the entire catalog.
To configure the Scheduler
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Scheduler. The Scheduler Configuration window appears. Define the Scheduler configuration as described in Scheduler Configuration Window - Properties Tab, page 324 and Scheduler Configuration Window Non Working Days Tab, page 326.
Scheduler Configuration Window - Properties Tab
Chapter 7
325
Scheduler Activity Accounting Event: Enables the generation of event logs for scheduler
activities.
Disable Scheduler Activity: If the Scheduler is disabled no scheduled backups can take place
in the catalog.
Send an Alarm if Scheduler is Disabled: Allows to choose whether or not an alarm is generated
when the scheduler is disabled.

Time Before Alarm is Sent: Allows to define when the alarm should be sent. Activate Job Limitation: Enables the limitation of simultaneous jobs running at the same
time.
Note:
The control over the number of jobs running simultaneously only takes place when a scheduled job is launched, not when a job is manually launched. However all jobs are taken into account (whether launched automatically or manually) when counting the number of jobs running.
Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs: Allows to define the maximum number of jobs that could be running at the same time. The default value is 100. Warn if Maximum Number of Jobs is exceeded: Check this box to trigger alarms, warnings and logs when the number of jobs running is greater than the maximum you defined. Cancellation Timeout for Scheduled jobs:
Specifies the timeout before scheduled backup jobs are cancelled if they cannot start because the agent is not connected to the server.
326
Scheduler Configuration Window - Non Working Days Tab
Recurrent: Allows you to choose the days of the week that are non working days. Specific: The Add and Remove buttons allow you to define a list of non working days via a calendar. The days chosen appear in the Date column.
Creating a Schedule
To create a schedule
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears.
2. 3.
Click on New. The Schedule window appears. Provide a name for the shedule.
Chapter 7
327
4.
You need to create at least one schedule rule. To do so, depending on the rule type you want to create, click on:
New Backup Launching Rule
Start rules allows you to define the times when you want to launch backups. See Backup Launching Rule Window, page 329 for a description of the required parameters.
New Activity Interval Rule
Activity interval rules allow you to define a time period during the day when backups are allowed to run. See Activity Interval Rule Window, page 331 for a description of the required parameters.
New Exclusion Rule
Exclusion rules allow you to define criteria upon which exclusions are based. See Exclusion Rule Window, page 333 for a description of the required parameters.
Warning:
In order to schedule automatic backups, you must create at least one Backup Launching rule, i.e., at least one rule must contain Start Hours. Activity Interval or exclusion rules alone cannot launch a backup. They must be used in conjunction with one (or more) Start rule to allow backups to be launched.
The schedule takes into account all the rules you define. 5. Click on OK.
Schedule Window
Name: Name of the current Schedule. Rules tab
Schedule Rule: List of existing schedule rules associated to the schedule. Validity: Indicates whether the schedule is valid or not. New Start Rule: Allows to create a new Start rule. New Interval Rule: Allows to create a new Activity Interval rule. New Exclusion Rule: Allows to create a Exclusion new rule. Properties: Allows to modify the selected rule.
328
Copy: Copies the selected rule Delete: Deletes the selected rule. Calendar Area << button: Moves the calendar displays back one year. < button: Moves the calendar display back one month. > button: Moves the calendar displays forward one month. >> button: Moves the calendar display forward one year.
Note:
Once a backup has been scheduled for a day, a black dot appears next to that day in the calendar area.
Actions Tab
The actions tabs provides the following information concerning the strategies that use this particular schedule.
Action: Type of backup triggered by the schedule. Strategy: Letter of the strategy using the schedule. Platform: Name of the platform onto which the strategy is defined. Type: Type of the platform. Group: Names of all the platforms belonging to the same group. Status: Status of the platform.
Advanced Tab Schedule Activity Accounting Events: Check this box if you want scheduling events to be
logged in the Time Navigator events file.

Note:
Only events concerning this schedule are recorded if you activate the Schedule Activity Accounting Events. To activate events logging for the entire Scheduler, do so in the Sheduler Configuration window (see Configuring the Scheduler, page 324).
Chapter 7
329
Backup Launching Rule Window

Name: Name of the schedule rule. The name must be unique. If no name is specified, the scheduler automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters. Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the name of the schedule according to the parameter modification you performed. ID: ID of the rule, automatically assigned by the Scheduler. Description: Description of the rule. If no description is specified, the scheduler automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters. Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the description of the schedule according to the parameter modification you performed. Days Tab
Frequency: Select whether you want a daily, weekly or monthly scheduling.
Daily: If you select daily backups, you must choose between every n days, every
working or non working day, or define a specific date when you want backups to
330
take place.
Note:
You can define the non working days in the Scheduler Configuration window. See Configuring the Scheduler, page 324 for details.
Weekly: If you select weekly backups, specify if it is every week or n week and on
which day of the week you want to perfom the backup.
Monthly: If you select monthly backups, specify the day of the month when you
want backups to take place.

Offset: Allows you to offset the backup from one to seven days before or after the day you chose in the Frequency area. Start Hours Tab
Define Start Hour: Check this box if you want to define a backup launching rule. Hours and Minutes: Use the scroll down lists to select the backup time. Add: Allows you to add the selected hours and minutes in the Defined Times list in order
to schedule a backup.
Next Hour: Adds the hour following the one selected in the list as a backup time.
Chapter 7
331
Next 15 minutes: Adds 15 minutes to the time selected in the list and create a new backup
time.
Defined Times: Lists all the backup times. Delete: Deletes the selected backup time. Validity Tab
Start Date: Defines the date when the rule becomes valid. The rule is not taken into
account prior to the Start Date.
End Date: Defines the date when the rule is no longer valid. The rule is not taken
into account after the End Date. This parameter is not mandatory.
Activity Interval Rule Window

Name: Name of the schedule rule. The name must be unique. If no name is specified, the scheduler automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters. Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the name of the schedule according to the parameter modification you performed. ID: ID of the rule, automatically assigned by the Scheduler.
332
Description: Description of the rule. If no description is specified, the scheduler
automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters.

Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the description of the schedule according to the parameter modification you performed. Days Tab
See Days Tab, page 329 for details.

Active Interval Tab
Define an Interval: Check this box if you want to define an Active Interval rule.
Start Hour: Defines the hour when the active interval begins, i.e., no backup can take place before this time. The earliest beginnning Start Hour is 00:00. End Hour: Defines the hour when the active interval ends, i.e., no backup can take place after this time. The latest End Hour is 23:55. Defining an End Hour is not mandatory, if you do not specify the end hour, backups will continue according to the next day Start Hour parameter. Cancel jobs if outside of the interval: Specifies that if a job is still in progress while the
interval end hour is reached, the job is cancelled.
Let jobs continue outside of the interval: Specifies that if a job is still in progress while
Chapter 7
333
the interval end hour is reached, the job is allowed to continue.
Let jobs continue outside of the interval and send an alarm: Specifies that if a job is still in progress while the interval end hour is reached, the job is allowed to continue, but an alarm warns that the job is running outside the active interval.
Validity Tab See Validity Tab, page 331.
Exclusion Rule Window

Name: Name of the schedule rule. The name must be unique. If no name is specified, the scheduler automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters. Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the name of the schedule
according to the parameter modification you performed.

ID: ID of the rule, automatically assigned by the Scheduler. Description: Description of the rule. If no description is specified, the scheduler automatically assigns a name to the rule according to the rule parameters. Auto Update: Click on this button to automatically adjust the description of the schedule
according to the parameter modification you performed.

Days Tab
See Days Tab, page 329 for details.

Exclusion Tab Validity Tab See Validity Tab, page 331.
Examples of Schedule Creation

Example 1 Backup requirements: Schedule full backups every Sunday at 11 pm. The backup must imperatively stop on the following day at 8 am if it is a working day.
334
Solution:
Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an Activity Interval rule:
Start Rule: Define 23h00 as a start hour on Sunday. Activity Interval Rule Define an active interval from 00h00 to 08h00 for all working days and select "Cancel jobs if outside interval".
Example 2 Backup requirements:
Schedule incremental backups every working day at 7 pm. Backups must imperatively stop on the following day at 8 am if it is a working day.
Solution: Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an two Activity Interval rules:
Start Rule: In the first rule, define 19h00 as a start hour for every working day. Activity Interval Rule: Define an active interval from 00h00 to 08h00 for all working days and select "Cancel jobs if outside interval". Activity Interval Rule: Define an active interval with a beginning time of 19:00 and no ending time, for all working days.
Example 3 Backup requirements: Schedule incremental backups every working day at 10 pm. Backup must imperatively stop on the following day at 8 am if it is a working day. If some backups are paused, they must restart at 7 pm on working days. Solution:
Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an two Activity Interval rules:
Start Rule: In the first rule define 22:00 pm as a start hour for all working days. Activity Interval Rule: In the second rule define an active interval from 00:00 to 08:00 for all working days. Activity Interval Rule:
Chapter 7
335
In the third rule define an active interval with a beginning time of 19:00 and no ending time, for all working days.
Example 4 Backup requirements: Schedule a full backup the first monday of each month at 8 pm. The backup must imperatively stop on the following day at 8 pm. Solution: Create a schedule consisting of a Start rule and an Activity Interval rule:
In the first rule define 20:00 as a start hour every first monday of the month. In the second rule define an active interval from 00:00 to 20:00 every first monday of the month, with an offset of one day.
Example 5 Backup requirements: Schedule a full backup on pool A on the last sunday of the month. Schedule full backups on pool B every sunday of the month except the last one. Solution: Create two schedules as follows:
For the first schedule, define a Start rule with a monthly frequency on the last Sunday every month. Choose a Start Hour. Associate that schedule to Strategy A that uses Pool A for full backups. For the second schedule, define a Start rule with a monthly frequency on the 2nd, 3rd, 4th and last Sunday every month. Add an offset of -7 days. Choose a Start Hour. Associate that schedule to Strategy B that uses Pool B for full backups.
Scheduling a Backup
To schedule automatic backups for a platform, proceed as follows: 1. In Time Navigator Administration Console, select a platform and choose BackupSelected Platform-Strategy A, B, C or D-New, or Properties if the strategy is already created. To schedule full backups, click on Choose in the Scheduler area of the Full tab, to select an existing Schedule, or click on New if you want to define a new schedule (see Creating a Schedule, page 326).
2.
336
3.
To schedule incremental backups, click on Choose in the Scheduler area of the incremental tab, to select an existing Schedule, or click on New if you want to define a new schedule (see Creating a Schedule, page 326). Provide all other strategy parameters as described in Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301.
4.
Editing a Schedule
Note:
When you edit a schedule, all the strategies that use that particular schedule will be affected.
To edit a schedule
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select a schedule in the list and click on Properties. The Schedule window appears. Modify parameters as needed (see Schedule Window, page 327 and Backup Launching Rule Window, page 329), and click on OK.
Copying a Schedule
To copy a schedule
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select the schedule you want to copy in the list and click on Copy. The Schedule is copied and appears in the list as Copy of.... Select the copied schedule and click on Properties to modify it.
Importing a Schedule
To import a schedule
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Click on Import. The Import Schedule window appears. Enter the name and path of the file containing the schedule to import, or browse your file system and select it.
Chapter 7
337
4.
Click on OK to import the schedule.
Exporting a Schedule
To export a schedule
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select a schedule in the list and click on Export. Enter the name and path of the file where you want to export the schedule, or browse your file system and select it. Click on OK to export the schedule.
Deleting a Schedule
Note:
Prior to deleting a schedule, you must unlink it from every strategy that is using that particular schedule. In addition, you will not be able to delete a schedule if it is associated to an active job.
To delete a schedule
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select a schedule in the list and click on Delete. Confirm the operation.
Copying a Schedule Rule

To copy a schedule rule
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select the schedule you want to copy a rule from and click on Properties. In the Schedule window, select the rule to copy and click on Copy. Select the type of the copied rule, either Start, Activity Interval or Exclusion.
338
5.
In the Schedule Rule window, modify the rule parameters as described in Backup Launching Rule Window, page 329, Activity Interval Rule Window, page 331 ou Exclusion Rule Window, page 333. Click on Auto Update to modify the rule Name and Description. Click on OK in the Schedule Rule and Schedule windows to validate your choice.
6. 7.
Modifying a Schedule Rule

To modify a schedule rule
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select the schedule in which you want to modify a rule and click on Properties. In the Schedule window, select the rule to modify and click on Properties. Modify the rule parameters as described in Backup Launching Rule Window, page 329, Activity Interval Rule Window, page 331 or Exclusion Rule Window, page 333. Click on OK in both the Schedule Rule the Schedule windows.
5.
Deleting a Schedule Rule

To delete a schedule rule
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Backup-Scheduling-Schedule Management. The Schedule Management window appears. Select the schedule in which you want to delete a rule and click on Properties. In the Schedule window, select the rule to delete and click on Delete.
Chapter 7
339
Backup Selections
About Backup Selections
Backup Selections specify the directories to be backed up, as well as time phases and conditions under which directories are backed up. If no backup selection is defined for a platform, backup cannot take place with Time Navigator. Any user authorized by the administrator can define, modify or delete a backup selection with Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. Defining a backup selection consists of defining the following settings:
The Time Phases allowed for incremental sessions. The associated Strategies. The Format options (compressing and/or encoding data, only available with the TiNa format). The Filters on the name and size of the backed up files.
All backup selections associated with a strategy are taken into consideration during backups. Except in the case of an automatically initiated incremental backup, where only backup selections whose time phases correspond to the current session strategy times are considered.
Creating a Backup Selection

The backup selection indicates the files and directories to be backed up. If none is defined on a host, no file can be backed up.
Note:
You may also use Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to define your backup selections. Select the host and choose Platform-Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. In the file tree, select the directory on which you want to set a backup selection and choose BackupSelection-New. In the Define Backup Selection window, set the parameters as indicated in the procedure below.
To create a backup selection
1.
Select a platform in the Network area.
340
2.
Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Backup Selection. The Viewing Backup Selections for the selected host appears. This list is empty if no classes have been previously defined.
3. 4.
Click on New. The Path of the New Backup Selection window appears. Enter the path of the directory to back up in the Backup Selection textbox or click on the Browse icon. The Browsing window appears. Select the directory you want in the file tree and click on OK. The Define Backup Selection window is displayed. The Directory represents the backup selection you are currently defining.
Warning:
If you do not use the browsing feature, verify that you enter the correct directory path in the POSIX form (for instance /c/data and not c:\data) to make sure that your directory will actually be backed up.
5.
Define the backup selection settings:
Strategies: Select the strategy you want your backup selection to be backed up with. The star (*) next to a strategy indicates that the strategy has actually been defined.
Note:
If a strategy appears grayed and cannot be selected, it indicates that the current user does not have the permission to use that particular strategy. See User and Access Rights Operations, page 123 for details.
By Default, all time phases and all strategies are selected, no filters or special formats are set. For a description of the filters, time phases and format, see
Define Backup Selection Window - Filters Tab, page 341
Chapter 7
341
Define Backup Selection Window - Time PhasesTab, page 343 Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab, page 344 Define Backup Selection Window - Security Tab, page 345
6.
Click on OK to validate the operation. The list of backup selections is displayed again. It contains the new directory to back up. Click on Close to close the window.
Define Backup Selection Window - Filters Tab

Use the Filters Tab to exclude some files and directories from the backup selection according to certain criteria. The following files are automatically excluded from backup, even though you do not specify any filters for them:
Time Navigator catalog directories that are already backed up via the Catalog application:
$TINA_HOME/Data.catalog_name $TINA_HOME/Data.catalog_name %TINA_HOME%\Data.catalog_name
The files filtered via the registry key

HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\BackupRestore\ FilesNotToBackup.
342
Names: Filters objects according to their names
Select: Selection filter list. See Selection Filters Window, page 342. Exclude: Exclusion filter list. See Exclusion Filters Window, page 343.
For instance, the * character in the Selection textbox will back up all the objects. The *.old string in the Exclusion textbox will exclude all the .old files.
Tip:
You can also directly enter a list of filters separated by spaces in the Selection or Exclusion textboxes. If the file or directory names contain spaces, you must insert a backslash before the space charaters to prevent Time Navigator from interpreting them as string separators (for instance: hello\ world).
Size: Filters objects according to their size by setting a maximum file size. This filter does not apply to directories. Files Modified Since: Filters files according to their last modification date. This filter does
not apply to directories.

Default Configuration: Resets all the parameters to the default configuration.
Selection Filters Window

Add: Allows to add a selection filter by entering a string in the New Filter window. You can use Time Navigator Filter Syntax and the special characters. Import: Allows to import one or several selection filters by selecting them in the Import
Compatible Selection Filters window.

Note:
All the selection filters from compatible platforms in the catalog are available for import.
Remove: Allows to remove a selection filter. Name Filters: List of the existing selection filters.
Chapter 7
343
Exclusion Filters Window

Add: Allows to add an exclusion filter by entering a string in the New Exclusion Filter window. You can use Time Navigator Filter Syntax and the special characters. Import: Allows to import one or several exclusion filters by selecting them in the Import
Compatible Exclusion Filters window.

Note:
All the exclusion filters from compatible platforms in the catalog are available for import.
Remove: Allows to remove an exclusion filter. Name Filters: List of the existing exclusion filters.
Define Backup Selection Window - Time PhasesTab

Use the Time Phases Tab to specify the time phases when the backup selection is backed up.
Activate: Activates the selected time phase.
344
Exclude: Excludes the selected time phase. Hours: Lists all the one-hour time phases. Strat: Indicates the backup strategies (incremental backups) for which backups are
scheduled during the time phase.

Define Backup Selection Window - Properties Tab

Use the Properties Tab to specify whether the data must be compressed and/or encoded. You can also define if the backup selection must be parallelized.
Compressed: Gives you better time performances in low data flow network since it reduces the amount of data traveling through the network. However, it requires more machine resources. It also uses less space on storage media. Compression takes place on the client machine.
Chapter 7
345
Encoded: Protects data against illicit reading. When the Encoded box is checked, data
traveling on the network is encoded and is writen on media encoded. Encoding takes place on the client machine.
Tip:
In order to restore encoded data, you need the original catalog into which the data was backed up, or you can use the tina_cart command. tina_cart allows you to automatically decode data contained on a media.
Note:
The Compressed and Encoded options are only available if the strategies you chose the TiNa format when you create the strategy.
Parallelized: Enables parallel backups for the backup selection being defined. This is used with strategy definitions to enhance backup performance. With applications, only backup selections that can be parallelized according to the application can be enabled.
Once you have enabled parallel backups, you will also have to set a Parallelism Index whose maximum value equals the number of available drives.
Note:
Parallel restore does not depend on using this option. It is entirely possible to use parallel restore on backup selections that were not backed up using the parallelized option.
For parallel backup details on specific applications, consult their respective Time Navigator documentation.
Define Backup Selection Window - Security Tab

Use the Security tab to associate a security rule to the backup selection, so that the backed up or archived data is encrypted and secured. When a backup selection is secured, the directory on which it is set appears in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager file tree with a small green lock instead of a green ball.
346
Rule: Allows to apply a security rule to the backup selection. Name: Displays the list of the rules present in the Time Navigator catalog. Select the rule
that you want to apply to the backup selection.

Note:
The selected rule must be signed by the certificate authentifying the host from which the backup is initiated.
Backup: Applies the security rule to the backup selection during backup. Archiving: Applies the security rule to the backup selection during archiving. Make sure
you choose this option if you want to secure the backup of applications using archive folders such as Time Navigator for Oracle using Recovery Manager. For more information on security rules and certificates, see the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide.
Chapter 7
347
Filter Syntax
Note:
Filters use Posix syntax, i.e. forward slashes rather than backslashes, regardless of Operating System.
Note:
Under MacOS and Unix, the spelling of filters is case sensitive.
To select the files tina, tina_adm and tina_restore from the directory
/application/tina/Bin /usr/tina/Bin c:\Program Files\Atempo\tina\Bin
You can:
Either define a backup selection at the root of the platform and enter the following Selection filters :
/usr/tina/Bin/tina /usr/tina/Bin/tina_adm /c/Program Files/Atempo/tina/Bin/tina_restore
Or define a backup selection on

/usr/tina/Bin /usr/tina/Bin c:\Program Files\Atempo\tina\Bin
and enter the following Selection filters:

tina tina_adm tina_restore
The paths dir/file and /.../dir/file are equivalent since in both cases, the selection is performed in the whole tree structure defined in the backup selection. Conversely, the paths dir/file and dir/.../file are not equivalent. If you specify dir/file, the selection is performed on the file file in the dir directory under the backup selection. If you specify dir/.../file, the selection is performed on all the files file from the directory dir under the backup selection.
348
The default value of the directories that can be filtered is the sign * (it represents the full directory contents). Filters can be used in backup selections to narrow down the choice of files to be backed up (selection and/or rejection lists) or in the file tree of Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to view only the wanted files.
Advanced Inclusion Filters

The explanations and examples that follow will be based on the sample directory tree defined below. Directory names are in normal type, file names are in italic.
Level 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 . 11 tmp data log1.log log log1.txt Dir03 Dir003 file.txt file.txt Log Dir0002 Dir02 Dir002 DirRoot
Level 2
Dir01
Level 3 Level 4
Dir001 file1.txt file2.txt file2.log file3.log file.log file.txt Dir002
Level 5
Level 6
Dir0002
file.log
General Principles of Inclusion
The asterisk, *, is used as a wildcard character to designate any text string. If you begin your filter with a slash, and you want to back up files, you must enter an absolute path. If you begin the filter with a slash and it is not an absolute path, you will back up only the tree structure. Omitting the slash allows you to define relative paths. The recursive notion of "one or more directory levels under the current level" is designated by three dots between two slashes: /.../.
Chapter 7
349
Inclusion Filter Examples
/DirRoot/Dir01/Dir001/file2.txt
To back up just one file in a tree structure, specify the whole path and name. This line backs up the file in line 2, as well as the entire directory structure.
/DirRoot/Dir02/Dir002/*.log
To back up all files with the extension .log, in the directory /DirRoot/Dir02/Dir002/ (the files in lines 3 and 4). Also backs up the entire directory structure.
/Dir02/Dir002/*.log
This will just back up the directory structure. No files with the extension *.log will be detected.
Dir02/Dir002/*.log
Same as above, but this time using a relative path (no slash at the beginning of the expression). This will back up lines 3 and 4.
Dir002/*.log
Backs up lines 3 and 4. This filter starts with a relative directory Dir002, which it finds on lines 3 and 7, and backs up all files with the extension .log, immediately under it. Since the directory in line 7 has no files with extension .log immediately under it, but just other directories, the file in line 7 is not backed up.
Dir002/.../*.log
By contrast, this will back up lines 3 and 4, but also the file in line 7. This filter starts with a relative directory Dir002, which it finds on lines 3 and 7, and backs up all files with the extension .log, recursively through the sub-directories.
Dir*/.../Log/.../*
To back up all files in subdirectories called Log of directories whose name begins with Dir (i.e. lines 5, 6 and 11).
da*/.../Log/.../*
Line 11 only. Files and directory.
da*/.../Log/.../
Same as above. Files and directory.
Dir03/
To back up directory structure under Dir03, but no files.
Dir03/*
Backs up files directly under Dir03 and directory structure under it, but does not back up files in sub-directories of Dir03 (i.e. will back up line 8, but not 9 or the file in line 7).
Dir03/.../*
Files and directories under Dir03, recursively.
350
Dir03*
All directories only.
Exclusion Filters
The Exclusion textbox specifies the list of the objects not to be backed up. If the list includes directories, the files they contain are not backed up. By default, no object is excluded (empty list). Both relative and absolute paths can be used.
Warning:
Backup selections cannot be set on subdirectories of an excluded directory within the same strategy. Having exclusion and inclusion filters in backup selections on the same directory and in the same strategy can result in permanent loss of files.
If, in a given strategy, a directory has an exclusion filter on it, none of its subdirectories can be backed up by that strategy. Subdirectories of an excluded backup selection inherit the exclusion, no matter what other backup selections or inclusion filters are placed on them. They can only be backed up by a different strategy. This is because Time Navigator reads a directory tree from its root to its smallest branches, detecting backup selections and applying filters as it descends. As soon as it reaches a branch with an exclusion filter on it, it stops descending and skips the branch. Thus details on the branch's subdirectories are never read. Example 1: Bad Practice: Strategy A contains:
a backup selection defined on "/" with a filter excluding the sub-directory "/
Volumes"
another backup selection set on "/Volumes".
Consequence: "/Volumes" will not be backed up. The filter excluding it has priority on the backup selection including it, and the whole branch will be ignored. Example 2: Bad Practice: Strategy A contains:
Chapter 7
351
Volumes"
another backup selection set on "/Volumes".
Strategy B contains:
a backup selection set on "/Volumes".
Consequence: As soon as Strategy A is run, it will no longer be possible to restore the files in "/ Volumes". Running Strategy B will not recover the files. Example 3: Correct Practice: Strategy A contains:
Volumes"
Strategy B contains:
a backup selection set on "/Volumes".
This is the correct way to ensure that the files in "/Volumes", are backed up.
Time Navigator Special Characters

Time Navigator uses its own special characters to filter files.The rules are the following:
Absolute and relative paths are allowed. Slashes (/) and double-slashes (//) located at the end of a path are ignored. * : specifies any characters from 0 to n. ? : specifies any single character. [ab]: specifies only one character among those mentioned (a or b). /.../: specifies any number of directory levels. \ : specifies that the following character is ignored. It enables special characters to be used in filters, such as [, ], ?, * and \.
Example
Syntax Used in Filters
*.tmp : all files with the extension .tmp are filtered. ????.o : all files with four characters followed by the extension .o are filtered.
352
tina_st[ao][pt] : all files beginning with tina_st with all possible combinations after st (a or o in 3rd position and p or t in 4th position) are filtered, such as tina_stop and tina_stat. /c/users/.../temp : all files or directories named temp are filtered from /c/users, such as /c/users/temp or /c/users/fred/temp, etc. On the other hand, /temp is not filtered. tina_st[ao][pt] : all files beginning with tina_st with all possible combinations after st (a or o in 3rd position and p or t in 4th position) are filtered, such as tina_stop and tina_stat. /c/users/.../temp : all files or directories named temp are filtered from /c/users, such as /c/users/temp or /c/users/fred/temp, etc. On the other hand, /temp is not filtered.
Filtering Nested Selections

If you have defined backup selections for two directories that are in a parent-child relationship, and that are using the same strategy, the child backup selection inherits filters from the parent backup selection, i.e., the child backup selection default filters will be those of the parent, unless you specifically activate the child backup selection filters. For example, if you set a maximum size of 10MB for the parent backup selection but you want no size restrictions for the child backup selection, select Infinite for the size filter of the child directory backup selection. Exemple: Nested backup selections Filtering /usr/people: filter name select *, exclude core /usr/people/spr: filter name not checked /usr/people/spr/project/all: filter name select *, exclude The files/directories named core will not be backed up in /usr/people nor in /usr/people/spr, but they will be backed up in the directory
Chapter 7
353
/usr/people/spr/project/all (and its children).
Warning:
If a parent backup selection filters out the path of a child backup selection associated to the same strategy, the child backup selection is never backed up. For instance: - If you set a backup selection on /dir/dir1 with an exclusion filter eliminating *dir3* from the backup, associated to StrategyA, - If you set a backup selection on /dir/dir1/dir2/dir3 (with or without filters) associated to Strategy A, The backup selection /dir/dir1/dir2/dir3 will never be backed up since it is excluded from the parent backup selection.
Backup Selection Representation

Once a backup selection has been defined, a small green ball is displayed to the left of the directory icon in the file tree of Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, indicating that a backup selection is set on this directory. If the backup selection is secured by Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager, the green ball is replaced by a small green lock. A green arrow pointing downwards is displayed on the left of all the parent directories of a backup selection.
Viewing Backup Selections

You can view the list of backup selections created on a platform. The following information is provided:
The time phases selected for the incremental sessions. The associated strategies.
354
The format (compression and/or encoding of data). The filtering information: excluded/selected files, maximum file size, and modified since date.
To view backup selection information for a platform
1. 2.
In the Network area, select a platform. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Backup Selection. The Viewing Backup Selections appears.
3.
Click on Column Choice to change the Column Selection: For more details about backup selection filters, time phases and format, see Creating a Backup Selection, page 339.
4.
Click on Close.
Column Selection
Strategy: Strategies that back up the backup selection. Exclusion: Exclusion filter criteria. Format: Either compressed or Encoded depending on the format defined for the backup
selection.
Maximum Size: Contents of the Size filter. Modified Since: Contents of the Modified since filter. Selected: Selection filter criteria.
Chapter 7
355
Time Phases: Time phases selected for the backup selection.
Editing a Backup Selection

You can modify the backup selections of a platform.
To edit a backup selection:
1. 2. 3.
In the Network area, select a platform. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Backup Selection. The list of backup selections of the selected platform is displayed. Select the backup selection to modify in the list and click on Properties. The Define Backup Selection window is displayed. See Creating a Backup Selection, page 339, and follow the same procedure. Click on OK to validate the operation. The list of backup selections is displayed again. Click on Close. It is also possible to edit a backup selection with Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. Select the backup selection in the file tree and choose Backup Selection-Properties.
4. 5.
Note:
Deleting a Backup Selection

You can delete a backup selection if you no longer need it. When the backup selection of a directory is deleted, the contents of the directory are no longer backed up (unless the directory is included in another backup selection).
To delete a backup selection:
1. 2. 3.
In the Network area, select a platform. Choose Backup-Backuo Selection List. The list of backup selections of the selected platform is displayed. Select the backup selection to delete in the list and click on Delete. The Delete Backup Class window is displayed. It contains all the characteristics of the selected class.
356
4.
Click on Delete to validate the operation. A dialog box prompts you to confirm your decision. It is also possible to delete a backup selection in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. Select the backup selection in the file tree and choose Backup Selection-Delete.
Note:
Chapter 7
357
List Administration of Backup Selections

If you want to perform operations on a great number of backup selections at once, use the List of all Backup Selections window that allows you to perform a variety of tasks.
List of all Backup Selections
Number of Backup Selections: Total number of backup selections appearing in the list. Export: Allows to export the backup selection list to a file. Backup Selection Information
Platform: Name of the platform onto which the backup selection is defined. Path: Path of the backup selection directory. Type: Platform type, operating system for a host, application type if the platform is an application. Strategy: Letter of the strategies with which the backup selection is associated. Protected Volume: Volume of data contained in the backup selection. This information appears only if at least one backup has been performed.
358
Format: Format chosen for the backup selection. Filters: Indicates whether filters have been defined on the backup selection or not. Security Rules: Name of the security rule associated to the backup selection. Parallelized : Indicates whether the backup selection is parallelized or not.
Properties: Opens the Define Backup Selection window for the selected backup selection.
Tip:
You can also double click on a backup selection in the list to open the Define Backup Selection window.
Modify Format: Opens the Backup Selection Format window to modify the format of the selected backup selections. Modify Filters: Opens the Backup Selection Filter window to modify filters for the selected backup selections. Modify Security Rule: Opens the Backup Selection Security Rule window to modify the
security rule associated to the selected backup selections.

Delete: Allows to delete the selected backup selections.
Note:
Whenever you select a backup selection in the list, all the other backup selections that could be affected by a modification of that selection (i.e., backup selections with the same path and associated to platforms belonging to the same group) are highlighted too.
Viewing Backup Selection Information

To view backup selection information:
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Browse through the list and click on Close when you are done.
Chapter 7
359
Exporting the Backup Selection List

To export the Backup selection list:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Click on Export, the Export window appears. Specify the export parameters as described in Export Window, page 214. Click on OK. The exported file is created in the location you specified. Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections window when you are done.
Editing Backup Selections

Note:
When you modify a backup selection, all the backup selections consisting of the same path and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are modified as well.
To edit a backup selection:
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup SelectionList. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Select the backup selection you want to edit and click on Properties. The Define Backup Selection window appears. Modify the parameters as needed and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Backup Selection, page 339 for details. To edit another backup selection, select it in the list and repeat step 2. Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections when you are done.
3. 4.
Modifying Backup Selection Parameters

Note:
360
To modify backup selection parameters:
1. 2. 3. 4.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Select the backup selections for which you want to modify the parameters and click on Modify Parameters. Modify the parameters and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Backup Selection, page 339 for details concerning backup selection format. Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections window when you are done.
Modifying Backup Selection Filters

Note:
To modify backup selection filters:
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Select the backup selections for which you want to modify the filters and click on Modify Filters. The Backup Selection Filters window appears. Modify filters as described in Backup Selection Filters Window, page 360 and click on OK to apply the modifications. See Creating a Backup Selection, page 339 for details concerning backup selection filters. Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections window when you are done.
4.
Backup Selection Filters Window

Modify Name Filters: Check this box to modify name filters. Activate Name Filters: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable name filters.
Add to existing filters: Specifies that the filter you define are in addition to existing
ones.
Replace existing filters: Specifies that the filter you define are replacing existing ones.
Chapter 7
361
Remove from existing filters: Specifies that the filter you select are to be removed from
the existing ones.

Selection: Specifies selection filters, see Selection Filters Window, page 342 for
details.
Exclusion: Specifies exclusion filters, see Exclusion Filters Window, page 343.
Modify Size: Check this box to modify the size filter. Activate Size Filter: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable the size filter. Maximum Size: Specifies the maximum file size.
Modify Days: Check this box to modify the days filter Activate Day Filter: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable the days filter Days: Specifies the maximum number of days since the last file modification.
See Define Backup Selection Window - Filters Tab, page 341 for details concerning backup selection filters.
Modifying Backup Selection Security Rule

Note:
To modify backup selection security rule:l
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Select the backup selections for which you want to modify the rule and click on Modify Security Rule. The Backup Selection Security Rule window appears.
362
3. 4.
Modify the rule parameters as described in Backup Selection Security Rule Window, page 362 and click on OK to apply the modifications. Click on Close in the List of all Backup Selections window when you are done.
Note:
Backup Selection Security Rule Window

Modify Security Rule: Check this box to modify the security rule. Activate Security Rule: Check or uncheck this box to activate or disable the security rule. Name: Select the name of the security rule you want to use.
Backup: Specifies that the rule is used for backup. Archiving: Specifies that the rule is used for archiving.
Note:
Deleting Backup Selections

Note:
When you delete a backup selection, all the backup selections consisting of the same path and associated to platforms belonging to the same group are deleted as well.
To delete backup selections:
1. 2. 3.
In Time Navigator Administration Console go to Backup-Backup Selection List. The List of all Backup Selections window appears. Select the backup selections you want to delete and click on Delete. A message box appears asking you if you want to create archive folders to archive the hosts backup files. Click on Yes if you want to archive the contents of the deleted hosts backup folders. Otherwise, click on No.
Chapter 7
363
364
Macro-multiplexing
This section presents the basic concepts of macro-multiplexing, and how they apply to Time Navigator features. A good understanding of cache mechanisms is helpful to handle macro-multiplexing.
Cache Space Management

Time Navigator uses a cache space to regulate data flow during backup and restore operations. Cache space is defined upon creating the catalog. It can be modified later on. See Connected Mode, page 13 and Editing a Catalog, page 45 for details. Each catalog uses its own cache space, no sharing is possible between catalogs. Using cache space provides the following advantages:
It acts as a flow regulator. It optimizes performance with parallel backups. The most recently processed data remains in the cache and can be accessed very quickly should it be restored. This is referred to as the cache effect.
There are two types of cache:
Memory cache: it varies in size between 32 MB and 256 MB. It offers very good performances. Atempo recommends using at least 64 MB of memory cache. Disk cache: provides capacity from 32 MB to dozens of GB, but offers lower performances than memory cache.
Traditionally, memory cache is used for a backup strategy with no macro-multiplexing since it does not require a big size cache. On the other hand, in a macro-multiplexing backup environment, more disk cache is required. In that case, it is advisable to use a memory cache + disk cache configuration. To optimize performance, the disk cache must be composed of several physical disks, called cache axes.
Chapter 7
365
Simple Backup without Macro-multiplexing

Regardless of the backup type, data always transits through the cache space before being written on tape. In the non-macro-multiplexed mode, a tape and a drive remain allocated to a backup until it ends, whatever the rate of data throughput. In case of a slow data throughput backup, due to a slow network, or an incremental backup with many files to read but few files to back up, the drive use is not optimized. When several backups are scheduled at the same time, they are processed in a linear fashion, one after the other. The total backup duration will be the sum of each individual backup duration.
DATA FLOW Backup B1 Backup B2 Backup B3 memory
DRIVE CACHE SPACE TAPE B1 B2 B3
disks
Backup with Macro-multiplexing

Macro-multiplexing breaks away from linear backup to allow several backups to be processed at the same time on the same drive. When backups starts in macro-multiplexed mode, data is written on disk blocks, called containers. Each backup is assigned a different container area of the cache. Each container can hold up to 256 MB of data. When the first container is full, it is copied on tape. The drive may or may not remain allocated to that backup. Depending on a variety of factors such as the speed at which data is copied into the containers, Time Navigator will decide to which backup the drive
366
should be allocated. Thus backups are not processed one after the other. This system optimizes writing throughput and takes full advantage of fast drives.
The total backup duration will be shorter than the sum of each individual backup duration.
DRIVE Backup B1 Backup B2 Backup B3 C1 C2 C3 Cache Axes CACHE SPACE C1 C2 C3 C1 C3 C2 TAPE
C1, C2 and C3 = 256 MB containers
Note:
Depending on your environment, you may reach a threshold where additional backup jobs lead to decreased performances, due to increased sollicitation of resources (io/cpu/memory). If this is the case, you should modify your backup schedule or you backup selections to lower the number of concurrent jobs.
Configuring Macro-multiplexing
Cache requirement
The size of all disks cache combined must be at least 2 GB, otherwise, the macromultiplexed mode is disabled. The size of any individual disk cache however, must not exceed 2047 MB. For performance reasons, it is strongly recommended to have more cache disk cache than drives (2 x n drives) with a maximum of 16 cache spaces (memory cache + disk cache).
Chapter 7
367
To modify the cache space configuration
Modifying the cache space requires editing the catalog. See Editing a Catalog, page 45 for details or Creating a Catalog, page 39, if you decide to work with a brand new catalog.
To activate macro-multiplexing
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Select a host. Choose Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy A (B, C, or D)-Properties. The Strategy Properties window appears. Click on the Advanced tab. See Backup Strategy Window - Advanced Tab, page 306 for details. Check the Sessions can be Multiplexed option to activate macro-multiplexing on full and incremental sessions of strategy A. Click the Incremental Backups Only option to activate macro-multiplexing on incremental backups only. This option is most interesting with fast clients machines for which macro-multiplexing on a full backup would not bring much performance improvement. In the Format area, check TiNa, since the is the only format allowed when macromultiplexing is enabled. Click on OK to validate the operation. Repeat this procedure for every strategy to be macro-multiplexed. It is advisable to enable macro-multiplexing for incremental backups and for full backups on slow machines or networks. It is also recommended not to mix macro-multiplexed backups and standard ones in the same media pool, or to avoid starting them during the same time phase to prevent slower performance due to cartridge mounting/unmounting operations.
6. 7. 8.
Note:
368
Backup Status by Platform

You can view at a glance the backup status of all your platforms or of a certain type of platforms matching your criteria.
Viewing the Backup Status by Platform

To view the protection status by platform:
1.
Choose Backup-Backup Status List. The Backup Status by Platform window appears.
2.
Choose the viewing parameters. The list of platforms matching your criteria appears.
Backup Status by Platform Parameters

Platforms with: Platforms that you want to view according to their backup status. You can
view:
The list of platforms having any backup status (all platforms) The list of platforms with failed backups only The list of platforms with the n most recent backups that failed The list of platforms with the n most recent full backups that failed The list of platforms with the n most recent incremental backups that failed
Period: Period that you want to analyze.
Chapter 7
369
Enabled Platforms Only: Displays only the platforms that are enabled. Platform List
Platform: Name of the plaform. A, B, C or D: Backup strategies used to back up the platform within the specified
period.
Last backup status: The backup status is identified with different colors:
Green: Finished ans successful Orange: Paused or cancelled on request Red: Cancelled on error
Last backup: Date of the last backup. Last completed backup: Date of the last backup that was completed. Last completed full backup: Date of the last full backup that was completed. Last completed incremental backup: Date of the last incremental backup that was
completed.
Retention Alert: An orange retention period alert appears for a strategy if the
retention period margin between the last full backup and the end of the retention period represents less than 20% of the total retention period. If the end of the retention period is reached, a red alert is triggered.
Note :
If a retention alert appears, it means that you should quickly perform a full backup on the plaform, because its protection is not properly ensured.
Details: Displays detailed information about the backups performed on the selected platform. Run Strategy Now: Allows to re-run a backup session that failed.
Viewing Backup Details

To view backup details:
1. 2.
In the Backup Status by Platform window, select the platform for which you want to display the backup details. Click on the Details button. The Backup Details window appears.
370
3. 4.
Click on the different tabs, Strategy A, B, C to view the backup details for each strategy. Click on Close to close the window.
Backup Details Window

Completed Jobs: Status of the last backup for each strategy.
Strategy tabs
Last Backup: Description (Backup type, platform name and strategy), date and status of
the last backup. Last Successful Backup: Description ((Backup type, platform name and strategy), and date of the last successful backup.
Full Backup: Date of the last successful full backup, and retention period margin. The
retention period margin is the time period between the last full backup and the end of the retention period of the media pool associated to the strategy. If the retention period margin represents less than 20% of the total retention period, an orange retention alert is triggered. If the end of the retention period is reached, a red alert is triggered.
Re-running a Strategy
If one of the backups failed and the issue causing the failure is solved, you can re-run the backup session.
To re-run a strategy:
1. 2.
In the Backup Status by Platform window, select the platform for which you want to re-run the strategy. The Run Strategy window appears. Enter the Strategy Parameters:
Type: Choose whether you want to run a full or an incremental backup. Strategy: Choose the strategy to re-run.
3.
Click on OK to relaunch the backup job.
371
C H A P T E R
Agents
This chapter covers the use of the application on all supported agents. The agents can be under any of the following types of operating system:
Windows Unix Linux Mac OS X VMS NetWare NDMP
For NetWare agents, the Time Navigator graphical interface is not available. For details concerning Specific Attributes and ACLs backup for each OS, see Backup of Specific Attributes, page 311.
372
Windows
Using the Time Navigator Agent
The tina_daemon.exe binary allows the Time Navigator server to manage the file system of the Windows client, and thus to back up the clients data by running the tina_backup.exe binary. The Time Navigator agent is automatically started as a service whenever the Windows machine starts.
Backing up Files
All file attributes (read-only, system, hidden, archive) are backed up. It is recommended not to back up the following files:

*.bak *.tmp
Possibly the temporary directory temp or tmp.
Restoring Files
All file attributes and dates are recovered.
Registry
The registry is made up of two files: System.dat and Users.dat located in the Windows directory. They can be backed up and restored.
Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista
For information concerning Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista clients and the System State application, see the Time Navigator Agent for Windows guide.
Chapter 8
Agents
373
Unix
Unix agents can perform all operations with Time Navigator as long as Motif is available on the machine.
Linux
Linux agents can perform all operations with Time Navigator as long as X11 is available on the machine. In order to backup ACLs, make sure that the libacl.so library is declared in the PATH environment variable of the system. Time Navigator handles file systems controlled by Data Migration Facility (DMF) from SGI through the use of the bapi_fs tunable. For information concerning the bapi_fs tunable, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
374
Mac OS X
Mac OS X agents can perform all the operations with Time Navigator as long as X11 is available on the machine. See the Time Navigator Installation Guide for details concerning the Mac OS X agent and X11 installation.
Time Navigator Daemon

Starting or Stopping the Time Navigator Daemon
To start or stop the Time Navigator daemon on a Mac OS X client, proceed as follows: 1. 2. Click on the Finder, choose Applications-Utilities and double click on the Terminal icon to open it. Move to the Time Navigator installation directory:
cd /Applications/Atempo/tina_environment
where tina_environment is the name of the Time Navigator environment you defined during the setup. 3. Run the the following command to set the Time Navigator environment: . ./.tina.sh 4. To start the daemon, run the tina_daemon command. To stop the daemon, run the tina_stop command.
Time Navigator Interfaces

Using the Time Navigator Interfaces
1. 2. 3.
Make sure that the Time Navigator daemon is running as previously explained (see Time Navigator Daemon, page 374). Click on the Finder and choose Applications-Atempo. In the Atempo folder, open the folder of the Time Navigator environment you want to use.
Chapter 8
Agents
375
4.
Double-click on the icon of the interface you want to use. See the Time Navigator Administration Guide (tina_adm, tina_job, tina_library) and Time Navigator Restore Guide (tina) for details concerning each interface. The tina_adm command is only available if you installed the Admin Tools component during setup.
Note:
Specifics of the Mac OS X agent

File System
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up HFS+ and UFS file systems.
Resource Fork
Files on Mac systems are traditionally made of two parts: the data fork that contains the actual data and the resource fork that contains such information as attributes, program segments, icon bitmaps and other parameters. The resource forks are associated with HFS+ volumes. In newer versions of the MAC OS X, they are being used less and less. However, for compatibility reasons, Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up and restore the resource forks.
Note:
In addition, the resource fork backup is used by Time Navigator to handle the processing of alias.
Backup
The version size provided by Time Navigator includes the Data fork, the Resource fork and additional information.
376
Restore
Resource forks are restored only on an HFS+ file system. If you perform a cross restore from an HFS+ to a UFS file system, resource forks are lost and the restored file only contains the data fork.
Note:
If you copy fileA.txt from an HFS+ to an UFS volume, the Finder keeps the resource fork in ._fileA.txt on the UFS volume.
Alias
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up and restore aliases.
HFS+
On an HFS+ system, an alias is a file that contains only a resource fork and no data fork. A field in the Finder Info indicates that the file is an alias. All alias information is contained in the resource fork and in the Finder Info and can therefore be backed up and restored with Time Navigator.
UFS
An alias consists of two files: an empty file fileB.txt alias and ._fileB.txt alias. The Time Navigator user only sees both file and must back up and restore both files.
Note:
The restore of aliases for UFS file systems does not require the restore of the Finder Info.
Cross restoring from HFS+ to UFS
Since resource forks are not restored on a UFS file system, a cross restore from HFS+ to UFS does not allow to restore the alias. Only the empty file fileA.txt alias is restored.
Cross restoring from UFS to HFS+
Cross restore between UFS and HFS+ is not supported by Time Navigator.
Chapter 8
Agents
377
FinderInfo
Time Navigator Agent for Mac OS X allows to back up and restore the Finder Info. The Finder Info is backed up as a block using APIs, the detailed contents of the Finder Info is not known. The backed up Finder elements include the following:
The color of a file or folder The Stationery Pad information of a file The alias of a file (for HFS+ file systems)
For details concerning the backup of the FinderInfo, see Backup of Specific Attributes, page 311.
PAM
Using Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) requires the following configuration:
Mac OS X configuration In the folder /etc/pam.d create a file atempo containing the following:

auth required pam_nologin.so auth sufficient pam_securityserver.so auth sufficient pam_unix.so auth required pam_deny.so account required pam_permit.so password required pam_deny.so session required pam_permit.so
Time Navigator configuration
Set the tunable enable_pam_authentication to "yes". See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
Known Issues
Accented Character
Files containing accented characters in their name are correctly backed up and restored. However, non ASCII characters are not displayed in the Time Navigator interfaces and are replaced by #.
378
Case Sensitivity
Time Navigator for Mac OS X automatically handles case sensitivity depending on the file system type. On UFS, Time Navigator is case sensitive, fileA is different from FileA. Both files can be located in the same directory. On HFS+, Time Navigator is not case sensitive, fileA is the same as FileA. If you rename fileA into FileA, it will not be backed up during the next incremental. During the next full backup, FileA will be back up and its version will be linked to fileA versions.
Case Sensitivity in Command line
While most Time Navigator commands work with a Time Navigator Mac OS X platform as they do with any other operating system, you must be careful with the following commands that use a path or a file name as a parameters:
tina_cart The option -files is case sensitive. You must use the exact case of the file names
to list or extract when using this option.
tina_restore The option -path_folder is case sensitive. To list the contents of a directory,
you must provide the exact case of the directory path even if the directory is located in a non-case sensitive file system.
tina_find The option -path_folder (unlike the tina_restore -path_folder option),
is not case sensitive.
tina_alpha
The file names specified in the command instance are case sensitive. The object names specified in the commands add and sub are not case sensitive. For details concerning the command line, see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
Finders comments
The Finders comments are located in the file .DS_Store. This file is currently updated only when the machine is restarted. Thus a backup of that file may not contain the latest modifications. A solution to that issue is currently being sought with the manufacturer of Mac OS X. Atempo proposes the following procedure to bypass that issue:
Create a file update_finder_comments containing the following script: osascript -e 'tell application "Finder" to quit' osascript -e 'tell application "Finder" to run' Make sure that the user performing the backup and restore operations has the permission to execute update_finder_comments.
Chapter 8
Agents
379
Backup: in the Strategy Window, enter update_finder_comments in the preprocessing field. The script will be executed prior to any backup on the Mac OS X agent. Restore: perform the restore on the Mac OS X agent and manually execute update_finder_comments once the restore is completed.
Context Sensitive menu
The shortcut key to activate the context sensitive menus is the apple key rather than the Ctrl key.
Cross restoring aliases on a different file system
It is not possible to cross restore aliases from HFS+ to UFS,nor from UFS to HFS+.
380
VMS
General information
VMS agents can use all the Time Navigator graphical interface functionalities as long as DEC Windows Motif is installed on the machine. Time Navigator tree structure is not limited to eight levels. The SYS$STARTUP:TINA_SHUTDOWN.COM procedure is used to stop the application. The Time Navigator start-up procedure defines the following: TINA$ROOT on the Time Navigator installation directory TINA$COM = TINA$ROOT:[COM] TINA$EXE = TINA$ROOT:[EXE], directories where the Time Navigator binaries are located.
Note:
Atempo recommends that you use logical names such as these instead of absolute paths to access binaries. This maintains consistency with any scripts that you might use. The directories names beginning with the hyphen character (-) are properly processed by Time Navigator. With VMS you must define a symbol before using parameters with a Time Navigator binary. For instance, if you want to use the tina_restore command help parameter, you must execute the following:
$ tina_rst = "$ TINA$EXE:TINA_RESTORE.EXE" $ tina_rst -help
Parameters are converted to lower case. If a parameter must remain in upper case, it must appear between quotes. Example:
$ tina_archive = "$ TINA$EXE:TINA_ARCHIVE.EXE" $ tina_archive -backup -full -strat "A"
The TINA_STATUS symbol represents the command return code. Its values are:
65 535 in case of success
Chapter 8
Agents
381
Another value in case of failure.
Operations to perform before starting the VMS agent
If you have just installed Time Navigator Agent for VMS, do not enter the following commands unless the installation was correctly performed.
Definitions at the VMS agent system level Run the DCL command file:
@SYS$STARTUP:TINA_STARTUP.COM
1. 2.
Enter the following command to cancel the above command or to stop Time Navigator.
@SYS$STARTUP:TINA_SHUTDOWN.COM
3.
Start the SYS$STARTUP:TINA_STARTUP.COM procedure in the SYS$STARTUP:STARTUP_VMS.COM file or in the LPMAIN phase of the SYSMAN STARTUP area to start Time Navigator Agent for VMS automatically with the system. Define or remove the following logical names to adapt Time Navigator to your environment specifics:
TINA_SET_BACKUP_DATE: Set to any value, this logical name indicates that the backup date of any file backed up with Time Navigator will be updated. TINA_ALL_VERSIONS: Set to any value, this logical name indicates that Time Navigator is working in a multi-version mode. When performing a backup or an archiving, all versions of a file are displayed in the selection window (otherwise, only the last version will be displayed). This option uses up a lot of space in the catalog since Time Navigator creates a backup selection per file version. During a restore, if Time Navigator detects an existing file with the same version number as the file you are restoring, you will have the option either to replace or rename the file. The old file will be renamed as filename.type_saven;p (where n = a number).
4.
Note:
If you choose to use the TINA_ALL_VERSIONS logical name, you must add the * character after each file name in the exclusion filter. For instance to exclude all LOG file versions, enter *.LOG;* in the exclusion filter. To exclude only version 2 files, enter *.LOG;2 in the exclusion filter. Definition at the VMS user level
382
Start Time Navigator Agent for VMS with the following commands:
RUN TINA$EXE:TINA to start Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. RUN TINA$EXE:TINA_ADM to start Time Navigator Administration Console.
Backup Selection
Due to a viewing problem in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, Time Navigator does not support the use of logical names in the path of the backup selection. If you have already performed a backup on a backup selection containing a logical name and you want to restore some data from that backup, open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager and set the date to a date in the past, with or without showing deleted files depending on your need. You will be able to see the backed up versions and perform the restore.
Chapter 8
Agents
383
OES NetWare
See the Time Navigator Agent for NetWare guide.
384
OES Linux
See the Time Navigator Agent for NetWare guide.
Chapter 8
Agents
385
NDMP
See the Time Navigator for NDMP guide.
386
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer

Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer application is installed by default on a Time Navigator agent. The application is supported on Unix, Windows, Mac OS X, VMS, and NetWare operating systems. On Unix, Windows and Mac OS X, it is divided into two tabs. The first tab provides information about the backups and restores performed on agents, while the second tab, which appears only if the User has rights, gives access to On Demand Backup functionality. On VMS and NetWare, only the first tab is available. This section will discuss the default functions of Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on all operating systems. For a detailed discussion of the optional On Demand Backup functions on Unix, Mac OS X and Windows, see Chapter 9, On Demand Backup, page 405.
Starting Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer

To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a Unix client
Run the following executable on the command line:

$TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_user_info
The application main window appears.

To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a Windows client
Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator- Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer. Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer appears. When minimized, Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer appears as a compass icon in the Windows System Tray. The icon appearance varies according to the service or daemon status, the catalog connection(s) and the backup and/or restore jobs in progress.
Icon appearance
Red Blue Flashing green dots on the horizontal axis of the compass
Status
Service or daemon stopped Service or daemon running Backup in progress
Chapter 8
Agents
387
Icon appearance
Flashing green dots on the vertical axis of the compass Flashing green dots on both horizontal and vertical axes of the compass
Status
Restore in progress Backup and Restore in progress
To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a VMS client
Run the tina_user_info binary located in the Bin directory of the tina user acccount. Enter run tina$exe:tina_user_info on the command line. The application main window appears.
Main Window
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer main window is divided into three areas: the menu bar, the information area and the status bar.
Menu Bar
Information Area
Status Bar
Menu bar
The menu bar contains all the commands:
Application-Job Details Displays the Job Details windows. For more information about the Job Details window, see Job Details, page 389.
Application-Quit
388
Closes Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer.
View-Refresh Refreshes the displayed information manually.
Information area
The Information area provides the following information:
Host name of the local machine. Date of the last successful full or incremental backup preceded by a green diamond. Date of the last full or incremental backup which ended on error. The date is preceded by a red or orange diamond which indicates the error severity.
Color
Orange Red
Error Description
Backup paused or cancelled on request Backup cancelled on error
Note:
The last backup date is displayed only if the backup came after the last successful backup. The date of the failed backup is not displayed if the latest backup was successful. Date of the next scheduled full or incremental backup.
The displayed dates do not concern application backups, only filesystem backups.
Status bar
The icons on the status bar provides the following information:
Chapter 8
Agents
389
Numbered Area
1
Icon
Description
Catalog connection status The Catalog is the Time Navigator database. It contains the information required to run Time Navigator (platform configuration, drives, libraries, users, media, etc.), as well as the description and location of all backed up and archived files. If the Catalog cannot be accessed, backups and restores cannot be performed. You can have several Catalogs defined for the same client platform. The number of catalogs that remain connected is indicated on the right of the catalog icon. If the connection to one of the catalogs fails, a red exclamation mark appears on the catalog icon on the left of the status bar.
Time Navigator service status The service is the process which allows Time Navigator Server and Time Navigator Agent to run. It corresponds to the Time Navigator service on Windows and the daemon (tina_daemon) on Unix. A green chekmark indicates that the Time Navigator service is running.
A red cross indicates that the Time Navigator service is stopped.
Backup or restore in progress If a backup or a restore job is in progress, a cartridge icon is displayed on the right of the status bar.
Refreshing
The information area and the status bar are refreshed every two minutes if no backup or restore job is in progress on your machine. If a job is running, the refreshing period is 30 seconds. You can manually refresh the window choosing View-Refresh.
Job Details
The Job Details window displays additional information about complete and cancelled backups, and about backup and restore jobs in progress.
To view the Job Details window
1.
Choose Application-Job Details.
390
The following window appears:
2. 3.
Click on the Complete, Cancelled and In Progress tabs to view successful and cancelled backups as well as current jobs. Click on Close to return to the main window.
Complete
The Complete tab is used to display the following information after a successful backup:
Catalog Description Status Date Processed Volume Processed Objects
Name of the catalog into which the backup is performed Job type, name of the platform, name of the strategy and backup type (incremental or full) Job status (Complete) Job submission date Processed object Volume (bytes) or Progression if the job is in progress Number of backed up/restored Objects
Note:
The Complete and Cancelled tabs allow you to view the details of backup jobs. The In Progress tab also allows you to view restores.
Cancelled
The Cancelled tab is used to display the following information after a cancelled
Chapter 8
Agents
391
backup:
Catalog Description Status Date Processed Volume Processed Objects In Progress
Name of the catalog into which the backup is performed Job type, name of the platform, name of the strategy and backup type (incremental or full) Job status (Cancelled) Job submission date Processed object Volume (bytes) Number of backed up/restored Objects
The In Progress tab is used to display the following information about running backup and restore jobs:
Catalog Description Status Date Processed Volume Processed Objects
Name of the catalog into which the backup is performed Job type, job description (name of baked up/restored platform, name of strategy and type of backup) Job status (Running) Job submission date Processed object Volume (bytes) or Progression if the job is in progress Number of backed up/restored Objects
Refreshing the Displayed Information

The information area and the status bar are refreshed every two minutes if no backup or restore job is in progress on your machine. If a job is running, the refreshing period is 30 seconds. You can also refresh the window manually.
To refresh the Displayed Information
1. 2.
Choose View-Refresh. Click on Close to go back to the main interface.
392
Mac OS X
Opening Time Navigator Backup Activity Widget
On Mac OS X Tiger platforms Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer is in the form of a Dashboard Widget.
To start Time Navigator Backup Activity Widget on a Mac OS X client
Choose Finder-Application and click on the Dashboard icon. In the Dashboard click on the Backup Activity icon. The widget appears.
The following information is provided:
Operation in progress (if any): backup or restore. Time Navigator Service Status: Up, Down or Unknown Last Status: Status of the last backup: completed, paused or cancelled. Last completed: Date of the last completed backup, Unknown or N/A. Next scheduled: Date of the next scheduled backup, Unknown or N/A. Status bar: Refreshing if a refreshing is in progress, the name of the Time Navigator environment if several environments are present, the icon to switch the Backup Activity over.
To switch the Backup Activity widget
Click on the i in the lower right corner of the widget.
Chapter 8
Agents
393
The following information is provided:
Refreshing frequency: allows the user to set the value and unit of the refreshing
period.
Environment Choice: allows the user to choose the Time Navigator environment, if
several environment are present. Othewise the button does not appear.
Viewing Jobs
Time Navigator Job Manager displays complete information about backup and restore jobs as well as all the job types found in Time Navigator either finished or in progress.
To view Jobs
1. 2.
Click on the Last Backup Status icon. The Catalog Login window appears. Provide a user name and password to connect to the catalog. The Time Navigator Job Manager appears.
See Time Navigator Job Manager, page 331 for details.
394
NetWare
Opening Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
To start Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer on a NetWare client
Run the binary with the following command:

load tina_ui.nlm
The application main window appears.
Main Window
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer main window is divided in two areas: a Status area and a Command bar.
Status area
The following information is displayed in the Status area:
Name of the Time Navigator Server Service status (started or stopped) Backup in progress (Running/None) Restore in progress (Running/None)
The status area is refreshed every two minutes if no backup or restore job is in progress on your machine. If a job is running, the refreshing period is 30 seconds.
Chapter 8
Agents
395
Command Bar
The following commands are available:
Esc to Quit F5 to do a refresh Enter to display the Job Details window.
For more information about the Job Details window, see the section below.
Job Details
This window displays additional information about backup and restore jobs in progress.
To view the Job Details window
1. 2.
Press the Enter key. The information is displayed on two separate windows. Press the Tab key to switch from one Details window to the other. The following information appears in the first window;
Name of the Catalog into which the backup or restore was performed.
Description of the backup or restore jobs (Job type, name of the backed up or
restored platform, name of the strategy and type of backup).
Status of the backup or restore jobs (Complete, Cancelled ...).
The following information appears in the second window:
396
Backup or restore submission Date. Processed objects Volume (bytes) or Progression if the backup or restore is in progress. Number of backed up or restored Objects.
3.
Press the Esc key to go back to the main window.
Chapter 8
Agents
397
398
Chapter 8
Agents
399
400
Chapter 8
Agents
401
402
Chapter 8
Agents
403
404
405
C H A P T E R
On Demand Backup
On Demand Backup is a feature in Time Navigator that empowers an end user to start the backup job. It allows users to initiate backups at their convenience, outside the schedule set by the administrator. They do not have to apply to the administrator in person every time they need an unscheduled backup. Administrators are able to retain control of backup access and load. Imagine a busy executive who is often on the road with a laptop. Before leaving on a business trip, he or she needs to ensure that all his or her work is well-protected. He needs a backup then and there - with a plane to catch, there can be no waiting around for the next automatic backup to run. On Demand Backup is the solution. The principle of on-demand backup is straightforward:
The Time Navigator Administrator defines:
Which Users have the right to run an On Demand Backup Which Strategies on which platforms can be run On Demand How many On Demand Backups can be run per strategy in a 24-hour period.
The User authorized to run On Demand Backup can run it:
With the Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer graphic interface From the command line, with the command tina_user_info_cmd In a MacIntosh environment, from a Dashboard Widget.
Limitations
The On Demand Backup feature only works on hosts and on FileSystem Applications. All On Demand Backups are incremental.
406
Configuring On Demand Backup

For Users to be able to use On Demand Backup, the administrator must configure some settings in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Defining Users
A User having On Demand Backup rights must already exist. Create it if necessary. For information on how to create a User, see Chapter 9, Users and Access Rights, page 119.
To give On Demand Backup rights to a user
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Security-User Access RightsPersonal. The list of Users appears. Select the User and click OK. The Access Control window appears:
3.
In the top part of the window, select Define Personal Access Rights.
Chapter 9
On Demand Backup
407
4. 5.
Note:
Under the Backup tab, check the box On Demand Backup (start and stop). Click on the OK button. If you wish to give all the Users in your Network the right to use On Demand Backup, select Security-User Access Rights-Default. This assumes they do not already have a personal profile created.
Defining Strategies
Create a Backup selection and Strategy for which it will be possible to run On Demand Backups, or edit an existing one. For more information on creating or editing a strategy, see Chapter 7, Automatic Backup Configuration, page 285.
To set On Demand Backup on a strategy
1. 2.
In the New Strategy or Strategy Properties Window, under the Advanced tab, check the box Available for On Demand Backup as shown in the illustration below. Click on OK.
408
Managing Load
The Administrator must set a global parameter for the entire Time Navigator network of how many On Demand Backups can be run per host and per day. The default value is 5.
To set the limit
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Catalogs-Parameters. The Catalog Parameters interface appears.
Chapter 9
On Demand Backup
409
2. 3.
In the On Demand Backup area in the lower half of the window, modify the parameter Maximum of On Demand Backup per day and per host. Click on OK.
410
411
Using On Demand Backup

Windows and Unix: Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer
Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer has already been described in Chapter 8, Agents, page 371. In that chapter, we mentioned that Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer was structured over two tabs and covered in detail the contents and operation of the first tab, Information. The second tab, On Demand Backup, appears only if On Demand Backup functionality is available:
The user must have the rights At least one strategy has the On Demand Backup option activated At least one On Demand Backup still can be run as defined in the Maximum per day on that host
If one of these conditions ceases to be present after the program has been launched, the second tab remains, but the Start and Cancel buttons are greyed and the label beside them reads "No available platforms for On Demand Backup".
Description of the On Demand Backup Tab
412
The On Demand Backup tab contains:
Two buttons, Start and Cancel to start and cancel the On Demand Backup A scrollable Details of my On Demand Backup area displaying status and information for the On Demand Backup jobs:
The List of running On Demand Backup Jobs The List of terminated On Demand Backup Jobs
The tree shown in this Details area has up to four levels:
The first level is the catalogs, but it appears only in a multi-catalog environment. If there is only one Time Navigator catalog, the jobs become the first level. Jobs are displayed with an icon representing their status:
For completed jobs, a green gear. For running jobs, a blue arrow. For error jobs, a orange triangle.
Under each job, the backup selections (with a yellow folder icon) and the Information icon (white i on blue circle) are found. If Information is opened, the job id and the folder name appear.
The tree keeps only one job per catalog, platform, and strategy. When a more recent job is created, it replaces the old one of the same catalog, platform and strategy.
Tree Update
The tree is updated at three different rates:
2 minutes when there is no activity. 30 seconds when a normal backup is running. 5 seconds when an On Demand Backup is running.
An update can be forced with the View - Refresh menu item, or by pressing the F5 key.
To Operate On Demand Backup on Windows and Unix
1. 2. 3.
Log in as an authorized User on the platform. Run Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer. Go in the On Demand Backup tab.
413
4.
Click on the Start button to launch the backup, or on the Cancel button to cancel a backup in progress.
On Demand Backup in the Windows Taskbar

When On Demand Backup is minimized in Windows, it can still be accessed from the taskbar at the lower right of the screen. If the necessary conditions are present, right-clicking on the taskbar icon gives access to two items in a Windows popup menu: Start on demand backup or Cancel on demand backup.
414
On Demand Backup Unavailable
The Start On Demand Backup can be unavailable (i.e. the Start button disabled, or the On Demand Backup tab does not appear on Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer) if:
A backup job is still active on this platform. Check in the Job Details or in Time Navigator Job Manager whether there are any jobs stopped on error. They need to be cancelled for On Demand Backup to be available. The number of On Demand Backups launched within the last 24 hours is greater than the limit set by the administrator. The backup server is busy (i.e. the number of running jobs is greater than the fixed limit). The user does not have sufficient rights.
The Cancel On Demand Backup can be unavailable (Cancel button disabled, or the On Demand Backup tab does not appear on Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer) if:
An On Demand Backup is not running on this platform. The user does not have sufficient rights.
Monitoring On Demand Backup in Time Navigator Job Manager

In Time Navigator Job Manager, the backup jobs derived from On Demand requests are tagged as End User jobs.
It is possible for several On Demand Backup jobs to be running at once. For example, the Start of On Demand Backup starts two backup jobs:
If the Administrator defines two separate On Demand Backup strategies on a platform. If the Administrator defines one On Demand Backup strategy on a platform. and defines another On Demand Backup strategy on a FileSystem Application related
415
to the platform.
In a multi catalog environment, if a platform is present in two catalogs and if each version of it has an On Demand Backup strategy.
416
417
418
419
C H A P T E R
10
Time Navigator in SAN Environments
10
This section describes how to configure Time Navigator in order to implement a backup and restore solution on a dedicated data storage network, the Storage Area Network (SAN).
About Time Navigator in SAN Environments

Storage Area Networks (SAN) are designed to simplify and optimize data management through resource sharing. As such, they also optimize the data backup processes, making it possible to share libraries and drives with multiple servers over a storage-dedicated network. Time Navigator allows you to implement two different types of architectures to share storage resources over a SAN:
About Multiple Server Architecture About Storage Node Architecture
See Multiple Servers or Storage Nodes, page 422 to help you choose between the two types of architectures according to your needs and constraints.
420
About Multiple Server Architecture

As shown in the diagram below, storage resources can be shared between several Time Navigator servers connected to a SAN. The main server managing the library allows you physically to split the library between each server. The data located on the servers is backed up directly on the storage device through the SAN. The meta-data is sent to the associated catalog and do not go through the IP or the SAN network.
For more information about the representation of this configuration in Time Navigator Administration Console, see "SAN Supervision", page 424.
Chapter 10
421
About Storage Node Architecture

A storage node is a client platform that can be connected to a storage device and can back up data directly, bypassing the Time Navigator Server. The meta-data is farted to the server catalog through the IP Network. As shown on the diagram below, several storage nodes can share the drives and library. The library is managed by the Time Navigator Server.
For more information about the representation of this configuration in Time Navigator Administration Console, see "Storage Node Architecture Implementation", page 428.
422
About Mixed Architecture

Both types of architecture can be combined on the same network to fit your needs:
If the catalog is full on storage node architecture, you can either add a catalog on the same server or add a second server with the Time Navigator Shared Drive Option. You can also add NDMP file servers with dedicated catalogs to a storage node architecture.
Multiple Servers or Storage Nodes

The table below will help you choose between the two types of architecture according to your needs and constraints:
Features
Multiple writing Media duplication Synthetic backup
Multiple Servers
YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES
Storage Node
YES YES NO NO YES YES (dedicated media pool required) NO NO NO YES except for the export to the same catalog
cpio, and TiNa formats support tar format support sidf format support
Requires splitting of the library Dedicated catalog Macro-multiplexing
tina_export command
Chapter 10
423
Device Descriptor Re-allocation

In a SAN configuration, SCSI devices (drives and libraries) may be dynamically reallocated during zoning operations. The operating system device configuration is then modified on the platforms connected to the SAN. Time Navigator can get the serial numbers of the devices in order to identify drives and library exactly and modify the device descriptors dynamically. Time Navigator supports this feature on the following operating systems:
Windows SUN Solaris Linux
The drive serial number is automatically detected if the drive is created on a SAN in Time Navigator Administration Console (see "To create a SAN", page 429). On the other hand, the detection of the library serial number and the re-allocation of the device descriptors require the Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor (check_device_descriptor_from_serial_number) tunable to be declared through the Configurator on the Time Navigator Server.
To implement device descriptor re-allocation
1.
Before performing an operation likely to modify the devices connected to the SAN (zoning), declare the Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor (check_device_descriptor_from_serial_number) tunable via Time Navigator Configurator on the server. For more information on tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables Guide.
2.
Once the zoning operation is completed, restart the Time Navigator server and storage nodes connected to the drives or libraries through the SAN to update the device configuration. If you do not want to restart the machines, you must manually update the device configuration on the operating systems. For more information on device configuration, see the operating system administration documentation and the Time Navigator Drivers Guide.
3.
Perform an operation which requires access to the drives and libraries. For instance, reinitialize the library and read a cartridge label with the drives. This operation allows update of the device descriptor in Time Navigator. The new descriptor appears in the Drive and Library Properties windows.
424
4.
Remove the Use Serial Number to Determine Device Descriptor (check_device_descriptor_from_serial_number) tunable via Time Navigator Configurator. If the tunable is not removed, requests are regularly sent to check the device descriptors and it generates unnecessary network traffic.
SAN Supervision
Time Navigator Web Supervision is designed to facilitate remote supervision and administration in large SAN environments with many catalogs. For more information about Time Navigator Web Supervision, refer to the Time Navigator Web Interfaces guide.
Chapter 10
425
Multiple Server Architecture Implementation

Prerequisites
Several Time Navigator components must be installed:
Time Navigator Server must be installed on each secondary server connected to the SAN. The setup must be run and the Time Navigator Server option checked. For more information on Time Navigator installation, see the Time Navigator Installation Guide.
Time Navigator Server must be installed on the main server managing the library. The setup must be used to split the library so that each server is allocated a split in the library. For more information about the library split, see the Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager Guide.
When you create catalogs on the various servers, they must all be accessible by all servers. To do so, you must manually modify the catalogs files on each server to add an entry for each catalog. See Time Navigator Installation Guide for details.
Configuration
Each secondary server must be similarly configured, except for the main server managing the library.
To configure the main server
1.
In Time Navigator Administration Console on the main server, create the library. The split number corresponding to the library server must be added at the end of the Device Descriptor. For example: qc0,0 /dev/qc0,0 c0b2t4l0s0 See "Creating a Library", page 161 and the Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager Guide.
2.
Choose Platform-New-Network to create a SAN network.
426
3. 4. 5.
Select the SAN icon and choose Devices-Drive-New. The Drive Type Selection window appears. Choose the drive type and click on OK. The New Drive window appears. Set the parameters in the various tabs as described in "Changing the Mode of the Drive", page 182.
Note:
In the Identity tab, make sure you enter the name of a user who has the necessary rights to access the drive.
6. 7. 8. 9.
In the Connection tab, click on Add to specify the host you want to be backed up onto the drive. The Host List window appears. Select your main server in the list and click on OK. In the Device Descriptor field, enter the drive device descriptor. Click on OK to validate the operation.
The drive icon appears attached to the SAN in the lower part of the Network area. The screen below represents the Network Area of the main server Time Navigator Administration Console: the main server name is takata; it is attached to the DocLib library containing the DocDrive and DocDrive2 drives:
Chapter 10
427
To configure the secondary servers
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console on the secondary server, create the main server. See "Creating a Platform", page 74. Create the library attached to the main server. The split number corresponding to the secondary server you are configuring must be added at the end of the Device Descriptor. For example: qc0,1 /dev/qc0,1 c0b2t4l0s1 See "Creating a Library", page 161 and the Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager Guide.
3.
Choose Platform-New-Network to create a SAN network. Then select it to create the drive(s) used by the server you are configuring. See steps 2. to 9. of the To configure the main server procedure page 425. The screen below represents the Network Area of a secondary servers Time Navigator Administration Console: the server name is aria and the library server name is takata; data located on aria is backed up on the DocDrive2 drive:
428
Storage Node Architecture Implementation

Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met before configuring Time Navigator:
Time Navigator Server must be installed on the backup server. The setup must have been runned and the Time Navigator Server option checked. Time NavigatorStorage Node must be installed on each storage node. The setup must have been run and the Time Navigator Storage Node option checked.
For more information concerning Time Navigator installation, see the Time Navigator Installation Guide.
Configuration
Attention:
Prior to configuring Time Navigator Storage Node on Windows platforms, make sure that the Removable Storage Windows service (NtmsSvc) is stopped. If this service is started, some conflicts may occur for media access.
To Configure Time Navigator:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Create the library attached to the Time Navigator Server. See "Creating a Library", page 161. Declare each storage node as a host. Check the Storage Node option in the Advanced tab of the New Host window. See "Creating a Host", page 74. Create the SAN Network. See "SAN Creation", page 429. Create the shared drives. See "Shared Drive Creation", page 429. Create a backup strategy on each storage node. Uncheck the Use Cache on Server option in the Advanced tab. See "Creating a Backup Strategy", page 301.
Note:
When performing a backup without using the cache on the server, the backup format used is SIDF (System Independent Data Format - ISO/ IEC 14863).
Chapter 10
429
SAN Creation
To create a SAN
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Platform-New-Network. The New Network window appears. Enter any name for the network in the Network Name field and click on OK. The SAN icon appears in the lower part of the Network area.
Shared Drive Creation

To create a shared drive
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select the SAN in the Network area. Choose Devices-Drive-New. The Drive Type Selection window appears. Choose the drive type and click on OK. The New Drive window appears. Set the parameters in the various tabs as described in "Changing the Mode of the Drive", page 182.
Note:
In the Identity tab, make sure you enter the name of a user who has the necessary rights to access the drive.
5. 6. 7. 8.
In the Connection tab, click on Add to specify the storage node hosts you want to be backed up onto the drive. The Host List window appears. Select one or several host(s) in the list and click on OK. In the Host column, select a host and enter its device descriptor in the Device Descriptor field. Click on OK to validate the operation.
The drive icon appears attached to the SAN in the lower part of the Network area.
Note:
Adding hosts in the Drive window automatically fills in the SAN Connection tab in the Host window.
The screen below represents the backup server Time Navigator Administration Console: the backup server name is takata, the storage node names are aria and frida. DocDrive and DocDrive2 drives are the shared drives connected to a SAN.
430
Data located on the storage nodes is backed up directly on the drives:
Modifying the Drive Connection type

This feature allows you to quickly convert a local drive (or a shared drive) already configured in Time Navigator Administration Console to a shared drive (or to a local drive). See "Automatically Cleaning Drives", page 184, for details.
Disabling/Enabling Drive-Host Connections

This feature allows you to temporarily disconnect a host from a drive without affecting other drive-host connections. Practical applications are:
disconnecting a malfunctioning storage node for maintenance and repair purposes while still using the other storage nodes reading a 128 KB block size tape by disconnecting hosts that are not compatible with this tape format and retaining compatible ones
To disconnect a host from a drive/ To connect back a host to a drive:
1. 2.
Right-click a host in the Network area then select Properties. The Host Properties window appears. Select the SAN Connection tab.
Chapter 10
431
3.
Select a drive then click on Disable connection/ Enable connection.
To disconnect a drive from a host/ To connect back a drive to a host:
1. 2. 3.
Right-click a drive in the Network area then select Properties. The Drive Properties window appears. Select the Connection tab. Select a host then click on Disable connection/ Enable connection.
432
433
C H A P T E R
11
Alarms
11
Time Navigator contains an internal alarm system management which simplifies the application management. This system displays alarms in Time Navigator Administration Console. The administrator is thus informed, in real time, of possible problems and can react accordingly. Most alarms are associated with an object (host, application, drive, library, user or media). When it does not apply to a specific object (i.e., catalog backup failure), the alarm is associated with the server.
Note:
An alarm is created when an object belonging to a backup selection is not backed up. It is possible to forbid the creation of such an alarm through the
file located in the Time Navigator Conf directory, if you know that an object will not be backed up (opened and locked file, for example). See the Time Navigator Installation Guide, "Time Navigator Configuration Files" chapter for more details.
alarms_filter
A guide provides the list of all the alarm messages that are likely to appear in the Time Navigator Graphical User Interfaces. See the Time Navigator Alarms guide.
434
Alarm Description
Alarm IDs and categories
All the alarms are referenced in Time Navigator by a unique identification number (ID: TN_ALARM_ID030020) and sorted by category:
Server: refers to catalog and site security. Alarm IDs range from 10000 to 19999. Agent: refers to hosts and applications. Alarm IDs range from 20000 to 29999. Data Management: refers to all operations about data management (backup, restore, duplication, etc.). Alarm IDs range from 30000 to 39999. Storage: refers to library management and storage management (queries for media, space management, etc). Alarm IDs range from 40000 to 49999. Devices and Media: refers to device configuration, media errors, hardware errors. Alarm IDs range from 50000 to 59999. Security: refers to user accesses and Security & Compliance Manager (SCM).
Chapter 11
Alarms
435
Alarm Type
The alarms appear in Time Navigator Administration Console in three areas: the Network area, the Alarm area and the Icon area. Each area displays alarms in a different way. The following table summarizes the alarm properties according to their location. See Time Navigator Administration Console Main Window, page 18 for details concerning the Administration window areas.
Alarm Location
Network Area
Description
Alarms by object: - Host - Drive - Library Alarms by severity level: - Minor - Major - Critical Alarms by host
Visual clue
Alarms are represented by a colored bar under the object icons. If several alarms are present for a single object, the color is that of the most severe alarm. The colored bar blinks until the alarm is acknowledged. Buttons gather all alarms corresponding to the button color, i.e., the yellow button gathers all minor alarms. When no alarm is present, the buttons are green. The alarm buttons blinks until the alarm is acknowledged. The host icon appears in one of the alarm colors. If several alarms are present for a single host, the color is that of the most severe alarm. The host icon returns to its regular color once the alarm is acknowledged.
Alarm Area
Icon Area
An alarm can be recurring, i.e., the same alarm appears several times. Same alarm implies an alarm for the same object, with the same severity level and the same message.
Alarm Messages
Alarm messages are presented with their identification number (ID), their title and their help message. The alarm help message is associated with all the events of alarm severity (critical, major and minor). This message is divided into two parts:
Cause: The cause of the problem. Action: The action to perform to solve this problem.
436
Viewing Alarms
When the application is working normally, the three buttons of the Alarms area are green and do not blink. When alarms are initiated by Time Navigator, the buttons of the Alarms area start blinking. If it is an alarm concerning an object of host, drive or library type, the bar located under the object in the Network area starts blinking. If it is an alarm concerning an object of host type, the host icon is also displayed with a colored background in the Icons area. The alarm buttons will keep on blinking until the administrator acknowledges the alarm one way or the other.
To view an alarm list
There are several ways to view an alarm list:
If you want to view the alarms by severity level, click in the Alarms area on the colored button corresponding to the severity you want to see. If you want to view alarms by object, click on the bar located under the corresponding object icon in the Network area. If you want to view the list of all alarms, whatever the severity level or the object, use the Monitoring-Alarms menu.
The Alarm List window appears.
Chapter 11
Alarms
437
Alarm List Window

Column Choice: Allows to choose the type of alarm information you want to be displayed
in the window. See Alarm Column Choice Window, page 438 for details.
Alarm List: Contains all the alarms about the current catalog. Cause: Specifies the cause of the problem described in the alarm message. Action: Specifies the action to perform to solve the problem described in the alarm
message.
Note:
The Cause and Action fields display the help message of the selected alarm in the Alarm List OR the help message of all the alarms in the list if the latter have the same identification number (ID).
Properties: Allows to acknowledge an alarm permanently or temporarily. Activate: Allows to acknowledge an alarm that has been previously acknowledged either
temporarily or permanently. The alarm will be returned to a not-acknowledged status.

Acknowledge Permanently: Allows to acknowledge an alarm permanently. Acknowledge Temporarily: Allows to acknowledge an alarm temporarily.
438
Delete: Allows to delete an alarm.
See Processing Alarms, page 440 for more details on how to acknowledge alarms.
Alarm Column Choice Window

All: Displays all columns in the Alarm List window. Invert: Makes all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns
selected.
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Alarm List window. Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Alarm List window. > Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the > Button to move the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also double click on columns individually to move them to the Visible Columns list. < Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the < Button to move the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also double click on columns individually to move them to the Hidden Columns list. Available Alarm columns: Severity: Alarm severity: Minor, Major or Critical. First Date: Date of the first occurrence of the alarm. Last Date: Date of the last occurrence of the alarm. Count: Number of times the alarm occurred. Object Type: Type of the object for which the alarm occurs. The object type can be
Host, Library or Drive.

Object: Name of the object for which the alarm occurs. Acknowledgement: Acknowledgement status: Permanent, Temporary or Not
Acknowledged.
Permanent
The alarm and any subsequent same version of it are acknowledged. The alarm stops blinking.
Temporary
Only the current occurrence of the alarm is acknowledged. The alarm stops
Chapter 11
Alarms
439
blinking.
Not Acknowledged
The alarm has not been acknowledged by the administrator.

Message: Description of the alarm.
Note:
Severity, Acknowledgement and Message columns are always displayed.
Sorting Alarms
You may sort alarms by the content of any column. To do so, double click on the heading of the column by which you want to sort. On the first click, sorting will be ascending. Click a second time to sort in descending order.
440
Processing Alarms
Once created, an alarm can either be acknowledged, activated or deleted.
1. Acknowledging an alarm permanently
The alarm is acknowledged once for all the times it is issued subsequently. This implies that you will not receive any visual clue when this alarm is issued next. The only way to find out if the alarm has occurred again is to check if the count has been incremented or to look in Time Navigator Event Viewer.
2. Acknowledging an alarm temporarily
Only the current occurrence of the alarm is acknowledged. If this alarm is issued again, you will see the buttons blinking.
3. Activating an alarm
An alarm that has been previously acknowledged either temporarily or permanently will be returned to a not-acknowledged status.
4. Deleting an alarm
The alarm is permanently removed from the alarm list.

To process an alarm
In the Alarm list, right click on the alarm you wish to process. A popup menu will appear. Choose one of the processing options. Unavailable options are greyed. You may use multiple selection with the Ctrl key to process several alarms at once.
-OR
In the Alarm list, select the alarm you want to process, then click on one of the available buttons (Properties, Activate, Acknowledge Permanently, Acknowledge Temporarily or Delete). Once the alarm is processed, the processing information is displayed in the Acknowledgement column in the Alarm list.
-OR
Double click on the alarm in the list, on the blinking button in the Alarm area or on the blinking bar in the Network area, or select the alarm in the list and click on Properties. The Alarm Properties window appears.
Chapter 11
Alarms
441
Use the Acknowledgement radio buttons to either acknowledge or activate the alarm. Once all alarms have been acknowledged, buttons and/or bars in the Network area stop blinking and host icons appear with their original background color (grey or ocher) in the Icon area.
Alarm Properties Window

Object: Name of the object for which the alarm occurs. Object Type: Type of the object for which the alarm occurs. The object type can be Host,
Library or Drive.
Severity: Alarm severity: Minor, Major or Critical. First Date: Date of the first occurrence of the alarm. Last Date: Date of the last occurrence of the alarm. Count: Number of times the alarm occurred.
442
ID: Identification number of the alarm. Message: Description of the alarm. Cause: Specifies the cause of the problem described in the alarm message. Action: Specifies the action to perform to solve the problem described in the alarm
message.
Acknowledgement
Permanent (no alert on next alarm): Specifies that the alarm and any subsequent same version of it are acknowledged. Temporary (alert on next alarm): Specifies that only the current occurrence of the
alarm is acknowledged.
Chapter 11
Alarms
443
Notifying Alarms
The Preferences tool allows you to redirect alarms to external elements (ex: snmp, a file, a command line, the console, etc.) in the wanted format. See Setting Platform Preferences, page 86 for details concerning the notification of alarms.
444
445
C H A P T E R
12
Time Navigator Event Viewer
12
This section describes how to perform the following operations on the Time Navigator Event Viewer:
Viewing Events, page 446 General Operations on Events, page 448 Event Display, page 451 Event Search, page 458 Event Export, page 459 Event Purging, page 462 Notifying Events, page 465
446
About Events
Time Navigator Event Viewer provides insight into Time Navigator processes. It is a very useful tool to troubleshoot incidents that occur with any Time Navigator function or process. The information displayed in Time Navigator Event Viewer is kept in the event file on the server. An event file also exists on every client machine. See event File, page 463 for details. Time Navigator Event Viewer allows the administrator to display events graphically, to apply filters and to sort them. For example, the administrator may view all events regarding all backups for all machines, or just the restore operations on a specific machine. Each event type, information, warning, minor alarm, major alarm, etc. is displayed with a dedicated color in order to facilitate reading.
Viewing Events
Time Navigator events can be viewed using the following modes:
In Connected mode, you are connecting to a catalog to access the events related to that catalog. In File mode, you are directly opening the event file located on the server, without being connected to a particular catalog. Events relating to all the catalogs created on the server are displayed. In Command mode, see the "tina_event" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details.
Chapter 12
447
Viewing Events in Connected Mode

In Connected mode, you are connecting to a catalog to access the events related to that catalog.
To view events in Connected mode:
Choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Event Viewer. Time Navigator Event Viewer appears.
Viewing Events in File Mode

In File mode, Time Navigator Event Viewer displays the contents of the event.txt file. Events for all catalogs located on the server are included.
To view events in File mode:
1. 2. 3.
Choose Catalog-Open file. The Event File Name Input Window appears. Enter the name and path of the events file you want, or click on Browse to select a file. Click on OK.
448
General Operations on Events

Connecting to a Catalog
By default, Time Navigator Event Viewer displays all the events of the server on which the current catalog is running as well as all client machines attached to that server. You also have the option to view events from another catalog.
Note:
If no catalog is connected, Time Navigator Event Viewer opens by default in file mode, and displays events from all the catalogs located on the server.
To connect to another catalog:
1. 2. 3.
Choose Catalog-Connect. The List of Catalogs Window appears. Select the catalog that you want to view. Click on OK. An Event window appears displaying the events for the selected catalog.
To disconnect from a catalog:
Choose Catalog-Disconnect to clear the Event Manager.
Updating the Event Manager

To update Time Navigator Event Viewer manually:
To update the information displayed on screen, choose View-Refresh. The number of events retrieved during a refresh operation is the value of the Maximum number of events retrieved by request parameter set in the Preferences Window.
Tip:
You can also press the F5 key.
To update Time Navigator Event Viewer with all events in memory:
To display all the events in memory, choose Events-Load all.
Chapter 12
449
This procedure overrides the value of the Maximum number of events retrieved by request parameter set in the Preferences Window.
To enable the automatic updating of Time Navigator Event Viewer:
To enable automatic updating, choose Events-Automatic Refresh. A check mark appears left of the menu. To disable automatic updating, choose choose Events-Automatic Refresh again. The check mark disappears, meaning that the events will no longer be automatically updated. The refresh frequency and the number of events retrieved during an automatic refresh can be modified in the Preferences Window. By default, the frequency is 10 seconds and the number of events retrieved is 2000
450
Setting User Preferences

To set user preferences:
1. 2. 3.
Choose Catalog-Preferences. In the Preferences Window, enter your preferences. Click on OK to validate your choice and close the window.
Preferences Window
This window lets you edit and configure user preferences.
General
Apply Filters on Server: Allows to filter events on the server prior to downloading
them on a remote machine.

Tip:
Use this option if you are viewing the events on a machine other than the server and you are concerned with network performances. Checking this option reduces the number of events traveling on your network. On the other hand, if you are modifying filters frequently during a remote session, do not check this option, otherwise events are downloaded from the server again after each modification. When the option is not checked, all events are kept in memory on the remote machine and can be manipulated easily without having to be retrieved from the server again.
On the other hand, if you are modifying filters frequently during a remote session, do not check this option, otherwise events are downloaded from the server again after each modification. When the option is not checked, all events are kept in memory on the remote machine and can be manipulated easily without having to be retrieved from the server again.
Refresh Period (s): Specifies the time, in seconds, between two auto-refresh. Maximum number of events retrieved by request: Specifies the maximum number of
events loaded in memory when starting or refreshing Time Navigator Event Viewer. The initial default value is 2000 events.
Chapter 12
451
Limit number of displayed events
Allows to divide the events into pages to improve performance. When this option is selected, only a portion of all loaded events are displayed at a time in Time Navigator Event Viewer.
Note:
This limitation applies to the number of events displayed in the event list on screen, not to the number of events loaded in memory as is the case with the Maximum number of events retrieved per request parameter.
Events per page: specifies the maximum number of events appearing in one page. The
value you enter is recorded in the user preferences file. The initial default value is 1000 events.
Event Display
You can choose what information is displayed in the Time Navigator Event Viewer and how it is displayed.
Selecting the Events to Display

By default, when you open Time Navigator Event Viewer, only the end-user events are displayed. You can also display the list of advanced events.
End-user events are easily understandable and designed to help the user in case of error during Time Navigator execution Advanced events are more detailed events which help the Atempo Technical Support to analyze more sophisticated problems. Advanced events are only available in English.
To display the list of advanced events:
Choose View-Advanced Events. The list of events is updated in real time.

Note:
In order to improve performance when launching Time Navigator Event Viewer, the Advanced Events view is not saved with the user preferences.
452
Selecting the Columns to Display

By default, when you open Time Navigator Event Viewer, the following properties are displayed: Severity, Job ID, Program, Date (emission), Logical Host and Message.
Note:
The Severity and Message columns are always displayed, even if you do not select them.
To select the columns to display :
1. 2. 3.
Choose View-Column Choice. The Column Choice Window appears. Modify the column selection according to your needs. Click on OK to validate your choice.
Event Properties
Alarm Help: Alarm help message, which is divided into twp parts, the cause of the
problem and the action to perform to solve this problem.
Alarm ID: Identification number of the alarm. Date (emission): The date when the event occurred. Date (logging): The date the event is recorded in the server event file. Development: Debug information. Host: Logical host that triggers the action. Job ID: The job ID is a single identification number for each job. PID: Process Identifier. Program: A program, such as tina_adm or tina_daemon. Real Host: Host that performs the action. Real User: User that performs the action. User: Logical user that triggers the action.
Adjusting Columns
To adjust the column width:
Click and drag the edge of the column heading to either widen or narrow it. To return all columns to their default size, choose View-Adjust Columns.
Chapter 12
453
Adding a Line Break

You have the option to add a line break in the event list to facilitate event viewing. Three lines are added after the most recent event.
Note:
Use this feature only if the event list is sorted chronologically.
To add a line break:
Choose View-Add Line Break.
Filtering Events
In order to customize the type of events displayed in Time Navigator Event Viewer, you can use different filters.
To filter events:
1. 2. 3.
Note:
Choose Events-Filters. The Event Filters window appears. Enter the Event Filter Parameters. Click on OK. Make sure the filters are enabled: go to the Events menu and check that the Disable Filter option is not activated.
To disable filters:
If you want to disable the filters that you set in the Event Filters window, choose EventsDisable Filters. A check mark appears left of the menu and all the events are displayed. To re-enable the filters, choose choose Events-Disable Filters again. The check mark disapperas, meaning that the filters are enabled.
454
Event Filter Parameters
To activate any of the filters check the box in front of it and specify the value to use to filter. Filters are as follows:
Severity
Select the box next to Severity to activate it. With the severity check list, you can select which events will be displayed. The events include nine severity levels, among which three alarm levels that also appear in the real time management report of Time Navigator Administration Console. The following severity levels Fatal, Error, Information, Accounting, as well as the three alarm levels (Minor, Major, and Critical) are displayed by default in the events window.
Chapter 12
455
Severity level
Fatal Error Warning Information Debug Accounting Minor Alarm
Abbreviated as
Fatal (F)
Description
Fatal error causing the program exit (ex: Impossible to connect to server X). Serious error that might cause the program to exit (ex: Error during backup,retcode=6). Warning with no important consequences (ex: Silo inconsistency detected). Message of general interest (ex: Starting tina_init). Diagnosis Help (ex: Network error). Accounting concerning backups and archiving (ex: Start incremental backup, strategy A). Warning with no immediate consequences on the backup process (ex: Unable to connect to host "olive"). Warning with important consequences on the process of one or several backups (ex: Error starting backup strategy A). Warning with serious consequences on the process of all backups (ex: The library requires a manual operation).
Error (E)
Warn (W)
Info (I)
Debug (D)
Acct (A)
Min A (m)
Major Alarm
Maj A (M)
Critical Alarm
Crit A (C)
To facilitate their identification, severity levels are displayed with different colors in Time Navigator Event Viewer (ex: the Information severity level is displayed with an ocher background and the Critical Alarm alarm level with a red background).
Class
Select the box next to Class to activate it. With the class check list, you can select which classes of events will be displayed. By default, the class filter is disabled and all classes are displayed.
456
The different classes are as follows:

Class
Standard Non Restored Object I/O Error Non Uncompressed Object Fuzzy Object
Description
Standard events. Events related to an object restore error. Events related to an input/output error on a drive or on a backup media. Events related to objects that are restored but not uncompressed. Events related to a fuzzy object, for instance an object modified while backup was in progress or an incompletely backed up object. Events related to security and compliance operations. See the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager for information on security and compliance.
Secure Event
Note:
The number of logs concerning fuzzy object encountered when a job is being performed has been limited by default to 20, to avoid slowing down performances. You can use the accounting_max_fuzzy_objects tunable to specify how many fuzzy object logs should be kept in the event file (see the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.)
For instance, if you select Fuzzy Object and Non Restored Object, only events related to fuzzy or non restored objects will be displayed.
Emission Date
Use the sliding cursors in the Emission date area to set the beginning and ending dates of the time period you want events to be displayed for.
Basic Tab
Message: To only display events containing the specified message. Use special characters to indicate the text to filter. For instance, enter *media com00004* to display all messages including the media com00004 string . See Time Navigator
Special Characters, page 351 for details.
Host: To only display events concerning a particular host attached to the server with
or without events concerning the server itself.
Chapter 12
457
Users: To display events for a particular user with or without the root user. Program: To display events concerning a particular program, such as, tina_library, tina_backup. PID: To display events associated to a particular Process Identifier. Job Id: To display events associated with a particular job identification.
Advanced Tab
Logging Date: To display events logged during a particular time period. Function: To display events concerning a particular function such as tina_library. Package: To display events concerning a particular package attached to the server
with or without events concerning the server itself.
Catalog: To display events concerning a particular catalog. Server: To display events concerning a particular server.
Clearing Events
You can clear all the current events from Time Navigator Event Viewer. Cleared events are still present on the disk, but no longer appear in Time Navigator Event Viewer.
To clear events :
Choose Events-Clear. All events disappear from Time Navigator Event Viewer. To display them again, choose Events-Load all.
458
Event Search
In order to find a specific event and display it in Time Navigator Event Viewer, you can:
Navigate through all the events page per page. Use search criteria.
To navigate through the events:
Choose Events-Navigate and select the action to perform:
First event page Previous event page Previous event Next event Next event page Last event page You can also use the navigation buttons located on the right of Time Navigator Event Viewer.
Tip:
To look for events:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Events-Find. The Find Events window appears. Specify your search criteria by entering the Event Filter Parameters. See Filtering Events, page 453 for details concerning this window. Click on OK. The first event matching the criteria is highlighted. Choose Events-Find Next (F3) to highlight the following event matching the criteria.
Chapter 12
459
Event Export
Events can be exported to a file whenever the need arises. You can choose the type of information to be exported and the file format.
Note:
If you want redirect events to external destinations (ex: snmp, a file, a command line, the console, etc.) in the format you want, use the Preferences tool. See Event Notification, page 90 for more information on the Preferences tool and event notification.
Export Events
To export events:
1. 2. 3.
Choose Events-Export. In the Export Events Window, enter the export parameters. Click on OK to validate the operation.
Export Events Window

File: Exports events to a text file. Click on the button to the right of the path field to browse your machine, or enter the absolute path where you want the text file to be located. For instance:
460
C:\temp\events.txt /tmp/events.txt /tmp/events.txt

Export Only Selected Lines: This option is not available, all events pertaining to the selected
job are exported.

File Format Tab
File Format: Allows you to choose the format of the export file, either Event file format, HTML or Text. Encoding: The proposed encoding depends on the file format you select:
File Format
Event File Format HTML Text
Encoding
None UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character values into a byte stream) UTF8, US-ASCII or Latin 1 (ISO8859-1)
Chapter 12
461
Content Tab
The Content tab only appears if you have selected HTML or Text in the File Format tab.
Events list.
Note:
When the Export Visible Columns box is checked, the selection in the Export/Do not Export lists are not taken into account.
If there are different items from the Event tab that you want to export, double click the items in the Export and Do not Export list.
Note:
Export Visible Columns must be deselected.
462
Event Purging
Events are automatically purged every hour. The event retention is defined independently for each severity level, via a series of tunables. The following table summarizes the tunable names and default values. To modify the tunables, see the Time Navigator Tunables guide.
Tunable Name
Critical Alarm Retention Time Major Alarm Retention Time Minor Alarm Retention Time Accounting Event Retention Time Debugging Event Retention Time Error Event Retention Time Fatal Event Retention Time Information Event Retention Time Warning Event Retention Time Retention Time for Fuzzy Object Events
Default Value (days)

14 14 14 7 7 14 14 7 7 7
Chapter 12
463
event File
All events appearing in the Event window are kept in the event log file, located in the Adm directory. If this file does not exist, Time Navigator automatically creates it. The file provides detailed information on any incident. For each event, the tina_daemon program writes the event in an unreadable private format:
The file event under Unix, Mac OS X and VMS. The file event.txt under Windows and NetWare. The event file must not be a symbolic link. However, the Adm directory can be a symbolic link to another directory.
Note:
Only privileged users of the various operating systems are allowed to write in the event file (ex: root for Unix, administrator for Windows 2000/2003, user with administration rights for MAC OS X). Thus, there is no access rights problem. All client events are gathered in the server event file so that you can consult the events of all client machines from the server and have an overall view of the network. However, an event file is also present on every agent declared in Time Navigator. The client event file is used when the server event file is unavailable, namely when the server service is not running. Events will be kept in the client event file until they can be moved to the server.
log or log_debug File

Another log file is present on every host declared in Time Navigator. The name of this file depends on the operating system:
log.catalog_name or log_debug.catalog_name (with or without the extension catalog_name) under Unix, Mac OS X and VMS. log.txt or log_debug.txt under Windows. sys:/system/tina$log.err under NetWare.
Events are written in this particular log file if the list of catalogs cannot be retrieved or if the event file cannot be to written in.
464
If the file log_debug.catalog_name exists in the Adm directory, Time Navigator uses it to record all events. If the file does not exist, Time Navigator uses the log.catalog_name file (which is created if necessary) to record all events except Debug events.
Fields contained in the log or log_debug file:
Id: specifies the process identification number. Lines are usually grouped by family
number. The first line is the lowest level one and next lines appear in stacking order until the program ends.
Date: specifies the event date. Severity: specifies the event severity level. Package, Function and Position: identify the part of the code involved in the event. Message: specifies the type of event with sometimes a Time Navigator internal return code (retcode) or the system error type errno.
Using these files, it is possible to clearly diagnose a problem without performing any particular operation. You may rename the file log.catalog_name into log_debug.catalog_name to record more information.
Example of file log_debug.catalog_name:
Package, Function and Position
Id
Date
Severity
Message
21773 21773 21773 21773 21773 21773 21773 21773 21778 21778 21983 21983 21983 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281 22281
Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue
Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
09:00:37 09:00:38 09:00:38 09:00:39 09:00:39 09:00:42 09:01:03 09:01:03 09:02:16 09:02:16 09:41:36 09:41:36 09:42:25 10:00:05 10:00:14 10:00:46 10:00:49 10:01:00 10:01:01 10:01:05 10:01:05 10:01:06 10:01:06 10:01:23 10:02:03 10:02:07
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
A A A A A A A A A A I I W A A A A A A A A A A A A A
"Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:create_sessions"[5] Create session, session_id =... "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:archiver"[16] End incremental backup ... "Dri:manage_sess_w"[23] End writing on media BCK00021... "Vvm:log_volume_ecrit"[6]Stat folder "daisy" writing,... "Clt:restore"[1] Start restoring backup: "Clt:restore"[4] Destination = "/tmp", Folder ... "Vos:unix_chown"[2] Error chown "nmpolling", ... "Clt:archiver"[4] Start incremental backup... "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:desc_dir"[2] Start backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:create_sessions"[5] Create session, session_id =... "Clt:desc_dir"[14] End backup selection "/usr..." "Clt:archiver"[16] End incremental backup,...
Chapter 12
465
22359 21983 21983 22359 22359 22359 23162
Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue Tue
Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
10:05:22 10:05:50 10:06:07 10:09:30 10:10:07 10:10:07 10:48:03
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
I D I I A A A
"Rcy:do_recycle_cart"[10]Start recycling cartridge ... "Vvm:xfer_file"[10] Error closing stream out "Clt:restore"[7] Cancel restoring backup "Rcy:do_recycle_cart"[13]End recycling cartridge "BCK00019" "Dri:manage_sess_w"[23] End writing cartridge BCK00019,... "Vvm:log_volume_ecrit"[6]Stat folder "daisy" writing, ... "Sdb:tina_odbsave"[4] Start backup catalog
Notifying Events
Time Navigator allows you to redirect events to external elements (ex: snmp, a file, a command line, the console, etc.) in the wanted format via the Preferences tool. See Setting Platform Preferences, page 86 for details concerning the notification of events.
466
467
C H A P T E R
13
Time Navigator Job Manager
13
Jobs executed by Time Navigator are managed through a graphical window refreshed in real time. The job concept applies to several types of sessions. The main job types are:
Backup (incremental, full, synthetic, snapshot or replication) Archiving Restore Media duplication Catalog maintenance
468
Viewing Jobs
To view the list of jobs
Choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Job Manager in Time Navigator Administration Console. Time Navigator Job Manager appears. Note: It is also possible to view jobs using the tina_job command. See the "tina_job" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for details.
Chapter 13
469
Selecting Catalogs
By default, Time Navigator Job Manager only shows jobs for the catalog currently displayed in Time Navigator Administration Console. If you are managing more than one catalog, you may want to view jobs belonging to several catalogs at once.
Selecting a Catalog
To select catalogs:
1.
Choose Catalog-Select. The Catalog List window appears.
2. 3.
Click in the catalog checkbox you wish to connect to and click on Apply to know its status. Click on Close to return to Time Navigator Job Manager.
Catalog Selection Window

List: Lets you select the catalogs to connect to.
The icon between the checkbox and the catalog name indicates the status of the catalog:
Green icon: Indicates that the catalog is connected. Green icon with a small white cross on a red background: Indicates that you do not have
the required permissions to access that catalog.
Gray icon with a red cross: Indicates that the catalog is unavailable (the catalog could be stopped, suspended,...). Question mark: Indicates that the catalog status is unknown.
Tip:
Check the box in front of a catalog and click on Apply to identify its status.
470
Job Information
When you open Time Navigator Job Manager, by default, only Active jobs are displayed. You have the option to display job History as well.
Displaying Job History

To display job history:
1.
Choose View-History. The job history list appears below the Active job list. The View-History menu is now checked.
Tip:
Use the same menu command to remove the History list.
To modify the column display:
1. 2.
Choose View-Column Choice-Active... or View-Column Choice-History... depending on the job list you want to modify. Double click on the column headings or use the < and > buttons to move columns between the Visible Columns list and the Hidden Columns list. You can also click on All to select all columns and on Invert to make all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns selected.
Note:
The History list default display includes the End Date column in addition to all the Active jobs default columns.
Note:
Among the default columns, only the Media and Submit Date columns (and End Date for historical jobs) can be hidden. The other columns are always displayed.
Column Choice Job Window

All: Selects all columns.
Chapter 13
471
Invert: Displays hidden columns and hides visible columns.
Tip:
To move a column name from a section (Hidden Columns or Visible Columns) to another, use the arrows or double-click the name of the column.
Available Columns:
Default columns Catalog: In a multi-catalog environment, indicates the catalog name. Status: The most frequently used statuses are: Complete, Cancelled on error,
Cancelled on request, Running...etc. Jobs with a running status may be either active or inactive. An inactive session indicates that one of the resources (media, drives) required to execute the job is unavailable. The status Scheduled concerns active backup jobs only and indicates that the server created a job corresponding to a scheduled backup on an agent, and is waiting for the agent to respond. If the agent does not respond within the one hour default timeout, the status becomes Cancelled without starting. If the server cannot reach the client, the status becomes Cancelled (unreachable agent). The timeout can be modified using the tunable timeout_on_scheduled_jobs. Job Statuses The color of a job indicates its status of a job is identified with different colors:
Blue: Green:
In progress Finished
Orange: Paused or cancelled on request Red: Cancelled on error
Id: Unique identification number for each job. Parent ID: Some jobs are spawned by another job. In that case the ID of the parent job appears in that column. Description: Contains the job type, i.e. Backup (full or incremental), Synthetic,
Archiving, Restoration, Media Duplication or Maintenance.

Progress (active jobs only):
472
For backups, where the total volume of data to be processed is unknown, the progress bar displays the current job volume in GB. To change the unit see Preferences Window, page 475. For archiving, restoration and duplication, where the total amount of data to be processed is known, the progress bar indicates the percentage completed. For restores, the percentage indicated by the progress bar corresponds to the percentage of data written in the cache, not on disk. Thus although the progress bar indicates 100%, the job can still be running for a while until all data has been written.
Note:
Volume (historical jobs only): Total amount of data processed by the job. By default
the volume unit is gigabyte. To change the unit see Preferences Window, page 475.
Note:
This information is only available for jobs that actually wrote data on tape. For snapshot jobs for instance, the volume is provided only for the job handling the snapshot data backed up on tape (if any), or if you selected a multiple writing pool to copy the entire snapshot on tape.
Alarms: If a problem occurs while a job is running, a critical, major, or minor alarm appears. The alarm is displayed with the color associated to its severity. Media: Depending on the media type, this column indicates either the name of the
media pool being used to perform the job, or snapshot, or replication.

Submit Date: Date and time when the job is submitted. Priority: Indicates the job priority as defined during the Backup Strategy Creation
phase.
Rank (Active jobs only): Job execution number indicating job priority. Instant Rate (GB/H) (Active jobs only): Current rate of data processed by the job. Average Rate (GB/H): Average rate of data processed by the job since the beginning of the job. For historical jobs, the average rate is based on the total amount of data processed and the whole duration of the job.
Chapter 13
473
Duration: Duration of a job. For active jobs, the Duration column displays the time elapsed between the beginning of the job and the present moment. Additional columns End Date: Date and time when the job is finished or cancelled. Execution Date: Date and time when the job actually begins to be performed.
Note:
The Execution date may differ from the Start Date if for instance, the job is waiting for physical resources to become available.
Folder: Name of the backup or archive folder involved with the job. Host: Name of the host involved with the job. Start Date: Date and time when the job is ready to be performed, i.e., all jobs with
higher priority have been cleared.

User: Name of the user involved with the job.
474
Sorting Jobs
You may sort jobs by the content of any column.
Sorting Jobs
To sorts jobs:
1. 2.
Double click on the heading of the column by which you want to sort. On the first click, sorting will be ascending. Click a second time to sort in descending order.
Chapter 13
475
Job Manager Preferences

Refreshing Time Navigator Job Manager
The refresh period depends on the job list:
Active Job List: by default, the screen is refreshed every 3 seconds. Historical Job List: the screen is refreshed every hour.
To refresh manually the active job list:
Choose View-Refresh (or press F5 on your keyboard).

To set the active job list refresh period:
1. 2.
Choose View-Preferences. The Preferences Window appears. Use the sliding button to set the refresh period and click on OK.
Preferences Window
Active Job Refresh Period
Minimum Value (default value): 3 seconds. Maximum Value: 60 seconds.
Volume Unit in Job Lists
The possible units are:

Kilobytes Megabytes Gigabytes Terabytes Most Appropriate Unit: use this option to let Time Navigator choose the best unit
according to the total volume of data. If you change the job unit, it is changed throughout the entire Job Manager: In the main job lists and in the General and Avanced tabs of the Job Details window.
476
Job Details
In addition to the information displayed in the list, you may access detailed information for each job.
Viewing Job Details

To view job details
Select a job in the list and choose Jobs-Details.

Tip:
You can also select a job in the list, right click and select Detail, or double click on a job in the list.
The Job Details Window appears with the General tab preselected.
Viewing Alarm Details

When a job is associated with an alarm, the alarm message appears in the lower part of Time Navigator Job Manager if you select the job in the Job list. Several alarms are generally associated with a given job. A tool tip provides the number of alarms for the selected job. The color of the icon located on the left of the alarm message indicates the highest severity level of the last alarm associated with the job (red for a critical alarm, orange for a major alarm and yellow for a minor alarm). You can view all the alarms associated with the job and have more information on the alarms, especially with the help messages which explain how to solve the problem.
To view alarm details
1. 2.
Double click on a job associated with an alarm in the Job list. The job message appears in the lower part of Time Navigator Job Manager. Click on Alarm Detail in the right lower part of Time Navigator Job Manager. The Job Details Window appears with the Alarms tab preselected.
Chapter 13
477
Job Details Window - General Tab
The General tab gives you access to information common to all job types. Most of the information found in the General tab is identical to the information found in the job list window. In addition, the Progress area provides the following information:
Information Area
Catalog: In a multi-catalog environment, indicates the catalog name. Id: Unique identification number for each job. Description: Contains the job type, i.e., Backup (full or incremental), Synthetic,
Archiving, Restoration, Media Duplication or Maintenance.
Status: The most frequently used statuses are: Complete, Cancelled on error, Cancelled on request, Running...etc. Jobs with a running status may be either active or inactive. An inactive session indicates that one of the resources (media, drives) required to execute the job is unavailable. The status Scheduled concerns active backup jobs only and indicates that the server created a job corresponding to a scheduled backup on an agent, and is waiting for the agent to respond. If the agent does not respond within the one hour default timeout, the status becomes Cancelled without starting. If the server cannot reach the client, the status becomes Cancelled (unreachable agent). The timeout can be modified using the tunable timeout_on_scheduled_jobs.
478
Priority: Job priority as defined during the Backup Strategy creation. Host: Name of the host involved with the job. User: Name of the user involved with the job. Media: Either the name of the media pool being used to perform the job, or Snapshot, or Replication. Folder: Name of the backup folder involved with the job.
Progress Area
Expected Volume: Indicates the volume of data to be processed in bytes. This field
remains dimmed when the volume is unknown (ex: for backups).
Processed Volume: Indicates the volume of processed data in bytes.
Note:
By default, the volume unit is gigabyte. To change the unit, see Preferences Window, page 475.
Processed Objects: Indicates the number of objects involved (files or directories). Progress: If the expected volume is known, this field indicates the progression of a job
in percentage when it is being executed. If the expected volume is unknown, this field displays a result in megabytes. Once the job is ended, the result is a volume given in megabytes.
Instant Rate (GB/H): (Active jobs only) Current rate of data processed by the job. Average Rate (GB/H): Average rate of data processed by the job since the beginning
of the job. For historical jobs, the average rate is based on the total amount of data processed and the whole duration of the job.
Chapter 13
479
Dates Area
Submit Date: Date and time when the job is submitted. Execution Date: Date and time when the job actually begins to be performed.
Note:
The Execution date may differ from the Start Date if for instance, the job is waiting for physical resources to become available.
Start Date: Date and time when the job is ready to be performed, i.e., all jobs with higher priority have been cleared. End Date: Date and time when the job is completed or cancelled.
Job Details Window - Advanced Tab
In the Advanced tab, you will find the following information: Running Area
Current: Indicates the number of times the job has been initiated and allows you to
know the number of retries on incident already performed.
480
Maximum: Indicates the maximum number of retries on incident as defined by the
administrator.
Interval (min): Indicates the time interval, in minutes, separating the retries on
incident, as defined by the administrator. Cache Use Rate Area This area indicates the cache use rate for each job at a given time.
Blocks Used: Indicates the number of blocks used in the cache space for the job. In the case of a full synthetic backup, this number corresponds to the total amount of reading and writing sessions in cache. Total Blocks: Indicates the total number of blocks contained in the cache space. Each
block size is 32 KB.
Use Rate: Indicates the percentage of the cache space used by the job being
processed. Current Object Area It indicates the object (file or directory) being processed by the on tape writing session. Sessions Area
Type: Is either Read or Write. Volume: Indicates the amount of data processed by the session.
Note:
By default the volume unit is gigabyte. To change the unit see Preferences Window, page 475.
Date: Indicates the date the session started. Media: Indicates the media name used by the session. Drive: Indicates the drive name used by the session. Mode: Can have the following value: Real if the session goes through the server cache. Virtual if the session does not go though the server cache. Resourceless if the session does not require any drive or media.
Chapter 13
481
Job Details Window - Specific Tab
Note:
The information displayed in the Specific tab area varies according to the job type. The above screen is for a backup.
Backed up Platform Area This area is only present if the job involves backup, i.e., backup, snapshot, replication or synthetic backup job type.
Name: Indicates the name of the platform on which the job has been or is running. Format: Indicates the data writing format used for the backup in question (TiNa, tar or cpio). Folder: Indicates the host (or the application) backup folder name.
482
Folder Area This area is only present if the job type is archiving or restore. The Information found in this area is as follows:
Job Type Archiving Restore Name Name of the archive folder into which data is archived. Name of the backup or archive folder from which data is extracted. Format Tina, Tar, Cpio or none N/A
Replication Area This area is only present if the job is a replication.
Destination: Indicates the name of the replication destination. Host: Indicates the name of the host where the replication destination is located.
Backup Selections Processed This area is only present if the job involves backup, i.e., backup, snapshot, replication or synthetic backup job type.
Directory: Indicates the path and name of the directory backed up. Rule: Indicates the name of the security rule associated with the backup selection
and whether or not the rule is inherited from a parent backup. For information on security rules and compliance, see the Time Navigator Security & Compliance Manager guide.
Chapter 13
483
Job Details Window - Events Tab
All the events attached to the job are displayed with the following columns:
Sev: Indicates the degree of severity of the event. PID: Identifier of the Time Navigator process concerned by the event. That process
is identified in the Program column.
Date (emission): Date when the event occurred. Host: Indicates the name of the Logical Host, i.e., the host that triggered the action. User: Indicates the name of the Logical User, i.e., the user that triggered the action. Message: Describes the event.
Column Choice: Allows you to customize the information displayed. Export: Allows you to export the job events to the destination of your choice. For details
concerning the export of events, see Export Events Window, page 485.
Note:
The Export only selected lines option is not available in this context. All the events pertaining to the selected job are exported.
484
Update: Refreshes the window display.
The three following check boxes are only used when hierarchical relations exist between jobs, i.e., a job is issued from another job:
Parent: Allows display of the events concerning the parent job of the current job (if
any).
Brothers: Allows display of the events concerning brother jobs of the current job (if any). Children: Allows display of the events concerning children jobs of the current job
(if any).
Advanced Events: Allows display of the list of detailed events. By default, only the enduser events are displayed.
Column Choice Window - Events

All: Select all columns. Invert: Make all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns
selected. You can choose among the following columns:
Alarm Help: Alarm help message, which is divided into twp parts, the cause of the
problem and the action to perform to solve this problem.
Alarm ID: Identification number of the alarm. Date (Emission): The date when the event occurred. Date (Logging): The date the event is recorded in the server event file. Development: Debug information. Host: Logical host that triggers the action. PID: Process Identifier. Program: A program, such as tina_adm or tina_daemon. Real Host: Host that performs the action. Real User: User that performs the action. User: Logical user that triggers the action.
Chapter 13
485
Export Events Window

File: Exports events to a text file. Click on the button to the right of the path field to browse your machine, or enter the absolute path where you want the text file to be located. For instance:
C:\temp\events.txt /tmp/events.txt /tmp/events.txt

Export Only Selected Lines: This option is not available, all events pertaining to the selected
job are exported.

File Format Tab
File Format: Allows you to choose the format of the export file, either Event file format, HTML or Text. Encoding: The proposed encoding depends on the file format you select:
File Format
Event File Format
Encoding
None
486
File Format
HTML Text
Encoding
UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character values into a byte stream) UTF8, US-ASCII or Latin 1 (ISO8859-1)
Content Tab
The Content tab only appears if you have selected HTML or Text in the File Format tab.
Events list.
Note:
If there are different items from the Event tab that you want to export, double click the items in the Export and Do not Export list.
Note:
Export Visible Columns must be deselected.
Chapter 13
487
Event Severity List Event

Fatal Error Warning Information Debug Accounting Minor Alarm Major Alarm Critical Alarm
Abbreviation
Fatal (F) Error (E) Warn (W) Info (I) Debug (D) Acct (A) Min A (m) Maj A (M) Crit A (C)
Color
Red Orange Yellow Blue Green Violet Yellow Orange Red
Description
Causes program exit. Might cause program exit. An error of no important consequences. General interest. Diagnosis. Concerning backups and archives. No immediate consequences on the backup process. Important consequences on the process of one or several backups. Serious consequences on the process of all backups.
Job Details Window - Alarms Tab
488
The Alarms tab displays the following information:
Alarms, if any, attached to the job. This includes the streams or sessions, messages, dates, and severities of each incident associated with this alarm. The help message associated with the alarm. This message is divided into two parts, Cause and Action.
Severity: Alarms severity can be of three types:
Severity Minor Major Critical
Color Yellow Orange Red
Description Warning with no immediate consequences on the backup process. Warning with important consequences on the process of one or several backups. Warning with serious consequences on the process of all backups.
Date: Indicates the date of the alarm. Message: Description of the alarm. Cause: Specifies the cause of the problem described in the alarm message. Action: Specifies the action to perform to solve the problem described in the
alarm message.
Note:
The Cause and Action fields display the help message of the selected alarm in the Alarm List OR the help message of all the alarms in the list if the latter have the same identification number (ID).
Update: Refreshes the window display.
Chapter 13
489
Filtering Jobs
Several filters are available to let you customize the jobs to be displayed. Some filters apply to all jobs, active or historical; they appear in the Overall Filtering area. Other filters apply only to historical jobs; they appear in the Job History Filtering area. By default, no filters are selected.
Note:
Filter preferences are automaticaly saved when you close Time Navigator Job Manager.
Filtering Jobs
To filter jobs
1.
Choose Jobs-Filters.The Job Filtering window appears.
2.
Configure Job Filtering Window and click on OK.
490
Job Filtering Window

Overall Filtering Area
Media: Keeps only the jobs using a particular media pool. User: Keeps only the jobs for a particular user. Host: Keeps only the jobs concerning a particular host. Folder: Keeps only the jobs concerning a particular backup folder.
Note:
The Folder filter is useful if the platform you want to filter by is an application. If the platform is a host, the Folder filter is the same as the Host filter.
Note:
To perform a wildcard search on one criterion, edit its field as follows: - use the question mark ("?") to replace one character - use the asterisk to replace ("*") zero or more characters
Hide Job Type: Excludes jobs based on the job type (backup, archiving, restore...). The Catalog Collection job type is applicable if you have Time Navigator Reporter
installed as well.
Job History Filtering Area
Dates:
Time interval definition: Using the two slide cursors, select the beginning and end dates to display jobs. Definition of time navigation period: Choose from how far back in time you want
jobs displayed.
Chapter 13
491
By default, the viewing period is set to 60 hours and the maximum time period to 3 months.
Note:
These parameters can be modified via the following tunables:

Job Manager Displayed Period (displayed_job_hours) for the default
viewing period.
Job Manager Maximum Period (max_days_for_job_filter) for the
maximum viewing period. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details.
Maximum number of jobs displayed: Allows you to set a limit on the number of jobs
appearing in Time Navigator Job Manager. The limit applies to both active and historical jobs.The default value is 200.
Hide Job Status: You have the option to exclude historical jobs based on their status:
Complete: Succesful job. Cancelled on error: The job was cancelled due to an internal error. Cancelled without starting: The backup server initiated a backup job, but that job was cancelled because the agent failed to respond within the default one hour timeout. See the tunable timeout_on_scheduled_jobs in the Time Navigator Tunables guide to modify the value of the timeout. Cancelled on catalog stop: Time Navigator was shut down while the job was in
progress.
Cancelled on request: A user requested to cancel the job. Cancelled (unreachable agent): The backup server was unable to reach the agent
for which the backup job was initiated.
Reset: Removes any filters you might have selected.
492
Purging Jobs
This feature allows you to purge jobs on demand from the catalog. Jobs that have reached the retention period are removed from the catalog if all their objects have been destroyed. As a result, this feature can help you save some catalog space as well as improve Time Navigator Job Manager performances. Keep in mind however, that purged jobs are no longer included in statistical analysis, nor will they appear in any future Job Accounting report. In order to purge jobs, you must have the permission to administer the catalog (General Tasks permission in the Administration tab of the Access Control windows). If this is not the case, the menu is grayed out. If Time Navigator Job Manager is connected to several catalogs, all catalogs for which you are administrator are purged.
Tip:
To reduce the number of historical jobs displayed in Time Navigator Job Manager without removing them from the catalog, use the Maximum number of jobs displayed filter.
Purging Jobs
To purge jobs
1.
Choose Jobs-Purge. The Job Purge window will appear. Use the sliding button to set the retention period between 0 and 30 days. The default value is 30 days.
Job Purge Window

Use the sliding button to set the retention period.
Minimum Value: 1 day.
Chapter 13
493
Maximum Value (default value): 30 days.
Note:
The maximum and default value can be modified using the Job Retention in the
Catalog (job_retention_days) tunable.
Note:
Jobs are purged on the hour.
494
Processing Jobs
You may directly intervene, at any time on the jobs in the Active jobs list to:
Modify the execution order of a job in the list. The job priority can be either moved up by one, moved down by one, or moved all the way to the top or the bottom of the list. Cancel, pause or restart a job. When a job is stopped on error, it remains in the Active job list after all automatic retries are exhausted, until you manually cancel or restart it. If you cancel it, the job moves to the History list and its status becomes "Cancelled on error."
Note:
Note:
The Pause operation is not available for backups jobs that do not use the cache on the server.
Processing Jobs
To modify job priority
1. 2.
Select the job you want to process (you may only process one job at a time). Choose Jobs-Priority and select the operation you want to perform. The job priority can be either moved Up by one, moved Down by one, or moved all the way to the Top or the Bottom of the list. or
1. 2.
Note:
Select the job you want to process (you may only process one job at a time). Choose Jobs- and either Cancel, Pause or Restart. To process jobs, you may also select a job and use the buttons on the window outer left side to indicate the operation you wish to perform.
Chapter 13
495
Exporting Jobs
The job Export function allows you to export the job information of your choice to a file.
Exporting Jobs
To export the job list
1. 2.
In Time Navigator Job Manager, make sure that only the jobs you want to export are displayed. Choose Jobs-Export. The Export window appears.
3. 4.
Configure Export Job Window to export jobs. Click on OK to create the export file.
Export Job Window

File: Exports jobs to a file. Click on the button to the right of the path field to browse
your machine, or enter the absolute path where you want the file to be located. For instance: C:\temp\jobs.txt
496
/tmp/jobs.txt /tmp/jobs.txt
Export only Selected Lines: Allows you to only export the jobs you have selected in the
Active job list.

List to Export: Allows you to select the jobs to export according to the list they belong to, either Active, Historical or both.
File Format Tab
File Format: Allows you to choose the format of the export file, either Text or
HTML.
Encoding: Allows you to choose the encoding for the export file, either Latin 1
(ISO8859-1), US ASCII or UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character values into a byte stream). The proposed encoding depends on the file format you select:
File Format HTML Text Encoding UTF8 (standard mechanism used by Unicode for encoding wide character values into a byte stream) UTF-8 US-ASCII Latin 1 (ISO8859-1)
Contents
Export Visible Columns: Allows to export all the information displayed in the Jobs list.
Note:
Otherwise, uncheck that box and doubleclick on the column heading to switch them from the Export list to the Do not export list.
Chapter 13
497
Duplicating Jobs
You can duplicate data backed up by a backup or archiving job. Job duplication allows you to duplicate one or several jobs on one or several media, as opposed to media duplication which only permits duplication of a complete media.
Prerequisites
The status of the jobs to duplicate must be Complete. Several jobs can be duplicated simultaneously if they belong to the same catalog. Job types eligible for duplication are: backup, synthetic backup, archiving, media duplication.
Duplicating Jobs
To duplicate jobs
1. 2.
From Time Navigator Job Manager, select one or several jobs to duplicate in the History list. Choose Jobs-Duplicate. The Job Duplication Parameters window appears.
3.
Set the Job Duplication Window and click on OK.
Job Duplication Window

Media Pool
Original Pool: The media pool containing the data to duplicate will also be the one
498
containing the duplicated data.
Other Pool: Specify another media pool if you do not want the original pool to
contain the duplicated data.
Options
Start on Empty Cartridge: Only allows use of empty cartridges for job duplication. Close Duplicated Cartridges: Allows you to close the cartridges that contain duplicated
data.
Tip:
If you check the Start on Empty Cartridge and Close Duplicated Cartridges options, you will obtain a consistent media pool including only data of the current duplication.
Continue on Error: Allows to continue duplication even if errors due to data occur.
You can also duplicate jobs using the tina_job_control command. Refer to the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide for more details.
Simultaneous Job Duplications
By default, even if several jobs are selected in Time Navigator Job Manager to be duplicated, duplications are performed sequentially, one after the other. This behavior is designed to prevent duplication operations from reserving all the available drives. To modify the default behavior, you can:
Set the tunable "Maximum Number of Simultaneous Job Duplications" (max_para_job_dup). See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details. Select the jobs to duplicate one by one instead of all at once and choose JobDuplicate. In that case all duplications are launched in a row, provided that there are enough available drives to perform the duplications.
For instance to duplicate ten jobs two by two (four drives required), select a first group of five jobs, choose Job-Duplicate. Then select the five remaining jobs.
Chapter 13
499
Job Reports
The job reports allow you to view various information concerning the jobs performed by Time Navigator.
Note:
The job accounting reports are available in command line only. For detailed documentation and instructions on how to generate reports, see the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide. The commands used to generate reports are: tina_acct and tina_report.
The reports available are as follows: 1.

Job accounting report (tina_acct)
This report generates a standard accounting report that lists all the jobs, sorted by type, that took place within the last 24 hours. By default, the report lists the following information:
The platform name The job type The job status The user name A job description (backup type, archiving folder name...etc) The date and time the job was submitted, began, ended The job ID The job volume (amount of processed data) in bytes The job objects (number of processed objects) The media and drives involved as well as the backup format (Tina, Tar, Cpio) and the tape file number.
If you want a customized job accounting report, you may use parameters to determine what information is displayed in the report and in what order. 2.
Data Volume report (tina_report)
This report produces reports concerning the data backed up, either globally for all the catalogs involved, or in a more detailled fashion. This report is invoice oriented, allowing users to be billed according to the volume processed.
500
Modifying Job Behavior using Parameters

A series of parameters (also refered to as "tunables") is available to let you modify the job behavior. Keep in mind that a parameter will modify all jobs within a given Time Navigator environment. For example, to limit the number of simultaneous jobs, use the Limit Number of Simultaneous Jobs (limit_nb_jobs) and Maximum Number of Simultaneous Jobs (max_nb_jobs) tunables. See the Job Configuration section in the Time Navigator Tunables Guide for details.
501
C H A P T E R
14
Time Navigator Task Viewer
14
Time Navigator Task Viewer can be used to optimize backup, network traffic and drive workload. It gives a global view of the workload for all past and future backups. By graphically displaying each job load, along with the resulting data flow, Time Navigator Task Viewer helps the administrator spread the jobs over time, balancing the overhead. Moreover, Time Navigator Task Viewer proves an efficient forecasting tool. By providing the administrator a comprehensive view of the ultimate result of programming new backups, adding new data sets, or modifying backup frequency, etc. It helps plan for new resources. Time Navigator Task Viewer allows you to view at a glance all the backups completed or planned for any given platform. This chapter describes Time Navigator Task Viewer and presents the functionalities offered by Time Navigator Task Viewer.
To open Time Navigator Task Viewer
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Task Viewer. Time Navigator Task Viewer appears.
Note:
To use Time Navigator Task Viewer in command line, see the "tina_sched" section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface guide.
502
Chapter 14
503
Time Navigator Task Viewer Interface

Time Navigator Task Viewer is composed of three main areas:
The Platform List Area, page 503 The Backup Area, page 504 The Time Scale Area, page 505.
Platform List Area

The first column in the window is the list of platforms (hosts and applications) from all the Time Navigator server catalogs. For each platform, the following information is displayed:
Name Name of the catalog it belongs to. Type: Host or application Status: Enabled or disabled. Associated backup strategies: A, B, C, and D.
The following table summarizes the color code used in Time Navigator Task Viewer.
Information
Platform (colors are the same as those used in Time Navigator Administration Console) Strategy
Color
Dark blue background Light blue background Brown background Green background Brown background
Meaning
Enabled host Enabled application Disabled platform Defined strategy Undefined strategy
The list of platforms can be sorted by platform, catalog, or type (host or application) either in ascending or descending order. By default, the list is sorted by name, then by catalog, and finally by type.
To sort the list of platforms
1.
In Time Navigator Task Viewer, choose View-Sort and select:
504
By platform to sort platform names in alphabetical order. By catalog to sort catalog names in alphabetical order. By type to sort platforms by type: host or application.
2.
In Time Navigator Task Viewer, choose the sorting order with the View-Descending Order menu:
Tip:
If the option is not checked, sorting will be done in ascending order. Inversely, if the option is checked, sorting will be done in descending order.
Backup Area
The second main area in Time Navigator Task Viewer shows all backups that are completed and planned. The red vertical line dividing this area symbolizes the present.
History corresponds to backups performed in the past by Time Navigator, whether
completed or cancelled on error.
Schedule corresponds to backups planned in Time Navigator Administration Console.
The bars in the time scale represent backups. The thickness of the bars depends on the backup duration (see Filters, page 508 for details on backup duration). The bar color code is as follows:
Bar Color
Light blue Dark blue Sky blue Red
Meaning
Incremental backup Full backup Backup in progress Backup cancelled on error
Chapter 14
505
Time Scale Area

The dates located on the bottom left and right of the Backup Schedule represent respectively the minimum and maximum displayed dates. The actual time interval shown depends on the period of time you select with the slider located below the platform list. The maximum duration is 30 days. You can also change the period of time by using the Zoom feature (see below). The time scale unit can vary from a second to a week depending on the duration and the window size you are using. For more information on how to modify the time period, see Filters, page 508.
Using the Zoom Mode

The zoom mode allows you to modify the time interval viewed in the Backup area. It performs the same function as the slider.
To use the zoom mode
1. 2.
Choose View-Zoom Mode or use the right mouse button and select Zoom Mode in the pop-up menu. The cursor changes, the menus become unavailable. Position the cursor at the point where you want the displayed interval to begin. Right-click, a menu appears:
The first item in the menu is the date and time where the zoom interval will begin. Click on Zoom Beginning to apply. 3. A vertical line appears in the backup area at the Zoom beginning point. Position the cursor at the point where you want the displayed interval to end. Right-click, a menu appears:
506
4.
The first item in the menu is the date and time where the zoom interval will end. Click on Zoom end to apply. The backup area will be resized according to the dates you just defined.
Note:
At any time during this process, click on Cancel to exit the zoom mode.
Pop-up Menus
Several pop-up menus are available in Time Navigator Task Viewer. The information displayed varies according to the area selected with the cursor.
Platform List Area:
If you right-click in the Platform List area, the following menu appears:
The first item indicates the platform name and the catalog name. The second item gives you access to the backup evolution window after you select a strategy. See Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups, page 514, for details. The third item gives you access to the zoom mode, see Using the Zoom Mode, page 505, for details.
Backup Area:
If you right-click in the Backup area, the following menu appears:
The first item indicates the strategy you selected. The second item displays the Backup Evolution window for the strategy. See
Chapter 14
507
Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups, page 514, for details.
The third item gives you access to the zoom mode. See Using the Zoom Mode, page 505, for details.
508
Filters
Filtering the Display of the Platforms
Use filters to better define the information you wish to view in Time Navigator Task Viewer.
To filter the display of the platforms:
1. 2.
Choose Scheduler-Filters. You can perform the following operations: Filter the display of the platform list according to their name and the catalog they belong to. See Filtering the Display of the Platforms, page 508. View the backup schedule according to the type of backup (full or incremental), the type of platform (application or host), and the strategy (A, B, C, or D). See View tab, page 510 . Define the time period to view the backup schedule and set the parameter to estimate backup duration. See Dates Tab, page 511 .
Platforms Tab
Chapter 14
509
Use the Platforms Tab to filter the display of the platform list according to their name and their type (host or application).
Tip: Use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple platforms and double-click on the
highlighted ones to move them from one column to the other.

Available: All the platforms available. Double-click a platform to move it to the Selected column. Selected: The platforms to be displayed in Time Navigator Task Viewer. All: Moves all the Available platforms in the Selected column. Invert: Inverts the contents of the Selected and Available columns. Host: Displays only hosts. Application: Displays only applications. Default Configuration: Sets the default values for all three tabs.
Note:
In the default configuration, only Enabled platforms are displayed. Thus, although all platforms are selected, the disabled ones do not appear in the main window.
510
View tab
Use the View Tab to view the backup schedule according to the type of backup (full or incremental) and the strategy (A, B, C, or D).
Full: Displays platforms for which full backups have been scheduled. Incremental: Displays platforms for which incremental backups have been scheduled. Strategies A, B, C and D: Displays platforms for which the checked strategies have been
defined.
Enabled: When checked, displays only enabled platforms. Disabled platforms do not
appear.
Active Strategies: When checked, displays only the strategies that have been defined for
the platform.
Chapter 14
511
Default Configuration: Sets the default values for all three tabs. By default all filters in the
View tab are selected.

Note:
At least one backup type and one strategy must be checked.
Dates Tab
Use the Dates Tab to define the time period to view the backup schedule and set the parameter to estimate backup duration. Move the slider in the past (history) and in the future (schedule area) to set the beginning and end dates.
Absolute Date: Lets you toggle between an absolute date format (e.g., Tues Apr 11 2000
16:52:30) and a relative date format (e.g., 3day(s) 06h12:17).

Note:
This date format only applies inside this filter window. It does not apply to the main window date format.
512
History Cursor: Sets the beginning date. Schedule Cursor: Sets the end date. History Button: Defines the time period in the Past. The schedule date is automatically set
to 0, the history is set to 2 days.

Schedule Button: Defines the time period in the Future. The historical date is automatically
set to 0, the schedule date is set to 4 days. The following table indicates various preset values for the history and schedule dates.
Minimum
History Date Schedule Date 0 0
Maximum
60 days 30 days
Default Value
2 days from present 1 day after present
History Button
2 days from present 0
Schedule Button
0 4 days after present
Duration Estimation: Sets the number of backups that will be used to calculate the thickness
of the lines representing backups. Time Navigator averages the duration of past backups to estimate the duration of future backups. The maximum number of backups used to estimate is 100. The default value is 1.
Note:
If you use the default value, no calculation is actually performed, all scheduled backups are assigned the same duration as the last one performed.
Note:
If you specify a number of backups higher than the actual number of backups present in the catalog, the latter number is used to estimate backup duration. For example, if five backups have been saved in the catalog and an average of 10 backups have been performed, the backup duration is calculated from the last five backups available.
Default Configuration: Sets the default values for all three tabs.
Chapter 14
513
Updating Time Navigator Task Viewer Contents

If Time Navigator Task Viewer remains open for any length of time, use Update to refresh the screen. The following items will be updated:
The present date and time. Catalog information such as:
Platform declaration or deletion on the network Modification in a platform enabled/disabled status Creation/edit of a backup strategy, etc.
To update Time Navigator Task Viewer
Choose View-Refresh or press the F5 key.
Exporting Data to a Text File

To export data to a text file
The Export menu exports data to a text file. 1. 2. Choose Scheduler-Export. Enter the absolute path where you want the text file to be located. For example:
C:\temp\evt.txt /tmp/evt
3.
Click on OK.
Viewing Simultaneous Backups

The Simultaneous Backups feature allows you to view backups performed or planned simultaneously at any given point in time. This option is very useful if you are working with a large number of platforms. It will point out the low and high usage point. You can then modify your strategies accordingly to optimize Time Navigator usage and spread out network traffic over time.
514
To view simultaneous backups
Choose View-Simultaneous Backups. Simultaneous backups appear in the lower part of the window, below the platforms.
The X axis is the time scale indicating backup duration. The Y axis is the number of simultaneous backups. The Y axis scale is automatically set according to the maximum number of simultaneous backups found in any given time period. For example, if the maximum number of simultaneous backups is six, the histogram will be divided into six equal parts separated by horizontal lines.
Tip:
Use the filters if you want to display the Simultaneous Backups according to a platform, a catalog, a strategy, a backup type, etc. See Filters, page 508 for details.
Viewing Backup Evolution of Performed Backups

You can view the evolution in time and volume of performed backups (History area of the main window) for a given platform, strategy, and backup type.
To view the backup evolution:
1.
Choose Scheduler-Evolution and select a platform and an associated backup strategy.

Tip:
Right-click either in the Platform or Backup Area, and choose Evolution-
Chapter 14
515
Strategy X.
Note:
If you right-click in the Backup Area, you can only access the Backup Evolution for the strategy you clicked on. Whereas, if you right-click in the Platform Area, you can access the Backup Evolution for any strategy available for the platform you clicked on. See Pop-up Menus, page 506 for details.
The Backup Evolution Window appears.
Displays the evolution in time and volume of performed backups (History area of the main window) for a given platform, strategy, and backup type. For each backup, from the most recent to the oldest, the following information is displayed:
In the upper area: Identification: Displays the platform name, catalog name, and backup strategy. Backup Type: Displays the backup evolution for full or incremental backups.
516
Number of Backups: Select the number of backups to view. In the main area: Backup List: Lists each backup, from the most recent to the oldest:
The backup starting date and time. The backup duration in hours, minutes and seconds. It appears in the form of a horizontal histogram bar in the corresponding column of the table. The bar's scale depends upon the longest duration and the biggest backup volume displayed in the window. The backed up volume with the number of processed objects in parenthesis. The backup rate in megabytes per hour (MB/H). The Job identification number (ID) corresponding to the one displayed in TTime Navigator Job Manager.
Selecting a Catalog
At any time during your session, if several catalogs are present on your machine, you can change the catalog selection.
To select a catalog:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Choose Catalog-Select. The list of available catalogs is displayed. Select one of the catalogs. Click on Apply. Click on Close.
Catalogs Selection Window

By default, Time Navigator Task Viewer displays the backups completed or planned for the current catalog. If you are managing more than one catalog, you may want to view backups for several catalogs at once.
List: Lets you select a catalog to which to connect.
The icon between the checkbox and the catalog name indicates the status of the catalog:
Green icon: Indicates that the catalog is connected. Green icon with a small white cross on a red background: Indicates that you do not have
Chapter 14
517
the required permissions to access that catalog.
Gray icon with a red cross: Indicates that the catalog is unavailable (the catalog could be stopped, suspended,...). Question mark: Indicates that the catalog status is unknown.
Tip:
Check the box in front of a catalog and click on Apply to identify its status.
518
519
C H A P T E R
15
Time Navigator Media Request Console
15
All the requests concerning media are handled through Time Navigator Media Request Console. This application centralizes requests from all catalogs into a single interface. When a media operation (mounting, dismounting, moving cartridges, ...) is required to perform a backup, a restore or any other function, a request is logged into the catalog and appears in all Time Navigator Media Request Console applications that are running and connected to that catalog. The process that requested the cartridge operation is then paused until either an operator performs the action or the time-out expires. Depending on the request result, the process can either resume, resend a similar request, or cancel on error.
Note:
Time Navigator Media Request Console should be opened and minimized on the operators console at all times. It is automatically maximized whenever a new request is detected.
To open Time Navigator Media Request Console
In Time Navigator Administration Console, choose Monitoring-Time Navigator Media Request Console. Time Navigator Media Request Console appears.
520
Time Navigator Media Request Console is composed of two areas: a pending requests area and a processed requests area.
Note:
To use Time Navigator Media Request Console on a command line, see the
tina_operator section in the Time Navigator Command Line Interface
guide.
Viewing Requests
To view Time Navigator media requests
1.
Choose View to show or hide the processed requests area. Also use that menu to modify the column selection in either the pending or processed requests area of the window. The Column Selection feature is also available by right-clicking. In the Column Selection window, various options are available. Click on All to view all columns Click on Invert to make all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns selected Double-click on columns individually to move them back and forth between the Visible Columns and Hidden Columns list.
2. 3. 4.
Time Navigator Media Request Console 521
5.
Select columns individually or in multiple selections and use the < and > button to move columns from one list to the other. In case of multiple selections, the last selected column appears with a yellow border to indicate that it is the active one. You may double-click on it to move the whole selection at once).
Note:
Selecting Catalogs
By default, Time Navigator Media Request Console only shows requests from the catalog currently used by Time Navigator Administration Console. If you are managing more than one catalog, choose Catalog-Select to open the Catalog Selection window and select all the catalogs you need.
522
Managing Requests
Whenever a new request is created, it appears in the upper part of Time Navigator Media Request Console in the Pending Requests area. The request life cycle is divided in two parts, the handling phase and the acknowledgment phase. Each phase has its own time-out. Requests will go through several statuses during their life cycle (see Request Status and Evolution, page 527 for details).
Handling a Request
During the Handling phase, when the request first appears in the upper window, the operator is expected to take the request into account. However the operator must do so before the time-out expires. The time-out is represented in Time Navigator Media Request Console by the red progression bar. The remaining time appears in the red bar. If the operator does not handle the request before it is timed out, the request will be moved to the Processed Request list (in the lower part of the main window) with a Timed Out Handling status.
To handle a request
1.
Select the request and choose Request-Handling.

Note:
You can also double-click on the request, or select the request and rightclick to access Handling in the pop-up menu.
The Handling Request window appears.
Once this window appears, the request is considered to be handled and enters the acknowledging phase. A new time-out starts. It is represented by the red progress bar in the Acknowledgment area of the Request Information window. The cartridge name, barcode and comment lets you identify the requested cartridge. 2. Now, you can acknowledge, discard or suspend this request.
Responding to a Request
During the Acknowledging phase, the operator is expected to either perform the required action, discard the request if the action cannot be fulfilled, or suspend the request if the action requires more time than the acknowledgable timeout will allow. If the request is suspended, a third longer security timeout starts. If the operator does not acknowledge the request before it is timed out, the request will be moved to the Processed Request list (in the lower part of the main window) with a Timed Out Acknowledging Status or Timed Out Security if the request was suspended and never acknowledged.
To respond to a request
Click on either Acknowledge or Discard and close the Handling Request window.
524
Acknowledge is that the operator fulfilled the request having performed the action
required.
Discard is that the operator cannot perform the required action. Suspend only postpones acknowledgement. The operator will have to acknowledge
the request.
Note:
If a request has been suspended, the operator cannot close the Handling Request window until the request is either acknowledged or discarded.
Once a request has been acknowledged, it appears in the Processed Requests list, in the lower part of Time Navigator Media Request Console.
Processed Requests
The processed request list is a useful way to check for requests that happened in the absence of the operator. Also consult Time Navigator Job Manager to verify the consequences of timed out requests by the processes requesting them.
To view processed request detailed information
Select the request in the list, choose Request-Detail.

Note:
Right-click on a request and choose Detail from the pop-up menu.
The Request Information window appears for the selected request.
Viewing Handled Requests

Only pending requests are displayed in Time Navigator Media Request Console.
To view handled requests
Choose View-Handled Requests. The handled requests appear in the lower part of Time Navigator Media Request Console.
Note:
If you want to hide the handled requests, choose View-Handled Requests again.
Viewing Information in the Handled Requests Area

To modify contents of the handled requests area
1. 2.
Choose View-Column Choice-Handled Requests. The Column Choice window appears. Choose the information you want to view in the handled requests area.
Column Choice - Handled Requests Information
Use the Column Choice window to modify the column selection in the Handled Requests area.
All: Displays all columns in the Handled Requests area. Invert: Makes all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns selected. Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Handled Requests
area.
Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Handled Requests area. > Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the > Button
to move the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also doubleclick on a column name to move it to the Hidden Columns list.
< Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the < Button to move the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also doubleclick on a column name to move it to the Visible Columns list.
526
Viewing Information in the Pending Requests Area

To modify contents of the pending requests area
1. 2.
Choose View-Column Choice-Pending Requests. The Column Choice window appears. Choose the information you want to view in the pending requests area.
Column Choice - Pending Requests Information
Use the Column Choice window to modify the column selection in the Pending Requests area.
All: Displays all columns in the Pending Requests area. Invert: Makes all selected columns unselected and, inversely, all unselected columns
selected.
Hidden Columns: Lists the columns that are not displayed in the Pending Requests
area.
Visible Columns: Lists the columns that are displayed in the Pending Requests area. > Button: Once columns are selected in the Hidden Columns list, use the > Button to move the selected columns to the Visible Columns list. You can also double-click on a column name to move it to the Visible Columns list. < Button: Once columns are selected in the Visible Columns list, use the < Button to
move the selected columns to the Hidden Columns list. You can also double-click on a column name to move it to the Hidden Columns list.
Request Status and Evolution

A particular request can display several types of statuses. Taking corrective action with respect to the declared status allows request resolution and job continuation.
Status Definition
Submitted
This is the request initial status.
Handled
The operator has taken the request into account before the handling time-out expired. A new time-out starts, further action is required.
Acknowledged
The operator fulfilled the request before the acknowledgeable time-out expired. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
Unacknowledged
The operator cannot fulfill the request and indicated it to the application before the acknowledgeable time-out expired. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
Suspended
The operator needs additional time and suspended the acknowledgeable time-out. A new security time-out starts, further action is required.
Timed Out Handling
The request was not taken into account within the handling time-out. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
Timed Out Acknowledging
The request was not acknowledged nor suspended before the acknowledgeable timeout expired. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
Timed Out Security
The operator did not acknowledge the request within the security time frame after having suspended it. This is a final stage, no further action is required.
Terminated
Time Navigator shut down before the request could be handled or acknowledged.
528
This is a final stage, no further action is required.

Note:
Minimize Time Navigator Media Request Console after use to allow it to be maximized automatically for the next use.
Status Evolution
The following table shows all the different statuses a request may go through during its life cycle.
Request Status Evolution
Submitted
Handled
Acknowledged
Final stage
Unacknowledged
Final stage
Timed Out Acknowledging

Final stage
Terminated
Final stage
Suspended
Acknowledged
Final stage
Unacknowledged
Final stage
Timed Out Security

Final stage
Terminated
Final stage
Timed Out Handling

Final stage
Terminated
Final stage
Redirecting Operator Requests

The operator requests asking for a VTL Disk Drive cartridge to be put online can be redirected by means of a script prior to their being issued. The result of the script determines whether the request is processed or issued. Time Navigator communicates with the script through the following variables:
TINA_CATALOG:
Name of the current catalog. TINA_TMR_TYPE: Operator request type (possible value: ONLINE). TINA_TMR_HOST_NAME: Name of the host where the restore is performed. TINA_TMR_CART_LOC_FILE: Absolute path of the Disk Drive cartridge file. TINA_TMR_CART_NAME: Cartridge name. TINA_TMR_CART_TYPE: Cartridge type (possible value: "Disk Drive"). TINA_TMR_CART_LABEL_PREFIX: Prefix of the media pool label. The return codes of the script must be the following: OK (0)= The request is processed and no operator request is issued. TN_ERR_MOUNT_ABORT (55)= The request is ignored and no operator request is issued (the equivalent of discarding a request in Time Navigator Media Request Console). TN_ERR_REQ (Other)= The request is not processed and the operator request is issued. The script is activated via the Redirect Operators Requests (op_req_handler) tunable which defines the its absolute path. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details. For further information on the script, contact Atempo Professional Services.
530
531
C H A P T E R
16
Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System
16
About the Virtual Library System

In addition to backup to tape, Atempo also offers a disk-based backup functionality, Time Navigator Virtual Library System, that uses external disks rather than cartridges as the backup target. It allows for faster backup and restore. Time Navigator Virtual Library System emulates traditional tape library behavior by providing an interface that lets you configure and manage virtual drives and cartridges. Atempo also provides a solution to export data from disk to tape: Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application allows to migrate data backed up on disk to a tape library.
Note:
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application interfaces with various types of backup to disk solutions, including Atempos Virtual Library System.
See Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library, page 549 for details.
532
Configuring a Virtual Library System

A Virtual Library System is represented by a virtual library to which one or several virtual VTL Disk Drives are associated. The library contains some virtual slots and a virtual mailbox. The Virtual Library System configuration consists of:
Creating a library associated with a host. Specifying the number of VTL Disk Drives that you want to use. Specifying the directory where the data is backed up. Specifying the number and size of cartridge files.
Virtual Library System Configuration Files

The Virtual Library System configuration is stored in configuration files located in the Vtl directory of the Time Navigator installation directory. A backup of this directory is automatically triggered each time the Time Navigator catalog is backed up. If the configuration files disappear, Time Navigator automatically restores the backed up version of the Vtl directory. Once the restore performed, it is recommended that you run a barcode reinitialization of the virtual library via the LibraryOperation-Reinitialization-Barcode menu. If the Vtl directory is corrupted but that it still exists, you must delete it, so that it can be automatically restored.
Note:
Only one backup version of the Vtl directory is kept. Only the last version backed up can thus be restored.
Using the Atempo VLS Wizard

If you do not have any devices configured in your catalog when you open Time Navigator Administration Console, the Administration Assistant allows you to declare an Atempo VLS. The Atempo VLS Wizard is only available if you do not have any libraries defined in your catalog.
Chapter 16
533
The wizard allows you to:
Create a two drives VLS Specify the directory where the data is backed up. Specify the number and size of the cartridge files.
To configure an Atempo VLS using the Wizard
1.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console. The Administration Assistant window appears. Click on Declare a virtual device for backup to disk (Atempo VLS).
2.
The Welcome window appears. Click on Next.
3.
In the Directory Selection window, click on Next to accept the default installation directory or enter a different directory. You can also click on Browse to select a directory.
534
4.
In the Size Selection Windows, click on Next to accept the default size and number of cartridges or modify the values.
5.
In the Name window, click on Next to accept the default name or enter a name for the VLS.
Chapter 16
535
6.
Verify the information in the Summary Window and click on Finish.
7.
If you have to configure a backup for any of your platforms, the Administrative Assistant allows you to do so. See , page 291 for details.
Creating a Virtual Library System

To create a Virtual Library System
1. 2. 3.
Open Time Navigator Administration Console. In the Network area, click on the icon of the host where you want to create the VLS. Choose Device-Library-New. You are asked to choose a library type.
536
4. 5.
Select Virtual Libraries-Atempo-Virtual Library System and click on OK. The Create Atempo VLS window appears. Provide all required information as described in:
Create Atempo VLS Window - General Tab, page 537. Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab, page 538.
6. 7.
To set advanced parameters, click on the VLS Environment Variables button. See VLS Configuration Window, page 539 for details. Validate your choice by clicking on OK. The virtual library and the virtual disk drives appear in the Network area.
A library Reinitialization (barcode) is automatically performed when the library is created. This reinitialization provides information to the catalog concerning the slots and drives status. See Reinitializing Libraries, page 237, for details. 8. Choose Storage-Media Pool-Properties to associate the VTL Disk Drives to media pools. For details concerning media pools, see Creating a Media Pool, page 196.
Chapter 16
537
Create Atempo VLS Window - General Tab
Host Name: The name of the host you selected appears in the Host Name field. You cannot edit it at this point. Library Name: The name of the library appears with the library icon in the Network area. Number of Drives: Number of Virtual Disk Drives that you want to use. The default value is 2. Media Directory: Directory where the cartridges are going to be created. Click on the Browse button to select a directory on your disk.
Warning:
On Windows platforms, if the cartridge directory is located on a network drive, enter the path with the UNC format: \\server_name\share_name\directory_name.
Cartridge Size (MB): Size of one cartridge. The size must be between 256 MB and 200 GB. Number of Cartridges: Number of spare cartridges available in the library. It must be between 4 and 6000.
538
Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab
Disk Space Allocation: Specifies whether the space allocated to the cartridges is reserved on the disk when the label reinitialization is performed.
The Cartridges in slots value reserves the cartridge space. The None value does not reserve the cartridge space but allocates space as cartridges are filled. If the backed up data is to be write protected, use the None option.
Note:
Note:
If you choose the Cartridges in Slots option, make sure you perform a Label Reinitialization of the library via the Devices-Library-OperationsReinitialization-Label menu. As space allocation may take a long time, we recommend that this operation be performed at a time when Time Navigator Administration Console is not being used.
Chapter 16
539
Additional Media Directories: You can add up to 10 media directories to store cartridges. The size of the cartridge files in the additional directories is the size you specified via the Cartridge Size parameter when you created the Virtual Library System.
Note:
This feature is not compatible with the SAN feature. If you add media directories, you cannot use the VLS in a SAN environment. Add: Allows you to enter the Absolute path of an additional directory in which cartridge files are stored, and a number of cartridges to add in that directory. For Windows platforms, if the cartridge directory is located on a network drive, enter the path with the UNC format:
\\server_name\share_name\directory_name
Remove: Allows you to remove a cartridge directory.
Connection Identity:
User Name: Name of the user required to access the cartridge directory. This information may be required for instance if the cartridge directory is located on a network drive on a Windows platforms. For Windows platforms, the user name format must be: domain_name\user_name. The user allowed to access the cartridge directory must also have access to the Vtl directory located in the Time Navigator installation directory. Password: Password of the user required to access the cartridge directory.
Note:
Advanced Properties: Opens the library Advanced Properties windows. See Advanced Library Properties, page 165. VLS Environment Variables: Allows you to edit environment variables. See VLS Configuration Window, page 539 for details.
VLS Configuration Window

Use the VTL Configuration window to edit, add or remove VTL parameters.
540
Add: Lets you add a parameter. Edit: Lets you modify the value of an existing parameter. Remove: Lets you remove a parameter. Name: Name of the Time Navigator Virtual Library parameters. See Virtual Library System Parameters for a list of available variables. Value: Value of the variables that are already defined.
Chapter 16
541
Virtual Library System Parameters

Parameter
ALLOCATE_SPACE CART_DIR
Description
Specifies whether the space allocated to the cartridges is reserved on the disk. Directory in which the cartridges are going to be created. The cartridges of the Virtual Library System are located in the following directory:
CART_DIR/DiskDrives/catalog_name/device_descriptor
Where: CART_DIR is the cartridge directory you specified at library creation; catalog_name is the name of the catalog where the Virtual Library System has been created; device_descriptor is the device descriptor of the Virtual Library System. CART_DIR_EXTRAN (where N stands for 0, 1, 2 ... depending on the number of additional directories) CART_DIR_HOSTN (where N stands for 0, 1, 2 ... depending on the associated hosts) CART_SIZE Absolute path of an additional directory in which cartridge files are stored. For Windows platforms, if the cartridge directory is located on a network drive, enter the path with the UNC format:
Note: This feature is not compatible with the SAN feature. Path of the mounting point corresponding to the cartridge directory on HOSTN. The path must be entered with the UNC format:
Size of one cartridge. It must be between 256 MB and 200 GB. Note: If you edit the CART_SIZE parameter, only new cartridges will take the new size. The size of existing cartridges remains the same. Names of the drives
DRIVEN (where N stands for 0, 1, 2 ... depending on the number of drives) HOSTN (where N stands for 0, 1, 2 ... depending on the number of associated hosts) MAILBOX_DIR MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX NB_CART_TO_ADD
Name of the host connected on the SAN. Only hosts declared as storage nodes can be connected to a SAN. Warning: the host where the VLS is located is declared by default: do not declare it using the HOSTN variable. Directory in which the cartridges will be put online or offline Number of spare cartridges available in the library. It must be between 4 and 6000 Number of slots contained in the mailbox Number of spare cartridges that you want to add in the Virtual Library System
542
Parameter
NB_CART_TO_ADD_EXTRAN (where N stands for 0, 1, 2 ... depending on the number of additional directories) NET_PASSWORD NET_USER
Description
Number of cartridges that you want to store in the additional directories
Password of the user required to access the cartridge directory. Name of the user required to access the cartridge directory. On Windows platforms, the user name format must be: domain_name\user_name. Name of the network to which you want to associate the Virtual Library System. Note: This feature is not compatible with the additional cartridge feature.
SAN
Cartridge File Location

The cartridges of the Virtual Library System are located in the following directory:
CART_DIR/DiskDrives/catalog_name/device_descriptor CART_DIR/DiskDrives/catalog_name/device_descriptor CART_DIR\DiskDrives\catalog_name\device_descriptor
Where:
CART_DIR is the cartridge directory you specified when you created the library. catalog_name is the name of the catalog where the Virtual Library System has
been created.
device_descriptor is the device descriptor of the Virtual Library System.
Disk Space Allocation
If you specified at library creation that you wanted to allocate the cartridge space on disk, you must choose the Library-Operations-Reinitialization-Label menu to perform a Label
Chapter 16
543
Reinitialization of the library. This operation actually allocates space.
Warning:
As space allocation may take a long time, we recommend that this operation be performed at a time when Time Navigator Administration Console is not being used.
If you want to stop space allocation in progress, edit the library and set the ALLOCATE_SPACE parameter to NONE. See Editing a Virtual Library System, page 545 for details about VLS Parameters.
SAN Configuration
You can configure a Virtual Library System on a SAN architecture (Storage Area Network), except if you are performing backups using the NDMP protocol. In this case, the use of a VLS is not supported.
Warning:
The SAN features cannot be used if you have defined additional cartridge directories. See Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab, page 538.
See Time Navigator in SAN Environments, page 419 for details about the SAN.
To create a Virtual Library System on a SAN
Note:
A platform of network type must have been created previously via the PlatformNew-Network menu. In Time Navigator Administration Console, select the Virtual Library system in the Network area. Choose Devices-Library-Properties-Advanced tab and click on VLS Environment Variable.The VLS Configuration window appears. Click on Add. The Select VTL Parameter window appears. Edit the following parameters:
1. 2. 3. 4.
SAN
544
HOSTN CART_DIR_HOSTN
See Virtual Library System Parameters, page 541 for details. 5. Click on OK. The drives are now displayed near the SAN in the lower part of the Network area. A small SAN network appears on the icon of the hosts associated with the VTL Disk Drives.
Chapter 16
545
Editing a Virtual Library System

Once a virtual library has been created, you have the option to modify its parameters.
To edit a Virtual Library System
1. 2.
Select the library to edit in the Network area. Choose Devices-Library-Properties and modify the parameters as described in:
Create Atempo VLS Window - General Tab Create Atempo VLS Window - Advanced Tab
3.
To modify environment variables, click on VLS Environment Variables in the Advanced tab. The list of the Virtual Library System Parameters that you specified when creating the library appears. See Virtual Library System Parameters, page 541 for a complete list of available variables.
Note:
If you edit the CART_SIZE parameter, only new cartridges will take the new size. The size of existing cartridges remains the same.
4.
According to your needs, you can:
Modify the value of a parameter: select the parameter in the list and click on Edit. Add a new parameter: click on Add, select the parameter in the list and click on OK.
Modify the parameters as described in VLS Configuration Window, page 539. 5. 6. In the Edit VLS Parameter window, enter a value or modify the current value in the Value field and click on OK. In the Library Properties window, click on OK.
546
Managing the Virtual Library System

As the Virtual Library System emulates a standard library, the virtual drives and cartridges can be managed through Time Navigator Library Manager.
Description
Time Navigator Library Manager is accessed via the Devices-Library-OperationsManagement menu. It provides information about the VTL Disk Drives, the mailbox slots and the cartridges:
The Drive area contains all the VTL Disk Drives and indicates if they are full or empty. The Mailbox area contains all the virtual mailbox slots. The Slots area represents all the slots containing the cartridges present in the Virtual Library System.
See Time Navigator Library Manager, page 233 for details.

Virtual Library System Operations
All the cartridge operations that can be performed with standard cartridges are also available for virtual cartridges. This section only describes operations that are specific to a Virtual Library System:
Adding Spare Cartridges in the virtual library. Bringing Cartridges Offline Bringing Cartridges Online
See Libraries, page 159 for details about standard library management.
Adding Spare Cartridges

If the number of cartridges defined at library creation is not sufficient, you may need to add spare cartridges to the library.
To add spare cartridges in the Virtual Library System
1. 2. 3.
Select the library in the Network area. Choose Devices-Library-Properties. In the General tab, increase the number of cartridges as needed.
Chapter 16
547
4.
Click on OK. The library is automatically reinitialized in order to take the new cartridges into account.
Bringing Cartridges Offline

If you need to remove some virtual cartridges from the library to store them in another location, you must inform the catalog that the cartridge is offline. To perform these operations, a mailbox directory is needed that you must define through the MAILBOX_DIR parameter. You must also specify the number of slots that you want the mailbox to contain through the MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX parameter. See Editing a Virtual Library System, page 545 for details about VLS Parameters.
To bring a cartridge offline
1.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the cartridge(s) to be brought offline and choose Media-Off line. The Confirm window appears. Check that the selected cartridges are the one that you want to put offline.
Tip:
2.
If you have selected more cartridges than there are mailboxes in the library, check the Retry if mailbox full box.
3. 4.
Click on Start. The cartridge is moved from its slot to a mailbox slot. Run the following command to empty the mailbox:
tina_vls -l device_descriptor -j
where device_descriptor corresponds to the library device descriptor. 5. In Time Navigator Library Manager, select the mailbox slot and choose LibraryOperations-Reinitialization-Bar Code to inform the catalog that the mailbox slot is empty.
Bringing Cartridges Online

A cartridge that was removed from the virtual library may be brought online again. To perform these operations, a mailbox directory is needed that you must define through the MAILBOX_DIR parameter. You must also specify the number of slots that you want the mailbox to contain through the MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX parameter. See Editing a Virtual Library System, page 545 for details about VLS Parameters.
548
To bring a cartridge online
1.
Run the following command to add a cartridge in the mailbox:

tina_vls -l device_descriptor -g -v barcode
where device_descriptor corresponds to the library device descriptor. 2. In Time Navigator Library Manager, choose Library-Operations-Reinitialization-Bar Code to inform the catalog of the full status of the mailbox slot. The mailbox slot now contains the cartridge. Select the mailbox slot(s) containing cartridges to be brought online and choose Media-On-Line.
3.
549
C H A P T E R
17
Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library
17
In order to export data backed up to disk to a tape library on a scheduled basis, Atempo designed a specific application: Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application.
Note:
While Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application is particularly suited to export data backed up with the Time Navigator Virtual Library System (see Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System, page 531) it can also interface with a variety of backup to disk solutions.
Duplication Mode
The Virtual Library System Application offers two duplication modes:
A cartridge duplication mode A job duplication mode
Changing the duplication mode

The Cartridge Duplication mode is the default mode when you install Time Navigator. To use the job duplication, proceed as follows:
Move or rename the current Vls folder located in the $TINA_HOME/Tools/Tina directory. In the same directory, you will find the folder VlsJobDup that contains the job duplication version of Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application. Rename VlsJobDup to Vls.
550
Windows only:
Uninstall and reinstall the schedule service. See Installing the Schedule Service, page 575 for details.
Then, check the following to make sure that the Virtual Library System Application operates properly:
Open the Virtual Library System Application and choose Virtual Library-Edit Configuration, to check the configuration. The parallelism index is now available on Windows, and can be set to any value regardless of the number of meta-pools. Make sure that there is data to duplicate, and choose Virtual Library-MonitoringDuplicate and Remove Data now to start the duplication and removal process manually. You should see all the duplications running in parallel. Once duplications have been completed, the background color for some of the meta-pools can be yellow. This is not relevant with the job duplication mode of the Virtual Library System Application. If you are using the Virtual Library System Application with the job duplication mode, updating Time Navigator will reinstall the cartridge duplication mode (default mode). You must then follow the above procedure to go back to the job duplication mode.
Warning:
Chapter 17
551
Exporting Data Using Cartridge Duplication

Principles
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application associates a Virtual Library System to a tape library in order to export data automatically.
552
Exporting data consists of the following operations:
Data on disk is first duplicated on cartridges in a tape library for longer storage. You can either duplicate full and incremental backups or only full backups. Duplication takes place everyday at a given time.
Note:
Only full and closed cartridges are duplicated.
Then, data is removed from the disk. The data that has been duplicated on the tape library is then removed from the disk until a specified threshold is reached. Data removal occurs when a given filling rate is reached for the Virtual Library System, starting with the cartridge files that are recyclable.
It is also possible to perform an emergency data removal whenever there is a critical need for free space on the Virtual Library System.
Prerequisites
Architecture
The Virtual Library System Application must be run on a Time Navigator Server or Storage Node on the machine where the Virtual Library System is located.
Device Configuration
The tape library and the drives to which data is going to be exported must have been declared in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Create the Virtual Library System as described in To create a Virtual Library System, page 535. Create the library as described in To create a library, page 161. Create the drives as described in To create a drive, page 170.
User Access Rights

The user with administration rights on the machine onto which the Virtual Library System Application is installed must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He must be granted at least the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he be granted the same permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user.
Chapter 17
553
The tina_vlsa binary must be run with the root user, who must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He must be granted at least the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he be granted the same permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user. The system administrator of the machine onto which the Virtual Library System Application is installed must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He must be granted at least the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he be granted the same permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user. The system administrator of the machine onto which the Virtual Library System Application is installed must be declared as a Time Navigator user. He must be granted the cartridge and drive permissions. It is recommended that he be granted the same permissions as the Time Navigator privileged user. See Users and Access Rights, page 119 for details on how to declare users in Time Navigator.
Configuration File Backup

The Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application configuration is stored in files that are located in the directory:
$TINA_HOME/Conf/Vlsa/catalog_name/virtual_library_name $TINA_HOME/Conf/Vlsa/catalog_name/virtual_library_name %TINA_HOME%\Conf\Vlsa\catalog_name\virtual_library_name
This directory is backed up along with the Time Navigator catalog. Make sure your catalog is backed up on a regular basis. See Backing up the Catalog, page 52 for details on how to back up the Time Navigator catalog.
Restore Configuration
The "Use Source Cartridge when Restoring Duplicated Cartridge" tunable (keep_primary_on_duplication) must be set to yes on the Time Navigator Server. It must be set prior to using the Virtual Library System Application. The tunable allows you to restore from the original cartridge on disk rather than from the cartridge on the tape library. This is particularly useful when the data is present both on the disk and on the tape library. See the Time Navigator Tunables guide for details on how to set a tunable.
554
Configuring the Virtual Library System Application

Configuring the Virtual Library System Application consists of the following operations:
Opening the Virtual Library System Application Installing the Schedule Service (Windows only) Setting data duplication and data removal options Defining Virtual Library System cartridge pools (Metapools) Defining Virtual Library System Application backup strategies Backup selections must be defined in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Note:
Opening the Virtual Library System Application

To open the Virtual Library System Application
Open the virtual Library System Application.app in your Time Navigator installation folder (for instance /applications/Atempo/tina41) and provide your password. Run the tina_vlsa binary located in the $TINA_HOME/Bin directory. Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Virtual Library System Application. The Virtual Library System Application window appears.
Chapter 17
555
556
Installing the Schedule Service

Note:
This procedure is only for Windows operating systems only.
You must imperatively install the Windows Schedule Service, so that data duplication and removal can be launched at the specified time.
To install the Schedule Service
1. 2. 3.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Schedule ServiceInstall. In the Account Name field, enter the name of the system administrator (.\Administrator) and in the Password field, enter the administrator password. Click on OK. The Schedule Service (tina_vls_sched_tina4) is now installed. Make sure it is started.
Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options

You must specify the conditions for data duplication and removal.
To set Duplication and Removal Options
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryConfiguration. The Virtual Library Parameters window appears.
Chapter 17
557
2.
Enter the following parameters:

Virtual Library Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are
declared.
Note:
You will be asked to enter the Privileged User Name and the Password to retrieve information from the catalog.
Virtual Library Name: Name of the virtual library allowing to back up data to disk. Duplication/Removal Schedule
Checking the Duplication/Removal Schedule box enables the automatic scheduling for duplication and removal operations.
Start Time: Time when the data duplication and removal will start every day. Use the hh:mm format.
558
Duplication Parameters Time Limit: Checking this box allows you to define a deadline after which no
duplication operation will be launched. This option is useful to prevent duplications to overlap with any other scheduled operations, such as backups.
Do not Start Duplications after: Time after which you do not want duplications to be started. Use the hh:mm format.
Example
If the backups take place during the night, you can program the duplication jobs to start at 10:00 and you can set the time limit to 19:00. If the duplication jobs for some of the cartridges has not started at 19:00, they are blocked until the following day, and the duplicated data is deleted from disk at once. Thus, duplication and deletion operations do not interfere with backup operations.
Note:
If the time limit is before the start time (for instance, 7:00 and 22:00), duplication jobs will start at the specified time and go on until the time limit on the following day.
Parallelization Index (Unix only): Number of metapools that you want to duplicate
simultaneously. This index must not be greater than the number of drives available in the physical library.
Warning:
If only one metapool is defined, no parallelization is possible: cartridges belonging to the same pool cannot be duplicated simultaneously on several drives.
Removal Parameters Start Threshold: Maximum percentage of fullness that you want your Virtual Library System to contain. For example, if you set the threshold to 90%, information will be removed when the Virtual Library System is more than 90% full, starting with the cartridge files that are recyclable.
Chapter 17
559
Stop Threshold: Percentage of when data removal will stop.
For example, if you set the threshold to 80%, data will be removed until the Virtual Library System is 80% full.
Note:
If necessary, data will be removed that is still in the retention period. However, data will not be removed that has not been duplicated.
3.
Click on OK.
560
Managing Metapools
Managing metapools consists of:
Defining at least one metapool. A meta-pool is a cartridge pool for the Virtual Library System (source pool) which is associated to one or two cartridge pools on the tape library (target pools). It defines the global retention period policy and the type of backup and duplication. Some parameters can also be set to automatically close cartridges according to specific criteria, so that they can be duplicated. Warning: Meta-pools must imperatively be created in the Virtual Library System Application in order to be duplicated. Any media pool created via the Storage-Media Pool-New menu of Time Navigator Administration Console cannot be used by the Virtual Library System Application
Editing metapools to modify the associated pools and the closing parameters. Deleting metapools.
To define metapools:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Create. The Create Metapool window appears.
Chapter 17
561
2.
Enter the following parameters to create cartridge pools for the Virtual Library System (backup to disk):
Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are
declared.
Note:
You may be asked to enter the Privileged User Name and the Password to retrieve information from the catalog.
Virtual Library Name: Name of the virtual library allowing to back up data to disk. Metapool Name: Name of the metapool that you want to create for the Virtual Library
System.
Scenario : Duplication scenario that you want to implement. A scenario indicates
how the data is backed up (standard or synthetic backup), and the type of backup to duplicate (full or incremental).
562
Synthetic backup is the preferred method because the backup is performed from the Time Navigator server and not from the agent. This method is faster and puts no load on the agent machine. See Backup Types, page 286 for details on synthetic backup. The scenarios available are the following:
Duplicate Full and Incremental Backups
All information is duplicated. One cartridge pool is automatically created for the Virtual Library System from which all data from full and incremental backups will be duplicated.
Duplicate Full and Incremental Backups, Full Backups use Synthetic
All information is duplicated. All full backup are synthetic backups. One cartridge pool is automatically created for the Virtual Library System from which all data from full and incremental backups will be duplicated.
Duplicate Only Full Backups
Only full backups are duplicated. Two pools are automatically created for the Virtual Library System to separate full backups from incremental backups. The full backup pool bears the name of the metapool and the pool dedicated to incremental backups uses the same name followed by an _i.
Duplicate Only Full Backups Using Synthetic Full Backups
Only full backups are duplicated. All full backup are synthetic backups and the duplication is performed simultaneously: only one job is started that writes both on the Virtual Library System and on the tape library. Two pools are automatically created for the Virtual Library System to separate full backups from incremental backups. The full backup pool bears the name of the metapool and the pool dedicated to incremental backups uses the same name followed by an _i.
Label: Label for the cartridge files on disk. Retention Period: Number of days the data on the Virtual Library System will be
retained before reusing the cartridge. 3. In the Target Cartridge Pool area, enter the following parameters to create or choose a cartridge pool for the duplication from disk to tape:
Target Library: Name of the tape library where you want data to be duplicated.
Chapter 17
563
Cartridge Pool: Specifies whether you want to use an Existing Pool or Create a New Pool.
Note:
Target cartridge pools can be created either at the meta-pool level in the Virtual Library Sytem Application, or directly via the Storage-Media PoolNew menu of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Existing Pool: Specifies the name of the cartridge pool if you chose to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Name: Name of the new cartridge pool if you chose not to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Label: Label for the new cartridge pool. Retention Period: Number of days the data on the tape library will be retained before
reusing the cartridge.

Note:
The Secondary Cartridge Pool area allows to specify a second pool, so that to the data from disk is duplicated to two different tapes. This may be useful if you want to externalize one of the copies and keep the second one in the tape library.
4.
Check the Automatic Catridge Closing box if you want to define automatic closing criteria and enter the following parameters to specify what category of cartridges should be automaticaly closed in order to be duplicated.
Filling Rate: Maximum percentage of fullness that you want your cartridge to
reach before being automatically closed. If you set this option to 80%, the cartridge will be closed as soon as it is 80% full.
First Backup: Time Period following the first backup and after which the cartridge will be automatically closed. If you set this option to 5 days, the cartridge will be closed 5 days after the first backup. This option ensures that no data is kept for too long on disk without being duplicated.
5.
Click on OK.
To edit a metapool:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Edit. The Edit Metapool window appears.
564
2. 3. 4.
In the Catalog Name and Virtual Library Name drop-down lists, choose the catalog and the virtual library associated with the metapool to edit. In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to edit. Modify the parameters as needed.
Note:
Only the target cartridge pools and the closing parameters can be modified.
5.
Click on OK.
To delete a metapool:
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Delete. The Delete Metapool window appears. In the Catalog Name and Virtual Library Name drop-down lists, choose the catalog and the virtual library associated with the metapool to delete. In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to delete. Click on Delete.
Defining a Backup Strategy

The backup strategies for backing up data to disk must not be created in Time Navigator Administration Console. They must be defined in the Virtual Library System Application. However, it is possible to edit strategies at a later stage in Time Navigator Administration Console in order to set more advanced parameters. Creating a backup strategy allows you to define the platform to be backed up, the media pool where the data is backed up and the time when the backup is performed.
To create a strategy:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Strategy-Create. The Create Strategy window appears.
Chapter 17
565
2.

Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are
declared.
Note:
Virtual Library Name: Name of the virtual library allowing to back up data to disk. Platform to Back up: Platform that you want to back up. Strategy Name: Name of the strategy that you want to create: A, B, C or D. Only
the strategies that have not been defined yet are available.
Metapool: Name of the metapool you want to use. If you selected a stream based application, only Regular full backup metapools are available. Full Backup Day: Day on which the weekly full backup will be performed. Full Backup Time: Time at which the weekly full backup will be performed.
566
Incremental Backup Time: Time the daily incremental backup will be performed.
3. 4.
Click on OK. If you want to have a different strategy scheduling policy and set more advanced parameters, you can then edit the strategy in Time Navigator Administration Console (Backup-Selected Platform-Strategy-Properties menu).
Defining the Metapool Priority

If there are not enough drives in the library to perform parallel duplications of all your metapools, you can sort the metapools in order of priority. For instance, the metapool containing the most critical data can be given top priority and be duplicated first.
To define metapool priority
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Priority. The Metapool Priority window appears.
2. 3. 4.
Select a metapool in the list and use the Up and Down button to define the priority level for each metapool. Repeat this operation for all the metapools. Click on OK.
Chapter 17
567
Virtual Library System Testing

After the export options, the metapools and the backup strategies have been configured, you must perform a test that will validate the consistency between the Virtual Library System and Time Navigator.
To perform a test of the Virtual Library System
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual Library-Test. The Virtual Library Test window appears.
The Test window displays a line for each component that was tested. Inconsistencies are displayed in bold red type, explaining what the problem or inconsistency is.
Monitoring
Monitoring libraries consists of the following operations:
Displaying information about the Virtual Library System and the metapools. Exporting the monitoring report. Duplicating and removing data manually Performing emergency data removal In both cases of data removal, normal and emergency, data continues to be removed until the threshold is reached. Data that is still in the retention period. may be removed. However, data will never be removed that has not been duplicated. This is the only case where the threshold may not be reached.
Note:
568
Viewing Virtual Library System Information

To display information on the Virtual Library System
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring Report window appears.
Note:
Click on Compact Columns to display columns with abbreviated titles. This allows you to see more information at once.
2.
In the Catalog drop down list, select the catalog where the libraries are declared.
Note:
3.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to monitor. The report is displayed in the text area below. You can refresh it by clicking on Refresh.
Chapter 17
569
Available Information
The information displayed in the monitoring window are of two types:
Virtual Library System information: summary description displayed above the columns. It provides global information on the Virtual Library System. Metapool information: description of the metapool status. It is displayed in columns.
Virtual Library System Information
Space Used: Percentage of the Virtual Library System that is already used. The
background color can be the following:

Color
No color Green Yellow Red
Description
Space used is below the start threshold Space used is between the removal start and stop thresholds Space used is between the stop threshold and the maximum capacity The Virtual Library System is full
Duplication Progress: Percentage of the duplicable cartridges that have already been
duplicated.
Duplications Running: Number of duplication jobs that are running. Duplicated Cartridges: Number of duplicated cartridges. Duplicable Cartridges: Number of cartridges that are eligible for duplication (Full and
Closed cartridges).
Last Duplication: Last time when a duplication job was run. Full Cartridges: Number of full cartridges. Part. Filled Volume: Volume occupied by partly filled cartridges. Allocated Cartridges: Total number of cartridges belonging to the metapool.
Metapool Information
The above information is available for metapools, as well as the following information:
Part. Filled Cart: Number of partly filled cartridges. Empty Cart: Number of empty cartridges. Free Space: Cartridge space that is still available in the metapool.
570
The background colors for each metapool can be the following:

Color
Green Yellow Orange Red
Description
All the cartridges are duplicated (there is no partly filled cartridge) All the cartridges are duplicated except partly filled cartridges Some cartridges have not been duplicated even though they were duplicable No cartridge has been duplicated
Exporting the Monitoring Report

The monitoring report can be exported to a file on your disk.
To export the monitoring report
1. 2. 3.
Click on the Export Report button. The Export Monitoring Report window appears. Modify the export file path if needed. Click on OK.
Duplicating and Removing Data Manually

You can duplicate and remove cartridges manually at any time, even if you have scheduled automatic duplication jobs.
To duplicate and remove data
1. 2.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring window appears. In the Catalog drop down list, select the catalog where the libraries are declared.
Note:
3.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to monitor.
Chapter 17
571
4.
Click on Duplicate and Remove Data Now. Data duplication and removal first duplicates data that has not yet been duplicated. Then it removes the oldest duplicated data, according to the retention period until the threshold retention period is reached. The threshold level used is the one that was set in the Configuration window in Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options, page 556.
Emergency Data Removal

Warning:
An emergency data removal should only be performed in emergency cases when there is a critical need for free space on the Virtual Library System. If you are performing emergency data removal on a regular basis, you should reevaluate your strategy. Performing this procedure overrides the settings made in Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options, page 556.
To perform an emergency data removal
1. 2.
Note:
3. 4.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to monitor. In the Stop Threshold field, enter the percentage of when data removal will stop. For example, if you set the threshold to 80%, data will be removed until the Virtual Library System is 80% full. Click on Emergency Duplication and Removal. Data is removed from disk until the specified threshold is reached. If the threshold is not reached by removing data that is older than the retention period, then it will continue duplicating and removing data that is within the retention period until the threshold is reached.
5.
572
Exporting Data Using Job Duplication

Job duplication brings the following improvements over cartridge duplication:
Improved data protection: All backed up data can be duplicated daily without waiting for cartridges to be full or closed. Handling of large files spanning on several cartridges. Improved parallel duplication: Parallel duplication is available on Windows systems. Parallelism is not limited to one duplication per meta-pool and all jobs that are backed up on different cartridges can be duplicated in parallel, provided there are enough available drives. Backup strategies are no longer configured in the Virtual Library System Application, but directly in Time Navigator Administration Console, which allows for a finer and more advanced scheduling.
Chapter 17
573
Principles
Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application associates a Virtual Library System to a tape library in order to export data automatically.
Exporting data consists of the following operations:
Data backed up on disk is first duplicated on cartridges in a tape library for longer storage on a per job basis. You can either duplicate full and incremental backups or only full backups. Duplication takes place everyday at a given time. Then, data is removed from the disk. The data that has been duplicated on the tape library is then removed from the disk until a specified threshold is reached. Data removal occurs when a given filling rate is reached for the Virtual Library System, starting with the cartridge files that are recyclable.
It is also possible to perform an emergency data removal whenever there is a critical need for free space on the Virtual Library System.
574
Prerequisites
Architecture
The Virtual Library System Application must be run on a Time Navigator Server or Storage Node on the machine where the Virtual Library System is located.
Device Configuration
The tape library and the drives to which data is going to be exported must have been declared in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Create the Virtual Library System as described in To create a Virtual Library System, page 535. Create the library as described in To create a library, page 161. Create the drives as described in To create a drive, page 170.
Configuration File Backup

The Time Navigator Virtual Library System Application configuration is stored in files that are located in the directory:
$TINA_HOME/Conf/Vlsa/catalog_name/virtual_library_name $TINA_HOME/Conf/Vlsa/catalog_name/virtual_library_name %TINA_HOME%\Conf\Vlsa\catalog_name\virtual_library_name
This directory is backed up along with the Time Navigator catalog. Make sure your catalog is backed up on a regular basis. See Backing up the Catalog, page 52 for details on how to back up the Time Navigator catalog.
Configuring the Virtual Library System Application

Configuring the Virtual Library System Application consists of the following operations:
Opening the Virtual Library System Application Installing the Schedule Service (Windows only) Setting data duplication and data removal options Defining Virtual Library System cartridge pools (Metapools)
Chapter 17
575
Defining backup strategies and selections in Time Navigator Administration Console.
Opening the Virtual Library System Application

To open the Virtual Library System Application
Open the Virtual Library System Application in your Time Navigator installation folder (for instance /applications/Atempo/tina41) and provide your password. Run the tina_vlsa binary located in the $TINA_HOME/Bin directory. Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Virtual Library System Application. The Virtual Library System Application window appears.
Installing the Schedule Service

Note:
This procedure is only for Windows operating systems only.
You must imperatively install the Windows Schedule Service, so that data duplication and removal can be launched at the specified time.
576
To install the Schedule Service
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Schedule ServiceInstall. The Schedule Service (named tina_vls_sched_xxx) is now installed. Make sure it is started.
To uninstall the Schedule Service
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Schedule ServiceUninstall. The Schedule Service (named tina_vls_sched_xxx) is now uninstalled.
Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options

You must specify the conditions for data duplication and removal.
To set Duplication and Removal Options
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual Library-Edit Configuration. The Duplication/Removal Parameters window appears.
Chapter 17
577
2.

Virtual Library Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are declared. Note:
You will be asked to enter the Privileged User Name and the Password to retrieve information from the catalog.
Virtual Library Name: Name of the virtual library allowing to back up data to disk.
578
Library Size Note:
The libray size parameters must only be set if the source library is a physical library and not a virtual library.
Cartridge Size (MB): Size of the cartridges in the source physical library. Number of Cartridges: Number of cartridges present in the source physical library. Duplication/Removal Schedule
Checking the Duplication/Removal Schedule box enables the automatic scheduling for duplication and removal operations.
Start Time: Time when the data duplication and removal will start every day. Use the hh:mm format. Duplication Parameters Time Limit: Checking this box allows you to define a deadline after which no
duplication operation will be launched. This option is useful to prevent duplications to overlap with any other scheduled operations, such as backups.
Do not Start Duplications after: Time after which you do not want duplications to be started. Use the hh:mm format.
Example
If the backups take place during the night, you can program the duplications to start at 10:00 and you can set the time limit to 19:00. If the duplications for some of the jobs have not started at 19:00, they are blocked until the following day, and the duplicated data is deleted from disk at once. Thus, duplication and deletion operations do not interfere with backup operations.
Note:
If the time limit is before the start time (for instance, 7:00 and 22:00), duplication jobs will start at the specified time and go on until the time limit on the following day.
Parallelization Index: Number of jobs that you want to duplicate simultaneously. This index must not be greater than the number of drives available in the physical library. Note:
If two jobs are backed up on the same cartridge, they cannot be duplicated in parallel. The second job will be queued while the first job is duplicated.
Removal Parameters
Chapter 17
579
Start Threshold: Maximum percentage of fullness that you want your Virtual Library
System to contain. For example, if you set the threshold to 90%, information will be removed when the Virtual Library System is more than 90% full, starting with the cartridge files that are recyclable.
Stop Threshold: Percentage of when data removal will stop.
For example, if you set the threshold to 80%, data will be removed until the Virtual Library System is 80% full.
Note:
If necessary, data will be removed that is still in the retention period. However, data will not be removed that has not been duplicated. Most of the time, the Start and Stop Thresholds are set to the same value.
Tip:
3.
Click on OK.
Managing Metapools
Managing metapools consists of:
Defining at least one metapool. A meta-pool is a cartridge pool for the Virtual Library System (source pool) which is associated to one or two cartridge pools on the tape library (target pools). It defines the global retention period policy and the type of backup and duplication.
Warning:
Meta-pools must imperatively be created in the Virtual Library System Application in order to be duplicated. Any media pool created via the Storage-Media Pool-New menu of Time Navigator Administration Console can not be used by the Virtual Library System Application
Editing metapools to modify the associated pools. Deleting metapools.
To define metapools:
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Create. The Create Metapool window appears.
580
2.
Enter the following parameters to create cartridge pools for the Virtual Library System (backup to disk):
Catalog Name: Name of the Time Navigator catalog where the libraries are declared. Note:
Virtual Library Name: Name of the virtual library allowing to back up data to disk. Metapool Name: Name of the metapool that you want to create for the Virtual Library
System.
Scenario : Duplication scenario that you want to implement. A scenario indicates the
type of backup to duplicate (full or incremental). The scenarii available are the following:
Duplicate Full and Incremental Backups
All jobs are duplicated, regardless of the backup type.
Duplicate Only Full Backups
Only full backups are duplicated.

Label: Label for the cartridge files on disk.
Chapter 17
581
Retention Period: Number of days the data on the Virtual Library System will be
retained before reusing the cartridge. 3. In the Target Cartridge Pool area, enter the following parameters to create or choose a cartridge pool for the duplication from disk to tape:
Target Library: Name of the tape library where you want data to be duplicated. Cartridge Pool: Specifies whether you want to use an Existing Pool or Create a New Pool. Note:
Target cartridge pools can be created either at the meta-pool level in the Virtual Library Sytem Application, or directly via the Storage-Cartridge Pool-New menu of Time Navigator Administration Console.
Existing Pool: Specifies the name of the cartridge pool if you chose to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Name: Name of the new cartridge pool if you chose not to use an existing
pool.
New Pool Label: Label for the new cartridge pool. Retention Period: Number of days the data on the tape library will be retained before
reusing the cartridge.

Note:
The Secondary Cartridge Pool area allows to specify a second pool, so that to the data from disk is duplicated to two different tapes. This may be useful if you want to externalize one of the copies and keep the second one in the tape library.
4.
Click on OK.
To edit a metapool:
1. 2. 3.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Edit. The Edit Metapool window appears. In the Catalog Name and Virtual Library Name drop-down lists, choose the catalog and the virtual library associated with the metapool to edit. In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to edit.
582
4.
Modify the parameters as needed.

Note:
Only the target cartridge pools can be modified.
5.
Click on OK.
To delete a metapool:
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Delete. The Delete Metapool window appears. In the Catalog Name and Virtual Library Name drop-down lists, choose the catalog and the virtual library associated with the metapool to delete. In the Meta Pool drop-down list, choose the metapool to delete. Click on Delete.
Defining Backup Strategies and Backup Selections

The backup strategies and selections for backing up data to disk are created in Time Navigator Administration Console. The strategies must be associated to the relevant meta-pools. For more information on backup strategies and backup selections, see Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301, and Creating a Backup Selection, page 339.
Defining the Metapool Priority

If there are not enough drives in the library to perform parallel duplications of all your metapools, you can sort the metapools in order of priority. For instance, the metapool containing the most critical data can be given top priority and be duplicated first.
To define metapool priority
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Metapool-Priority. The Metapool Priority window appears.
Chapter 17
583
2. 3. 4.
Select a metapool in the list and use the Up and Down button to define the priority level for each metapool. Repeat this operation for all the metapools. Click on OK.
Virtual Library System Testing

After the export options, the metapools and the backup strategies have been configured, you must perform a test that will validate the consistency between the Virtual Library System and Time Navigator.
To perform a test of the Virtual Library System
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual Library-Test. The Virtual Library Test window appears.
The Test window displays a line for each component that was tested. Inconsistencies are displayed in bold red type, explaining what the problem or inconsistency is.
Monitoring
Monitoring libraries consists of the following operations:
Displaying information about the Virtual Library System and the metapools. Exporting the monitoring report. Duplicating and removing data manually
584
Performing emergency data removal In both cases of data removal, normal and emergency, data continues to be removed until the threshold is reached. Data that is still in the retention period. may be removed. However, data will never be removed that has not been duplicated. This is the only case where the threshold may not be reached.
Note:
Viewing Virtual Library System Information

To display information on the Virtual Library System
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring Report window appears.
Note:
Click on Compact Columns to display columns with abbreviated titles. This allows you to see more information at once.
2.
Note:
Chapter 17
585
3.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to monitor. The report is displayed in the text area below. You can refresh it by clicking on Refresh.
Available Information
The information displayed in the monitoring window are of two types:
Virtual Library System information: summary description displayed above the columns. It provides global information on the Virtual Library System. Metapool information: description of the metapool status. It is displayed in columns.
Virtual Library System Information
Space Used: Percentage of the Virtual Library System that is already used. The
background color can be the following:

Color
No color Green Yellow Red
Description
Space used is below the start threshold Space used is between the removal start and stop thresholds Space used is between the stop threshold and the maximum capacity The Virtual Library System is full
Duplication Progress: Percentage of the duplicable cartridges that have already been
duplicated.
Duplications Running: Number of duplication jobs that are running. Duplicated Cartridges: Number of duplicated cartridges. Duplicable Cartridges: Number of cartridges containing jobs eligible for duplication. Last Duplication: Last time when a duplication job was run. Full Cartridges: Number of full cartridges. Part. Filled Volume: Volume occupied by partly filled cartridges. Allocated Cartridges: Total number of cartridges belonging to the metapool.
586
Metapool Information
The above information is available for metapools, as well as the following information:
Part. Filled Cart: Number of partly filled cartridges. Empty Cart: Number of empty cartridges. Free Space: Cartridge space that is still available in the metapool.
The background colors for each metapool can be the following:

Color
Green Yellow Orange Red
Description
All the cartridges are duplicated (there is no partly filled cartridge) All cartridges are duplicated (there are some partly filled cartridges) Some cartridges have not been duplicated even though they were duplicable No cartridge has been duplicated
Exporting the Monitoring Report

The monitoring report can be exported to a file on your disk.
To export the monitoring report
1. 2. 3.
Click on the Export Report button. The Export Monitoring Report window appears. Modify the export file path if needed. Click on OK.
Duplicating and Removing Data Manually

You can start the data duplication and removal at any time, even if you have scheduled automatic duplications.
To duplicate and remove data
1.
In the Virtual Library System Application main window, choose Virtual LibraryMonitoring. The Virtual Library Monitoring window appears.
Chapter 17
587
2.
Note:
3. 4.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to monitor. Click on Duplicate and Remove Data Now. Data duplication and removal first duplicates data that has not yet been duplicated. Then it removes the oldest duplicated data, according to the retention period until the threshold retention is reached. The threshold level used is the one that was set in the Configuration window in Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options, page 556.
Emergency Data Removal

Warning:
An emergency data removal should only be performed in emergency cases when there is a critical need for free space on the Virtual Library System. If you are performing emergency data removal on a regular basis, you should reevaluate your strategy. Performing this procedure overrides the settings made in Setting Data Duplication and Removal Options, page 556.
To perform an emergency data removal
1. 2.
Note:
3. 4.
In the Virtual Library drop down list, select the virtual library that you want to monitor. In the Stop Threshold field, enter the percentage of when data removal will stop. For example, if you set the threshold to 80%, data will be removed until the Virtual Library System is 80% full.
588
5.
Click on Emergency Duplication and Removal. Data is removed from disk until the specified threshold is reached. If the threshold is not reached by removing data that is older than the retention period, then it will continue duplicating and removing data that is within the retention period until the threshold is reached.
589
C H A P T E R
18
List Application
18
Application Overview
Definition
A List application allows you to create and organize objects at a logical level. These objects can be located on different locations on a same machine (ex: objects located on different partitions under Windows 2000/2003 or on different file systems under Unix). The application makes it possible to back up a list of objects of the following type:
Regular file Directory Raw device Symbolic links Special Unix objects, such as: character or block device access, named pipe.
The List application can be used to perform cold backups of an Oracle database, to back up the critical files of an operating system (ex: passwd under Unix, win.ini under Windows 2000/2003). The List application is able to back up any database product equipped with a backup utility using named pipe. The List application does not support ACLs (Access Control Lists).
List File
The list of the objects to back up associated with a "List" application is defined in a file called List file. The List file can be specified in the following manners:
Enter the file name in the List File textbox of the New Application window in Time Navigator Administration Console. Click on Browse next to the List File textbox of the New Application window to select the file on disk.
590
Use the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable. The variable can be defined either in the New Application window in Time Navigator Administration Console, or directly in the Information directory of the file tree in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager.
If you decide to specify the List file via the List File textbox and if the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable is also set, Time Navigator will take into account the List file specified in the List File textbox. For more information on environment variables, see Environment Variables, page 607.
Parallel Backup
When you perform parallel backups with the List application, the backup job is divided into several jobs, according to the degree of parallelism defined when you create the backup strategy and backup selections. You can define a synchronization point using the WAIT keyword, if necessary.
Chapter 18
List Application
591
List File Syntax

Using the keyword defines below, you must define the list of all the objects to be backed up by the List Application. The List file describes the objects in a simple and easy-to-use language.
Basic Rules
The basic syntax rules are the following:
Keywords are not case-sensitive. Object paths must be specified between single or double quotes (ex: "/usr/ local" or /usr/local) and follow the syntax used by the operating system: (ex: "/path1/path2/file" under Unix
"c:\path1\path2\file" under Windows 2000/2003 "device:/path1/path2/file" under NetWare, etc.).
The name associated with each keyword FILE or DIR must appear between quotes if it contains a space, ex: "my name" or my_name or "my_name" are accepted, but my name is not. The name associated with each keyword FILE or DIR must not contain the slash character. For instance, DIR "/vol/vol1" is not allowed. If the name of one of your files or directories happens to be a declared List application keyword, it must appear between quotes (single or double), to prevent it from being interpreted as a keyword. For instance: DIR size ("/vol/vol0/DT/PROD/TESTDATA/treendmp/size") should be written:
DIR "size" ("/vol/vol0/DT/PROD/TESTDATA/treendmp/size" )
If some object paths contain non-system environment variables (ex : %TINA_HOME%/Conf), you will have to perform all Time Navigator operations with the identity of the current Windows session user. Failing to do this will prevent the variables from being interpreted correctly.
592
Keywords
For simplicity reasons, the syntax used includes a limited number of keywords. They are presented below in alphabetical order.
DIR DIR name ( path | DIR | FILE )
or
DIR name ( path | DIR | FILE | MOUNT | TREE | EXEC | LINK | PIPE | INFO ) The keyword DIR is used to define a meta-directory (like an ordinary directory) which can be composed of other meta-directories (DIR) or meta-files (FILE). It allows for a
logical organization of files to be backed up or replicated.
name is the meta-directory name. path is the path to a directory to be backed up. DIR is a sub-meta-directory. FILE is a meta-file.
Examples DIR Keyword
DIR mydir ( FILE myfile ("/Users/Demo/Weather.html") FILE myfile ("/Users/Demo/Movies/mymovie.avi") ) => Backs up the file /Users/Demo/Weather.html and /Users/Demo/Movies/ mymovie.avi DIR mydir2 ( DIR mydir3 ( FILE myfile ("/Users/Demo/Pictures/image.jpeg") ) ) => Backs up the file image.jpeg
Another use of DIR consists in directly specifying a path, which makes it possible to back up all regular files present in the directory.
DIR mypath ( "/Users/Demo/Movies" ) Backs up only the contents of the directory /Users/Demo/Movies.
Chapter 18
List Application
593
DIR mydir ( FILE hosts ( "/etc/hosts" ) FILE config ( "/usr/people/lch/.cshrc" ) ) Backs up the files /etc/hosts and /usr/people/lch/.cshrc. DIR mydir2 ( DIR mydir3 ( FILE dummy ( "/usr/people2/file" ) ) ) Backs up the file file.
Another use of DIR consists in directly specifying a path, which makes it possible to back up all regular files present in the directory.
DIR mypath ( "/usr/local/bin" ) Backs up only the contents of the directory /usr/local/bin.
DIR mydir ( FILE hosts ( "c:\hosts\hosts.txt" ) FILE config ( "c:\config\config.txt" ) ) Backs up the files hosts.txt and config.txt. DIR mydir2 ( DIR mydir3 ( FILE dummy ( "c:\winnt\win.ini" ) ) ) Backs up the file win.ini. Another use of DIR consists in directly specifying a path, which makes it possible to back
up all regular files present in the directory.

DIR mypath ( "c:\Program Files\Atempo" ) Backs up only the contents of the directory c:\Program Files\Atempo. EXEC DIR name ( path EXEC exec_path | DIR | FILE )
594
The EXEC keyword associates an executable program or script with a meta-directory. Whenever the meta-directory is backed up, the executable is spawned twice: once for pre-processing when arriving in the meta-directory and a second time for post-processing when leaving the meta-directory after the backup of its contents. You need to provide the file name and path of the program to be executed by the EXEC keyword. For instance: EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh" (Unix), or EXEC "c:\rks\applist\test_exec.bat (Windows).
Example
EXEC Keyword
DIR "First Directory" ( DIR "Rake Files" ( "/home02/rks/testdir" EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh" ) DIR "Recursive files" ( TREE "/home02/rks/testdir" EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh" ) DIR "Specific Files" ( EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh", FILE ".script" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ), FILE ".doc" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/testdir2/testdir3/testdir4/lindberg.doc" ), LINK ".link" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ), ) )
Example
Executable script that can be called by the EXEC keyword

#!/bin/sh case "$1" in '-pre') # Stabilize the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Preparing Data in $3 meta-directory" sleep 10 ;; '-post') # Release the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Postparing Data in $3 meta-directory" sleep 10 ;; *) echo "Usage: $0 { -pre | -post } -dir path" exit 100 ;; esac case "$2" in '-dir') ;; *) echo "Usage: $0 { -pre | -post } -dir path" exit 101
Chapter 18
List Application
595
;; esac exit 0
Example
Executable script called by the EXEC keyword, using the TINA_CATALOG and TINA_AML_FOLDER variables See Environment Variables, page 607 for a complete description of the TINA_CATALOG and TINA_AML_FOLDER variables.
:::::::::::::: test_exec.sh :::::::::::::: #!/bin/sh case "$1" in '-pre') # Stabilize the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity acct -text "Preparing Data in $TINA_AML_FOLDER:$3 meta-directory" sleep 10 ;; '-post') # Release the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity acct -text "Postparing Data in $TINA_AML_FOLDER:$3 meta-directory" sleep 10 ;; *) echo "Usage: $0 { -pre | -post } -dir path" exit 100 ;; esac case "$2" in '-dir') ;; *) echo "Usage: $0 { -pre | -post } -dir path" exit 101 ;; esac
exit 0
FILE FILE name ( { path, ... } OFFSET m | SIZE n | MYSELF ) The FILE keyword is mostly used to back up files and raw devices. The absolute file path is specified by path. It can also be used with mirror files. The term applies to files
which are theoretically identical to one another. The concept is mainly used for databases.
name is the meta-file name. path is the path (or a list of paths) to a file (or mirror files) to be backed up.
596
OFFSET is the partition address of the data to be backed up. The unit is K for KB, M for MB and G for GB. The default value is: 0 if the OFFSET parameter is not
specified.
SIZE represents the amount of data to be backed up from the OFFSET location. If SIZE=0, the amount of data is unlimited, the entire file will be backed up. The default value is 0 if the SIZE parameter is not specified. MYSELF is a keyword used to automatically back up the List file. If the MYSELF parameter is being used, OFFSET and SIZE are useless.
Warning:
Using the OFFSET and SIZE parameters allows you to back up part of your data if the application you are using shares raw devices or if you are performing operations between raw devices of different sizes. Do not use these parameters if the data volume is subject to change during backup.
Example
FILE Keyword
FILE myfile ( "c:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\services" ) Backs up the file services. FILE mypartition ( "/dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s0" OFFSET 4K SIZE 23550K) Backs up the raw device c0t0d0s0 from the 4 KB address for a size of 23550 KB. FILE mymirror ( "/mirror/file1" , "/mirror/file2" , "/mirror/file3" , ) Backs up just once the three identical files file1, file2 and file3.
If the size of one of the files is different, an error message is sent to the event file (Meta-file file1 size 4012 <> mirror file3 size 2015).
FILE auto ( MYSELF ) Backs up the current List file. If the List file name is c:\temp\test_list.txt, then FILE auto ( MYSELF ) corresponds to FILE auto ("c:\temp\test_list.txt").
Note:
The MYSELF keyword is replaced by the physical name of the List file. If this file contains the INCLUDE keyword, it is not expanded in the backed up file. To back up the included file contents, you must add a MYSELF keyword into the included file.
Chapter 18
List Application
597
INCLUDE INCLUDE ( file_path ) The keyword INCLUDE is used to include the contents of another List file into the list of
objects to be backed up and specified in the current List file.

file_path represents the name and path of the List file to include. Note:
It is recommended not to use the keyword INCLUDE recursively (file1 including file2 that includes file1 itself). To avoid infinite loops, the nesting level is limited to 16.
INCLUDE ( file_path GENBY exec_path) The GENBY option specifies the script name and path to be used to generate the List file
that will be included into the current List file. Examples INCLUDE Keyword
INCLUDE ( "c:\temp\file_list.txt" ) Loads the file c:\temp\file_list.txt and includes it into the current list at the
place occupied by the keyword.

INCLUDE ( "/DT/DEV/people/nko/file_list.txt" GENBY "/DT/DEV/people/ nko/gen.sh") Generates the /DT/DEV/people/nko/file_list.txt file using the /DT/DEV/people/nko/gen.sh script. INFO INFO "info_name" ("comment") The INFO keyword allows you to display and back up comments in the file tree of a List
application in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. The INFO keyword must be included into a DIR clause (its parent must be a directory). Example INFO Keyword
DIR "First Directory" (
INFO "info1" ("This is a comment")
) DIR "Second Directory" ( INFO "info2" ("This is another comment") )
598
Tip:
If you want the INFO link to be sorted to the top of its directory, start its name with a space character.
LINK LINK "link_name" ("target_name") The LINK keyword allows you to create a meta-link to a file. The file data will not be
backed up.
MOUNT
DIR "mydir" (MOUNT path)
The MOUNT keyword allows to backup and restore file systems with the list application in a similar fashion as the Time Navigator Filesystem application. Symbolic links are not followed, they are backed up as a link.
Note:
The MOUNT keyword cannot be used with the TREE keyword, but is compatible with EXEC and INFO.
Example
MOUNT keyword
DIR "Mounted files" ( EXEC "/DT/DEV/dev/rks/testlist/test_exec.sh", MOUNT "/DT/DEV/dev/rks/testdir" )
NOSNAP
This keyword is used only when performing snapshot of the List application. When the List application is set to snapshot a volume, the NOSNAP keyword can be used to prevent the snapshot of a level 1 directory within that volume. A level 1 directory is a directory located just below the root of the List application, as defined in the List file. Example NOSNAP keyword
DIR "My Dir" (TREE "/usr/localuser" NOSNAP) DIR "My second Dir" (MOUNT "/usr/tmp")
In this example, the "My Dir" directory is going to be backed up on tape while the "My second Dir" directory is going to be snapshotted.
Chapter 18
List Application
599
PIPE PIPE "pipe_name" (GENBY|USEDBY exec_path) The PIPE keyword allows to back up a dump via a named pipe. The GENBY option specifies that the pipe is created by the script or the program specified by exec_path. The USEDBY option specifies that the pipe is created by the List application. The path of the script or program (exec_path) corresponds to the path of the script or
program that is run to dump data into the pipe. The script must take into account the following parameters generated by the List application: the named pipe path, the operation type (backup or restore) and the phase type (incremental or full).
Note:
If the GENBY option is used, the TINA_AML_IO_TIMEOUT environment variable can be set to specify a timeout allowing an external program to create the pipe.
For more information on environment variables, see Environment Variables, page 607. Example PIPE Keyword
DIR "First Directory" (
PIPE "Pipe_A" ( USEDBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" ) PIPE "Pipe_B" ( GENBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" )
Example
Executable script called by the PIPE keyword

#!/bin/sh # This script does not create a pipe, # so it must be used with the keyword USEDBY. case "$2" in '-backup') # Create the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Backup data to $1" sleep 5 echo "Silly Data" > $1 ;; '-restore') # Restore the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity acct -text "Restore data from $1 to /tmp/test_pipe_$$" sleep 5 cat $1 > /tmp/test_pipe_$$ ;; *) $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -severity error "Usage: $0 abs_pipe [ -backup [ -full | -incr ] | restore ]" exit 100 ;; esac
600
exit 0
Example
Executable script called by the PIPE keyword, using the TINA_CATALOG and TINA_AML_FOLDER variables See Environment Variables, page 607 for a complete description of the TINA_CATALOG and TINA_AML_FOLDER variables.
:::::::::::::: test_pipe.sh :::::::::::::: #!/bin/sh # This script does not create a pipe, # so it must be used with the keyword USEDBY.
case "$2" in '-backup') # Create the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity acct -text "Backup data to $1 in $TINA_AML_FOLDER" sleep 5 echo "Silly Data" > $1 ;; '-restore') # Restore the data $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity acct -text "Restore data from $1 in $TINA_AML_FOLDER to /tmp/test_pipe_$$" sleep 5 cat $1 > /tmp/test_pipe_$$ ;; *) $TINA_HOME/Bin/tina_alarm -catalog $TINA_CATALOG -severity error "Usage: $0 abs_pipe [ -backup [ -full | -incr ] | -restore ]" exit 100 ;; esac
exit 0
TREE DIR name (TREE path) The TREE keyword causes a gutter type meta-directory to be recursively extended
downwards if it contains sub-directories thus enabling the backup of a tree of files and directories, specifying only one gutter physical path.
Note:
Only regular files are backed up with the TREE keyword. Symbolink links are followed to their final destination and backed up as files. If you want to back up symbolic links as links and perform a file system like backup, use the MOUNT keyword instead of the TREE keyword.
Chapter 18
List Application
601
Example
TREE Keyword
DIR "First Directory" ( DIR "Rake Files" ( EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh", INFO " info" ( "Rake means one level only" ), "/home02/rks/testdir" ) DIR "Recursive files" ( EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh", INFO " info" ( "Recursive means all levels" ), TREE "/home02/rks/testdir" ) DIR "Specific Files" ( EXEC "/home02/rks/testsave/test_exec.sh", INFO " info" ( "Specific means named objects only" ), FILE ".script" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ), FILE ".doc" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/testdir2/testdir3/testdir4 /lindberg.doc" ), LINK ".link" ( "/home02/rks/testdir/.cshrc" ), ) )
Options The TREE keyword can also be used with the following options:
LEVEL n
This option specifies the number of subdirectory levels to display. If n is equal to 0, all subdirectories are displayed. If n is equal to 1, only one level of subdirectories is displayed, ...etc.
INCL special_characters Only the files matching the special_characters criteria are going to be
displayed. The syntax of the special characters is the same as the syntax used to filter backup selections. See Filter Syntax, page 347 for details.
EXCL special_characters All files matching the special_characters criteria are excluded from the
display. The syntax of the special characters is the same as the syntax used to filter backup selections. See Filter Syntax, page 347 for details. Example TREE Keyword with options
DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR DIR "dddd" ( "L0" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" LEVEL 0) "L1" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" LEVEL 1) "L2" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" LEVEL 2) "Inc1" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" INCL "*.c") "Inc2" (TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/a1" INCL "*.c*" EXCL "*.cat")
VERSION (optional) VERSION number The VERSION keyword is used to specify a version number for the List file. In case of
a conflict with the syntactic analyzer (most recent analyzer), a message is displayed in
602
the Time Navigator event file (Monitoring-Time Navigator Event Viewer menu in Time Navigator Administration Console to view events). Example VERSION Keyword
VERSION 1 If the List file is automatically created, it indicates that it is compliant with version 1
of the syntactic analyzer.

Note:
It is advised not to specify a version number in the List file, since the version number only makes sense when the List file is automatically created by an application.
# (optional) # comment The # keyword is used to specify a comment in the List file.
The comment must be entered after this keyword and ends at the end of the line (i.e., if the comment is entered on several lines, you must insert the # keyword on each line). Example # Keyword
# Backs up a system file FILE system ("c:\winnt\system32\ntio.sys") FILE automatically ( MYSELF ) FILE system ("c:\winnt\system.ini" ) FILE win ("c:\winnt\win.ini" ) DIR special (# backs up confidential data DIR confidential ("d:\private\secret") FILE key ("d:\private\key.txt") ) INCLUDE ("e:\list\add_list.txt") Backs up the following objects:
The system.ini file. The win.ini file. The key.txt file. The List file specified by the MYSELF keyword. The contents of the directory d:\private\secret. The contents of the List file e:\list\add_list.txt specified by the INCLUDE keyword.
Chapter 18
List Application
603
For an example of how a List application is represented in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager file tree, see Using Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, page 614.
WAIT
The WAIT keyword implements a synchronization point. The synchronization point can be useful when you perform parallel backups of the List Application. It is an option of the DIR keyword. When Time Navigator encounters a meta-directory with a WAIT keyword, it waits until all the meta-directory's children and brothers have finished their backup, and then continue the navigation in the tree for other backups. Example WAIT keyword
DIR "First Directory" ( FILE "Sample" ("/etc/services") DIR "Dir2" ( TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/FF/Src") DIR "Dir3" ( TREE "/DT/DEV/people/nko/AA/Src") WAIT ) DIR "Second Directory" ( FILE "Me" (MYSELF) FILE "Host" ("/etc/hosts") LINK "Link" ("/DT/DEV/people/nko/.kshrc")
Creating a dynamic List file

Using the INCLUDE keyword presented above, you can define a dynamic List file. In that case, the process you specify with the keyword is run prior to each backup performed by the List application. This feature is very useful if the structure of the backed up data changes frequently or if you need to perform a specific action prior to the backup. See Using the List Application to back up a MYSQL database, page 624 for an example of using a dynamic List file.
604
Backup
The List Application is managed by Time Navigator in the same way as other applications and hosts. You must create at least one backup strategy and one backup selection to back up a List application automatically. You can perform full and/or incremental backups of the application. This section deals with the List application configuration and details the steps to follow to set up an automatic backup.
Configuring Backups
The procedure below is performed using Time Navigator Administration Console menus: 1. 2. 3. 4. Create a List type application. Enable the application. Create or edit a media pool. Create a standard backup strategy.
Note:
If you want to perform parallel backups set the parallelism to at least 2, in the Advanced tab of the New Strategy window.
5.
Create a backup selection if the default backup selection is not suitable.

Note:
If you want to perform parallel backups, create at least two backup selections and check the Parallelized option in the Properties tab of the Define Backup Selection window.
Note:
All these procedures are discussed at length in previous chapters. Step 1 is detailed below and additional information concerning the backup selection is provided as well.
Creating a List Application

You must define a List type application using Time Navigator Administration Console.
Chapter 18
List Application
605
To create a List type application
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select a host in the Network area. An application is always associated with a host. Choose Platform-New-Application. The list of the applications supported by Time Navigator appears. Select the List application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application window appears. Edit the fields of this window as described in the following section, List Application Creation Parameters, page 39.
5.
Define the source List file associated with the application:
Either by entering the absolute path of the file in the List File textbox, or by clicking on Browse to select it . Or by defining the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable in the Environment Variables area. If a List file is defined at both locations, Time Navigator will take into account the List file specified in the List File textbox.
Note:
To add an environment variable, click on Add in the Environment Variables area. The Edit Environment Variable window appears. Enter the environment variable name
606
in the Name textbox and the environment variable value in the Value textbox then click on OK. You can edit or delete an environment variable using the Edit and Remove buttons.
Note:
Environment variables can also be set in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. You do not need to enter the variable name. See Environment Variables, page 607 for a list of all available environment variables.
6. 7.
Click on OK to validate the operation. Right click on the List application icon you have just created and select Enable to enable the application.
Tip:
If you have a lot of applications to enable, use the Platform-Use-EnableApplication menu that allows for multiple application selection.
Once the List application has been declared in Time Navigator Administration Console, you must proceed as follows:
Logically arrange the objects to be backed up in the application folder. Define the List file(s) associated with the application by specifying the paths of the objects to be backed up. Configure the application backup (see Backup Selection, page 611).
For more information on the List file syntax, see List File Syntax, page 591.
List Application Creation Parameters

Host Name: Name of the host to which the application is linked. It appears dimmed and
cannot be modified.
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. The application name can
be edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.

Warning:
Chapter 18
List Application
607
List File: Absolute path of the List file associated with the application.
Note:
The List file can be defined using either the List File textbox, or the
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE environment variable. If a List file is defined at
both locations, Time Navigator will take into account the List file specified in the List File textbox.
User Name: Name of the user who has access to the application. Password: Allows to provide a password and confirm it. Snapshot Type: Name of the available snapshot technologies. Configuration: Click on this button to configure the selected snapshot technology.
Environment Variables
Environment Variable
TINA_AML_DEST_FILE
Description
Possible Values [default]
Status
Optional
Absolute path of an App metaAccess Path language text file defining the destination tree with the absolute paths to be used for a restore operation. If this variable is not set, objects are restored according to the value of the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE variable. If the source text file is not found, objects are restored to their original address. Timeout allowing an external program to create the pipe. Integer in seconds [120] The maximum value is one day.
TINA_AML_IO_TIMEOUT
Optional
TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE
Absolute path of an App metaAccess Path language text file defining the source tree with the absolute paths to be used for its backup.
Optional
608
TINA_CATALOG
Description
Status
Automatically set by Time Navigator
Specifies the name of the catalog String the List application will be backed up to or restored from. This variable can be used in a script (see EXEC, page 593 and PIPE, page 599 for sample scripts). Specifies the full name of the List String application as defined in Time Navigator Administration Console. This variable can be used in a script (see EXEC, page 593 and PIPE, page 599 for sample scripts). Note: TINA_AML_FOLDER contains the "fully qualified" name of the APPL object, starting with appl., as required by the -folder or -folder_dest parameters of the tina_restore command.
TINA_AML_FOLDER
Automatically set by Time Navigator
Editing Environment Variables

You can edit environment variables from the Platform-Properties menu in Time Navigator Administration Console. The environment is updated when re-opening Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. Environment variables can also be edited via Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager. Open the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager corresponding to the application that you need to edit variables for. Open the meta-tree and the Information directory. A list of Information icons appears displaying all the variables that are available for the application. The variables are represented in the following format:
VARIABLE_NAME = value
The color bar on the left identifies the variable status:

Color Status
Chapter 18
List Application
609
Gray
Variable not defined by the user: - Variable not set in the environment -or- Variable set by default, without the user defining it Variable set in the environment - Optional variable whose value is incorrect -or- Variable defined by the user while not supported by Time Navigator Mandatory variable whose value is incorrect
Green Orange
Red
Note
For some applications, it is mandatory to edit the TINA_APP_LIB_PATH environment variable. The environment variable must be edited via the Time Navigator Administration Console when creating the application in Time Navigator. This variable is needed for Time Navigator to connect to the application.
Editing an environment variable in the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager
1.
Make sure that the user connected to the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager is granted the General Tasks and Platforms rights (Administration tab in the Access Control window). For more information on users access rights, see the Time Navigator Administration Guide. Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Properties. The Properties window appears. Add or modify the value of the variable. Click on OK to immediately update the environment. The new value is displayed in the tree.
2. 3. 4.
If you assign an incorrect value to a variable, a red or orange icon (depending on the severity) appears in the tree, followed by an error message. You can still access the list of variables and modify the incorrect value with the procedure above.
Information on environment variables
Select the variable and choose Tree-Selection-Help to display information about the variable. The Help window contains the variable description, the possible values and the default value, if any.
610
Note
It is possible to copy and paste text from the Help window to the Properties window.
Chapter 18
List Application
611
Backup Selection
By default, a backup selection is automatically set on the root meta-directory of the file tree. This allows you to gather objects from different locations in order to back them up easily with the List application. This default backup selection has the following settings:
It is associated with all the backup strategies No filter is set No time phase is excluded
The data format is compressed but not encoded In Time Navigator file tree, the backup selection is represented by a small green ball located on the left of the icon of an application List directory.
The List application allows for a more flexible backup administration. Depending on backup requirements, you can also define backup selections on different locations in the application folder, as in a file system.
612
Restore
The List application allows you to:
Restore objects located in various locations on a same machine in a simple and quick way. Restore objects in a different location from the source location (standard restore) or on another machine with a different disk configuration (cross-restore). This feature is called "relocation".
Restore with Relocation

In order to relocate the List application objects, you must use the TINA_AML_DEST_FILE environment variable. All the links representing the object restore addresses are relocated to new values. Objects whose destination is not specified are restored into a temporary directory. If this variable is not defined, the object restore addresses will be those stored in the catalog without using the List file. The TINA_AML_DEST_FILE file must have:
The same syntax than the source list file The same tree structure
The only difference between the source list file (TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE) and the destination list file (TINA_AML_DEST_FILE) is the physical path location. Example TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE Source file:
DIR "Document" ( FILE "File" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/Documents/my_document.doc" ) )
DIR "Program Files" ( DIR "Atempo" ( DIR "tina_server" ( DIR "File_lists" ( DIR "test" ( FILE "test.txt" ("c:\Program Files Atempo\tina_server\File_lists\test\test.txt") ) )
Chapter 18
List Application
613
) ) )
Example
TINA_AML_DEST_FILE Destination file:
DIR "Document" ( FILE "File" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/Documents/Restore/my_document.doc" ) )
DIR "Program Files" ( DIR "Atempo" ( DIR "tina_server" ( DIR "File_lists" ( DIR "test" ( FILE "test.txt" ("c:\Program Files Atempo\tina_server\File_lists\test\restore\test.txt") ) ) ) ) )
When you open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, the following information is displayed if you defined the TINA_AML_DEST_FILE: "Alternate restore destination in force via %TINA_AML_DEST_FILE%"
614
Note:
Between Time Navigator versions 3.6 and 3.7.0.2, a relocation method was available provided that all links were defined with environment variables representing the mount points before the backup operation. This method is no longer supported as of version 3.7.0.3. You must now use the TINA_AML_DEST_FILE environment variable.
For more information on environment variables, see Environment Variables, page 607. For more information about restore procedures, see the Time Navigator Restore Guide.
Using Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager

File Tree
Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager for the List application includes a file tree enabling you to view the platform status at any given time (present or past). In the following example, a demo.txt List file is associated with the Demo list application. It backs up different objects (directories and files), together with another file_list2.txt (INCLUDE keyword) List file. It also backs up the List file itself (MYSELF keyword). Example Syntax of the demo.txt List File
# Example of the List file syntax
$ cat demo.txt DIR "First Directory" (
Chapter 18
List Application
615
EXEC INFO FILE PIPE PIPE
"/Users/Demo/mac/exec_script.sh" "Info 1" ("Objects example") "Me" (MYSELF) "Pipe A" ( USEDBY "/Users/Demo/mac/pipe_script.sh") "Pipe B" ( GENBY "/Users/Demo/mac/pipe_script.sh")
) # Include a list file INCLUDE ( "/Users/Demo/mac/file_list2.txt")
$ cat demo.txt DIR "First Directory" ( EXEC "/aml/unix/exec_script.sh" INFO "Info 1" ("Objects example") FILE "File List" (MYSELF) FILE "Services File" ("/etc/services") PIPE "Pipe A" ( USEDBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" ) PIPE "Pipe B" ( GENBY "/aml/unix/pipe_script.sh" ) ) # Includes a List file INCLUDE ("/tmp/file_list2.txt")
$ cat demo.txt DIR "First Directory" ( EXEC "g:\AppList\win32\exec_script.bat" INFO "Info 1" ("Objects example") FILE "File List" (MYSELF) FILE "Services File" ("C:\WINNT\system32\drivers\etc\services") PIPE "Pipe A" (USEDBY "g:\AppList\win32\pipe_script.bat") PIPE "Pipe B" (GENBY "g:\AppList\win32\pipe_script.bat") ) # Includes a List file
INCLUDE ( "c:\temp\file_list2.txt" )
Example
Syntax of the file_list2.txt List File
# List File DIR "Second Directory" ( INFO "Info 2" ("Directories examples") DIR "Library - 1" ( TREE "/Library") DIR "Library - 2" ("/Users/Demo/Library") )
# List File
DIR "Second Directory" ( INFO "Info 2" ("Directories example") DIR "Librairies X11 - 1" ("/usr/X11R6/lib/X11") DIR "Librairies X11 - 2" (TREE "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11")
)
616
# List File
DIR "Second Directory" ( INFO "Info 2" ("Directories example") DIR "Perl site libs - 1" ("C:\Perl\site\lib") DIR "Perl site libs - 2" ( TREE "C:\Perl\site\lib") )
For more information on the List file syntax, see List File Syntax, page 591. The Demo list application is represented in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager by the following file tree:
The object representation of the Demo list application in the file tree is explained in
Chapter 18
List Application
617
the following table..

Icon Represents the List object
Closed directory
Open directory
Gutter
File
File physical link
Information
Pipe
"Exec"
The location of the object physical link in the file tree complies with the following rule: the objects physical link appears directly below the object.
Note:
The directory gutter is a destination meta-link for all the objects in the directory.
Note:
Since objects in the file tree are classified in alphabetical order, a directory gutter may not appear directly below the directory (ex: a file name beginning with a space could be located before the directory gutter).
618
Object Information
Information on objects can be displayed by choosing Tree-Selection-Contents or TreeSelection-Versions. In the Directory Contents window, the file physical link appears with the file name followed by the extension: .00.
For more information about the Tree-Selection menu, see the Time Navigator Restore Guide.
Restore Methods
Restoring objects belonging to the List application is performed in the same way as Time Navigator standard objects. The only difference occurs when you select the objects to be restored. The selection depends on the object type:
If the file is created with the FILE keyword, you must select the file and its physical link.
If the file is created with the DIR keyword, you must select the gutter of the directory into which the file is located. Two methods can be used to restore objects:

The time navigation period.
Synchronization. Whatever the method chosen, a basic rule must be followed when selecting the objects to be restored: Select an object and a destination, i.e its physical link.
Chapter 18
List Application
619
Time Navigation Period

The time navigation period is used to show and restore a disappeared file in a given time interval.
To restore objects with a time navigation period
1.
Select a time period for showing deleted files in the lower part of the
620
Examples
This section presents an example of the List application. This application type can be used to perform cold backups of an Oracle database, to back up the critical files of an operating system (ex: passwd under Unix, win.ini under Windows 2000/2003), to perform a raw device backup etc.
List File Examples

Example Syntax of a List file to back up Raw devices on Windows 2000
DIR "dump_disk" ( DIR "disk_d" ( FILE "dump_d" ("\\.\d:") ) DIR "disk_g" ( FILE "dump_g" ("\\.\g:") ) )
Examples List File Syntax
# Generated by Time Navigator Enterprise Edition List 5.0.0.2., App 4.0.4, Dynamic "", Compil\'e Jun 30 2005 VERSION 6 DIR "TIGER10G" ( DIR "TABLESPACES" ( DIR "SYSTEM" ( FILE "file0001.dbf" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/ TIGER10G/system01.dbf" ) ), DIR "UNDOTBS1" ( FILE "file0002.dbf" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/ TIGER10G/undotbs01.dbf" ) ), DIR "SYSAUX" ( FILE "file0003.dbf" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/ TIGER10G/sysaux01.dbf" ) ), DIR "USERS" ( FILE "file0004.dbf" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/ TIGER10G/users01.dbf" ) ), DIR "TEMP" ( LINK "tempfile0001" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/ TIGER10G/temp01.dbf" SIZE 20488K ) ) ), DIR "_ARCHIVE_LOGS" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/archives/" ), DIR "_CONTROL_FILES" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/admin/TIGER10G/udump/" , FILE "control.ctl" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/control01.ctl" , "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/control02.ctl" ,
Chapter 18
List Application
621
"/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/control03.ctl" ), FILE "control.sql" ( ) ), DIR "_REDO_LOGS" ( FILE "GROUP_01" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/redo01.log" ), FILE "GROUP_02" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/redo02.log" ), FILE "GROUP_03" ( "/Volumes/Home/Applis/oracle/product/oradata/TIGER10G/redo03.log" ) ) )
The following example allows you to perform cold backups of an Oracle database. The tina_cold_DB73.txt List file is associated with the charlie_o73_cold List application and backs up the following objects:
Data files (tablespaces and datafiles). Logs (archive_logs). Control files (control files). Log files (redo_log files).
# Generated by Time Navigator

VERSION 2 DIR "DB73" ( DIR "TABLESPACES" ( DIR "RBS" ( FILE "file0002.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/rbs01.dbf" ) ), DIR "SYSTEM" ( FILE "file0001.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/system01.dbf" ) ), DIR "TEMP" ( FILE "file0003.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/temp01.dbf" ) ), DIR "TOOLS" ( FILE "file0004.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/tools01.dbf" ) ), DIR "USERS" ( FILE "file0005.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/users01.dbf" ), FILE "file0006.dbf" ( "/home04/oradata/DB73/users03.dbf" ), FILE "file0007.dbf" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/users02.dbf" ) ) ), DIR "_ARCHIVE_LOGS" ( "/export/home/oracle/admin/DB73/arch/" ), DIR "_CONTROL_FILES" ( FILE "control.ctl" ( "/home01/oradata/DB73/control01.ctl" , "/home02/oradata/DB73/control02.ctl" , "/home03/oradata/DB73/control03.ctl" ), FILE "control.sql" ( ) ), DIR "_REDO_LOGS" ( FILE "GROUP 02" (
622
"/export/home/oradata/DB73/redoDB7302.log" , "/home04/oradata/DB73/redoDB7302.log" ), FILE "GROUP 03" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/redoDB7303.log" , "/home04/oradata/DB73/redoDB7303.log" ), FILE "GROUP 01" ( "/export/home/oradata/DB73/redoDB7301.log" , "/home04/oradata/DB73/redoDB7301.log" ) ) )
The following example allows you to perform cold backups of an Oracle database.The tina_cold_ora92.txt List file is associated with the morpheus.ora92.cold List application and backs up the following objects:
Data files (tablespaces and datafiles). Logs (archive_logs). Control files (control files). Log files (redo_log files).
# Generated by Time Navigator\-r List 4.0.0., App 3.2.3, Dynamic "i386_WinNTV500", Compiled Jan 15 2005 VERSION 4 DIR "ORA92" ( DIR "TABLESPACES" ( DIR "DRSYS" ( FILE "file0004.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\DRSYS01.DBF" ) ), DIR "EXAMPLE" ( FILE "file0005.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\EXAMPLE01.DBF" ) ), DIR "INDX" ( FILE "file0006.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\INDX01.DBF" ) ), DIR "SYSTEM" ( FILE "file0001.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\SYSTEM01.DBF" ) ), DIR "TEMP" ( LINK "tempfile0001" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\TEMP01.DBF" SIZE 40968K ) ), DIR "TOOLS" ( FILE "file0008.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\TOOLS01.DBF" ) ), DIR "UNDOTBS1" ( FILE "file0002.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\UNDOTBS01.DBF" ) ), DIR "USERS" ( FILE "file0009.dbf" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\USERS01.DBF" ) ) ), DIR "_ARCHIVE_LOGS" ( "F:\oracle\oradata\ora92\archive\" ), DIR "_CONTROL_FILES" ( FILE "control.ctl" ( "F:\oracle\oradata\ORA92\control01.ctl" ,
Chapter 18
List Application
623
"F:\oracle\oradata\ORA92\control02.ctl" , "F:\oracle\oradata\ORA92\control03.ctl" ), FILE "control.sql" ( ) ), DIR "_REDO_LOGS" ( FILE "GROUP 03" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\REDO03.LOG" ), FILE "GROUP 01" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\REDO01.LOG" ), FILE "GROUP 02" ( "F:\ORACLE\ORADATA\ORA92\REDO02.LOG" ) ) )
Graphical Representation
The List application is represented graphically by the following file tree in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager:
The TABLESPACES directory contains Oracle data files. The _ARCHIVE_LOGS directory contains Oracle logs. The _CONTROL_FILES directory contains three versions of the same file. The _REDO_LOGS directory contains two versions for each of the three files. This list is automatically generated by Time Navigator for Oracle each time a database hot backup or replication is performed.
Note:
624
Using the List Application to back up a MYSQL database

In the following example, the combined use of the keywords INCLUDE, GENBY, PIPE and USEDBY allows to dynamically generate a list file to back up a MYSQL database.
Note:
For additional information concerning the backup and restore of MYSQL databases with Time Navigator, contact Atempos Professional Services: write to proserv@atempo.com or visit us at http://www.atempo.com/support/ pro_services.php.
The List file name and path defined via the TINA_AML_SOURCE_FILE variable are:
E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\AppGeneratorFullScript.txt
The List File contents is as follows:

INCLUDE ("E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\gentreeFullScript.lst" GENBY "E:\MySqlDev\V1b\MySql1bFullScript.exe")
Chapter 18
List Application
625
The script MySql1bFullScript.exe generates the following file:

# Generated by : E:\MySqlDev\V1b\MySql1bFullScript.exe - version 1.35 # Last update : Wed Jul 20 14:35:17 2005 # # (c) PTH tools VERSION 5.0 DIR "DataBase : golf "( PIPE "#cards" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfcards.cmd" ) PIPE "#columns_priv" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRestgolfcolumns_priv.cmd" ) PIPE "#db" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfdb.cmd" ) PIPE "#func" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golffunc.cmd" ) PIPE "#golfs" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfgolfs.cmd" ) PIPE "#host" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfhost.cmd" ) PIPE "#parcours" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfparcours.cmd" ) PIPE "#photo01" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfphoto01.cmd" ) PIPE "#scores" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfscores.cmd" ) PIPE "#tables_priv" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golftables_priv.cmd" ) PIPE "#user" ( USEDBY "E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\BckRest-golfuser.cmd" )
The script MySql1bFullScript.exe also generates a cmd file for each table found in the database, as follows:
rem Windows version rem SHELL et WIN32 rem rem if "%2"=="-backup" goto backup if "%2"=="-restore" goto resto :backup C:\MySql4.1\bin\mysqldump.exe golf user >> %1 goto fin :resto type %1 > E:\MySqlDev\Scripts\resto\golf_user3536.sql goto fin :fin exit 0
626
To view the contents of the List application, open the Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager:
627
C H A P T E R
19
Mapped Network Drives
19
Time Navigator allows you to back up, archive or restore Windows 2000/2003 mapped network drives using the Net Disk Application (page 627), if the drives are located in the same domain as the machine they are mapped onto. Otherwise, use the Backing up and Restoring a Mapped Network Drive without the Net Disk Application procedure (page 633). A network drive is a directory or drive of a remote machine (often used as a file server) that can be mapped onto any machine in the network. In order to access the drive on a local machine, a user must have the necessary permissions on the remote machine.
Net Disk Application

Use the Net Disk application to back up, archive or restore Windows 2000/2003 mapped network drives located in the same domain as the machine they are mapped onto.
Note:
Do not confuse network drives mapped by the Net Disk application with network drives mapped by the Windows Explorer (with a letter) in the current session. The basic notion may be the same, but the environments are distinct from one another. As an illustration, it is perfectly possible to back up network disks with the Net Disk application without being logged into them on the Windows server.
Backup
Applications are managed by Time Navigator in the same way as hosts. You must create at least one backup strategy and one backup selection to back up a Net Disk application automatically. You can perform full and/or incremental backups of the application.
628
Configuring Backups
The list below details the steps for setting up an automatic backup. The procedures below are performed using Time Navigator Administration Console menus. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Note:
Create a Net Disk application. Enable the Net Disk application. Create or edit a media pool. Create a backup strategy. Create a backup selection. All these procedures are discussed at length in previous chapters. See Ejecting a Media from a Drive, page 188, and Automatic Backup Configuration, page 285. Steps 1 and 2 are detailed below and additional information concerning the backup selection is provided as well.
Creating the Application
Net Disk applications are defined in Time Navigator Administration Console.

To create a Net Disk application
1. 2. 3. 4.
In the Network area, select the host for which you want to back up network drives. An application is always associated with a host. Choose Platform-New-Application. The list of the applications supported by Time Navigator appears. Select the Net Disk application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application window appears. Edit the fields of the window as described in the following section, Net Disk Application Creation Parameters, page 629.
Chapter 19
629
5. 6.
Click on OK to validate. Right click on the Net Disk application icon you have just created and select Enable to enable the application.
Tip;
If you have a lot of applications to enable, it is recommended to use the

Platform-Use-Enable-Application menu because it allows for application
multiple selection.
Net Disk Application Creation Parameters

Host Name: Name of the host the application is connected to. Click on Host Name to select
another host.
630
Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. The application name can
be edited at a later date if needed without losing backups.

Warning:
Tip:
It could be convenient to have the application icon displayed next to its host. As the objects in the Network area appear in alphabetical order, you should start the application name with the name of the host and add a suffix. For instance, if your Net Disk application is installed on the aria host, the name of the application could be aria.netdisk.
Server: Name of the remote machine where the mapped drives are located. User Name: Name of the local machine user who has access to the mapped network drives.
Note:
The user of the local machine must be known to the operating system of the remote machine. To ensure full access when backing up mapped network drives, it is recommended that the user be an administrator of the domain where the mapped network drives are located.
Password: Allows to provide a password and confirm it.
TINA_APP_LIB_PATH
Description
Path. Automatically set to
libtina_ndk.dll
Status
Specifies the absolute or relative path of Mandatory the Time Navigator Net Disk application dynamic library:
%TINA_HOME%\bin\libtina_ndk.dll
Chapter 19
631
Backup Selection
In the Time Navigator file tree, the backup selection is represented by a small green ball located on the left of the icon of a Net Disk application object.
The Net Disk application offers a flexible backup administration of mapped network drives on Windows 2000/2003 systems. Depending on backup requirements, you can also define backup selections at different locations within the application folder, at the machines level, at the mapped network drives level and even within the mapped network drives. The Net Disk application also supports synthetic backups.
Note
Hidden drives, such as C$, do not appear in the Net Disk application file tree and cannot be backed up by the Net Disk application.
Parallel Backup
The Net Disk application supports parallel backup. Time Navigator Parallel Backup and Restore is a functionality that increases system performance by allowing users to split backup jobs into several processes that can run simultaneously. The user must select parallelism points in Time Navigator and set the maximum number of streams in the strategy (parallelism index). When Time Navigator encounters such a point during backup, it spawns a process to back up the node and its sons.
To configure parallel backups:
632
1.
After creating a Net Disk Application, set parallel backup selections on directories on the Net Disk tree in Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager (the Properties Tab of the Define Backup Selection window). Define a strategy with a parallelism index equal to the number of drives (Advanced Tab of the Strategy Properties window). For the parallel backup mechanism to be visible, it is recommended to set an index greater than 2.
2.
Restore
The Net Disk application allows you to restore mapped network drives under Windows 2000/2003. You can restore objects that have disappeared during mishandling or a disk crash, but also restore objects as they were at a given date.
Note Note
The Net Disk application does not support parallel restore. To ensure full access when restoring mapped network drives, it is recommended that the user be an administrator of the domain where the mapped drives are located.
See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for more information about restore procedures.
Archiving
Mapped network drives can be archived through Time Navigator Archiving Server. See the Time Navigator Archiving Server Guide for more information about archiving procedures.
Chapter 19
633
Back up and Restore without the Net Disk Application

In order to back up, archive and restore network drives mapped on a Windows machine located in a different domain, you need to proceed as follows:
1. Tunables
Add the following five tunables in the parameters.txt file, located in the %TINA_Home%\Conf directory:

force_fixed_bad_remote_disk=yes archive_pre_processing archive_post_processing restore_pre_processing restore_post_processing
Note:
For backups, the pre and post processings are specified in the Strategy window, not via a tunable.
To mount and unmount the network drives before and after archiving or restoration, the pre-processing tunables must contain the path to a mount script, and the post-processing tunables the path to an unmount script. Following is an example of definition for these tunables:
parameter:archive_pre_processing=c:\tina\conf\backup_pre.bat parameter:archive_post_processing=c:\tina\conf\backup_post.bat parameter:restore_pre_processing=c:\tina\conf\restore_pre.bat parameter:restore_post_processing=c:\tina\conf\restore_post.bat
Warning: 2. Scripts
The script path must NOT contain any space.
The letter you use in the scripts to define the destination drive for the mapping must be different from the letter defining the source drive, and must not be already in use for anything else. For instance, if the drive you wish to back up is mapped on F:\, map it to R:\ in the scripts and make sure that R:\ is not used for anything else. Thus the Time Navigator mounting/unmounting activities will not interfere with your
634
normal use of the mapped drive. Following are two examples of the mount/unmount scripts called by the tunables.
Mount -------net use s: \\tetram\dkf winnt /user:administrator if %ErrorLevel% NEQ 0 goto ErrorS goto End :ErrorS c:\tina\bin\tina_alarm -text "Mount error \\tetram\dkf on s:" -severity major goto End :End Unmount --------net use s: /delete if %ErrorLevel% NEQ 0 goto ErrorS goto End :ErrorS c:\tina\bin\tina_alarm -text "Error cannot unmount s:" -severity minor goto End :End
3.
Filesystem Application
Create a Filesystem application in Time Navigator Administration Console on the host where the network drives are mapped. Use the Platform-New-Application menu. In the User field, enter the same user as the one declared in the mount/unmount scripts ("administrator" in the example above).
4. Backup Strategy
Create a strategy for the FileSystem application. In the Advanced tab, check the Go through Network FileSystems option and enter the path to a mount script in the Preprocessing field and the path to an unmount script in the Postprocessing field.
5. Backup Selection
To create the backup selection(s), map the network drive on the letter used in the scripts. Open Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager to view the drives in the file tree structure and set your backup selection(s). Unmap the drive.
Chapter 19
635
Archiving
Network drives can be archived using Time Navigator Archiving Server. See the Time Navigator Archiving Server guide for details.
636
637
C H A P T E R
20
20
Application Definition
The Filesystem application allows you to go beyond the maximum of four strategies that can be created for a host. A Filesystem application acts as a clone for a host, thus for each application created you can specify four additional strategies. In addition, the root directory of the Filesystem application can optionally be defined as an environment variable, and can be different from the root directory of the host with which the application is associated. In this case, using the Filesystem application allows you to dissociate data from its actual location on the network.
Benefits of defining the root directory of the Filesystem Application
If the directory composing the root of the Filesystem application backup selection is moved to a different location, only the value of the environment variable needs to be changed. No modification of the backup folder of the application is required. Thus the backup history of the backup selection is maintained, and you do not need to create a new backup selection. If you create several Filesystem applications associated with the same host, to back up directories located on separate disks, you are able to parallelize the backup of your host, thus improving backup performance.
Backup
To perform backups with a Filesystem application, configure Time Navigator following these steps: 1. 2. 3. Create and enable a Filesystem application. Create or edit a media pool. Create a backup strategy.
638
4.
Create a backup selection if the default backup selection at the root does not suit you.
Creating and Enabling a Filesystem Application

To create and enable a Filesystem application
1.
In the Network area of Time Navigator Administration Console, select the host for which you want to create a filesystem application.
Note:
If you intend to use the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR variable to specify the root of the application, make sure that the host you select allows you to access the entire file tree you intend to backup.
2. 3. 4.
Choose Platform-New-Application. The list of the applications supported by Time Navigator appears. Select the Filesystem application in the list, then click on OK. The New Application window appears. Edit the fields of this window as described in the following section, Filesystem Application Creation Parameters, page 39.
Chapter 20
639
5. 6.
Click on OK to validate. Right click on the Filesystem application icon you have just created and select Enable to enable the application.
Tip:
If you have a lot of applications to enable, it is recommended to use the

Platform-Use-Enable-Application menu because it allows for application
multiple selection.
Filesystem Application Creation Parameters

The Filesystem application allows you create a clone of the host to which the application is attached. This is very useful to create additional backup strategies for a host and eventually to organize data in a thematic way (ex: according to applications, departments, etc.).
Host Name: Name of the host to which the application is connected, with the .fs extension. Click on Host Name to select another host. Application Name: Name of the application you want to create. By default, the application is named <Host_Name>.fs and can be modified. The application name can be edited at
a later date if needed without losing backups.

Warning:
User Name: Name of the user who has access to the application.
Note:
On Unix platforms, if you intend to use the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR variable to specify the root directory of the Filesystem application and if that path includes a mount point to another host, make sure that you choose a user that has the permission to access both hosts.
Password: Allows to provide a password and confirm it. Snapshot Type: Name of the available snapshot technologies. Configuration: Click on this button to configure the selected snapshot technology.
640
Enter variables as needed, for instance, enter TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR in the Name textbox, and the path of the directory to be used as the root of the Filesystem application in the Value textbox. For instance:
/usr/people/rde /usr/people/rde
c:\usr\people\rde
TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR
Description
Specifies the access path of the directory to be used as the root of the Filesystem application. The value of the variable must be an existing directory. If the variable is not set, the root of the Filesystem application is the root of the host.
Status
Optional
Creating or Editing a Media Pool

You must have at least one media pool available to associate with your backup strategy. Your data will be written on media contained in the media pool designated in the backup strategy. To create or edit a media pool, see Ejecting a Media from a Drive, page 188.
Chapter 20
641
Creating a Backup Strategy

At least one backup strategy must be defined. The strategy determines how and when data should be backed up.
Warning:
On Unix platforms, if you are setting the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable to specify the path of the root directory, the Go through Network Filesystems option in the Advanced tab of the New Strategy window cannot be used.
Note:
If you want to perform parallel backups set the parallelism to at least 2, in the Advanced tab of the New Strategy window.
To create a backup strategy, see Creating a Backup Strategy, page 301.
Creating a Backup Selection

At least one backup selection must be defined. The backup selection determines what data should be backed up.
Note:
If you want to perform parallel backups, create at least two backup selections and check the Parallelized option in the Properties tab of the Define Backup Selection window.
If you are using the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable to specify the path of the root directory, you can also choose to set several backup selections on any sub-directories within the root directory.
Warning:
Once the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable is set, only local directories can be backed up. If your backup selection contains directories that are mounted or mapped onto other file systems they will not be backed up.
In the Time Navigator file tree, the backup selection is represented by a small green ball located on the left of the directory designated as a backup selection.
642
For details on how to create a backup selection, see Creating a Backup Selection, page 339.
Restore
Viewing the Application Contents
The Filesystem Application contains an Information meta-directory just below the root. This directory contains useful system and parameter information. It is visible within Time Navigator Restore & Archive Manager, and allows environment variables to be edited or unset in that interface, in addition to Time Navigator Administration Console. The information directory is backed up in the catalog so that settings at the moment of any previous backup can be seen. Time Navigator creates a gutter meta-directory when backing up the filesystem application. The gutter allows the creation of the directories specified in the destination path if they are missing when a restore is performed. The path of the gutter directory is based on the value of the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable.
Chapter 20
643
Information
Environment Variables Gutter
Restoring data
To restore data with the Filesystem application, proceed as with any other Time Navigator application. If you have set the TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR environment variable to perform backups, the variable will also determine where the data should be restored. A Filesystem application backed up on Unix or Mac OS X can be cross-restored to a Windows platform. To do so, first edit the Filesystem application via Time Navigator Administration Console (Patform-Properties menu) and remove any User and Password that may have been defined there. Both fields must remain blank to perform inter-system cross-restores. See the Time Navigator Restore Guide for more information concerning restore procedures.
Archiving
The Filsystem application can be archived through Time Navigator Archiving Server. See the Time Navigator Archiving Server Guide for more information about archiving procedures.
644
645
Appendix
Appendix 1: Advanced Library Properties

Standard Tab
Basic properties are available for all libraries. They concern Time Navigator performance, but will not cause any major disruption if improperly set.
Property
Use Barcodes Dismount Media after Use
Description
Indicates that the library is able to handle a barcode reader. Does not mean that the library actually contains a barcode reader. Usually Time Navigator leaves cartridges inside the drive after an operation has been performed. If this property is selected, cartridges will be systematically put back in their original slots once a job is completed. This property is required for libraries that unload drives upon opening the library door. Enables Time Navigator Library Sharing Manager use and the shared drive allocation and release. Activates logs if the Shared Library property is enabled. Indicates that a slot has been reserved in the library for the cleaning cartridge. Number of the slot reserved for the cleaning cartridge (0 to n). Number of cleanings already performed. Maximum number of cleanings a cleaning cartridge can perform. Retrieves the default parameters values. Gives you a code corresponding to your library configuration. This code can be useful for the Technical Support to help you configure the library parameters.
Shared Library Activate Drives Allocation Log Cleaning Slot Reserved Slots Performed Cleanings Autorized Cleanings Default Configuration Button Code Button
646
Generic Tab
Generic properties concern the librarys handling and behavioral logic.
Warning:
If misused, these properties can prevent the library from working properly.
Property
Media is ejected when Power is switched on Use Slot Access Status
Description
Enables the automatic remounting of a cartridge in a drive. To be used for certain library types which eject cartridges when the power is turned on. Example : MP Magstar. When a move request is initiated, Time Navigator verifies both the full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a slot. For libraries not returning reliable information on accessible/nonaccessible status, the Access status slot is not verified, and this property is unselected. This property is only used for Exabyte full size drives. When a drive is unloaded, this property allows you to put the cartridge back in its original slot. This property is required for autoloaders such as PowerStore L200. Otherwise, the request is rejected and deemed illegal. When a move request involving mailbox slots is initiated, Time Navigator verifies the full/empty status and the accessible/ non-accessible status. Do not select this property if libraries do not return reliable information on accessible/non-accessible status.The mailbox slots access status will not be verified. This property is used when a library cannot perform the Init Element Status (IES, library inventory) while a cartridge is mounted in a drive. Checking this property will empty all drives before the IES and replace the cartridges in the drives after the IES. Before mounting a cleaning cartridge in a drive, Time Navigator verifies both the full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a drive. For libraries not returning a reliable accessible/ non-accessible status information, the drive Access status in not being verified, this property is unselected. Once a cleaning has been performed, Time Navigator verifies both the full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a drive. For libraries not returning reliable information on accessible/ non-accessible status, the Access status slot is not verified, and this property is unselected
Use Drive Except Status Store Media in Initial Slot Source
Reliable Mailbox Status
Unload Library Drives before performing IES
Use Drive Access Status before Cleaning
Check Drive Status after Cleaning
Appendix
647
Property
No Request to move Media after Cleaning
Description
After a cleaning, Time Navigator systematically removes the cleaning cartridge and puts it back into the cleaning slot. However, some libraries have this function built-in. This property is designed to avoid errors due to trying to move the cleaning cartridge twice. This property is required for a library without a picker. It applies especially to autoloaders. Activates cartridge unloading and ejection prior to moving cartridge to a slot (most cases). Indicates that the barcode reader can read a barcode when a cartridge is inside a drive. Used mostly for DLT. For drives having a shutter-like door, it can happen that a cartridge located inside is ignored after reinitialization. This property allows for a direct drive inquiry, especially for libraries that do not use a serial line to communicate with drives. Indicates whether or not the library supports the "IES with Range" SCSI command. Retrieves the default parameters values. Gives you a code corresponding to your library configuration. This code can be useful for the Technical Support to help you configure the library properties.
Picker Address is always 0 Eject Media before Moving Can Read Barcode in Drive Check media in drive on Except status
IES with Range SCSI Command Support Default Configuration Button Code Button
Specific Tab
Specific properties concern library handling and behavior logic with a SCSI dimension.
Warning:
If misused, these properties can prevent the library from working properly and can force the administrator to restart the machine connected to the library.
Property
Manage Pack Use "Position To Element" before "Move Medium"
Description
For certain ADIC libraries, this property controls the loading/ unloading of the library silo. Positions the slot in front of the drive to move a cartridge. Applies to library with a moving silo instead of a picker. Certain ADIC only.
648
Property
Read Barcode after "Move Medium" from Drive or Mailbox
Description
Cartridge operations do not necessarily warrant a barcode rereading. This property forces a cartridge barcode reading after a move from a drive or mailbox to a slot. This property requires Init Element Status with Range (IESR) support. With an ATL 2640, accessing the mailbox requires the activation of a switch. ATL 2640 only. The Init Element Status with Range (IESR) is used to perform the inventory when the Init Element Status (IES) is unusable. 3575 only. To prevent rejection of the SCSI command, a barcode reading is performed even if the Init Element Status (IES) has not required it. 7331 only. The library geometry is usually derived from information provided by the library. This property sets the number of mailboxes to 0. Useful for some ADIC libraries that use their silos as a mailboxes. ADIC only. The library geometry is usually derived from information provided by the library. With this property, the presence of a mailbox is based on a bit (STIE). Useful for the Bruce Hill Q serie that consider its packs as mailboxes. Bruce Hill Q serie only. The slot or picker status is provided by the library. This property resets the status since the library information is incorrect. Some ADIC only. Indicates that the library is able to flip cartridges. Magneto-optical drives only. When a move request is initiated, Time Navigator verifies both the full/empty status and the accessible/non-accessible status of a drive. For libraries not returning reliable information on accessible/nonaccessible status, the Access status slot is not verified, and this property is unselected. (Magneto-optical drives only).
Use "Ready Inport" to manage the mailbox Use "Init Element Status With Range" Force Barcode Reading on "Init Element Status" Discard Mailbox Detection
Use "Store To Import/Export" Bit to detect Mailbox
Reset Incorrect Status for Slot and Picker Able to Flip Media Use Drive Access Status
No IES Command if a Drive is Full This property concerns Exabyte EZ17 libraries only. It prevents IES commands from being sent to the library. VTL only: Use "info" file Indicates that the virtual library content comes from the
vtl_info.txt configuration file.
Applies to virtual libraries (VTL) only.
Appendix
649
Property
VTL only: Self Correcting Drive Status
Description
If there is a conflict between the library and a drive concerning the drive empty/full status, the library status prevails unless this property is activated. Applies to virtual libraries (VTL) only. For libraries with removable mailboxes, this property prevents any cartridge move order from being issued while the mailbox contents are being scanned. Allows the library to scan all mailbox slots in order to update their contents, if the status of the slot has become questionable. Retrieves the default parameters values. Gives you a code corresponding to your library configuration. This code can be useful for the Technical Support to help you configure the library properties.
Wait for End of Mailbox Scanning
Scan mailbox on exception Default Configuration Button Code Button
Geometry Tab
The geometry properties define the library screen appearance in Time Navigator Library Manager.
Property
Slot 1 Position
Description
Same line as Slot 0: positions slot 1 on the same line as slot 0 (horizontally). Same column as Slot 0: positions slot 1 on the same column as slot 0 (vertically). Number of columns or lines displayed in the Time Navigator Library Manager, according to the Slot 1 Position property. Assign slot 0 a location in the library. Retrieves the default parameters values. Gives you a code corresponding to your library configuration. This code can be useful for the Technical Support to help you configure the library properties.
Number of columns/lines Slot 0 Position in library Default Configuration Button Code Button
650
Appendix 2: Specific Library Information

Cartridge Management when Partitioning an Adic Scalar i500 Library
The Adic Scalar i500 Library allows for the partitioning of a physical library into several logical libraries called partitions. Each partition functions as a fully-fledged library on its own. It possesses a certain number of slots which are visible to it alone, except for the mailbox slots (I/E Station in Adic terminology) which are shared by all the partitions. This particularity has two consequences on cartridge import and export operations:
When cartridges are exported and a partition places cartridges into the slots of the mailbox, these slots are seen by other partitions with a status of "Except". When cartridges are imported: the cartridges inserted in the mailbox must be assigned to a partition by the operator. This assignment is performed from the library's Control Screen in the form of a selection of the partition that the operator is required to make. The selection interface is displayed until the operator has made a choice. It is not possible to reject or interrupt this choice.
However, the operator can forget to respond to the choice of partition proposed by the library. In this case, all the cartridges that have been inserted in the mailbox remain marked with the "Except" status for all partitions. To ensure that operations of putting online and putting offline are correctly run in Time Navigator:
A partition must absolutely be assigned to cartridges newly placed in slots or having changed slots in the I/E Station. This assignment must be performed by the operator from the Control Screen of the Library. The operator imperatively must wait for the end of the reinitialization of the I/E Station before validating a putting online or offline operation in Time Navigator.
The best practice for importing cartridges with this library consists in following these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the drawer of the I/E Station. Insert the cartridges. Close the drawer of the I/E Station. Wait for the end of the reinitialization of the I/E Station. Assign each of the cartridges to a partition.
Appendix
651
6. 7.
In Time Navigator Library Manager, reinitialize the barcodes of the mailbox. Put the cartridges online in Time Navigator Library Manager.
With regards to cartridge exports in Time Navigator Library Manager, the first thing to do is to reinitialize the barcodes of the mailbox to detect the slots that have an "Except" flag. These slots will appear hashed and be inaccessible from Time Navigator Library Manager. You can then choose only accessible slots for the export operations.
Note
Cartridge export from the menu item Storage-Media-Management in Time Navigator Administration Console works without these problems because before there is any movement towards a mailbox slot, an availability check is run. Hence, when a slot is detected as having an "Except" flag, it is skipped in favor of the next slot.
Appendix 3: TCP Parameter Modification

If a host is behind a firewall, an inactive connection between the server and the agent may be broken by the firewall after few minutes, usually when a large file is being backed up, and this may cause backups to fail. In this situation, it is recommended to modify the TCP idle timeout at the operating system level to keep the connection alive much longer. Use the commands below to display and modify the TCP parameter:
HP-UX
Display
/usr/bin/ndd -get /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval
Modify
/usr/bin/ndd -set /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval <new_value>
IBM AIX
Display
/usr/sbin/no -a | grep tcp_keepidle
Modify
/usr/sbin/no -o tcp_keepidle=<new_value>
SUN Solaris
Display
652
% /usr/sbin/ndd -get /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval
Modify
% /usr/sbin/ndd -set /dev/tcp tcp_keepalive_interval <new_value>
Linux
Display
/sbin/sysctl -e net.ipv4 | grep tcp_keepalive_intvl (Result is in
seconds) Modify
/sbin/sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_keepalive_intvl=<new_value>
Windows
On Windows, the following OS/network settings are implemented:
Idle time threshold. Any connection idle for at least this time is a candidate for liveness checking. The default value is 2 hours. Maximum number (unsigned integer) of keep-alive messages that can be sent before a connection is declared dead. The default value is 5. Minimum delay that is applied between keep-alive messages. The default value is 5 seconds. Once a connection is declared dead, any current or subsequent attempt to communicate on that connection will fail immediately with an error. The keep-alive message is a simple, low-level message. If the connection is still present, the other end will use fundamental TCP/IP functionality to reply, without affecting the sending application. The cost of a liveness check is negligible ; because it is implemented via an exchange of TCP/IP ACKs, there is minimal network or processor utilization.
Windows relies on system-wide registry settings to set a single check interval for an entire machine. Even worse, the default is to wait two (2) hours before checking for a dropped connection! This is usually inadequate for responsive liveness checking. To modify the Idle time threshold, you must create or modify the following DWORD registry key and reboot the machine for the new settings to take effect (unit is millisecond):
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\ Parameters\KeepAliveTime
Appendix
653
654
655
Glossary
This glossary contains terms found in this guide. Some terms are specific to the Time Navigator software.
A
Application
A term used for databases and application software. Applications (backup, archiving and restore) are managed the same way as hosts by Time Navigator. A description of the structure and organization of a host or an operating system. To copy a directory or file for medium or long-term periods onto an external medium. The storage of data for medium and long-term periods onto an external media.
Architecture Archive Archiving
B
Backup Backup Backup Selection
A copy of data on a hard disk or external medium. To copy a directory or file on a hard disk or external medium. A definition of the directories to be backed up, of the hours and the conditions under which these directories are backed up. A machine that takes on the backup process of another host. A definition of the media pool used, the date and the hour at which an automatic backup starts. To remove a media from the library. To add a media to the library.
Backup master Backup strategy Bringing off-line Bringing on-line
656
C
Catalog
The Catalog is the core Time Navigator database. It contains all the information required to run Time Navigator, such as the configuration of the platforms, drives, libraries, users, media...etc, as well as the description and location of all backed up files. A synonym for media (see this term). To specify Time Navigator not to use a media to write data. The rules you must follow to use the Time Navigator commands and their various options. A format in which data is compacted in order to free up space on the medium.
Cartridge Close Command syntax Compressed format
D
Drive Duplicate
Peripheral used to read or write data on a storage media. To copy data from one media to another.
E
Edit Enabled Encoded format Extraction
To view or modify settings. The state of a platform on which automatic backups are allowed. A format in which data is coded in order to avoid illicit reading. A synonym for restore (see this term).
F
File tree Format Full backup
A graphical display of the hierarchical organization of directories and files. The structured organization of data on a backup or archiving media. A backup in which all files are backed up.
H
Host
A client computer of the application.
Glossary
657
I
Icons area Incremental backup
The area of the tina_adm main window representing iconized platforms and drives in the form of a chart. A backup in which only files that have been changed since the last backup are backed up.
J
Job
Important task carried out by Time Navigator gathering the following session types: backup, restore, archiving and duplication.
L
Label Label Library
File written by Time Navigator on media to identify them. To write a label. A robotized peripheral storage device made up of drives allowing the management of cartridge mounting and unmounting.
M
Mailbox Main media pool Media Media pool
The library slot through which a cartridge is inserted or ejected. A media pool associated with a backup strategy or a central archive folder. A volume used to back up or archive data. A pool used to perform automatic backup or central archiving. Each pool has a name, a label, drives, and a management policy. An optional media pool associated with a backup strategy or a central archive folder in order to make an extra copy of the backup or archive folder.
Multiple writing pool
N
Named pipe Network area
A special file that allows one process to communicate with another process. The area of Time Navigator Administration Console representing platforms and drives in the form of a tree.
Glossary
659
Time Navigation Time Navigator administrator
A concept that allows users to navigate through the history of the file tree. The person in charge of configuring, managing, and operating machines on a network. The machine hosting the Time Navigator catalog on which the Time Navigator Server software component is installed. A user of the application belonging to a media pool and allowed to use drives. The user can be assigned specific access rights. The hours at which an incremental backup is initiated.
Time Navigator server
Time Navigator user
Time phases
U
User group
A group that associates users with drives in order to perform local archiving or a group defined to assign special access rights to a number of users.
V
Version
The version of a directory or file at a given date.
W
Waiting session Writing session
A session waiting for writing or reading. The archiving or backup step during which data is written on a medium.
660
Index
661
Index
A
Access right application 120 cartridge 202 catalog 14, 120 default 123 drive 178 file 120 functionality 120 host 120 personal 123 platform 120 user 14, 44, 119, 178 Acknowledging Time Navigator Media Request Console 523 ACL backup 308, 312 administrative assistant 291 Administrator, media 227 Agent Linux 373 OES Linux 384 OES NetWare 383 Unix 373 VMS 380, 381 Windows 372 Windows 2000 372 Windows 2003 372 Alarm notifying 443 processing 440 representation 23, 29, 434 severity 29, 434, 454, 488 sorting 439 status 30 viewing 436, 487 Alarm area (tina_adm) 29, 435 Allocating drive 161 library 161 Application access right 120
Catalog see Catalog application creating 81 definition 70 deleting 108 disabling 85 editing 106 enabling 84 Filesystem see Filesystem application List see List application name 83 NDMP see NDMP application Net Disk see Net Disk application password 120 representation 21, 28 settings 106 see also Platform Archiving 20 Net Disk application 632 Axes, cache 364
B
Backup ACL 308, 312 advanced configuration 69, 119, 137, 233, 285, 419 catalog 52, 54, 62, 63 definition 286 exporting 513 Filesystem application 637 filtering information 508 full 286, 288, 302 incremental 286, 288, 304, 315, 367 List application 604 manual triggering 290, 315 master 71, 77, 106 multiplexed 309, 365 Net Disk application 627 On Demand 405 pre/postprocessing 308, 310 scheduling 288 simple backup without macromultiplexing 365 specific attributes 311 synthetic 286, 288, 422 tunable 300 viewing 501, 514
without using cache 288 see also Backup session Backup class creating 339 deleting 355 Filesystem application 641 filtering 347, 352, 353 information 353 nested 352 Net Disk application 631 parameters 341 settings 339, 340 syntax 347 viewing 354 Backup information 389 Backup selection editing 355 filtering 341 overview 289 Backup session multiple writing 290, 422 writing 290 see also Backup backup strategies pending 322 Backup strategy creating 301 deleting 316 editing 316 Filesystem application 301 importing 302 overview 289 representation 196 settings 301 Backup to disk 531 Backup Wizard 291 Bar code 201, 235, 238 Boot catalog definition 52 restoring catalog 64 viewing 59 Bringing a cartridge off line definition 161 with/without a mailbox 220 Bringing a cartridge on line definition 161 with/without a mailbox 249
C
Cache
662
axes 364 creating 40 disk 364 editing 367 free space 27 information 27 memory 364 Modifying Size in MacOs 42 reading 27 size 366 use 364 volume 27 writing 27 Cache area (tina_adm) 27 Cache space see Cache Cartridge access right 202 adding in the silo see Cartridge, bringing on line bar code 201, 238 bringing off line 161, 220 bringing on line 161, 249 cleaning 229 cleaning settings 229, 230 closing 207, 217 copying see Cartridge, duplicating definition 200 deleting 208, 218 duplicating 208, 219, 422 erasing 208, 219 externalization 203, 224 identifying 200 information 221, 241 known status 201, 204, 247 label 200, 202 label prefix 228 life points 172, 203 Lost+Found status 196, 201, 204, 208, 218, 247 mount request 161 moving 251 priority 202 recycling 202, 205, 215, 216 removing from the silo see Cartridge, bringing off line reopening 208, 217 replacing 226
spare status 195, 196, 201, 202, 204, 208, 209, 218, 226, 227, 247 viewing 221 Virtual Library System 546 wear 172, 203, 228, 229 writing 308 writing format 202 see also Cartridge pool Cartridge pool creating 196 definition 195 exporting information 213 information 210 limited retention period 195, 215 main 290 multiple writing 290, 422 recycling policy 195 retention period 195 storage policy 195 viewing 210 see also Cartridge Catalog access right 14, 120 backing up 52, 54, 62, 63 Boot catalog 52, 59, 64 connecting/disconnecting 15, 448, 469, 521 creating 39 dedicated 422 definition 38 editing 45 free space 26 identifying 13, 15 information 26 instance 26 known user 13, 121 maintenance, see Jobs, maintenance name 43 object 26 Parameter for On Demand Backup 408 parameters 43 password 120 privileged user 13, 14, 44, 119, 121 remote 63 restoring 64, 67 restoring limits 47
selecting 469 settings 46 size 43 starting 17 stopping 50 suspending 51 tunable 39, 215 unknown user 13, 121 volume 26 catalog increasing the size of 45 Catalog application backing up remote catalog 63 several catalogs on the same server 62 simple catalog 54 configuring 53, 59 definition 52 environment variables 54, 55 restoring another catalog on the same server 67 catalog with Boot catalog 64 viewing 59 Catalog area (tina_adm) 26 Catalog Information area (tina_adm) 25 Changing drive mode 182 user identity 132, 178 Cleaning a drive 243 automatically 169 definition 168, 184 editing 185 manually 169, 185, 243 request 168, 184 settings 229 Cleaning cartridge settings 229, 230 wear 169 Client, NDMP 385 Closing a cartridge 207, 217 Compressing file 203, 288, 344 Configuration devices 139 libraries 139 Configuring
Index
663
advanced backup 69, 119, 137, 233, 285, 419 Catalog application 53, 59 macro-multiplexing 366 Time Navigator over a SAN 425, 428 Virtual Library System 532 Connected mode Time Navigator Administration Console 13 Time Navigator Event Manager 446 Connection to SAN 78 Connection, broken 651 Container 365 Copying cartridge see Duplicating a cartridge cpio Unix command 203 writing format 202, 203, 309, 422 Creating application 81 backup class 339 backup strategy 301 cache 40 cartridge pool 196 catalog 39 drive 170 event redirection 90 Filesystem application 638 host 74 host automatically 79 library 161 Net Disk application 628 platform 74 platform group 33 SAN 429 shared drive 429 user 129 user group 133 Critical data 216
D
Data integrity 216, 222, 223 Data stored during 215 Dedicated catalog 422 Default access right 123 Definition
application 70 application Filesystem 70 application List 70 application Net Disk 71 backup 286 boot catalog 52 bringing a cartridge off line 161 bringing a cartridge on line 161 cartridge 200 cartridge pool 195 catalog 38 Catalog application 52 cleaning a drive 168, 184 events 445 filesystem application 637, 661 host 70 jobs 467 library 159 List application 589 macro-multiplexing 364 parallel backup 286 Time Navigator Media Request Console 519 Time Navigator Task Viewer 501 user group 122 Deleting application 108 backup class 355 backup strategy 316 cartridge 208, 218 drive 187 event redirection 96 host 108 library 166 platform 108 user 131 user group 135 Detected host creating 79 Deleting 110 ignoring 110 Device About Devices 137 automatic declaring 139 automatic discovering 139 configuring 139
Device Configuration Manager 138, 147 Device Detection Wizard 138, 140 Device List Window 148 Properties 151 serialization 423 Device Configuration Manager Properties Window 151 Device descriptor 78, 164, 173, 423 Devices Time Navigator interfaces for 138 Disabling application 85 drive 182, 242 host 85 platform 85 slot 252 Disconnected mode, Time Navigator Administration Console 12 Disk cache 364 Disk Drive see VTL Disk Drive Disk space allocation for VLS 542 Disk to tape Virtual Library System Application 549 Display, variable 11 Displaying a platform in the Network area 31 Drive access right 178 allocating 161 automatic cleaning 169, 184 automatic declaring 139 automatic discovering 139 changing mode 182 cleaning 168, 184, 243 cleaning request 168, 184 creating 170 deleting 187 Device Configuration Manager 147 Device Detection Wizard 140 disabling 182, 242 display 24 editing 186 ejecting media 188, 244 enabling 182, 242
664
information 240 loading mode 168 local 167 manual cleaning 169, 185, 243 manually loaded 168 modifying the drive connection type 192 position, index 157 representation 22 robotized 161, 168 settings 171, 186 shared 79, 167, 429 test 174 testing 183, 243 testing position or index in library 157 VTL Disk Drive 167 web supervision 182 Drive cleaning automatic 169, 184 definition 168, 184 editing 185 manual 169 request 168, 184 settings 184 Drives list administration 189 Duplicating jobs 497 Duplicating a cartridge 208, 219, 422 Duplicating a job 497 DVD-RAM drive 167, 173
E
Editing application 106 backup selection 355 backup strategy 316 cache 367 catalog 45 drive 186 drive cleaning 185 environment variables 58, 609 event redirection 95 host 106 jobs 500 library 165, 235 password 131
platform 106 slot 253 user 130 user group 134 Virtual Library System 545 Ejecting media from drive 188, 244 Enabling application 84 drive 182, 242 platform 84 slot 252 Encoding a file 203, 345 Environment variables Catalog application 54, 55 editing 58, 609 Filesystem application 640, 641 information 58, 609 Erasing a cartridge 208, 219 event file 289, 446, 463 Event redirection create 90 delete 96 edit 95 Events Connected mode 447 definition 445 exporting 459 filtering 454 notifying 465 purging 462 redirecting 459 severity 454 tunable 462 user preferences 450 viewing 447, 483 Export from disk to tape 549 Exporting backup 513 cartridge pool information 213 events 459 jobs 495 Time Navigator Task Viewer 513 Externalization cartridges 224 Externalizing cartridges 203 selecting cartridges 248
F
File access right 120 compressed 203, 288, 344 encoded 203, 345 File mode, Time Navigator Event Manager 446, 447 Filesystem application backing up 637 backup class 641 backup strategy 301 creating 638 definition 70, 637, 661 environment variables 641 restoring 642 Filtering backup class 347, 352, 353 backup information 508 backup selection 341 Events 454 jobs 489 Time Navigator Task Viewer information 508 Firewall 71, 651 broken connection 72 Free space cache 27 catalog 26 Full backup 286, 288, 302 Functionality access right 120
H
Help on environment variables 58, 609 Host access right 120 automatic creation 79 automatic detection 79 creating 74 definition 70 deleting 108 deleting detected host 110 disabling 85 editing 106 ignoring detected host 110 password 120 representation 21, 28 settings 74, 106 see also Platform hosts file 75
Index
665
I
Icon area (tina_adm) 28, 435 Identifier, SCSI 423 Identifying cartridge 200 catalog 13, 15 user 132, 178 Importing a backup strategy 302 Inconsistency see Library, inconsistency Incremental backup 286, 288, 304, 315, 367 Infinite retention period 195 Information backup class 353 cache 27 cartridge 221, 241 cartridge pool 210 catalog 26 drive 240 jobs 470, 476 slot 241 Installing Time Navigator over a SAN 425, 428 Instance, catalog 26
List application 592 Known cartridge status 201, 204, 247 user to the catalog 13, 121
L
Label cartridge 200, 202 prefix 228 reading 238 viewing 235 writing 209, 227 Library allocating 161 automatic declaring 139 automatic discovering 139 contents 159, 238 creating 161 definition 159 deleting 166 Device Configuration Manager 147 Device Detection Wizard 140 editing 165, 235 generic properties 646 geometry properties 649 inconsistency 160 kinds of Library 137 kinds of library 159 mailbox 159 reinitializing 160, 163, 237 representation 24, 159 settings 165 slot 159 specific properties 647 splitting 422, 425, 427 standard properties 645 testing drive position 157 viewing 233, 234 Virtual Library System 531 Library Drive Position Test 157 Life points, cartridge 172, 203 Limits parallelization 345 Linux agent 373 List Administration of Drives 189 List application backing up 604 definition 70, 589 keyword 592
List file 620 raw device 589, 596, 620 restoring 612 syntax 591 use example 620 List file (List application) 620 Loading mode, drive 168 Local drive 167 log file 463 log_debug file see log file log_debug.catalog_name file 464 Lost+Found, cartridge status 196, 201, 204, 208, 218, 247
M
Mac OS X Modyfying Cache Size 42 Macro-multiplexing backup 309, 365 configuring 366 definition 364 incremental backup 367 SAN environment 422 Mailbox library 159 slot 252 MAILBOX_DIR, VLS parameter 547 Main cartridge pool 290 maintenance job 206, 216, 467 Manual triggering, backup 315 Mapped network drive under Windows 2000/2003 see List application and Net Disk application Master, backup 71, 77, 106 MAX_NB_CARTRIDGES_MBX, VLS parameter 547 Media administrator 227 Media see Cartridge and Cartridge pool Memory cache 364 Menu Bar (tina_adm) 19 Mixed, SAN architecture 422 Mobile platform 78, 308 Mount points, NFS 307 Mount request 161 Moving a cartridge 251 Multicatalog 38
J
Jobs definition 467 duplicating 497 editing 500 exporting 495 filtering 489 information 470, 476 maintenance 206, 216, 467 parallelism index 301 priority 202 processing 494 purging 492 report 499 simultaneous backups 300 sorting 474 status 471 tunable 500 viewing 468, 476 Juke-box see Library
K
Keyword
666
Multiple server, SAN architecture 420, 422, 425 Multiple Writing session 308 Multiple writing 290, 422 Multiplexed backup 309, 365
N
Name application 83 catalog 43 logical (VMS) 381 user 44, 129 NDMP application 79, 202, 309 client 385 NDMPApplication NDMP see NDMP, application Nested backup class 352 Net Disk application archiving 632 backing up 627 backup class 631 creating 628 definition 71 parallel backup 631 restoring 632 Network area (tina_adm) 20, 435 Network representation 25 NFS mount points 307 none, writing format 202 Notifying alarm 443 events 465 NtmsSvc, Windows service 428
Strategies 407 Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer 411 Unavailable 414 User Rights 406 Windows Taskbar 413 Operations on slots 252 Overview backup selection 289 backup strategy 289
P
Parallel backup definition 286 Net Disk application 631 Parallel backup limitations Limitations parallel backup 286 Parallel restoring limits 47 Parallelism index jobs 301 Parallelization limits 345 Parameter see Settings Parameters backup class 341 Password application 120 catalog 120 editing 131 host 120 platform 120 user 44, 121, 131 Pending backup strategies 322 Personal access right 123 Platform access right 120 adding in a group 33 deleting 108 disabling 85 displaying in the Network area 31 editing 106 enabling 84 group see Platform group mobile 78, 308 password 120 removing from a group 34
removing from the Network area 31 representation 21, 28 searching for 32 sorting 35 Platform group adding in a platform 33 creating 33 removing a platform 34 see also Platform Platforms creating 74 POSIX standard 203 Postprocessing 308, 310 Preferences tool 443, 459, 465 Prefix, cartridge label 228 Preprocessing 310 Priority cartridge 202 jobs 202 Privileged user 13, 14, 44, 119, 121 Processing alarm 440 jobs 494 Time Navigator Media Request Console 522, 524 Purging events 462 jobs 492
R
Raw device 589, 596, 620 Reading cache 27 label 238 Recycling a cartridge 202, 205, 215, 216 Recycling policy, cartridge pool 195 Redirecting events 459 Reinitializing a library 160, 163, 237 Remote catalog 63 Removable Storage, Windows service 428 Removing a platform from the Network area 31
O
Object catalog 26 selecting in the Network area (tina_adm) 20 odb file 39 OES Linux, agent 384 OES NetWare, agent 383 On Demand Backup 405 Catalog Parameters 408 Configuring 406 in Time Navigator Job Manager 414 Limitations 405
Index
667
user from a group 135 Reopening a cartridge 208, 217 Replacing a cartridge 226 Replica 200 Representation alarm 23, 29, 434 application 21, 28 backup strategy 196 drive 22 host 21, 28 library 159 network 25 platform 21, 28 slot 235 Time Navigator Administration Console 18 Time Navigator Task Viewer 503 Request cleaning a drive 168, 184 mount 161 operator see Time Navigator Media Request Console Restoring catalog 64, 67 Filesystem application 642 List application 612 Net Disk application 632 Retention period cartridge pool 195 infinite pool 195 Robot see Library Robotized drive 161, 168
S
SAN configuring Time Navigator 425, 428 connection properties 78 creating 429 installing Time Navigator 425, 428 macro-multiplexing 422 mixed architecture 422 multiple server architecture 420, 422, 425 settings 78 storage node architecture 77, 288, 421, 422, 428
testing a drive 183 Web supervision 428 Scheduling a backup 288 SCSI identifier 423 Serial number, SCSI device 423 Serialization 423 Service, Removable Storage (Windows) 428 Settings application 106 backup class 339, 340 backup strategy 301 cartridge wear 172 catalog 46 cleaning cartridge 229, 230 drive 171, 186 drive cleaning 184, 229 host 74, 106 library 165 see also Library properties SAN 78 user 130 user group 134 Severity alarm 29, 434, 454, 488 events 454 Shared drive 79, 167, 429 sidf, writing format 202, 288, 309, 422, 428 Silo adding a cartridge 161 removing a cartridge 161 Simultaneous backups jobs 300 Time Navigator Task Viewer 513 viewing 514 Size cache 366 catalog 43 Slot cleaning 230, 253 editing 253 enabling/disabling 252 information 241 library 159 mailbox 252 operations 252 representation 235 Snapshot 200
Some Time Navigator applications such as Time Navigator Task Viewer, Time Navigator Job Manager or Time Navigator Media Request Console, will let you access several catalogs at the same time, while others, such as Time Navigator 38 Sorting alarm 439 jobs 474 platform 35 Spare, cartridge status 195, 196, 201, 202, 204, 208, 209, 218, 226, 227, 247 Specific Attributes backup 311 Splitting a library 422, 425, 427 Status bar (tina_adm) 27 of a job 471 of an alarm 30 Time Navigator Media Request Console 527 Storage node, SAN architecture 77, 288, 421, 422, 428 Storage policy, cartridge pool 195 Strategy On Demand Backup 407 Syntax backup class 347 List application 591 Synthetic backup 286, 288, 422 Synthetic full backup see Synthetic backup System.dat file 372
T
Tape see Cartridge tar Unix command 203 writing format 202, 203, 309, 422 TCP Parameter 651 TCP parameter 72 Testing a Drive 243 Testing a drive 174, 183 SAN environment 183
668
Time 386 Time Navigator configuring over a SAN 425, 428 installing over a SAN 425, 428 Time Navigator Administration Console Alarm area 29, 435 Cache area 27 Catalog area 26 Catalog Information area 25 Connected mode 13 Disconnected mode 12 Icon area 28, 435 Menu Bar 19 Network area 20, 435 representation 18 status bar 27 Time Navigator Agent Job Viewer 386, 411 compass icon (Windows) 386 main window (NetWare) 394 main window (Windows and Unix) 387 more on backups (Windows and Unix) 389 On Demand Backup 411 starting (NetWare) 392, 393, 394 starting (Windows and Unix) 386 Time Navigator Event Manager Connected mode 446 File mode 446, 447 viewing 447 Time Navigator Job Manager 467 Display of On Demand Backup 414 Time Navigator Media Request Console acknowledging 523 definition 519 processing 522, 524 status 527 viewing 520, 524 Time Navigator Task Viewer definition 501 exporting 513 filtering information 508 representation 503
simultaneous backups 513 zoom 505 TiNa, writing format 202, 203, 309, 339, 422 tina_acct 499 tina_adm see Time Navigator Administration Console tina_backup 71, 289, 372 tina_cart 203, 208 tina_cart_control 225, 248 tina_daemon 10, 372, 463 tina_export 288, 422 TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR variable 641 TINA_FS_ROOT_DIR, variable 640 tina_job see Jobs tina_library see Library tina_library_control 225, 239, 248 tina_report 499 tina_restore 380 TINA_SDB_BOOT_HISTORY variable 56 TINA_SDB_CATALOG variable 56 TINA_SDB_HOME variable 56 TINA_SDB_LIB_PATH variable 56 TINA_SDB_MAIL_FROM variable 56 TINA_SDB_MAIL_SERVER variable 56 TINA_SDB_MAIL_TO variable 56 TINA_SDB_MIRROR_PATH variable 56, 61 TINA_SDB_RECOVER variable 56, 67 TINA_SDB_RESTORE_PATH variable 56 TINA_SDB_SAVE_EVENTS variable 56, 61 TINA_SDB_SAVE_HISTORY variable 56 TINA_SDB_SAVE_PATH variable 57, 61 TINA_SDB_SERVICE_NAME variable 57 Tunable backup 300 catalog 39, 215 device descriptor 423
events 462 jobs 500
U
Unix agent 373 Unknown user to the catalog 13, 121 writing format 202, 309 Use cache on server 307 User access right 14, 44, 119, 178 changing identity 132, 178 creating 129 default access right 123 deleting 131 editing 130 group see User group known to the catalog 13, 121 name 44, 129 On Demand Backup Rights 406 password 44, 121, 131 personal access right 123 privileged 13, 14, 44, 119, 121 removing from a group 135 settings 130 unknown to the catalog 13, 121 User group creating 133 definition 122 deleting 135 editing 134 settings 134 see also User Users.dat file 372
V
Variables denvironnement ORACLE_BASE 607 ORACLE_HOME 607 Viewing alarm 436, 487 backup 501, 514 backup class 354 bar code 235 Boot catalog 59 cartridge 221 cartridge pool 210
Index
669
Catalog application 59 events 447, 483 jobs 468, 476 label 235 library 233, 234 simultaneous backups 514 Time Navigator Event Manager 447 Time Navigator Media Request Console 520, 524 Viewing Requests 520 Virtual Library System adding cartridges 546 bringing cartridges off line 547 bringing cartridges on line 547 configuring 532 disk space allocation 542 editing 545 exporting to a tape library 549 file location 542 Virtual Library System Application 549 defining a backup strategy 564, 582 defining catridge closing options 563 defining metapool priority 566, 582 defining metapools 560, 579 deleting metapools 564, 582 displaying information 568, 584 duplication and removal options 556, 576 editing metapools 563, 581 emergency data removal 571, 587 exporting the monitoring report 570, 586 monitoring 567, 583 prerequisites 552 principles 551, 573 testing 567, 583 Windows Schedule Service 556, 575 VLSA cartridge duplication 551 duplication mode 549 job duplication 572 VMS agent 380
logical name 381 Volume cache 27 catalog 26 VTL Disk Drive 167, 529
slot 246
Z
Zoom, Time Navigator Task Viewer 505
W
Wear cartridge 172, 203, 228, 229 cleaning cartridge 169 Web supervision drive 182 SAN 428 Windows backing up files 372 registry 372 restoring files 372 use 372 Windows 2000 agent 372 mapped network drive see List application and Net Disk application Windows 2003 agent 372 mapped network drive see List application and Net Disk application Writing backup session 290 cache 27 cartridge 308 label 209, 227 multiple 66, 290, 422 Writing format cpio 202, 203, 309, 422 none 202 sidf 202, 288, 309, 422, 428 tar 202, 203, 309, 422 TiNa 202, 203, 309, 339, 422 unknown 202, 309
X
X-Window display 11
Y
Yellow triangle drive 240
670

Guide Sauvegarde

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Guide Sauvegarde

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Version 4.

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Third Party Copyrights

The Year-2038 bug. For more information, consult

OpenSSL. "The OpenSSL Project is a collaborative effort to develop a robust,

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Perl. For more information, consult

Apache 2.0. For more information, consult http://www.apache.org

Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Users and Access Rights

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Device & Media Management

Time Navigator Library Manager

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Automatic Backup Configuration

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

.411 .411 .414 .414

Chapter 10 Time Navigator in SAN Environments

Chapter 12 Time Navigator Event Viewer

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Chapter 13 Time Navigator Job Manager

Chapter 14 Time Navigator Task Viewer

Chapter 15 Time Navigator Media Request Console

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

.525 .525 .526 .527 .527 .528 .529

Chapter 16 Backup to Disk with Virtual Library System

Chapter 17 Exporting Data Backed up to Disk to a Tape Library

Chapter 18 List Application

Chapter 19 Mapped Network Drives

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Time Navigator Features

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

First step. Next step, etc.

Command syntax is presented as follows:

Time Navigator Documentation

Time Navigator Release Notes

Time Navigator Getting Started Guide

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Time Navigator Online Help

Time Navigator Tutorials

architectures (Client/Server, Multi-site, Secured, Firewall and SAN Architectures).

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Your Comments are Welcome

Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

Prerequisites to Opening Time Navigator Administration Console

For csh, run

Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

To start Time Navigator Administration Console in disconnected mode

Choose Start-Programs-Time Navigator-Time Navigator Administration Console 2. 3.

Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation

Opening Time Navigator Administration Console

First connection to a catalog:

Logging in as the privileged user:

Logging in as a user known to the catalog:

Logging in as a user unknown to the catalog:

Time Navigator Administration Guide for Microsoft Windows

User(s) allowed to perform the operation

To start Time Navigator Administration Console in connected mode 1.

Time Navigator Administration Console Presentation